JP2019033892A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: Information acquired by acquisition means is stored by storage means with an upper limit of a first prescribed number. A pre-discrimination based on the stored information is performed by pre-discrimination means. On the basis of a result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means, a presentation mode of a specific presentation is set by presentation mode setting means. The specific presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means is performed at a prescribed timing by specific presentation performance means. Then, if a specific condition has been established at a timing when the specific presentation is performed, as the presentation mode of the specific presentation to be performed by the specific presentation performance means, a replacement presentation mode different from the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means is set by presentation mode replacement means. Therefore, amusement of games can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and if the lottery result is a hit, the player There are some games for which an advantageous bonus game is performed.

JP, 2012-217766, A

  However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises an acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, and a discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. A display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, A storage unit that can store the information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a first predetermined number until the determination is performed on at least the information, and the information stored in the storage unit, Prior determination means capable of determining in advance before dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started, and an effect aspect of a specific effect based on the result of the prior determination by the preliminary determination means Stating effect mode setting means, specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means at predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means are the specific effect When a specific condition is satisfied at the timing of executing, as a presentation aspect of the specific presentation performed by the specific presentation execution means, a different substitution presentation different from the presentation aspect set by the presentation aspect setting means And an effect mode replacement means for setting the mode.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination means A display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination, and a privilege is given to the display means when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and acquired by the acquisition means Storage means capable of storing up to a first predetermined number up to the first predetermined number until at least the determination on the information is executed, and the information stored in the storage means is based on the information A pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discrimination before dynamic display of identification information is started, and an effect aspect capable of setting a production aspect of a specific effect based on a result of the pre-discrimination by the pre-discrimination means In a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means at a predetermined timing, and at a timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect When a specific condition is satisfied, a rendering effect mode different from the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting means is set as the rendering mode of the specific effect executed by the special effect executing means And a mode replacement means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an XIV c- in FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in an XIVc line. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. (A) is a front view of a drive device, (b) is a side view of the drive device in the arrow XVIIb direction view of Fig.17 (a). It is a front disassembled perspective view of a drive device. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam in the arrow XXa direction view of FIG. 18, (b) is a side view of the left disc cam in the arrow XXb direction of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a releasing member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a releasing member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operating device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a) FIG. 18 is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction of the arrow LIXc of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibration apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus 5410 in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a), and the accommodating member 5430. FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of a right disk cam, (b) is a back surface perspective view of a right disk cam. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the arrow LXVa direction view of Drawing 62, (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of Drawing 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a) It is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a) It is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a disc member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disc cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disc cam. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam in an arrow LXXVb direction of It is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engagement member, (b) is a side view of the engagement member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), (c) is a right disk cam (D) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, (f) These are side views of the right disc cam in the arrow LXXVIII f direction view of FIG. 78 (e). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which opened the inner frame to the outer frame (deployment). It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack to the inner frame in the state where the inner frame was opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame to the outer frame and opened (expanded) the front frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the front frame which the structural member arrange | positioned below the window part of a front frame disassembles and is shown in figure. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame which the structural member arrange | positioned below the window part of a front frame disassembles and is shown in figure. (A) is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame, (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner of a front frame, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in an XCIVb-XCIVb line of Drawing 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner of a front frame, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of Drawing 95 (a). (A) is a back side schematic diagram which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of Fig.96 (a), (c) is a binding movable member and a harness It is a back surface schematic diagram illustrated typically, (d) is an upper surface schematic diagram of FIG. 96 (c). (A) And (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which illustrate a binding movable member and a harness typically. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending field. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line | wire of Fig.112 (a). (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a right panel unit in the CXIIIb-CXIIIb line of Drawing 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of Fig.115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper side frame member. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of a speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. 124 (a) FIG. 124 is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction, and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front assembly in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), a rear assembly, an upper side frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member, (b) is FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front assembly in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of a, rear assembly, an upper side frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side board member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a front view of an inner frame. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 127 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the board support apparatus and game board which showed the board support apparatus and game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board support apparatus. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is a disassembled front perspective view of a ball | bowl emission unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launch unit showing the sending situation of the ball by the ball feed device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball | bowl emission unit, (b) is a partial top view of the ball | bowl emission unit in the arrow CXLVIb direction view of Fig. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of a ball | bowl emission unit, (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting which shows the relationship between the thread | yarn and the metal member for cutting in the state of Fig.147 (a). FIG. 5 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit, the inner rail and the outer rail after firing of the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operation device in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153; It is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member, (b) is a disassembled back perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a central axis rotating device and a loose fitting device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a central axis rotating device and a loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a backplate. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a backplate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the channel | path formation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the channel | path formation unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a saucer passage formation member in a 11th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation apparatus. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of the slit member and slide member in another example of 12th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (D) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCIIId-CCIIId line of Drawing 203 (a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operation device in the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of Drawing 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) and (c) is a rear view of a fraud detection apparatus. FIG. 206 (a) is a partial back view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a) And (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part concavely provided by the light guide member in area | region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing a display mode in which three holding balls are set during fluctuation of the third symbol, and (b) is a setting of four holding balls during fluctuation of the third symbol And a display mode in which the character J0 appears from the display area C. (A) is a figure showing four display balls set during the change of the third symbol, and showing the display mode without increasing the no-vacancy recommended value, and (b) shows the state from FIG. 6 (a) Furthermore, it is the figure which showed the display mode when the number of holding balls increases and it exceeds a recommendation value. (A) is a view showing a display mode when the holding ball increases in a short period of time, (b) shows the character J0 of the display area C indicates the optimum number of holding balls according to the state It is the figure which showed the display aspect of the case. (A) is a figure showing a display mode when character J1 is displayed in display field C during fluctuation of the third symbol, and (b) changes to a holding ball during fluctuation of the third symbol , And further shows a display mode when the character J2 is displayed in the display area C. (A) is a view showing a display mode when the number of balls held reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C is changed when an over winning is achieved FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the player is allowed to store up to 6 holding balls during reach, and (b) is a case where the number of holding balls is stored up to 6 and the symbol arrangement changes It is the figure which showed the display mode at the time of having. (A) is a figure showing the display mode of the lucky display of the big hit suspension last time, (b) shows the display mode when the player presses the button after the number of balls held is accumulated up to 6 FIG. (A) is a figure showing a display mode of effect during long opening, and (b) is a view showing a display mode of variation effect of long opening winning. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in a first control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example It is the model which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the special symbol big hit random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing a normal hit random number table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the special figure 2 big hit classification selection table in the 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table for usual which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 1st control example. It is the model which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table for time reductions which is a part of fluctuation pattern selection table in a 1st control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing a winning command table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the hold effect mode selection table in the first control example . (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a notice A mode reservation lid range selection table in the 1st control example, and (d) is a notice B mode reserve lid range in the 1st control example It is the model which showed the selection table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the short-term winning hold lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the hold lid range selection table in the reach effect in the first control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the holding lid color change selection table in the first control example It is. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing a lucky hold command table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is the model which showed typically the reserved character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the normal balloon selection table in the first control example (C) is a schematic view schematically showing the notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the notice B balloon selection table in the first control example It is. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the short-term winning blowout table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the blowout table in the reach effect in the first control example is there. It is the model which showed typically the lucky reservation balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the in-reach effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example FIG. 14C is a schematic view schematically showing the lucky reserve lottery table in the first control example. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example. It is the model which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing executed by MPU in the main control in the example of the 1st control. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation execution decision processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU in the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process which is executed by MPU in the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU in the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky display determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the holding effect production setting processing during reach which is performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the storage lid setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation character setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the blowing lid setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning a prize decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lucky reservation memory processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indicator setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the short-term winning a prize management processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the in-reach holding production management processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of a control. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the boot processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing the mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing pending lid command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flowchart showing a process of displaying a character on hold. It is the flowchart which showed the balloon display process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the special symbol variation and the continuous effect in the second control example. It is the model which showed the relationship of the continuous presentation and background display in the 2nd control example. (A) is a display mode which showed the display screen in continuous production in the 2nd control example, (b) is the display mode which showed the display screen in special production in the 2nd control example. It is the display mode which showed the background change in continuous production in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information related processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the processing during time saving which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuation production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect restoration processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous presentation return processing which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special production setting processing 3 which is executed by MPU in the sound lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a figure which showed the display screen at the time of the power activation in the 4th control example, (b) is a figure showing the customer waiting screen at the time of the power activation in the 4th control example. (A) is a figure showing a customer waiting screen after power on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a first variation game screen after power on in the fourth control example . It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. It is the model which showed the sound volume table in the 4th control example typically. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial sound volume setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the sound volume setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the volume related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) is a figure which showed the accommodation error A screen at the time of the power supply in 5th control example, (b) is a figure which showed the accommodation error B screen at the time of the game operation in 5th control example. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a timing chart in the case of performing retry operation in a tilting device. It is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in a tilting device. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the origin detection B table in the fifth control example FIG. 7C is a schematic view schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 3 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the retry processing in the touch input which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the tilting apparatus control processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the flow chart which showed the operation production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the inclination initial stage operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the processing under the operation production which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the back effect operation processing for production which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 5th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the retry operation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode during the fluctuation of the symbol 3 with the fluctuation of the jackpot A in the holding ball, (b) is further from the state of FIG. 346 (a), the holding ball It is a figure showing the display mode at the time of being digested one and becoming jackpot A. (A) is a diagram showing that the holding ball is further digested by one from the state of FIG. 346 (b) and shows the display mode during super time, (b) is a drawing of FIG. It is the figure which showed the display mode when it is further digested one more from the state of, and it is a big hit by this fluctuation. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode of the chance, (b) is a figure which showed the display mode in the middle of a definite change. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode when jackpot was started, (b) is a figure which showed the display mode of presentation of the jackpot 1R eye. (A) is a figure showing the display mode in the case of notifying that there is a button effect in the jackpot, (b) is that the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 350 (a), It is a figure showing the display mode in the case of notifying a player that the definite variation was given. (A) is a figure showing a display mode when a big hit is finished, (b) is a figure showing a display style when a big hit is finished and it enters into a definite change mode. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows a promotion lottery table in the sixth control example FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 2 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern reception processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flow chart which showed stop symbol change processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize command reception processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flow chart which showed stop symbol change processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which shows the jackpot related command reception processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the opening process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the big winning a prize ball processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the ending processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indicator setting processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 6th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing 4 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 6th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing stop symbol replacement processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example Is a flow chart showing a game state setting process to be performed. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related display processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 6th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 6th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) is a figure showing the display mode in production at the time of winning the long open in the 7th control example, and (b) shows the display mode in the case of the production in the long open in the 7th control example. FIG. It is the figure which showed the indicatory feature under long open production control control in the 7th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which shows the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long opening production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the long open related processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 7th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in the 8th control example, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the display screen and BGM at the time of the power-off in the 8th control example. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of power activation, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in which initialization was completed and which shows return fluctuation. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing in the special figure fluctuation | variation. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode when the background change operation is performed during the slow movement of the special figure, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode when the background is changed by the next fluctuation is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when eight reserve production is performed, and (b) shows an example of a display mode of the 1st change after eight reserve production is performed. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when there is newly winning a prize after 8 pending productions are performed, and (b) is a display of the 1st change from a new winning with 8 running productions being carried out It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of completion | finish of eight pending production. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example, (b) is content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing vibration pattern data in the eighth control example And (c) is a schematic view schematically showing an eight hold lottery table in the eighth control example. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in an eighth control example. It is the model which showed typically the eight production scenario selection table in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern reception processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation stop processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holds control processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th example of control. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing variation display setting processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is the flowchart which shows the SW production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the background modification processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the sensor input process 8 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the mode identification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 8 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which shows fluctuation pattern command processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 8th control example. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an eight-piece display setting process performed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding display process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the eighth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 9th control example, (b) is content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 9th control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. It is the model which showed the background advance notice selection table in the 9th control example typically. (A) is a figure which showed the display mode when silhouette production in sea mode is performed, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when silhouette production in mountain mode is performed. is there. It is the flow chart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the background change processing 9 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation stop process 9 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 9th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting setting processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting presentation processing 9 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 10th control example, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 10th control example It is the model which showed typically a part of. It is the model which showed typically the crack generation | occurrence | production selection table in a 10th control example typically. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 10 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing 10 which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the crack crack production end processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 10th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the SW production processing 10 which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 10th control example. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control device in a tenth control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, Figure 1 to Figure 4
Referring to 4, as a first embodiment, the present invention pachinko machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine"
An embodiment in the case of being applied to 10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front near side with the side on which is provided as an opening and closing axis.

In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, a front view (
1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front near side with the side provided with the hinges 19 as an open / close axis. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
The game is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the stage of the effect displayed in the reference) or changing the content of the effect of the super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. At the periphery of the window portion 14c, electrical decoration portions 29 to 3 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs.
Three are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Moreover, the front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1
Reference) In the upper left part, a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the fact that the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills or cards are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, lending of a ball is made according to the operation. To be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation.
b and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view,
Other than a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown), the rails 61 and 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 330, and the through Gate 67,
The variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable display unit 8
0 is disposed in the through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 has an inner frame 12 through a window 14 c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
Can be viewed from the front side of the Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front of the game board 13
An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided,
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. The end portion of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2
The ball holder 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the) to prevent the ball guided to the top of the game board 13 from being returned to the ball guide passage again. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the winning opening 640 is won. In particular,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while,
When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. Note that multiple L
The ED is configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a jackpot, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds after 15 rounds of jackpot,
While transitioning to the low probability state, for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is a jackpot that becomes a short time state.

Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the state of the game which is neither definite nor
It is a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is up).

During a definite change or during a time cut, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but the second winning opening 64
The time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is normally set as compared with the middle. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one operation may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B is triggered by a winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 in the variable display unit 80.
The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") performing the variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for fluctuating display of the second symbol is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640
Is activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball fired to the game board 13. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the second symbol display device performs the variable display of the second symbol by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
The lighting of the symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Also, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of holding balls, so the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment,
Although the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball are configured the same, the first winning hole 64 to the ball The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, for example, a prize to be paid out when the ball wins to the first winning opening 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won the second winning opening 640 may be five.

The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), the ball is the second winning opening 6
It becomes easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher than that during normal change during and after a certain period of time,
In addition, since the time taken to change the second symbol is also short, in the second symbol's variable display, "○"
The symbol of the symbol becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Fire the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called
), It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a jackpot by obtaining many opportunities for a jackpot lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
As the motorized role piece 640a attached to 0 is in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize at the second prize opening 640, the ball passes the right of the variable display 80 toward the second prize opening 640 Shoot a ball at the same time (so-called "right-handed"), pass through gate 67 to open the motorized part, and aim to become a 15R positive variation jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640 , It is advantageous for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetric, so aiming at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" may also aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). It can be unnecessary to change "right-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100 to 10
4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the substrates.

In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is intended to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102,
When the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, it is cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, and
2 is provided with a control knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. There is a RAM 203
Besides, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 causes the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 to
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed such as setting of display in 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and drawing of display result in the second symbol display device.

Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. Working area where values are stored (
Work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off and holds data (backup).
The configuration is such that all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205
Drive open / close to the front side centering on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and the power supply 1.
The RAM 201 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processing is executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control unit 111 is M.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is a payout control device 1
11, but not to the main control unit 110.

The firing control device 112 is configured such that when the main control device 110 instructs firing of the ball, the ball firing unit 112 is configured to have the ball launching strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off.
Under the condition that it is not operated, the firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Display control device 114 such as display and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. Input / output port 22
The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the other unit 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the unit 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
It instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and is made to correspond to the display content. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81.
It controls the display of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, whereby the third symbol display device 8 is produced.
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
And the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
Take in a voltage of 4 volts and use various switches such as various switches 208 and
Generate a voltage of 12 volts for driving solenoids such as 9 motors, a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. Necessary voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 generates the MPU of the main control unit 110 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
The circuit 201 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and the power failure occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts.
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111, judging that the power is turned off and the power is shut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111
The interrupt process (not shown) can be successfully executed and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 3
00 is arranged at the lateral center of the inner frame 12 in a front view (that is, the lateral center of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be capable of tilting operation by being pushed into a player, and in a region constituted by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. It is arranged. When the player operates the tilting device 310 to tilt (rotate), a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a mode in which the fingertip is disposed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the explanation will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

Fig.6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG.6 (b) is VI of FIG. 6 (a).
7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line b-VIb, and FIG.
It is a partial front view of 0, and Drawing 7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line of Drawing 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows that the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 is directed vertically, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is disposed in the second state facing upward and backward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that, in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable by the driving force of the driving device 340 between the first state and the second state. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (for example, a display of “press a button”)
When the player appears.

Here, for example, when pushing the operation of the tilting device 310 by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward as in the case of pushing the button moving forward and backward, the position of the operation surface 312a1 is shifted to the near side depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the face of the hand and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pressing operation by a method of vigorously dropping his hand downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, keeping the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by the method of lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as the fulcrum so that the hand is not vigorously dropped downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Also, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pressing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, while the area is reduced to the extent of being invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). By this, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be largely changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31 is
The light amount of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 is gradually recognized as it is configured in such a manner that the area 1i becomes gradually larger.
The difference (the degree of light and dark) of the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state is large, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be largely changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist about the axis) While the palm of the hand is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, the tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation in a method of lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop the hand downward.
Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. Figure 10
FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and a detection sensor 324L, 32 that detects a pressing operation from the first state.
4R is disposed outside the lower frame member 320 which encloses the tilting device 310 from the lower side.

As described above, by disposing a sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, a voice coil motor for giving a driving force, and the like on the outer side of the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 is used. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. By this,
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is an operation device 30.
FIG. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR1 disposed respectively at the left and right ends at the rear end (the rear end in FIG. 12) and the tilt device 310 A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and defining a pressing end of the tilting device 310, and a ring member BR1 for the tilting device 310 from the upper side A member having a concave portion disposed facing to the main frame and having a large opening at the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner as to arrange the tilting member 310 with the lower frame member 320 Together with the tilting device 3
The driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 which determines the disposition in the second state 10 and the arm member 345 which is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and which constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. A driving device 340 for transmitting, and a protective cover device 3 which is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and which protects the driving device 340 from three sides in the lateral direction and the rear direction.
And 50 are mainly provided.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate 321 Horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-like member arranged horizontally at the upper end on the back side of the
22 and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, and a lower bearing portion 323 receiving the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from the lower side; The left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R which are disposed as a left and right pair on the side
And an opening 325 which is an opening formed by scraping a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position of the bottom plate 321 in the left-right direction.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings, through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is the bottom plate 3
It is configured to be able to pass 21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled at the front side central portion, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325
And an insertion hole 321c which is drilled symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is disposed at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size through which the projecting convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 can pass. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear movement direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321 b is a detection piece 311 gL, 311 which is provided so as to protrude from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
It is a through hole configured to allow insertion of gR. Detection piece 31 protruding from the detection hole 321b
The 1 gL and 311 gR are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size capable of inserting the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through holes are formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is configured to extend upward from the upper surface and to have a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324 </ b> L and 324 </ b> R are the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
It arrange | positions in the position where the separation distance (position of a detection groove) from 1 becomes equal in the right and left.

A photocoupler type sensor includes a light emitting unit for emitting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a portion to be detected can be inserted. Means a sensor disposed substantially in a U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for enabling the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to intrude into the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the lateral width is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, with regard to the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f in the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the LED device 341f has the opening 325
By pushing the drive device 340 upward after passing through the
f can be disposed above the opening 325, and the LED device 341f
The upper and lower widths of the opening 325 can be shortened as compared with the upper and lower widths including seven.

The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 which is an opening having a size to which the extension portion 311 h extended from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side is caught, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320 And an upper bearing portion 332 configured of a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically dividable so as to be covered in three directions excluding the front side, and has a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340 and its main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 supported by a bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward in the front direction, a left side detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of a body cover 351, And a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center visible.

The voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface in the lower frame member 3 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
It is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of FIG. Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disc cam 344L, 3 of drive unit 340
44R is arrange | positioned in the aspect arrange | positioned inside the detection groove | channel of detection sensor 353L, 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are disposed in the detection grooves of 53R.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 353 are provided.
There are two specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 14 (a
Is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the arrow XIVb direction view of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. ) XIVc
-Is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured to cover the case main body 311 configured of a box-shaped body having a side fan-shaped opening having upper and lower openings and the upper opening of the case main body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case main body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging down downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are pinched , The torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and the case main body 3 at the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312.
11 mainly includes a ring-shaped ring member BR1 that fixes the lid 11 and the lid 312 indivisiblely.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a which is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft 311c extending to the center in the left-right direction from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the frame, and a recess 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft 314 at its rear end. And an insertion groove 311e which is a groove disposed at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and which locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315 A left side detection piece 311gL provided on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15), and a predetermined amount side from a front side end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a A protective lens member 311i which is disposed on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And an overhanging projecting portion 311j which is provided so as to project downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front side end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311 a is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
20 is a portion that comes in contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of FIG.

The opening 311 b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311 c is a guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17 (b)) of the drive device 340.
The cylindrical member 45b is inserted into the cylindrical portion 45b and serves as a portion for transmitting the driving force to the driving device 340.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, an angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the axial portion 314 is about 3 ° (see FIG. 22) and the pressing end (see FIG. 22) The left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared to the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle of the tilting device 310 is the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side and protrudes to a position where it is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Configured in an aspect.

The protective lens member 311i is configured in a curved shape in top view (FIG. 14 (a)
(See FIG. 14 (c)), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is provided to project at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
In the state (see FIG. 29) in which the push-in operation is performed, the distal end is extended downward of the lower frame member 320 through the transmission hole 321a.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 31 thereof.
The LED device 34 is fixed in the first state (see FIG. 6) while fixing 2b to the top plate member 312a.
And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape with a size surrounding 1f.

In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312c is a cylinder whose light is emitted from the LED device 341f to the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by axial rigidity. In the second state (see FIG. 7), while being held inside the member 312c, such limitation is released so that the light from the LED device 341f can be emitted widely.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmitting material, and has upper and lower end portions extending forward in the form of a flange, and the extending end portions are configured to match the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right torsion parts, and is provided with both arm parts 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion parts and a central part 315b connecting the pair of torsion parts. And.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 will be described. Fig. 17 (a)
17B is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the drive device 340. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a main body member 341 that constitutes a framework by bending a plate-like sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (not rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343)
Left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R), and connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
And a release member 346 rotatably supported by the first overhang portion 344c1 and the second overhang portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. And a rotation claw member 347 coaxially supported by the release member 346 and operating relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and a coil spring that generates a biasing force directed in a direction to lower the rotation claw member 347 First spring SP1, which is a spring member of the
A second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the two to move away from each other between the second and third rotating claw members 347 is mainly provided.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward to the left and right, and is formed in a U-shape in a top view as viewed from above.
A shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the oppositely arranged plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and supports the disk cam 344 and an axis parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b A shaft portion 341c which is convexly provided in the left-right direction at a position deviated to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in an aspect which has, an extending portion 341d which is extended from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
and e, an LED device 341f disposed at an upper end portion of the illumination support portion 341e and in which an LED light source is disposed.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof and is a portion that refracts light (
A portion for refracting light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be uniformly emitted upward and downward.

The drive motor 342 is a motor housing portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341 a.
It has a fixing member 342a fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixing member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is drilled in one end portion in a perfect circle shape and is bored in a rectangular shape at the other end portion, and a pivot hole 345a axially supported by the connection pin 344d of the disk cam 344 And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts on the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is at least one rotation of the disk cam 344 It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft 343. As shown in FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a driving motor 342 which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
Of the transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotary gear of the second embodiment, and a movable clutch 343c which can switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and the movable clutch 343c And a coil spring 343 d for pressing the transmission gear 343 b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 433a2, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer in the center side than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
When 43c is moved against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, it is formed to have a length capable of moving to a position not interfering with the transmission gear 343b.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
And a clutch portion 343b2 in which projections and depressions along the axial direction are formed at circumferential positions around the axis from the surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 with a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 having concavities and convexities along the axial direction at a circumferential position in the axial center from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b, and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 .

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an apex angle of about 100.
It is composed of 凸 -shaped convex and concave parts.

By setting the angle fixing hole 343c1 to be D-shaped in cross section, relative rotation with respect to the cylindrical member 343a of the movable clutch 343c becomes impossible, so the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b
The driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is engaged with the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c by the engagement of the clutch 2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c.
It is transmitted to 3a. Thus, the disc cam 3 is rotated by rotating the drive motor 342.
It becomes possible to rotate 44 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is normally transmitted by the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arrange | positioned in the position which adjoins 43b, and the engagement relation of the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3 is
43a2 is configured to be movable along a direction away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344 L and the right disk cam 344 R are roughly shaped like a mirror copy, and the difference is the detection hole 3.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are present, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the arrow XXa direction view of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the arrow XXb direction of FIG. is there. 20 (a) and 20 (b), as shown in FIG. 18, a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disk, and at the center position of the disk A central shaft portion 344a which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the inward direction, a circular rib 344b which is convex in an inward direction as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and the outer side of the circular rib 344b It is provided with an inward convexity as a rib whose height is lower than that of the circular rib 344b.
An engagement rib 344c having a radially outward projecting portion at a portion, and a circular rib 344b
Between the arm and the engagement rib 344c, and the arm member 3
It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d connected to 45 (see FIG. 18) and a detection hole 344eL formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different from the detection hole 344eL only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other is configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It is comprised by the letter shape, and it comprises by the shape by which the outer periphery is internally fitted by the axial support hole 341b (refer FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20A). An overhanging portion 344c1 and a first lead-in portion 344c2 which retracts radially inward at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ1 = 50 °), and from the first overhanging portion 344c1 At the position shifted by the angle θ2 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ2 = 150 °), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that is projected outward in the radial direction again, and the second overhanging portion 344c
And a second lead-in portion 344c4 which is recessed inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the angle 3 by an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are disposed in a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21 (b) shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by coming into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 346b is disposed at the middle position of the guide long hole 347b). State (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a support hole 346a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From an axial support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b convex in the thickness direction and having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axial support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c into which an end portion of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and And an engaging portion 346d configured as an overhanging portion with a maximum diameter.

The engagement portion 346d is engaged with the engagement rib 34 of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By curving the outer periphery of d, contact with the engagement rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has an arcuate shape centered on the central support axis of the axial support hole 347a and the axial support hole 347a supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A guide long hole 347b (in a size including the movement trajectory of the convex pin 346b on the inside) drilled so as to guide the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 along the second spring SP2
Of the first spring (see FIG. 18), and an insertion hole 347c through which the end portion of the first end portion is inserted, a hooked portion 347d which is provided in the form of a hook downwardly projecting at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a. And 3) a pull-down hole 347e which is pierceable.

In the present embodiment, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347 in the large angle state shown in FIG. Therefore, when a load in the pressing direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 integrally rotate in the backward direction while the engaging portion in the large angle state. When a load in the push-up direction is applied to 346 d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle small state shown in FIG. 21B is reached.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in the state where the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified to facilitate understanding.

22 to 24 show an operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 shows the tilt device 310 in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows the player pushing the tilt device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. Then, the state after return operation of the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an example of the hand of the player who operates the tilting device 310 continuously is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is a hooked portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347.
It is hooked to Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly applied to the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is the right detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31 is operated.
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed into the player from the first state by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R.

Here, when continuously operating the tilting device 310, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player continuously drives, the torsion spring 31 may be used.
Since the return of the tilting device 310 by 5 is not in time, the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel discomfort.

Conventionally, it has been possible to cope with this by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is resisted against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) to be pushed down, and there is a need to increase the size of the driving motor 342. As a result, there is a problem that the product cost increases and space saving can not be achieved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects by the vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be increased without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
A return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is given, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs the continuous hitting operation. By this,
The player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 30, a case (first operation mode) will be described where the tilting device 310 starts an operation (rounding operation) reciprocating back and forth from the first state. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.

Note that FIG. 25 illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state, and FIG.
A state where the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed is illustrated. In FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 is a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is returned by only rotating in the forward rolling direction is illustrated in FIG.
The manner in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and turns is illustrated. In FIG. 29, the state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state of FIG. 28 is illustrated. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount to engage the engagement rib 34.
A state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of 4c has reached a second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
Ten positions are illustrated in phantom lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312 is
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the light quantity of the light irradiated to the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the light quantity of the light irradiated to the axial direction can be secured large. As a result, the cylindrical member 312 c can improve the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and can adjust the irradiation intensity of the light of the LED device 341 f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. When the first protruding portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 depresses the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotation claw member 347 rotates in the backward direction to a position where the engagement with the bottom plate portion 311 a of the tilting device 310 is released.

The posture change of the release member 346 is determined by the first pull-in portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34.
Since the disc cam 344 is maintained until it faces the state 6d, the tilting device 310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the rising movement of the tilting device 310 is an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 27),
When the first lead-in portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated forward by the biasing force of the first spring SP1 (FIG. And the rotation claw member 347 returns to a state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts to the upper side of the LED device 341f, and the tilting device 31 in the case where the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint is the first state
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player)
It also becomes possible to irradiate. Therefore, when the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3 is
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the up and down reciprocation operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently the disk cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount Figure 2
28) by repeatedly performing the operation of rotating it clockwise).
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 repeatedly moving up and down in the range of the angle D1. Therefore, it is possible to change the light amount of the light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light irradiated from the LED device 341f in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313 a of the lens member 313 is an LED device 3.
Since it is disposed on the front side 41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f should be expanded not only in the front-rear direction or the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. Can.

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state, the light of the LED device 341 f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312 c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction (front direction) directed to the player, and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time according to the change of the attitude of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push in the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves upward, the shaft 311 c Only move the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load occurs).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the push-in end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the collar portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 to push it forward. The member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and the bottom plate portion 311a is formed into a hooked portion 347d by subsequently pressing the tilting device 310.
, The rotary claw member 347 returns to the position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, the player tilts the device 31 from the state in which the tilt device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
After depressing 0, when the player releases the hand, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed in and pushed to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting a vibration to the player who continues to put his hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the ascent of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and to perform vibration rendition by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pressing end position. It can be used to

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projection convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320.
And the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 into the end.

Therefore, compared to a gaming machine in which the operation button is simply vibrated, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 generates vibration at the pressing end when the tilting device 310 is pressed and operated,
Only the player who has pushed in the tilting device 310 can grasp.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pressing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 may not be operated at all, in which case the value of the tilting device 310 as the operating means becomes low.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 so as to produce vibration when the big hit is determined, the player can improve the sense of expectation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the tilting device 310 Can improve the value as a means of pre-reading.
Thus, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operation means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG.
The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disc cam 344 in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until the disc contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. .

In the second initial state, as in the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 abut in the rotational direction. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 abuts on the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 abuts on the engagement rib 344c.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) to cause the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c to pass the engagement portion 346d, and then reverse rotation. The driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, the load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG.
Can be rotated counterclockwise).

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when tilting device 310 is moved up and down (turning operation) from the state where tilting device 310 is in the first state and driving device 340 is in the second initial state The second operation mode will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (rounding operation) reciprocating back and forth through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG.
31 shows that the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31), and in FIG.
Shows a state in which the tilt device 310 has reached the second state by rotating by a predetermined amount, and in FIG.
3 shows that the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating rotation operation from the state shown in FIG.
A state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG.
In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG.
In FIG. 34, an example of the player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345 b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311 c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 has the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be moved upward with low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disk cam 344 is rotated by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state where the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released). Posture where it is possible to arrange 310 in the second state (from the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is 180 °
It can be in a rotated attitude). Therefore, when the rising speed of the tilting device 310 is large, and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is brought into the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently the disc cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount Figure 3
By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating it clockwise (clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 repeatedly moving up and down in the range of the angle D2. Therefore, it is possible to change the light amount of the light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light irradiated from the LED device 341f in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313 a of the lens member 313 is an LED device 3.
Since it is disposed on the front side 41f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f should be expanded not only in the front-rear direction or the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. Can.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time according to the change of the attitude of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 as the vertical movement of the tilting device 310;
Two types of up and down movements (turning movements) with the up and down movement shown in FIG. 33 can be performed immediately after the restriction of the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes can be made to operate the tilting device 310 in the first state by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, the difference in the expectation of the jackpot), and the tilting device 310
The player's attention to the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is pulled downward (the shaft portion does not move even if the arm member 345 moves upward). 311
c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the collar portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 in the process of bringing the tilting device 310 into a pushing operation, whereby the rotating claw member 347 is rotated backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, the player tilts the device 31 from the state in which the device 310 shown in FIG.
When the player releases the hand after pressing 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Then, referring to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
The operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the angle 47 will be described. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down operations (tiling operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one side.

35 to 37 show the operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 35 counterclockwise) by rotating clockwise is shown. In FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 is in the backward direction (FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. The state in which the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts on the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346 is illustrated. The disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. In FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an example of the player's hand swinging from above to the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second lead-in portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is the engagement portion of the release member 346. Contact with 346 d. In this case, although the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346, the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide long hole 347b of the rotating claw member 347. Retaining, the rotating claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
The posture shown in 5 is maintained.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 Regulation of the elevation of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). The drive 340 can be in a second initial state, as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36. However, the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, as described above, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up and down movement (rotational movement) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player pushing in the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of leaving the hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that has pushed the over-tilt device 310 to concentrate on the effect, but in this case, the tilt device 310 ascends even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down in the range of the angle D2,
The attitude of the tilting device 310 can not be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 (FIG. 1) in the state of rotating the disc cam 344 in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) does not reversely rotate the disk cam 344 while maintaining the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first condition), as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward as the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG.
A change to the state shown in 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (forward and reverse switching until the tilting device 310 can not move up and down). Operation can be avoided, the load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state early, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, whereby the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing the drive device 340 from being broken will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand for gripping and fixing is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of 5 is restricted, the disc cam 344 can not be rotated from the state of FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, the drive motor 342
There is a risk that a high load will occur between the drive motor and the transmission gear 343b, and if left free, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343 b is configured to be able to idle with respect to the transmission rod 343 a that fixes the disc cam 344, failure of the drive motor 342 can be prevented.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343 b is biased in the rotational direction, whereby the clutch portion 343 b
Power is transmitted through the 2343c 2 and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. Thus, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from breakdown.

When the player does not grip the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360.degree.).
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (if the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310 The rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying by displaying on the third symbol display device 81, for example, so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select the case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and to notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and to stop the drive motor 342 early.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 can not be operated accurately (the phase shift can not be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353 L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
Since it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the state has been reached, the control of the drive motor 352 is resumed with the state as the initial position. By setting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343 b and the movable clutch 343 c, control is performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned It can be performed.

Thereby, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
It is prevented that a shift occurs between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the above. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be appropriately operated to perform effects.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity is explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is started from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the wheel 44 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) is illustrated. In FIG. 41, a state in which the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state illustrated in FIG. Also, in FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38.
The state where the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CW direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 is illustrated in FIG. 43.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CCW direction, the tilting device 31
In the 0 state, the standing state operates toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. Meanwhile, FIG.
As shown in 3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured in such a manner as to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
When the wheel rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotation claw Member 3
There is no load in the direction of pushing up 47. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIGS. 38 to 40 and FIG.
Until the first state shown in, both appear to operate in the same way, and the subsequent movement after the first state is either the operation in FIG. 41 or FIG. 43 is different.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilt device 310 reaches the first state is
It may be generated by the control (refer to FIG. 39), but the player notices the mode of the control being performed by the difference in the change of the drive sound due to the change of the rotational speed of the drive motor 342. There is a possibility that the player may grasp the interest of the player. Also, the tilting device 3
When the operation of rapidly stopping 10 is performed by the rapid stop of the drive motor 342, the load on the drive motor 342 is increased, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is moved toward the first state from the state shown in FIG. 38 and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is differentiated, the drive motor 342
Since the direction of rotation is different only in the direction of rotation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation in the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 gets up from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the effect, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) to the player and moves toward the first state by the drive motor 342, It can be arranged to watch the movement of the tilting device 310.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from holding the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to provide an effect to stop the tilting device 310 rapidly, the drive motor 3 is required to be stopped suddenly.
It is possible to eliminate the burden imposed on the motor 42, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player presses the tilting device 310 (third operation mode) explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. In FIG. 44, the disc cam 3 is started from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340.
44 is shown in a state in which it has been rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44).
Disc cam 344 at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344 c 1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346
The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2 By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not to pass 346 d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is in the backward direction (along with the posture change of the release member 346).
44 is maintained in the state of being rotated clockwise), the tilting device 31 shown in FIG.
When 0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are not engaged, and the player releases the hand to tilt the tilting device 310.
Can move upward as compared with the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotary claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310), and can carry out an operation mode that continues the up and down movement. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, by providing a difference in rendering between the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilt device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilt device 310 and then releases the tilt device 310. It is possible to know whether it was up or down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in presentation, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the hand is released after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310) Is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the hand is released after pushing the tilting device 310). If there is a difference that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot is recognized not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310 Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings for the player to focus on the operation device 300. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348 Slide claw member 23 when the release member 2346 is pushed up.
48 is configured to slide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347 and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking movement of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347 and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46 (a), the rotating plate member 2347 has a second spring S with respect to the releasing member 2346.
The large angle state of rotating to the end position in the biasing direction of P2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 46 (b), the rotating plate member 2347 against the release member 2346 rotates to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2. An angle small state is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by coming into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 3
The state in which 46b is arrange | positioned in the intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b (refer FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a shaft 341c (see FIG.
47) is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the rotary plate member 2347 interposed therebetween as the functional members pivotally supported by FIG. And a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arc track centering on the rotation axis of the reference). In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. (The left side in FIG. 45) is provided with a ridged portion 2348b convexly formed in a ridged shape, and the curved portion 2348a and the ridged portion 2348b overlappingly disposed in the thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a projecting pin 2348d projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly included. Prepare.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348 a of the slide claw member 2348 is the rail portion 2.
In the state of being internally fitted to 347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347.

The collar portion 2348 b is similar in shape to the collar portion 347 d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of the tilting device 2310 described later.
a is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be adsorbed.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the opposite surface of the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotary plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , And a portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

The projecting pin 2348 d is a cylindrical member inserted into the function long hole 2346 e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348 e. Release member 234
6 is rotated relative to the rotary plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348 d functions as a long hole 23.
The slide claw member 2348 slides and is pushed by the side surface 46e.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide long hole 347b, and an insertion hole 347c.
In addition to the pull-down holes 347e, there are provided a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support long hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is in the forward rolling direction (see FIG. The shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in the state of being placed at the end position of 46 counterclockwise).
Is formed from a curved shape along a circular arc centered on.

The support elongated holes 2347g are formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), as with the rail portion 2347f. Protruding pins 2348 in the support long holes 2347g
When sliding the slide claw member 2348 in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from being shaken. it can.

The release member 2346 has a functional long hole 2346e which is a long hole drilled in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the convex pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

The function long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. A hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending from a first end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined in the direction opposite to the support hole 346a;
Mainly to

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 forms the rail portion 234.
Slide along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the function long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is moved as it is without moving the releasing member 2346. Reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is decreased, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also decreases.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348 d to the functional elongated hole 2346 e is directed in a linear direction passing through the axial support hole 346 a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is rotated by rotating the release member 2346.
Although the sliding movement of the sliding member 347 may occur, the sliding movement of the sliding claw member 2347 is not caused by the pulling movement of the sliding claw member 2347 in the large angle state. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is disposed in the first state, the elevation of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating the change in posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the second lead-in portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is the release member 234.
47 shows that the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. The state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is illustrated. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48, and the releasing member 2346 is the second spring SP.
The state returned by the biasing force of 2 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 is operated.
Since the adsorption of the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of 10, a large load is not given to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved up and down at a speed different from that in the case of releasing the restriction on the rising movement of the tilting device 2310 by the rotation of the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. Thereby, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, by associating the operation mode with the expectation of the jackpot, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be obtained. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when raising the tilting device 2310 by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hooked portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348
8b and the magnetic device 2310a1 of the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction between the device and the tilting device 2310
Is increased, the load exerted on the tilting device 2310 can be increased by securing a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, it is prevented that the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the weight of the hand when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released. (If the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG.
In the state shown in, the tilt device 2310 can be raised in a manner of lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to make a difference in the load in the rising direction (the force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pressing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in the load with the expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 for the player It can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, it is described that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where it is pressed by the player. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and in the state of being pushed into the player or in the state of being pushed into the player. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position (rotation of the tilting device 3310) as the right side detection piece 311gR extended downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment. And a left detection piece 3311gL extended at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane which is a plane perpendicular to the axis and which is disposed at a central position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension than the right detection piece 311gR,
Compared with the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment, the extension length thereof is shortened.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
In 1 (a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51 (b), the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in the middle of pressing 0 is illustrated. Also, FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b).
In order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are indicated by solid lines. While being illustrated, the portion where each detection sensor 324L, 324R and each detection piece 3311gL, 311gR overlap is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3 is
311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of pushing operation from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is the left detection sensor 324L.
The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

If the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the pushing end is pressed by detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the state is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the middle of or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the pushing end is pressed. Left side detection sensor 324L is in OFF state and right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R is changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
2 (a), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed in and pushed to the end, is shown in FIG.
In 2 (b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of pushing from the end to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are illustrated schematically.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed down to the final end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 3
11gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the pushing end is disposed, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the push-in end is pressed. Sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state is changed, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
When an auxiliary load for raising 310 is given, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted while the tilting device 3310 is lifting as compared to causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is lowering. The collision with the device 3310 can effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is on its way up and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after pressing the tilting device 3310 from the first state 3
Ascending speed of 310 becomes slower. In this case, even if the player continuously operates the tilting device 3310, the raising operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is operated to rise by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Because the speed of rising can be improved, the tilting device 3310
It is possible to perform the continuous hitting operation comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, it is described that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the player is pushed in. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment In this mode, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the transition from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k which is provided in a plate shape so as to protrude from the front side of the protruding portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. It is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321 d and 4321 e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the pressing operation of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 431 is
In FIG. 54 (b), the tilt device 4310 is set from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a).
Is illustrated in a state in which the front detection piece 4311k is passed downward with the lower detection sensor 4321e. Also, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 is provided with an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper side detection sensor 4321 d and the lower side detection sensor 4321 e are photocoupler type sensors, and are disposed in a posture in which the detection grooves are directed in the direction in which the front detection piece 4311 k can pass. In the present embodiment, the upper side detection sensor 4321 d and the lower side detection sensor 4321 e are arranged at an interval of 20 ° on a circular arc orbit centering on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the front detection piece 4311k is the upper side detection sensor 4
321 d and the lower detection sensor 4321 e are sequentially passed. By detecting the interval of the timing of the passage, the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and it is selected whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 or not.

Here, when the inclining device 4310 is operated from the second position, the inclining device is longer than the operation button whose indenting length is short because the indenting length is long (because the period in which the acceleration is applied is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, when the player does not have any means for deceleration, the tilting device 4310 needs to be made strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A problem arises.

Further, it is possible to incorporate an elastic spring for applying a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak force or a player who decides to push in gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the push-in position becomes a burden of the push-in operation, making it easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321 d and the lower detection sensor 4321 e
It is possible to apply a strong reaction force to the tilting device 4310 when it is not necessary by determining whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the interval of the timing when the voltage switches between the ON state and the OFF state. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between the timing when the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between ON and OFF is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. When the interval of the above-mentioned timing is shorter than a predetermined period while not driving, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the weak force facilitates the tilting device 4310. It can be pushed in.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
Not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied as a reaction force against the force. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the protruding convex portion 3 of the tilting device 4310
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before 11j projects below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. Ru.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in the middle of pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. Note that FIG.
5 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

Also, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the lower frame member 4 is shown to facilitate understanding.
While the outlines of the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated in phantom lines 320,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the overhanging protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state where the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the first state and reaches the end. The arrangement portion 311 j and the voice coil motor 352 abut on each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding and projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the expansion direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The power of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving it to the Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 is not a structure that applies a load by friction like a disk brake, but is a structure that applies a load by an electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L By gradually increasing the current flowing to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 abut, deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state toward the end The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned ON. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and the lowering is stopped. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). By this,
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end, the effect of transmitting the vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pressing operation of the tilting device 4310 and the purpose of performing vibration rendition by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pressing end position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is operated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
Although the case has been described where vibration is transmitted to the player pushing in 0, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is a weight member 5 disposed on the lower frame member 5320 at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
A drive motor 5411 is provided to rotate 412, and vibration is transmitted to the player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 as compared to the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, and the drive device 340 is used.
Is the driving device 5340 and the voice coil motor 35 from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured the same as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 provided with a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5534 by one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 is a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives the fan-shaped weight member 5412.
A flexible member 5420 which accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and is formed in a bottomed dish shape whose upper surface is opened, and which has a weight member 5412 and a flexible member And the lower frame member 53
And a housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the twenty.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. And mainly.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixing portion 5411 a which is disposed in a pair on the left and right and which is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and having a bottom on the opposite side of the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted. Connecting between a pair of rib-like legs 5422 projecting in the form of a pair of ribs in the radial direction left and right and downward, and rib-like legs 5422 projecting left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 Posture maintenance unit 5423 in which fixing unit 5411a is embedded
And a pair of pillars 5424 projecting upward from the top surface of the main body 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411, and the depth of the container shape is configured. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. Further, in this state, fixing portion 5411 a is embedded in posture maintaining portion 5423.

The ribbed legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, but the ribbed legs 5422 on the left and right sides are the same as the posture maintaining part 5423 is disposed on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

The convex leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar shape so that the load can be easily concentrated at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Accordingly, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.
The resolution of 20 deformation degrees can be made finer.

The housing member 5430 is, in the assembled state, a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and the weight member 5 provided adjacent to the first housing portion 5431.
The second housing portion 5432 in which the second housing portion 412 is housed, and the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5
And a concave groove 5433 which is recessed downward from the upper surface in the connection surface 432.

The depth of the first accommodation portion 5431 is such that the flexible member 54 is formed until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom.
When the load 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the projection leg 5424 has a depth protruding from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodation portion 5432 is a depth which is recessed outward beyond the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg 5424 so that the flexible member is flexible. When 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth of interference with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 is set.

The recessed groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extends slightly lower than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is
FIG. 60 is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59 (a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is brought into the first state, and the first state, are pushed three times into the player, A termination area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when disposed at the termination position, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg 5424 is provided so as to protrude in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
It is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg 5424 in response to the change in angle (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembled load release state where no load is applied to the convex leg 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center line of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the extending direction thereof. Therefore, since the convex leg 5424 can be pushed uniformly in the left and right at the bottom of the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 can be prevented from tilting to the left and right (in the paper surface of FIG. 59 (b)) when pushing. The projection leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a convex leg 5424.
And a pair of through holes 5321d which can be inserted. Since the through hole 5321d has a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the diameter of the convex leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is convexly provided. When the leg portion 5424 is pressed, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the convex leg 5424 is suppressed, and the convex leg 5424 together with the main body 5421 is used.
Can be easily translated downward (FIG. 59 (b) downward).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 60 (a), the assembly load released state is shown in FIG.
At 0 (b), in the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A), the assembled load state after the convex installation leg 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodation portion 5431 is It is illustrated. The outer shapes of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), the vibratory device 540 is released from the assembled load release state.
When a load is applied to 0 and the assembly load state is established, the convex leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5
As 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device is operated. The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated.
Further, because the load is elastic recovery force, even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed, the load can be generated without time delay.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The raising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous striking operation on the tilting device 310, the raising operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 performs the rising operation only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the assembled load release state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second accommodation portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if driving of the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembly load release state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the fine vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and the housing member 543
Transmission to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420 is in an assembled load state.
1 is configured in such a manner that the upper convex leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5422 are deformed to allow displacement up and down.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-like leg 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-like leg 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54 is formed.
Since the 22 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and arranged in a left-right pair at uniform intervals from the central axis to the left and right, the ribbed leg can be moved by moving the flexible member 5420 downward. The radially outer end portion 5422 is deformed in such a manner as to move to the left and right outwards (where the resistance is smaller at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like leg 5422) (see FIG. 60B).
In this case, the projecting direction of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right direction component, so that the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodation portion 5432 collide with each other is the rib-like leg 54 on the lower side of the main body 5421.
It can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. As a result, positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembled load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state where the center of gravity of weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. In addition, FIG.
1 (a) and FIG. 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player, and the end area S52 is
The state of the vibration device 5400 in the state of occupying

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed on the upper side in the assembled load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is at a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second accommodation portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof is the second housing portion 543.
Contact with 2 (scrub). Therefore, compared to the assembly load release state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

As a repulsive force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, the weight member 5412
Is generated upward (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 move close to each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward It can be easy to turn to). The flexible member 5 together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412 by this repulsive force.
As 420 moves upward, the flexible member 5420 can reinforce the pushing force of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310).

Thus, the flexible member 542 pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward.
Adjustment of the pushing force of the tilting device 310 is performed by a combination of forces generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and forces generated separately by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts to abut on the projecting leg 5424, the end region S52 (see FIG. 59).
Until going to (a), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force that pushes the tilting device 310 back, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412
The repulsive force between the second housing portion 5432 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Thereby, in the vicinity of the end region S52, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased, so that the lightness of the operation of the tilting device 310 and the alleviation of the impact at the time of pushing operation can be favorably achieved. This adjustment can be performed in a state in which the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is unnecessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) It is determined whether or not the operation speed of (a) is greater than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / hour), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operation speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 may be used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desirable to increase the load on the tilting device 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance to be in the downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

Thus, the end of the descent operation of the drive motor 5411 is performed by the rotation shaft of the second accommodation portion 543.
From the lower end of the inner wall of 2, it can be raised to a position raised by a radius Ra. Thereby, in the upper side of the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is disposed upward (see FIG. 61A) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61A). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 that is the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased when the convex leg 5424 is depressed by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible not to generate a force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432.

Here, the abutment of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be expanded. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the casing of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, a palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a pressing fulcrum or a part of the side of the hand Vibration can be transmitted to the player through This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which no vibration is transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the player tilts the device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Weight member 5 only when the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembled load state.
As a result, the vibration 412 occurs.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is previously rotated, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Therefore, the pushing operation of the player is detected The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated.

That is, when the player performs the pushing operation in a mode of releasing the hand immediately after the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (a mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed. In that case, there is a possibility that vibration can not be generated (the vibration start can not be made in time) by the time the player releases the hand, and there is a possibility that the player can not feel the effect by the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration generation is prepared before the tilting device 310 is pushed, the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pushing of the tilting device 310. Thus, the player can experience the effects of the vibration.

Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodation portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411 is
Can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the pushing operation of the tilting device 310.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 before pushing the tilting device 310 in advance.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343. The other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, and therefore the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 configured by a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a back perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Right disc cam 5344 R and left disc cam 534
Since 4L is configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 is disposed at the connection portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is a circular rib 344 from the disk portion at its center position.
b) in the form of a cylindrical support cylindrical portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape, and in the axial direction of the support cylindrical portion P1 to a position about a half of the extending distance, in an axisymmetric elongated hole shape From the axial end of the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and the support cylindrical portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1, extending toward the disc portion along the axial direction And a pair of sandwiching arms A1.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion for supporting the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter thereof equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5534. The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion in which the arrangement in the axial direction is the same as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformation portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions disposed so as to sandwich the long hole concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially collapsed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to

The long hole concave portion C1 is formed to have a width that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the pinching arm portion A1 is in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave section of the long hole concave portion C1 (
In the longitudinal direction).

Further, the facing surface of the long hole concave portion C1 is configured to engage with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a plane, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the cylindrical member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The holding arm A1 is formed of a pair of arm parts formed on the side facing the other arm,
An engagement convex portion A1a is provided so as to be convex toward a direction approaching the arm on the other side. Engaging convex part A1a
When engaged with the transmission shaft 5343, it engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engagement convex portion A1a is the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is composed of a shape conforming to the arc shape of 4. Thereby, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. (B) Longitudinal length) can be secured.

In the engagement convex portion A1a, a side surface close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 concaved along the axis near the axis It is arrange | positioned in the position used as the surface side with the side surface of the opening side of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the side of the support cylindrical portion P1 (lower side of FIG. 63B) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, in the outer side (upper side in FIG. 63 (b)) of the recessed surface portion C2, compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted to the cylindrical member 5343a,
The thickness of the e-ring can be shortened (see FIG. 65 (b)).

In addition, it is not necessary to secure a space for inserting the e-ring (a space required for placing and sliding the e-ring on a surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recess width (radial width) of the recess surface portion C2 can be reduced.
Thereby, the design freedom of the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft 5343
It is a front exploded perspective view of FIG. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343 a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a D-shaped fixing portion 5343a1 for fixing a disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in a front view, and a fitting groove 5343a3.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 with a groove between which the e-ring is fitted and the disc cam 534 by the e-ring
In the case where the disc cam 5344 is inserted until it reaches the inset groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of 4 and the e-ring inserted in the inset groove 5343a3, the engagement convex of the holding arm A1 An engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove engaged with the portion A1a, is mainly provided. In the assembled state, the fitting grooves 5343a3 are disposed on the outside in the left-right direction of a pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are bored.

The clutch operation portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the fixed angle hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

Since the e-ring is used to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by later inserting the e-ring into the insertion groove 5343a3, the cylinder is inserted before the e-ring is inserted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, a predetermined amount of cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the axial support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the axial support hole 341b by the e-ring In addition, the e-ring can prevent the axial displacement of the disk cam 5344.

According to the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disk cam 5344
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, in the case where the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft 5343, the cylindrical member 5343 a is one of the end portions of the support cylindrical portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side on which the engagement convex portion A1 a is disposed. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
343a4 is inserted to a position where the engagement convex portion A1a is fitted. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the insertion of the engaging convex portion A1a into a position where the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted, the distal end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a can expand the distance between each other. The clamping arm A1 elastically deforms in a manner. Thereafter, when the front end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are disposed opposite to each other, and the engagement convex portion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 serves not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a right disk cam 53 at line LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is L in FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the right disk cam 5344R in a XVIb-LXVIb line | wire.

In FIG. 66, the right disk cam 5344R after deformation in the case where the player overloads the non disk loaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG. 65 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip end portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of axial collapse with the extended distal end portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the long hole concave portion C1 is disposed in the direction in which the pair of holding arms A1 oppose each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. While
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylindrical portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected,
The cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the resistance of the shaft falling displacement of the cylinder member 5343a is increased.

Therefore, when an overload is given to the right disk cam 5344 R by, for example, the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (displacement of the connecting pin 344 d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Of the right disk cam 5344 R relative to the cylindrical member 5343 a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded,
The disc portion is axially collapsed and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylindrical portion P1 on a surface parallel to the surface of the disc portion. Thereby, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a) FIG. 26 is a partial rear view of device 5300. In FIG. 67 (b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 is illustrated by a solid line, overload is given, and shaft collapse occurs. The outline of the condition is shown in phantom.

In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. As a result, a load occurs between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L that is about to rotate. Since the right disk cam 5344 R can perform the above-described shaft collapse deformation when this load occurs, the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after its axis tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. The change of the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilting deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd by the start of the operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), only the dimension Rd,
The axial support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connection pin 344d will be misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is subjected to axial tilt deformation.

67A, the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67A. Therefore, the center Pb on the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the tip end of the protruding pin are right circles. It is displaced along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment is the right disk cam 534
Since positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to rotation of the 4R dimension Rd can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (while the tilting device 310 is held)
When driving (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in face contact due to the axis camber deformation of the disc cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344. Therefore, the drive motor 342 is driven in a state where the player holds and holds the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in a direction to repel it, the second spring The elastic force of SP 2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the movement of the bottom plate 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 in the direction to repel it. Disc cam 5344 through the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347
Act on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotation claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disc cam 5344 abut against each other and the releasing member 346 operates along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the first member does not depend on the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344.
Disc cam 5344 within the elastic force of either spring SP1 or second spring SP2
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disc.
Thus, the load exerted by the release member 346 on the disc cam 5344 can be increased.
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to 5 can be reduced regardless of the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a line symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point (a direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point In the same manner, regardless of the rotational direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345), the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed. The shaft can be deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a) FIG. 26 is a partial rear view of device 5300. In FIG. 68 (b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 68 (a), to facilitate understanding,
The outline of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 of the right disk cam 5344R is illustrated by a solid line, and the outline of a state in which an overload is given and the axis is collapsed is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68 (a), the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and falls down by an angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is operated in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344 is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connection pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R by the axial fall of R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. The load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described as the right disk cam 5344R are items that apply to the left disk cam 5344L as well.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the player holds the tilting device 310, causing an overload. When,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of an overload early. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
If 2 is driven during a period in which the right disk cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R
Although the 44eR passes the right side detection sensor 353R, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated when the player holds the tilting device 310,
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload occurs.

In this case, until the occurrence of an overload is detected, the right disc cam 3 in the state where no overload occurs.
Since a period required to rotate 44 R by a predetermined angle is required, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)) Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 34 is provided between the support cylinder P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
The method by the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is illustrated (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 66 (a))
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object contacts the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. And the input portion is disposed in such a manner as to project toward the support cylindrical portion P1. The notification device E1 and the support cylindrical portion P1 are separated in the unloaded state (see FIG. 65 (b)), and the notification device E1 and the support cylindrical portion P1 are formed in contact with each other in the overloaded state (FIG. 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344 and the engagement rib 344c and other members are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disk cam 6344R is configured in a mirror-like shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, so the description of the left disk cam 6344L The description of the right disk cam 6344 R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
And a detection hole 344eL, and a disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
And a ring member 3344L2 that is supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

The disc member 3344L1 has an annular shape in the axial direction at a position where the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is disposed at the center position of the disc portion and radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convexly provided.

The ring member 3344L2 has the same outer periphery diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment, and an annular main body 6344g configured by a ring shape whose inner periphery diameter is slightly larger than the outer periphery diameter of the circular rib 344b A cover plate portion 6344h which is disposed at an axial end of the ring body 6344g and which covers the opening of the ring shape of the ring body 3344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward at the thickened portion.

The inner circumferential diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so that in the assembled state, the annular main body 3344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b to form the central shaft portion 344a. The ring member 3344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about the

In addition, the end face of the disk member 3344L1 side of the axial direction of the annular main body 3344g is the annular rib 63.
Contact 44f. Thus, the annular rib 3344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced, as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Accordingly, relative rotation between the disk member 3344L1 and the ring member 3344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are engaged with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 3344L2 rotates. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 3344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
Of the number of rotations of the disk (when the ring member 3344L2 makes three revolutions, the disc member 63
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i is set in such a manner that the 44L1 rotates once.

The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The second transmission device 6348 is an auxiliary post member 6348 disposed in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a and a second of the auxiliary column members 6348a fixed thereto and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348 b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary pillar 6348.
44L2 mainly includes a reduction transmission gear 6348c engaged with the reception gear tooth 6344i.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the raising operation of the tilting device 310 is constituted by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310.

FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36. In FIG. 72, the ring member 3344R2 rotates in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (right) , And after being rotated by more than one rotation, it is considered to be a posture rotated reversely by that amount), and the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 rotation in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 73, FIG.
The ring member 3344L2 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG.

Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 3344R2 is rotated in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) to release fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is biased by the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 ascends in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 in the second state It was limited to the position (refer FIG. 34) arrange | positioned.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disc member 3344R1 and the ring member 3344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is a supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c. Can change the relative relationship of the
It is possible to increase the types of arrival positions of 0.

That is, when releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantaneously ascends due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state of being tilted downward by an angle D6 than the second state (see FIG. 73). Thus, the tilting device 310 is instantaneous (disk cam in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Without waiting for 344 rotation)
You can change the position to rise and reach.

Thereby, for example, when configuring the gaming machine in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantaneously rises and reaches from the first state, the attentional power of the tilting device 310 It can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether to increase the degree of expectation that the tilting device 310 rises higher or to increase the degree of expectation of the lower reaching position of the tilting device 310 to the lower one.

However, the elevation reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 is suppressed low (see FIG. 73), and the expectation is achieved by reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximum. And the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be associated, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is moving up, so the movement of the tilting device 310 can be watched by the player until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be driven to Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the effect mode of 10, it is possible to inhibit the game method of operating the tilting device 310 in a chaotic manner.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344 d and the engagement rib 344 c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member The 7344R1 and the connection pin 344d are disposed as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state fixed to each other and a slid state capable of relative rotation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation is omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(B) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is LX of FIG. 74 (a).
FIG. 75B is a cross sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R taken along line XVa-LXXVa.
FIG. 73 is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74 (a). In addition, since the right disk cam 7344L is configured from the symmetrical shape of the mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a to which the cylinder member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and the ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344 R 1
44R2 and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 which is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fitted in the equally-distributed concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2
344R3 mainly.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a portion extending in a flange shape radially outward from the edge of the cup
And the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member constituted from the shape which is omitted between the lead-in portion 344c2.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 by a surface in an assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
And a second circular recess 7420 which is a circular recess having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recess 7410 and which is deep in the axial direction, and a first overhanging portion 344c1 and a first lead-in 344c2 Radially outward from an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 bored in the radial direction and a side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 near the insertion hole 7430 (the outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) And a fixing protrusion 7440 which is provided in a convex manner.

The insertion hole 7430 is located at an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2.
From the bottom end of the first elongated hole 7341 which is a rectangular elongated elongated portion extending in the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at the shifted position, and the first elongated hole 7341 of the disc member 7344R1 A second long hole 74 which is a rectangular long hole portion extended along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and a second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum
And a return portion 7433 configured to project to the 32 side.

The dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engagement portion 7630 of the engagement member 7344R3. direction(
Smaller than the dimension of the short side direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B) of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is moved to the second elongated hole 743.
It is formed to be movable outward of two.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3 and has a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 76 (a)
Is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (b) is a ring member 7344R2
76C is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76A.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3
A ring plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape and a ring plate portion 7510 on which the 44 d is projected.
And a thick portion 7520 which is extended in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and in which a star-shaped through hole is formed at the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, and the resistance of relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

In the thick portion 7520, the extension length from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 is a length that does not interfere with the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75A), and the outer peripheral diameter Is slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recess 7420. Thus, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A) while preventing the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick-walled portion 7520 is formed into an irregular shaped through hole 7521 bored along the axial direction, and the irregular shaped through hole 7521 is concaved radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal parts in this embodiment). And an equal-portion recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The shape of the deformed through hole 7521 is such that the inner circumferential shape thereof is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Configured

FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a front view of FIG. 77 (a).
In the direction of arrow LXXVIIb).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engagement member 7344R3 has the radial outside of the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2. As shown in FIG. 77 (see FIG. 77), the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is disposed in the
b) an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end portion, and an engagement extending along the front-rear direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending end of the extending portion 7620 A portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are mainly included.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 is provided with a spring fixing projection 7611 which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the side surface on the inner peripheral side.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed radially inward in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extending tip end is configured to have an extending length which protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length passing through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and a displacement, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 78 (a)
Is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX of FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the VIIIb direction view, and FIG. 78 (d) is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78 (c).
FIG. 78 (e) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the d direction, and FIG.
FIG. 78 (f) is a front view of the 344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e).

In FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c) and 78 (d), the disc member 7 is not shown.
A state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the 344R1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are attached to the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. Also, to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78 (b),
In FIG. 78 (d) and FIG. 78 (f), the circular plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engagement member 734 is attached to the first long hole 7431.
The engaging part 7630 of 4R3 is inserted (refer FIG. 78 (a) and FIG. 78 (b)). As described above, since the dimension in the width direction of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the engaging portion 7630, the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated holes 7432, in the depth direction of FIG.
The engaging member 7344R3 is slidingly moved to a position where the positions of 630 and the fixing projection 7440 coincide with each other.

At the position after this movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses the positional deviation of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 78). The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Subsequently, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7342, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force. It enters into the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

In the state in which the second long hole 7432 is inward, the tip end of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large (See FIG. 78 (d)), movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engagement member 73
Since the circumferential movement of 44R3 can be limited, it is possible to prevent the position of the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

Once the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734 is thereafter engaged.
In a state where 4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, the disk member 734
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344 R 3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D 7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS 1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally-divided recess 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1.

The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the process described above. Note that
The right disc cam 7344L is configured to have a symmetrical shape of a mirror copy of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG.
And the disk cam 7344 is illustrated as a center, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide long hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the raised position when the engagement rib 344c abuts from below and passes through, the convex pin 346b becomes the movement end.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is obliquely cut in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79 (a), the release member 7346 is an engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R.
Is in contact and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79 (b), the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), and FIG.
In (a), the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 and pushed to the end is illustrated, and in M6-2 (b), the disc member 73 is removed from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the 44R1 is further rotated in the backward direction is illustrated. In FIG. 81, the right disk cam 7344R is rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b), and the engagement member 7344R3 is the release member 7
The situation after leaving 346 is illustrated. 79 (a), 79 (b) and 80.
In (a) and FIG. 80 (b), a state (a small angle state) in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the relative rotatable range with respect to the rotary claw member 7347 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. And the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the release member 734 is provided on the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engagement member 7344R3.
In a state where the six engaging portions 346d abut on each other, the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 are set to a small angle state.

In this embodiment, in the small angle state where the release member 7346 rotates in the forward direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the arc plate 7610 Inner circumferential surface and first overhang portion 344c1 of engagement rib 344c and first lead-in portion 3
The disc cam 7344 is disposed in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the 44c2 is in contact with the 44c2 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the disc cam 7344 is rotated, the release member 7346 is rotated toward the small angle state, and when it is in a state where it can not rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the rotation in the backward direction can not be continued, so based on the rotation of the disk cam 7344. The engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and hence, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disc member 734 is not shown from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
Even when 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to the deviation of the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is one equal-portion recessed portion 75 originally disposed.
As it moves from the point 22 to another equal-portion recessed portion 7522, the phase of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relatively rotates by an amount (72 degrees) of one recessed portion.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, the engagement member 73 is engaged.
Since the contact between 44 R 3 and the release member 7346 is released, the engagement member 7344 R 3 is projected radially outward, and the engagement portion 7630 is again accommodated in the equal-portion recessed portion 75 22. In this process, the equally-portioned recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by progressing the process shown in FIG. 79 (a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided concave portions 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the indented portion.

Referring to FIG. 82, engaging member 73 when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction.
The operation of the 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 8
3 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as a center, and the illustration of the other unnecessary portions is omitted.

In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), a state in which the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 82 (a), the release member 734
6 shows the state immediately before the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 abuts on the release member 7346 to start lowering. In FIG. 83 (a), the disc cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rolling direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In FIG. 83 (b), the releasing member 7346 and A state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate in the backward direction (FIG. 82 (a) clock). When rotating in the rotating direction, there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the elastic force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 to
7 can only be loaded in the forward direction.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward, and the engagement member 7344 is engaged from when the engagement member 7344R3 abuts against the release member 7346 until it is separated.
R3 maintains the radially outward projecting state. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward direction, relative rotation between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

By switching the rotational direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7 is
Whether or not the 344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other can be switched. Therefore, in the rotational direction (see FIGS. 82 and 83) in which relative rotation does not occur, it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed in the rotational direction (see FIGS. 79, 80 and 81) causing relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction not releasing the fixing). Since they coincide with each other, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other in the state (the posture is kept constant) maintained (see reference).

As a result, a state in which the player does not pay attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative attitude between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 where the player can not see it.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, it will be described that a plurality of types of modes can be formed in which the tilting device 310 is operated to rise from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7 (b) (disc cam 7344).
Of the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced (without rotating the disc), and in FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally-divided portions 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 84 and 85,
In either case, the state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 abuts on the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotating claw member 347 is in the first state.
By releasing the fixing by the above, it is possible to change the moving range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 84, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 is moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and downward relative to the position shown in FIG. It moves to the state sunk below 2 states.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be started from the first state.
It is possible to change the position reached 10 (without the rotation of the disk cam 7344) immediately by the upward movement. As a result, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of attention as the effect device of the operation device 7300 can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the paper front side is referred to as the front (front) side, and the paper back side is referred to as the rear (back) side. With respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) are pachinko machines 8010.
The vertical direction, the left and right direction, and the front and back direction of are shown. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the previous drawings.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 88 is a view showing the back pack 92 in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. Inner frame 1
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployed) open to two, and FIG.
FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko in a state in which the front frame 14 is removed. 80 is a front view of a machine 8010. In FIG. 90, for convenience, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which wooden plate materials are used as upper and lower sides and aluminum plate materials are used as left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game arcade by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) of the outer frame 11 and the locking structure It is good also as composition provided with the member which it has to the game arcade.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening and closing base end side) in front view, and the right side is a rotation tip end side It is possible to turn forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening and closing base end side) in a front view, and the right side is rotated. It can be pivoted backward as a moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip and functions to lock the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And, the front frame 14 has a function to lock the inner frame 12 so as not to be opened. In each of these locking states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front face of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform the unlocking operation. It is canceled by each.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a cylindrical portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft When the metal plate having a hole is engaged with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket 57 is extended from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at the lower position of the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12 and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the rear side It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed with a fittable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 is a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are continuously provided in the upper and lower directions) Is externally supported by the support pin 19a having a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 is provided with a main body frame 14 a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (electric decoration parts 8029-8033 etc.) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c which is smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
4c is covered by the glass unit 16 from the rear side, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the game board 1
The front center portion 3 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14 c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 is a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having transparency larger than the window portion 14c and transparency. And have. The fixed frame is a transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edge of the transparent glass 16a, 16b is bonded to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is an integrated multilayer glass.

In addition, although the glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent by transparent glass 16a, 16b, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and it is a glass unit from the pachinko machine 8010 front. If the game area can be viewed through 16, the game area may not be colorless and transparent but may be colored and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of electric decoration portions 8029 to 8033 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. These electric decoration parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Further, the electric decoration portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means which is turned on at the time of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls for discharging, and a light emitting means which is lighted during the prize ball being paid out.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) covering a speaker assembly 450 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output is provided. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper plate 17 and a lower plate 50 are disposed so as to be bulging toward the front side, and are vertically juxtaposed.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Also, lower plate 50
Has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 which is opened in the front-rear direction and in which the ball is guided to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 and provide a part for storing game balls in a plurality of places, and as a configuration having only one storage part where the lower plate 50 is eliminated and only the upper plate 17 is Also good.

On the front side of the upper tray 17 (the storage area of the game balls), an operation device 300 manually operated by players is provided. The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another portion such as the lower plate 50 and the like other than the upper plate 17,
It may be provided at a plurality of places, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to be able to input information by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and includes a front door upper tray passage portion 141 communicating with the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicating with the lower tray 50, and a ball passage passage 145 See FIG. 92).

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a dispensing ball receptacle part 143 which protrudes backward and is opened upward is formed. A passage inlet of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage inlet of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed by the left and right portions 143 being divided by the partition wall 144.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging the game ball that did not reach the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a as the far ball to the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The balls received in the ball receiving portion 146 are discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the inner passage of the ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). The far ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the far ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

Incidentally, the ball passage portion 145 joins with the ball releasing passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unfired ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player performing the ball releasing operation. Formed as.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there are attached resin cover members that are fastened and fixed to upper left and right corners, and multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 that bulge out to the back side. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172, a connector of wiring for conducting electricity to the electric decoration 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, the inner substrate of the electric decoration 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multi-function cover members 171 and 172, the wiring through grooves 14h communicated to the left and right electric decorative parts 8031 and 8032 and the wiring through grooves 14h pass through the electric decorative parts 8031, 31 An electronic substrate 14i to which the wiring drawn out from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic substrate 14i from the back side. Be

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the decorative portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89). It is possible to easily insert and remove the connector of the wiring to be conducted and the connector in which one end portion is connected to the internal substrate of the electric decorative portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic substrate 14i.

A multi-functional cover member 171 attached to the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14 is disposed in a pair at the top and bottom of the pivoting tip side of the inner frame 12 and holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13
The upper device of 0 (see FIG. 126) has a positional relationship facing the front and back, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

It is a container-shaped member in which the front side formed of a resin material is opened on the back side of the front frame 14 and is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 The long cover member 173 which accommodates the wiring in the space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a smaller cross-sectional area as it moves from the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14 to the pivoting base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring An upper wall portion 173b which is disposed in parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed opposite to the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and which constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 Composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion disposed in contact with the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided to extend upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end on the side where the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b are continuously provided is extended in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space which can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is further secured in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, while the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), rotation of the front frame 14 from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c It is projected to the proximal side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) which occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting. It is possible to reduce the possibility of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (a front frame 14
(A portion closest to the proximal end side of the pivot) and a plate portion which is a part of the main body frame 14a and which is a plate portion elongated vertically at the proximal end side of the pivot of the front frame 14 There is disposed a reverse cup portion 178 having a reverse cup shape which opens downward.

For example, the reverse cup portion 178 spreads the pivoting base end side of the front frame 14 illegally, inserts a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18 and takes measures against the cheating which is performed by entering the game area It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the reverse cup shape of the reverse cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be prevented, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against the fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated is made to enter and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat from the reverse cup portion 178
As well as being able to melt and pass through the reverse cup portion 178.
It also melts. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. Can make it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the reverse cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts on each other (adjacent). Further, since the normal to the lower surface of the reverse cup 178 in the wall 178a is directed downward, the piano wire can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall 178a when entering the reverse cup 178 from below. Since the sex can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability if the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to make it easy to detect fraud.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left and right direction when the end of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip is the wall portion It is pushed to 178a.

The wall 178a conforms to the curved portion of the upper extension wall 173c, so that if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall 178a and the tip of the piano wire It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the front end of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation front end side of the front frame 14 (
Since it progresses in the left-right direction, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to the person who performs the fraudulent action through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to make it easy to secure a wrongdoer by finding a wrongdoer before the wrongdoer escapes. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who performs the injustice can not distinguish it, and therefore thinks that the piano wire is on its way to the game area . Then, until the end of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window 14 c
It is possible to make the person who cheats the action of inserting the piano wire deeply further (without making the doubt that the piano wire has not been inserted properly) until the tip of the piano wire is seen from the front side. . Therefore, it is possible for a wrongdoer to be aware that the wrongdoing has been detected, and to prolong the time for the escape.

The detection device may be a device configured by a photo coupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be disposed on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being disposed on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operation handle 51 may also be used to determine the approach of the piano wire.

The ball firing unit 112 a is a device exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened as shown in FIG. 89, and is provided in the front lower side portion of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, in this ball launch unit 112a, an electromagnetic launch solenoid 701 provided as a launch device, and a game ball launched by the launch solenoid 701 are made of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. Rail 730 for guiding the game ball to be emitted toward the area between
And a ball feeding device 720.

Ball feed device 720 fires game balls stored in upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) rail 730
Supply one by one on top. In this case, the supplied gaming balls are disposed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launch portion in the launch solenoid 701. Then, the input of an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701 causes the plunger 702 to move to the firing rail 7.
It moves toward the game ball on 30 and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 provided with a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the countersink passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction a portion where the plate passage forming member 160 is provided, and the plate passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the countersink passage forming member 160 has a main body upper countersink passage portion 161 and a main body lower countersink passage portion 162. The main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 are
The passage is internally open so that one end is open toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with the through-hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. Form a curved passage whose direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12 and enters the plate passage forming member 160 from one end of the plate passage forming member 160 and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is formed on the lower portion of the countersink passage forming member 160.
The dispensing ball receptacle portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in 4 is inserted. The front door upper tray passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body upper tray passage portion 161, and the front door lower tray passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body lower tray passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower side portion of the countersink passage forming member 160 is a main body side upper countersink portion 161.
And the shutter 163 which controls the outflow of the game ball from the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is provided. The shutter 163 narrows the outlet part of both the passages and the blocking position for blocking the outflow of the gaming ball,
It is provided to be switchable to both of the allowable position where the game balls are allowed to flow out.

Further, an urging member (coil spring etc.) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where gaming balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, a disadvantage that the storage spheres spill out is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permitted position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the substrate 167, the portion where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are disposed and the portion where the connector CN3 is disposed are formed of different substrates. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are main controller 1
10 is used for transmission, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113. Since the target of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by previously using another substrate. by.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14 c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14 c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and illustrated. FIG. 92 is a window of the front frame 14 It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the structural member arrange | positioned below 14c is disassembled and shown in figure.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the main body frame 14 is located below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14.
The operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 17 at a position on the front side of the upper plate 17 and at the upper right of the lower plate 50 and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the cover.

The covering cover 370 is a member fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship covering the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width substantially the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorative portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions protrude to the front side It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body bending portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portion and the left and right direction end portion of the portion 371 toward the mutually approaching side in the width direction. Hanging portion 372 and body bending portion 371 and hanging portion 3
A light transmitting portion 373 which is a plate-like member closing the opening surrounded by the light source 72 and is formed of a light transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body bending portion 371 or the hanging portion 372; A left flat support portion 374 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the left end of the left side flat surface, a right flat support portion 375 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 It mainly includes a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the rear side.

The body curved portion 371 is configured such that the front side edge has a rounded curved shape, and the back side edge is shaped to match the front side edge of the upper plate 17 and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) 1
7 and the rear left edge 371a abutting in the front-rear direction with the front side edge, and the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 continuously connected to the rear left edge 371a A back middle edge 371b abutting against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 37
1b, a back right edge 371c continuously connected on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a and having a shape that matches the front side edge of the rental ball operation unit 40 and abuts in the front and back direction Mainly to

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 together with the main body bending portion 371 from the front side, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and is disposed at the right corner portion of the front frame 14
It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not form a gap between 0 and 0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is a recessed portion 1 at a position on the front side of a recessed portion 15a described later.
A screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recess 5a is formed, and the screw is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recess 15a is formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting light irradiated from the operation device 300 to the front side and capable of rendering with light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300 In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), it is disposed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, light is emitted upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e)
Six LEDs, which emit light downward (located on the lower surface of the lighting support 341e)
Are arranged, respectively.

Among the LED devices 341f, light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373 Do. On the other hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373 .

Thus, for example, if the amount of light emitted from the LED emitting light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 is compared when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control to change the amount of light), it is possible to match the state change of the tilting device 310 An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

Moreover, it is also possible to perform control which changes the light quantity of the light irradiated from LED which irradiates light downward according to the change of the state of the tilting apparatus 310 as another presentation control method. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is made stronger (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 The light that can be viewed through the light transmitting portion 373 according to the change of the state of the tilting device 310 by controlling the light quantity to be weakly (stepwise) changed according to the change from the 1 state to the second state The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a load directed downward is applied to the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electric decoration portion 8031. . Thereby, the position shift to the lower part of the electric decoration part 8031 can be suppressed.

The right side flat support portion 375 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a load directed downward is applied to the electric decoration portion 8032 and the position of the electric decoration portion 8032 shifts downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electric decoration portion 8032. . Thereby, the position shift to the lower part of the electrical decoration part 8032 can be suppressed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward by coming into contact with the lower surface of 0, the electric decorative portion 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1803 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported on a wide area by the electric decoration portion 8031, the electric decoration portion 8032 and the covering cover 370 which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Can widely disperse the force required to support the

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the decorative portion 8032 from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration part 8032 is in a state where it has entered to the deepest position of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end of the electric decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right flat support part 375 And the position agrees.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembling state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, It is possible to eliminate the need for separate fixing portions for fastening the cover 370 and the illumination portion 8032 to each other.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the resin plate-like plate member 14d is disposed on the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) Of the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. And the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is the main body frame 14a or a plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the rear side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween).

The sheet metal member 150 is a front frame even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates (for example, a wire having a heated tip or a piano wire is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry prevention member which makes entry impossible from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even when a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14 .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed to cover the lower end portion of the lower door passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 145 in the left front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to 140, and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back of the lower side of the far ball passage portion 145 and the ball removing passage 147.

The fitting box 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door lower countersink portion 142 and the upper and lower sides of the lower end portion of the far ball channel portion 145. Therefore, the lower end portion of the front door lower countersink portion 142 and the far ball channel portion Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145,
Even in the case of penetrating in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire forms the passage forming unit 1
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the back of the far ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed and the through hole is opened on the right side of the lower plate 50. Even in this case, the unauthorized member can be prevented from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the exemplified wire is pressed against a location where the operation device 300 is removed and the front and rear thickness is reduced accordingly (a location obliquely upward behind the recessed portion 15a) As a result, the through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 is provided with an operation portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the cylinder lock 20 is disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is set.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by the ribs formed in the front-rear direction mainly from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. And the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 can be penetrated so as to be penetrated by the plate member, and the through hole 1
A pair of insertion holes 157 which are drilled at the top and bottom of 56 and into which screws for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 are inserted in the body frame 14a and a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 It mainly includes a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored in parallel to each other, and an open / close restricting portion 159 which protrudes to the back side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connection insertion hole 158 is a connection portion 1 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
It is arranged to match 48 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is connected to the connecting through hole 1 at a position where it is aligned with the upper connecting through hole 158 in the longitudinal direction
It is inserted in the insertion hole 158 for connection at a position where the projection 148a protruding on the back side with a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction And a screwing portion 148b which is drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation portion back surface member 155 is stacked on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation portion back surface are inserted by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connection insertion hole 158. By performing alignment with the member 155 and thereafter screwing the screw passing through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion rear member 1 is easily made.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge and the lower side edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back surface member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the frame of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the region, and the extending wall portion 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L shape that can face the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left, and right.

Therefore, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 as alignment when assembling the operation portion back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By making the left and right face contact, the position and posture of the operation portion back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion disposed opposite to the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later.
The front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.
The effect of regulating 4 being in the closed state is achieved.

In the present embodiment, the open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and formed of a synthetic resin, and a cross section in the extending direction to secure rigidity The shape is formed in a U-shape. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when formed in a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material necessary while securing rigidity compared to when extending in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part Can be reduced. Therefore, the thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portion of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, the strength does not matter even if the strength is low because it is sufficient to rely on the main body frame 14a) It is possible to secure the strength of the open / close restricting portion 159 while improving the formability by being able to be formed by the plate thickness).

The cross-sectional shape of the open / close restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be ensured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, the cross section may be a curved (wave) shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section as compared to a flat cross section.

Further, the opening and closing restricting portion 159 is not a part of the operation portion back member 155, and the main body frame 14
It may be bent and extended from a to the back side, or may be formed of a metal portion extended from the other member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a to the back side. However, as in the present embodiment,
Forming the open / close restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin prevents the disc support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes in contact with the disc support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of an operator who changes the state of the board supporting device 600 and detaches the gaming board 13 from touching the chip or the dent formed on the board supporting device 600 and causing injury.

Here, since the open / close restricting portion 159 is disposed closer to the pivot base end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock disposed further to the pivot tip end side A long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the 20 points can be secured. Therefore, the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the rotating tip end side are erroneously locked is lowered in a state where the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board supporting device 600 or the game board 13 it can.

For example, a path that passes through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed as a path through which a foreign object such as a wire is made to enter. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable from the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap between the operation device 300 is traced.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is a wiring through hole 14 drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 of the protective cover device 350
It connects with the operation device 300 via the connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right outer peripheral wall lower corner of FIG.

Thereby, even if foreign matter such as a wire is made to enter the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire etc. is made to reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured substantially in a case shape. It is difficult to prevent the entry of foreign matter such as a wire to the back side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign matter that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick in the game result may put drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operating device 300 in a convenient position is likely to be a bait for drinking drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1).
3) may be broken.

Furthermore, if liquids such as drinking water enter the back of the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board etc., but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since the configuration is separable and independent, it is possible to prevent the liquid such as the drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

In the bottom plate upper surface (the surface facing the operation device 300) of the lower tray unit 15, a concave portion 15a is formed in a T shape in top view. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not perfect case-like, and in some places gaps are formed (see, eg, FIG. 13,
Through the inside of the operation device 300,
The recess 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid falling downward of the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 plays the role of an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, connection with the wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17 (b) and 18), the liquid such as drinking water is driven by the driving motor 3
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other part is covered by the bottom plate portion 321, The liquid remains adhering to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breakdown.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is put on the player at the time of return, the next player can play the game as normal as long as the user touches only the upper part of the operation device 300 and touches it. Since it can do, it can prevent that the maintenance time of the operation device 300 puts pressure on business hours.

On the lower side than the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIG. 93 to FIG.
6, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as illustrated in FIG. 91 is illustrated.

FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upper extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
The harness HN2 connected to the rental ball operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without the relay board, and is bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86).
The harnesses respectively connected to (see) are once connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and from the relay board to a bundle of extension harness HN
3 goes to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and pivots to a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction Movable arm portion 182 pivotally supported, and a side of the movable arm portion 182 facing the main body portion 181 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 (FIG. 93A) Flexible pair of binding arms 183 extending from the opposite side of the
Is a U-shaped portion disposed on the other side surface (the side surface facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A) of the rotation direction of the upper surface view, and the binding arm 183 can be locked Pair of locking parts 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, while the flexibility of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be high, the binding movable member 180 is formed to have lower flexibility (high rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section whose upper side is formed substantially in a horseshoe shape and has a through hole through which a screw passes in the center, and the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a project toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate retaining portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side 181c and a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a
(See FIG. 96 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion formed in a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of a screw which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d 181e,
Mainly to

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which matches the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

When fastening and fixing a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of rotation preventing convex parts 181b are fitted in the corresponding fitting hole of the hole group 14d1. Thus, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating about the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fastening
The attitude to d can be defined.

The intermediate stoppers 181c maintain the respective harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the intermediate stops 181c and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. A region that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation by the shape that is curved along the arranged circle (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18)
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region sandwiched by 1c.

The support plate portion 181 d forms a flat surface for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181 d
As for e, the outer peripheral surface thereof is fitted in the base end side portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 is a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly coupled to the plane OS1 offset from the pivotally supported position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e with the portion axially supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the proximal end It mainly includes a thin plate portion 182b in the shape of a long thin plate which is continuously provided on the opposite side of the pivotally supported position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is a left and right end portion (a portion where a straight line connecting with the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a back side end portion (the plane OS1 and the outermost portion) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the rotational direction are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radius are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as it approaches the plane OS1, and when it reaches the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It becomes equivalent to thickness.

Accordingly, the rigidity of the proximal end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the proximal end 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) not intended for elastic deformation, and the thin plate part 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) intended for elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since the binding arm portion 183 is configured in the same shape as each other, only one will be described and the other description will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small-width portion 183a formed with a width equal to the width of the root near the tip end and a large-width portion 183b formed wider than the small-width portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93B).

The large-width portion 183 b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small-width portion 183 a. In the present embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184 a formed on the movable arm 182 side and the large opening 1.
A small opening 184b is formed mainly on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass without depending on the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows passage of the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183. The large width portion 183 b is sized to be impassable (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when it is desired to move the binding arm 183 relative to the locking part 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is reduced). ,
When it is desired to lock the binding arm 183 to the locking part 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm 183 on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided at its central portion with a through hole through which the binding band can be inserted. Even when the bundling arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and it becomes impossible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3, a commercially available bundling band is inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be made bindable.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. Fig. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and Fig. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIVb of Fig. 94 (a).
95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb; a) XCV
It is a fragmentary sectional view of front frame 14 in a b-XCVb line.

In FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range) is illustrated, and FIGS. In b)
A state (the other limit state of the movable range) in which the movable arm portion 182 pivots in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts against a vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame
It is configured to be able to rotate about 160 degrees about an axis (facing the vertical direction). This angle is usually used from the situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machine 8010 is arranged side by side and may collide with the next pachinko machine 8010 when rotated 90 degrees or more). It is sufficiently larger than the turning angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 at the time of doing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95) Since the movable arm portion 182 is not deformed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 is deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Then, the support aspect of harness HN1-HN3 is demonstrated. Harnesses HN1 to HN
The arrangement 3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. FIG. 96 (b) is a top schematic view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

In FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 from an opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upper extension wall 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal lines of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c are the same, they are extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the middle stopper 181c.

The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, so that the upwardly extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c.
Of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm 18 of the binding movable member 180.
It can be made to conform to the shape of 2. Thus, as shown in FIG. 96 (b) and FIG. 96 (d).
As shown in the above, the shapes of the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 become a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of extreme bending deformation.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18 is provided.
The area surrounded by 3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14 d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96 (b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to the bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97 (a) and 97 (b) show a front frame 14, an inner frame 12, a binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. In FIG. 97 (a), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated, and in FIG. 97 (b), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated.

Also, in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. A member which is fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and is pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically illustrated by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 centering on the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b),
The inner frame 12 is rotated by rotating the proximal end 182a of the movable arm 182 about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e.
Since the opening and closing of the front frame 14 are supported, the thin plate portion 182b is not given a large load, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, whereby the durability can be improved (FIG. 9).
6 (b), see also FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the front frame 14 regardless of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
In the vertically elongated metal portion (FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a of FIG.
It is arranged in a path passing near the portion abuts the proximal end 182a of the movable arm 182). In other words, the harness HN 1 to HN 3 are forcibly routed to bypass
It is possible to prevent the curved portions 1 to HN3 from coming close to the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, at the time of opening and closing the front frame 14, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from interfering with the work of the worker, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed
It is possible to improve the accommodation of N1 to HN3 (the accommodation which is bent only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181 c is disposed vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt the reverse cup portion 178 and penetrate it by the support mode in which the intermediate stopping portion 181c disposed vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. Thus, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent action in which the wire is made to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when pressing the wire against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melting it to penetrate the wire and advancing the wire to the gaming area side, if the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178 Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
N1 to HN3 are pushed. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned off, and conduction is disabled.

In response to the interruption of the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3, an error signal can be output and an alarm can be sounded (for example, an error screen can be displayed) so that fraud can be quickly detected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from gaining the benefits of fraud.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the cheating is detected after the cheating is made (the early detection of the cheating can be achieved).

In this case, after allowing the wire to enter the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending the nails and making it easier to win illegally), the ball is made the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. By making a prize, it is possible to prevent the firing of the ball to the person who performs the fraudulent act that gets the prize ball illegally, it is possible to prevent giving the profit of the fraud. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to conduct a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 burns out, the operation of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, those who do wrongdo
Since there is a risk that it will not be possible to collect the ball for the balance of the bill or card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) by its own fraudulent activity, it exerts a deterrent against fraudulent activity. be able to.

Furthermore, in the case where the risk of not being able to collect the balls of the balance of the bill and the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is eliminated and the fraudulent act is carried out, the card unit (ball lending Even though the remaining amount of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating will be conducted without leaving the seat, the gaming machine store side can easily notice the cheating.

First of all, when the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In the gaming machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) is output, the disconnection error (C) is not shown.
By confirming the R error, it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
An outline of 0 and an outline of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is disposed at the lower end portion of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower door passage portion 1 on the front door side
The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left part of the ball guide opening 53 and the lower end of the far ball passage part 145 remains in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. Partition plate portion 53 a so as to occupy a region (a region of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53)
Divided by

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the far ball passage portion 145 are passages extending respectively from the disbursed ball receiving portion 143 and the far ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow downward to the lower plate 50. And the extension direction is at least once on both the left and right sides (switched) S-shaped path SL1, S
Each has L2.

Since the flow path length of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142 can be lengthened while keeping the upper and lower dimensions of the passage forming unit 140 short by the S-shaped path SL1, it stays in the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thereby, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
Since the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large upper and lower dimension of the lower plate 50, the upper and lower dimensions of the game area and the effect area are secured large. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress on ball replacement given to the player (if the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, it is required to refill the balls from the two boxes) The pachinko machine 8010 can be configured.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the far ball passage portion 145 respectively have bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions where the extending direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEa1. And a region NEa2.

In addition, the far ball passage portion 145 has a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NE in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1.
and b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be described, and the descriptions of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the lower door channel portion 142 on the front door side, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end portion Adjacent walls Nc, and each of these walls Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving the opposite surface Nc1 of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, and the surface Nc1 functions as a guiding surface of the ball. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 restricts the traveling direction of the wire HM (a thin metal represented by a wire, a piano wire, etc.) improperly inserted. Function, but the details will be described later. Note that the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is the wire H
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM incorrectly inserted due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1.
Can be prevented from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the front door side lower countersink passage portion 14 with the ball guide opening 53 as the entrance as an entering path of the wire HM to be incorrectly inserted.
Where a route going up to the upstream side of 2 is considered, in this case, the person who cheats is wire H.
It will be made to advance, pressing M against the side wall of the lower door passage part 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by a fraudster, the wire HM enters the gap Nin while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side, so it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin It will be. That is, one pair of bending areas NEa1,
By arranging the NEa 2 so as to be horizontally reversed, the wire HM can be made to enter the gap Nin without leakage.

One example of the travel path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin is shown in FIG. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (clamped), it is possible to prevent the further progress of the wire HM, and also to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly detect a fraud. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not get caught and travels further, when the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip protrudes in a posture facing downward, so the wire HM is more than that.
, The tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, the wire HM
Are disposed on the upstream side of the dispensing ball receptacle 143, and the foul ball receptacle 146
It is possible to prevent the game area located on the upstream side of the game from reaching the game area.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causes the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and causing the electric utility product 64.
By forcibly opening the movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) and making it easy to make an illegal prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal performer from gaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball or the like. .

Referring back to FIG. The fur ball passage portion 145 is formed with a vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE joining the ball opening passage 147 in a size about twice (2 or more times in the present embodiment) the diameter of the ball. Thus, when the balls flowing down the ball extracting passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the balls flowing down the far ball passage 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously move into the merging area CE) Even if the two balls are vertically aligned, the possibility of the balls being caught and engaged in the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being impeded in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The passage portion 145 a is set to have a width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and the passage forming unit 1
The back side bottom plate portion 40 is formed to project to the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 faces the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The rear bottom plate portion is positioned at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the case of the far ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145 a is the passage portion 14.
The front-rear width is set to be larger than the downstream region of 5a. In the present embodiment, the far ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the far ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width thereof is slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the ball passage portion 145
When the balls stay in the upper stream of the passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged by shifting their positions back and forth, so that the number of stay can be increased, and the center of the balls in the front-back direction Since alignment is prevented (it will be slightly shifted to the left and right and up and down), two balls can be prevented from entering the passage part 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to regulate the ball entry into the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more far balls flow in series in the far ball passage portion 145, it is possible to prevent the far balls from simultaneously reaching the merging region CE, so the balls in the merging region CE It is possible to reduce the possibility of being caught and engaged with the upper and lower wall portions.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 is extended in a plate shape on the front side from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the left end portion is connected to the left side wall portion and the flowing surface of the ball is directed to the right And an inclined plate portion 146a, which is inclined downward, and the ball receiving portion 1 of the far ball vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
46 and a passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate 146a.
And a curved guide plate portion 146c which is extended in a plate shape from the back surface side bottom plate portion 40 to the back surface side and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

The ball is guided to the far ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, while the far ball receiving portion 1 is formed by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b.
The passing position of the ball passing through 46 to the front side can be brought close to the right side of the far ball receptacle 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the ball receiving portion 146. Can.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time period until the ball that has passed through the far ball reception port 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since it is possible to finish the vertical bouncing of the ball before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (from the fact that the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the far ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 By setting the width of 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

The far ball passage portion 145 is a range that forms the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a
Since the passage width is set to be small (a little larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool having a larger outer diameter from passing through the ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 100 and 101, the state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the electric decoration 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is illustrated.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right, and the left and right end portions are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032. In this lower support structure, at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 recessed from the back side to the front side (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed in the upper end portion of the right panel unit 500 are engaged with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. The upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50 by
0 is linked.

Thus, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 directly to the main body frame 14a, respectively. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the assembling order to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 after fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) respectively disposed in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right Heavy plate unit 500 R, 5 depending on the structure in which
It is possible to prevent 00L from being separated to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded back perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the main body frame 14a is on the front side of the main body frame 14a.
A state in which the upper side plate member 14e and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 sandwiched between the front and rear panel units 400 (see FIG. 89) are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is illustrated.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member for sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122) and includes a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side, and the screw passing through the through hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole drilled in the main body frame 14a is shown disassembled from the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e. And while illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

The cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. Also, in the right panel unit 500, the right side wall forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded back perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 50.
The upper and lower long plate-like support plate portions 510 are mainly provided, in which OL and 500R are fastened and fixed and are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the rear side to the front side.
L and 500 R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and in that state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw which is inserted from the rear side to the front side to the front side 4a.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending in a plate shape an extending portion 511a extending from the outer edge (right edge) on the side opposite to the main body frame 14a to the back surface. (Figure 86
A fixed plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511 abuts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511, A plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens side through holes And a pin support hole 515 which is drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a pedestal 511b which is in a shape overlapping with the substrate 512 in a front view and the side of the substrate 512 protrudes to the front side in a trapezoidal shape, and the substrate member in a state in which it faces the front of the pedestal 511b. 512 are fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The platform 511b is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the heavy plate unit 500L, 500R.
(See Fig. 115 (b)), the heavy plate unit 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress the fall in the left and right direction of 0R. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extending portion 51 is extended more than the base portion 511b.
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511 is provided.
While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of the a.
The rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is the rear side end of the support plate 510 by being formed up to the rear side end as a side surface and a plane side surface of the base portion 511 b on the left side of 11. The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is in contact with the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which the plurality of LEDs 512a are disposed on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a line that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, an interval of 11 mm) next to each other. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are disposed inside the shape in which the light guiding member 540 is projected from the front, and the light is directed in parallel to the light axis toward the light guiding member 540 from directly behind the light guiding member 540 Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

The width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (right and left width of the light emitting part) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107). The light is incident on 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, but the light in / out and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole through which a back fastening portion 527 disposed in the inner cover member 520 is positioned, and a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. The inner cover member 520 is supported by the support plate portion 51 by fastening the screw to the rear surface fastening portion 527.
It is fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 disposed in the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is supported by the support plate portion 51 by fastening the screw to the rear surface fastening portion 556.
It is fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projection 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin supporting hole 515 is set such that the lateral width is slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting portion 566, while the vertical width is set to a length about twice the diameter of the projecting portion 566. Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 and is fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut the support plate portion 510 from the front side, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protrusion portion 566 The projection 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even when the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of. Thereby, the protrusion 566
Are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L with respect to the support plate portion 510,
By moving the 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be performed easily.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L has a window 14c (FIG. 86).
Inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the reference) and is formed of a non-transparent resin material
And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L.
And an outer lens member 550 which is in contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front end is disposed opposite to the front-rear direction and is made of a light transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the 550 and is made of a non-transparent resin material.
And an outer cover member 560 to which the 0 and outer lens members 550 are fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side is illustrated, and five plate members constituting heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Are illustrated in an exploded manner.

The inner cover member 520 is a main plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed on the upper end of the main plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
A plurality of short fastening parts 525 which are cylindrical parts to be inserted into 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525 The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the lens member 530.
And a plurality of back fastening portions that are provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 while being screwed into and screwed in to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
And mainly.

The front side end portion 521a of the main body plate portion 521 has a wave shape, and the connection plate portion 521c which connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in a short width portion (a portion close to the back side) of the wave shape. Equipped with

The rear side base portion 521b is the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b An inner side surface 521b1 is provided which comes into surface contact with the left side surface (the shape is matched).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion which is disposed in a posture inclined to the left toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connection plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and are arranged such that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening sizes of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of the light is displayed in the openings 524.
It can be different every time.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed in, and is recessed in the left and right direction on a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front and back direction And a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left and right direction on the left outside surface. That is, screws are inserted through the outer cover member 560 at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end, and fastened and fixed to the inner cover 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are juxtaposed at four upper and lower positions and the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
Act as a window to view the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed rightward from the left end of the connection plate 521 c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the back side base portion 521b and the connection plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is shaped like the design in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52
The surface of 0 (left side) corresponds to the part which overhangs to the left (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is curved in a concave shape to the right, like a design, between the boundaries described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521 b is formed in a wave shape which waves in the left and right directions as it proceeds in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed on the back surface side of the portion projecting to the design-like surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion is formed with a recess which is likely to be a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively used by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520. Efficiency can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions conforms to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed into a main plate portion 5 which is formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front end 531a of the front cover 31 has a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is drilled in the front and rear direction at the switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. And a support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531 c.

The support hole 531b is formed in a wave-like front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31 b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531 b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-like rearward portion of the front end 531a, and on the back side thereof, an inclined rib portion 532 extended to a position capable of coming into contact with the light guide member 540 is disposed. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531 c is strengthened in the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even when a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, the support hole 531c can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531 d drilled in the left-right direction with a size capable of inserting the long fastening portion 526 at a position between the support hole 531 b and the support hole 531 c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531 d, alignment between the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be performed.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connection plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connection plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting between the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended in such a manner as to fill a gap with the light guide member 540. That is,
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 is shaped to project leftward as it goes to the back side, so that the lateral width becomes longer as it goes to the back side (the front end in the top view is tipped Triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 which is formed to project leftward from the main body plate portion 531 in a manner passing through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 is provided with a light scattering portion 533a which is provided in a wavelike convex shape and has a wavelike curved surface so as to scatter light on the opposite side to the overhanging side.

The light guiding member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right direction as a dot pattern arranged in a grid shape It is a so-called light guide plate to be formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is directed in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is the front end from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) It is formed of a shape that gradually tapers towards the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in the present embodiment, the LED 512a).
) Is a processing unit for changing the light from (1) into uniform surface emission. The recessed portion is a notch-shaped recessed portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a to form the light guide member 5.
It emits from the surface of 40 left and right sides.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a thermoplastic plate having a pattern in which conical portions having a tilt angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom and a diameter of about 1 mm of the bottom circle are dispersed in a grid at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) on a resin. Among the light emitted from the LED 512 a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

Although the thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, noncrystalline polyester resins, noncrystalline olefin resins are preferable. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
An acrylonitrile, a styrene copolymer compound) can be illustrated. Among these, by using an acrylic resin, in particular, the light guide member 540 having high average luminance and little decrease in luminance distribution.
You can get

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512 a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness to 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, and the retention of the shape after the thermal bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front end is slightly shifted to the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 It is also formed from rippling wave shapes.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
There is no particular limitation, but the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm in the curved surface portion.
It is preferred that By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of giving three-dimensional freedom while reducing distortion after thermal bending and keeping practical mechanical properties well. .

In addition, although the detail of the wave shape which ripples right and left is mentioned later (refer FIG. 114), the inner cover member 520 is mentioned.
The left side at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and the right side (apart from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c It has a wave shape.

The wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by subjecting the base on which the concave portion is formed to thermal bending as described above. The heat bending method of the present invention includes a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (female mold) which are curved in a state of being heated to a heating temperature of +10 to 40 ° C. of the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin serving as the base material.
The mold is made by pressing the substrate to a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when a thermoplastic resin has acrylic resin as a main component, heating temperature can be 110 degreeC or more and 150 degrees C or less. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130 ° C. or more and 150 ° C. or less.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C. or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not broken, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process It can be suppressed that the reflection angle of As a result, it is possible to prevent the brightness reduction and the unevenness of the brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Moreover, distortion to a light-guide plate can be suppressed by setting it as such heating temperature conditions.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate, and the main plate portion 5 thereof.
A fastening portion 542 is mainly provided, which extends vertically from upper and lower end portions of the screw 41 and through which a screw fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541 a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In the other position, there is no part penetrating in the left and right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is constituted by a single plate without a hole at least on the inner side of the projection surface which projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect by the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is disposed on the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551 which is formed in a vertically long plate shape and the main body plate portion 551 and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Internal fit 5
52 and a plurality of insertion holes 553 which can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region extending rightward in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 A protruding portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a back surface side of the main body plate portion 551 It mainly comprises a plurality of back fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions conforms to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate 551 and forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front end of the light guiding member 540. It has a wave shape and is disposed slightly offset to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front side end of the light guide member 540 and the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed to be equally spaced in the longitudinal direction at any position in the vertical direction. Ru.

The front side end 551a is at the switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape,
A plurality of convex portions 551b are provided so as to be convex to the front side and fit in the support holes 531b and 531c in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The surface on the opposite side of the front end 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 is disposed on the front side,
The bulging part 551a1 (refer FIG. 115 (a)) bulging to side view semicircle shape is formed innumerably up and down. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart at a predetermined distance, The light emission at the front side end face can be made into a band-like light emission aspect that continues vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a recessed deep portion having a shape that is recessed on the inner side (the inner side of the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the projecting portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be made strong, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is disposed on the outer lens member 550 and is not disposed on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right side edge (the outer side edge of the pachinko machine 8010) of the support plate portion 510 (arranged regardless of the screw diameter and the arrangement of screws it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) arranged to face the player can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) 5
The surface 40 abuts on the main body plate 551 (see FIG. 114 (b)).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LEDs 512 a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
Misalignment with the light guide member 540 can be prevented, and light can be accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512 a.

The outer cover member 560 has a main plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522 a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main plate portion 561. A plurality of longitudinal holes each having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a transverse oval shape having a lateral width longer than the longitudinal width and a plurality of screws to be inserted from the opposite side It is a receiving surface which can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the lower end portion of the upper side fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the main body plate portion 561,
A lower-side fastened with a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in an elongated hole shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width The long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561.
26 is a receiving surface capable of receiving H.26, having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and a transverse elongated hole shape longer than the longitudinal width and from the opposite side A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 which is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a convex configuration from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side And a plurality of projecting portions 566.

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562 b recessed in the lateral width direction at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the fitting groove 522 b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower to-be-fastened portion 563 is provided with a fitting groove 563 b recessed in the lateral width direction at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the fitting groove 523 b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563 b is a cover 3
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is engaged with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by the upper and lower fitting grooves 562 b and 563 b. Here, the right panel unit 500 is in contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), so the right panel unit 500 is projected to the front side by the covering cover 370. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (see FIG.
It forms from the inner shape equivalent to the external shape of the overhang | projection part 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

Referring to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500.
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

In addition, in FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 112 (b), the state by which the convex part 551b is arrange | positioned at the back side of the support hole 531b is illustrated, and in FIG. 113 (a) and FIG. Part 55
A state in which 1b is inserted through the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in such a manner that the left end portion of the main plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact in the left and right direction (FIG. 11)
2 (b), the left heavy plate unit 500L can be brought close to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c can be inserted into the support holes 531b.

Thus, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the convex portions 551b and 551 are provided.
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support holes 531b, design freedom of the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit
It is possible to reduce the number of screws disposed on the front side of the front side surface of the light guide member 540 and fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, whereby the light is blocked by the screws Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the end face on the front side of the light guide member 540 can be easily viewed in the form of a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced. The light guide 540 is loaded by applying a load to the light member 540.
Can reduce the range where there is a risk of breakage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
The surfaces in parallel relation to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that can be in contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right heavy plate unit 500R in the front-rear direction, so that the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 in maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 includes the left heavy plate unit 5 at the support plate portion 510 as described above.
While the 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure.

The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. By fastening the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b.
In this method, the left heavy plate unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. And these two kinds of procedures can be adopted similarly at the time of disassembly of the right panel unit 500.

As described above, since assembling and disassembling can be performed in two procedures, the operator who performs maintenance or the like can use the right panel unit 50 in either of the procedures depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether 0 is disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, regardless of which procedure is taken, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R
It is necessary to slide each other in the plane direction. Convex part 551b, 551c and support hole 531b
It is necessary to release the engagement with the When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are mutually slid in the surface direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c are fitted to the support holes 531b, the right panel unit 500 is pricked (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). It helps to prevent fraudulent activity that travels inside the 500 and enters the interior of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening the screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and while it is possible to easily perform a fraudulent act, As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the left side is not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104). By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of passing along the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in rendering will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated from the back side to the light guide member 540, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is Be turned in the direction. At this time, light is emitted in the direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 is curved in the lateral direction (see FIG. 114B), the light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and the light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 of the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be condensed to produce effects. Thereby, the intensity of light viewed through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 disposed at the top among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to the light can be diffused and used for effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, the difference is in the form (whether it is condensed or diffused) of the effects of light performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as the boundary. It can be provided to improve the rendering effect.

In addition, the difference in the aspect of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it is possible to make the aspect of the effect of light on both the left and right sides different by dividing the shape of the concave portion notched in the light guide member 540 according to the area or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the area. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
> R2) Similarly, the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the curvature radius R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 is not changed, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the light collected for each opening 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of light to be visually recognized can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

In addition, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, ie, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4 R R1) and the center of the concave surface It has a shape in which the normal coming out of is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be intensified, light effects can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lower opening 524 can be viewed by the player. It can be emitted upwards.

The upper and lower widths W1 to W4 of the openings 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the middle point of the upper side of the opening 524 and the middle point of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114 (c). The width of the opening 524 opposite to the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposite to the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the curvature radius R3 The width of the opening 524 oppositely disposed is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 oppositely disposed to the portion of the curvature radius R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 of the respective openings 524 are reduced in the lower opening 524 (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radiuses R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship between the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relationship between the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are associated. Thereby, the location where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the curvature radius R
In part 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is large so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while in a portion where the degree of light collection is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3) The upper and lower width W3 of the opening 524 is smaller than the upper and lower width W1 to prevent the light from being excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radius of curvatures R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) correspond to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction It is arranged in the approximately middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the area KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is a band-like area extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as an area in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the region K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper side, and the lower end of the area KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower side. Therefore, in the area KE, the LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is a left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c).
In the reference), it advances in the state where it is concealed by connecting plate part 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is the inner cover member 520.
Therefore, even if the light collecting action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, the light guide member 54 is formed by forming a convex surface to the left side instead of the flat surface in the region KE.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape having no corner and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion to which light is diffused inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560 and a portion to which light is condensed Can be formed. Thereby, the rendering effect of the rendering of the light visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, it is possible to change the light viewed through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light viewed through the opening 524 depending on whether the light is made incident from the LED 512 a to the area KE. .

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5a are turned off.
It is also possible to irradiate light without gaps to the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 by turning on 12a. At this time, by making the shape on the right side of the light guide member 540 concave on the upper and lower sides of the area KE, the lights emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the area KE intersect at the right side of the outer cover member 560 As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in the form of an edge, which is viewed by the player at the edge The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhang portion 554 (FIG. 106).
The light emission aspect of (see) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the area KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. It can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512 a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, light incident on the area KE is likely to reach the front end even if the light quantity is weak. The effect may be performed using the light reaching the front end.

That is, although it can not be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front side end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
31a (see FIG. 105) A visual effect of light visible (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the jackpot expectation of the effect is set high to set the position of the player's eyes , Can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, the degree of tiredness of the player's eyes can be reduced, and the player can play the game for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side surface, and is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side surface. Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and is not visually recognized by the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 is notified by visible light to the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side be able to.

As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while not being noticed by the player who is performing the injustice, so that the player who is performing the injustice attempts to escape. It can be prevented.

By reversing the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the store clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of (a).

The light guide member 540 is shaped to be gradually tapered toward the front side from the end surface (approximately 5 mm in thickness) on the LED 512 a side. The front end of the light guiding member 540 (the LED 512)
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the lateral width dimension is reduced at the same gradient over the entire region in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 opposite to the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion opposite to the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the side of 12a becomes long, it is tapered more and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531 b and the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531 c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is disposed at a position where the support hole 531b is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front and rear direction
Due to the shadow created by the nearby part, the part near the support hole 531 c is more likely to be recognized darker than the vicinity of the support hole 531 b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 of the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531 b
Since the width dimension (thickness) of the end face of the portion of the light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of 0, the light irradiated from the LED 512a is received. Thus, a large area of the light emitting surface can be secured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is the support hole 53
The amount of light visually recognized in the portion near 1 b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be mitigated. Thus, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530
It is possible to make it easy to make the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end of the right panel unit 500 up and down uniformly (a difference in strength is small), with a as the front surface.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 is visible. Also, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (traveling direction) of the light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, light emitted from the light guiding member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of curving the light guiding member 540, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It spreads and travels to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of the light guide member 540 being curved. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, it is possible to make the light emission modes (rough, light and dark) different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
By 0 being curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b), it is not right next to the player but refracted toward the player (see the arrow of an imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). Imagination in FIG. 115 (b) Line arrows are
An example of the advancing direction of the light which passes the light guide member 540 is shown. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

Referring back to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a through e and are disposed at the upper end portion of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end portion thereof (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
And a unit that is supported from the lower side and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fixed to the upper side plate member 14e by sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 100), the upper frame member 410 and the front face of the upper frame member 410. And a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and held by the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly to In FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The electric decoration unit 401 is a unit to be decorated to indicate the model name etc. on the front side, and L
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is contained. By emitting light from the included LED,
Perform effects by light.

The electric decoration unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light transmitting resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a corrugated wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-like portion 404 extending in the form of a horizontally long plate from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion projecting cylindrically from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear plate members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the contained LED is disposed on the electronic substrate,
The electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction.
It is a part which improves the workability of assembling of 01.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed to be capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper side frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper side frame member 410. In the front side wall of the upper side frame member 410, a laterally long groove shape which sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 vertically is formed concavely.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for passing through the wiring of the electronic substrate in which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and the upper side plate member 14e. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14 e and the main body frame 14 a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper side frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an upper side frame member 41.
FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A lower edge plate member formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the body member 411, and a front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the body member 411. The left corner support member 430L to be fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 is inserted from the rear side to a position projecting to the front side from the opening 414, and is pressed from the rear side to the right corner support member 430R. And a lens member 440 which is restricted from falling off to the rear side and which constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033.

The main body member 411 has an opening formed on the left and right sides for passing the vibration wave (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and is a long elongate member on which the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the opening. In the front side, a corrugated wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape in top view, and a portion of the corrugated wall portion 412 disposed so as to face the cylindrical portion 405 of the decorative unit 401 than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405 A support through hole 413 which is formed with a slightly larger inner shape,
And an opening 414 which is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the position alignment in the left-right direction when inserting the electric decoration unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thus, the wire protruding through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through holes 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, since the other end of the wiring whose one end is connected to the electronic substrate contained in the electric decoration unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, the front frame 14 is closed. Can prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through holes 413 define the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted.
Thus, the support through holes 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visible in a front view. In the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), the LED 14 is positioned at a position coincident with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The light e2 is disposed, and the light emitted from the LED 14e2 can be viewed by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed side from the back side at the lower left end face Supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 which is disposed at a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end and in which a screw is threadably formed, and a screw is threadably formed at a position near the top and bottom The fastening portion 419 b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed on the lower edge front side end). Thereby, positioning in the lateral direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the left and right claws to be fitted to the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (FIG. 86)
In the reference), a load (such as weight) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be given to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electric decoration portion 8031, and the fitted state (
86), the upper panel unit 40 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from 0 to the electric decoration portion 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where the screws inserted in the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape to a position where the screw does not reach the tip portion. And an enlarged rib 419a.

As described later, the enlarged rib 419a is formed by fastening the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e can be assembled into the main body frame 14a. , And the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged ribs 419a, ribs of the same shape are disposed at three locations at intervals of 120 ° around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419 b (see FIG. 118) is a fastening portion 14 e 1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14 e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at a lower position of the main body member 411.
No. 2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and in the upper position of the main body 411, in the same position as the recesses 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450, Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by curving a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it is extended upward from the extending end portion, and the section L
And a plurality of L-shaped extension portions 423 formed in the shape of a letter, which are disposed at equal distances left and right from the left and right center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of curved shape) And an opening 424 composed of a small diameter through hole.

The lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 contacts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the corrugated side portion 416 in the back surface, with the corrugated wall portion 422 and the corrugated side portion 416 of the main body member 411 abutting on the front and rear A portion which is a part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 and extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Accordingly, the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased at the portion where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, and the strength can be improved.

The opening 424 is a speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 from the rear side of 1 is passed (discharged to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L have circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings in the speaker assembly 450, for passing the vibration generated toward the front side.

The right corner support member 430R is provided with a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the lens is visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded back perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted into the connection holes 469, and left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. In addition, the speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
The speaker assembly 450R will be described because it consists of 0 L.
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R is a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave to be audible, and the front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted through the through hole 466. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer contour that substantially matches the outer contour of the front assembly 460 in a front view,
A rear assembly 48 which forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0, and mainly.

The speakers 451 close the through holes 466 of the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is used to emit presentation sound in connection with a game.
Through-hole in which a speaker connecting line 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire comprising a covering portion covering the copper wire) extended at one end is connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) , And the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
Are configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front surface portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass therethrough. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 whose 54 is covered is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front portion thereof aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is hidden. High-quality sound can be played back and output without In addition, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front side assembly 460 is a main body 46 which is formed in a cup shape whose left and right sides are long and whose rear side is open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular tip shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the upper and lower width center, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 An extending plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461, and the main body 461
A wire passage recess 464 recessed from the rear side end of the main body to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461, and a speaker 451 at the right side of the main body 461 And a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending like ribs from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the above-mentioned screws are fastened and fixed, connection holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted The lower portion of the portion 461T mainly includes a front recessed portion 471 which is recessed from the back side to the front side.

The main body 461 is, as a region divided in the left and right direction, a base end side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left and right direction of the base end side main body 461B (FIG. 12).
1) mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M continuously provided on the left side and a tip side main body portion 461T continuously provided on the center side (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the left-right direction. A space formed between the proximal main body 461 B, the intermediate main body 461 M, and the distal main body 461 T and the rear assembly 480 is continuously formed.

The main body 461 includes a back side wall 461 H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge without an inner side (an edge without a flange or the like formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Be done.

The extending plate 463 is provided with a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
Screws inserted into a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-clamping hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
The through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 is inserted through the coe-clamping hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e.
And passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being tightened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a made of metal with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connecting wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recessed portion 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage recess 464, and a gap can be prevented from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced by the sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not on the rear assembly 480 but on the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled, The speaker connecting line 453 connected to the speaker 451 can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 in advance. Thereby, the workability of the assembly operation of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through holes 465 are LEDs 14e disposed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage forming rib 467 is in close contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap, and is a bent passage (curved into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480).
(Refer to FIG. 123). The bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front concave portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (extends slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a main body portion 48 which is formed in a cup shape whose left and right long front sides are open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular tip shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the upper and lower width center, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483 b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 An extending plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower width outer side to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481, and the main body portion 481
From the wiring pressing convex portion 484 provided on the front side of the front face, the light passing through hole 485 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body portion 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side, and a fastening portion 4 of the front side assembly 460
A plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes into which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and rear direction 68 and a front side from the front side at a position corresponding to the front concave portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front and rear direction And a rear-side recessed portion 491 which is recessed toward the main body.

The main body portion 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 than the outer shape of the back side plate. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that is internally fitted to the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H
It has 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes double wall portions fitted by the back side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H all around the outer periphery, air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced due to the sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions provided to project to the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position sandwiching the wiring pressing convex portion 484 with an interval allowing passage of the speaker connection line 453. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connecting line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage concave portion 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front side assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered so as to expand to the left and right toward the front side (the tip end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connecting line 45
Even if 3 is separated from the wiring passage recessed portion 464 and shifted to the left and right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

Thus, the speaker connecting line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connecting wire 453 is formed of the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing projection 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is formed in the same shape in front view as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
Screws inserted into a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-clamping hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
The through hole 483a and the front assembly 46 are inserted into the coe-clamping hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e.
It passes through the zero through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 483a from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wire pressing convex portion 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 so as to have a width fitted in the wire passing recess 464 and has a width greater than the recess depth of the wire passing recess 464. The speaker connecting line 453 is convexly provided with a convex length which is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is formed in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464.
By passing through 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the opening formed by being surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage recess portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Can be prevented. Thus, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced by the sound leakage from the opening for letting through.

The light passing through hole 485 is an LED 14e disposed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds the LEDs one by one. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and the assembled state (see FIG. 100) ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is formed in the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and abuts each other with no gap in front and back, and a plurality of spaces are formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 It is a rib which forms a bending passage (refer to FIG. 123) which turns in a turn. The bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and at the same time, the front side wall portion 481H.
The front and rear ends and the surface position of the That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body portion 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents the formation of a gap on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have a dimension such that a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction, although the front end is in contact with the passage forming rib 467. That is, a compression force directed from the passage formation rib 467 to the back side is applied to the passage formation rib 487, and the compression force produces the passage formation rib 4.
67 and 487 close the gap between them while being elastically deformed in the front and rear direction (Fig. 124 (b)
reference).

At this time, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 is weak, and if it is bent to the left and right, the compression force does not work well, and there is a possibility that the gap can not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is determined by the strength of the front side wall 481H (see FIG. 100). It is possible to strengthen the side wall portion 461 H). Therefore, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from left to right, so that the gap with the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. Can.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed in a shape inverted from the front concave portion 471 and forms an opening in cooperation with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed to a size (extends slightly outward from the outer shape) of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) It is placed at a position surrounding the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a rear assembly 48.
It is a front view of 0. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connecting line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are disposed to face each other, is developed with the surfaces facing each other toward the front side in the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be obtained by folding the drawing of FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn longitudinally to the left and right center of the paper. It can be adjusted. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the interior of the speaker assembly 450 includes the proximal main body 46 of the front assembly 460.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, an acoustic passage serving as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the distal end side main body portion 461 T with the acoustic chamber as a base end. This acoustic passage is configured as a bending passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming rib 467 is formed on the inner side (left side) in the left and right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes. Rib portions 467a and 467b disposed at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming the respective rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction than the wiring passage recessed portion 464 through which the wiring passes, the respective rib portions 467 are assembled.
a, 467 b, 467 c, 467 d, 467 e and respective rib portions 487 a of the rear assembly 480
Wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, so the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d are connected.
, 467 e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e, together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451 is
In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated as an example of the advancing path in FIG. 123 (a), the vibration wave Ws is located on the left side of the passage forming rib 467 (for example, the rib 467a) on the left side (arrow When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) closest to the left and right direction is disposed on the L side and is disposed on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) of the passage forming rib 467 after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side When the rib portion 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (in the directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4 are provided.
When 67e is alternately arranged up and down, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is secured longer than the horizontal width of the space can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of the standing wave by the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same function as the passage forming rib 467 is provided by the recessed portions 462 and 463b.
Can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463 b located above and on the right side (arrow R side) It can be made to advance (in the directions of arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect exhibited at the time of assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is provided with the wire pressing convex portion 4 for pressing the wire.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the 84 and alternately arranged vertically at a plurality of places (five places in the present embodiment).
87 d and 487 e are provided.

Since each rib 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected with the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, each rib 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is a front assembly 4
Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e is formed to have a shape corresponding to the six rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467e in the front-rear direction.

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same function as the passage forming rib 487 is obtained by forming the recessed portions 482 and 483b.
Can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is located at the upper left between the recessed portion 482 disposed closest to the rear-side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483 b located above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recess 48
In addition to the effect exerted at the time of assembly, 2, 483 b also exerts an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in height as it goes away from the speaker 451, and is narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position away from the speaker 451 and then communicated with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This can improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451 is
Since the proximal body portion 461 B side to which the speaker is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
The outlet is sought to advance toward the tip side main body 461 T which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (voice) reached to 61 T passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) in order, and the speaker assembly Sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back surface portion of the speaker 451 is an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, the recess portion 47.
Since it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed by 1,491, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without making you hesitate.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound in the same phase as the sound output from the front of the speaker 451 is recessed portions 471, 491. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase without canceling out due to the reverse phase of the sound output from the front side. That is, it becomes possible to amplify a deep bass. By this,
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment makes it possible to perform an effect full of reality,
It is possible to enhance the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is a speaker assembly Using the internal space 450 as an enclosure, it is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with an effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice), setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 or
This can be performed by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the respective rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are provided.
A path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path avoiding the respective rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e of zero. Therefore, each rib 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the 7 d and 467 e and the rib portions 487 a, 487 b, 487 c, 487 d and 487 e and the extension length in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front side assembly 460 are provided.
67 d, 467 e and the respective rib portions 487 a, 487 b, 487 c, 487 of the rear side assembly 480.
In addition to the above-described purpose, the d 487 e is disposed at a portion to which a load is applied at the time of fastening and fixing the speaker assembly 450 to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, the respective rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being disposed in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Loads applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when screws are screwed in can prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being broken.

The extending plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state and pressed (see FIG. 125 (a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, 487d are disposed closer to the extension plates 463, 483 than the closest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are provided.
When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c and 4 are screwed into the fastening portions 419 that are inserted into the three through holes 463a and 483a.
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are brought into contact by bringing the 87c, 467d and 487d into contact with each other.
A deformation of 0 can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by 7 d.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467 b and 487 b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions to which the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is configured as the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The zero recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, recessed part 462
, 482 are loaded upward from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467 b and 487 b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portions are formed from the fastening portion 14 e 1 The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed of a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a cheating attempt is made to illegally intrude a wire, a piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424. It can be made easy to control.

In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally intruded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front concave portion 471. In addition to being formed in a box shape sealed except for the opening formed by the rear side recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wire pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire or the like is made to enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the speaker assembly passes through the opening different from the part where it enters It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 to the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, since the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection lines 453 in the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, wires and piano wires The distance between the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 and the like are inserted, can be increased.

Therefore, even if such fraudulent activity is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent activity can be lowered, and it is possible to make it easy to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent benefits.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 124 (a).
It is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R in Vd direction. Figure 124 (a).
And FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connecting line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line to facilitate understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connecting line 453 is omitted. .

As enlarged and illustrated in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side. , The outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b)
The upper surface has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side and the inner side surface 461H
It is shaped to fit with i in the assembled state. Thereby, the working efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives an compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib 487c toward the rib 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M is formed to have a short front-rear dimension as compared with the proximal main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is largely secured in a bulging manner in the front-rear direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained by the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easy to hear a deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) is a front assembly 46 taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124 (a).
124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. 125 (b) is a front assembly 460 at the CXXVb-CXXVb line in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of side assembly 480, upper frame member 410, body frame 14a, and top board member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted into 483 a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, whereby the front assembly 460 is assembled.
The rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are parts that sandwich the body assembly 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extending plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419 b is fastened to the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position coinciding with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419 b and the fastening portion 14 e 1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (by passing through without being in contact with the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction), the front assembly 460
And it is comprised as a part which fastens the upper side frame member 410 and the upper side board member 14e, without passing through the rear side assembly 480.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together at the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411 is the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (a portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). In the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is a recessed portion 462,
It is disposed inside of 482 (the part extending to the front side is disposed inside).

In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are disposed in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the other speaker assembly 450R,
The conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed at 450 L is avoided, and the sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without causing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 and the upper side plate member 14e of the rear assembly 480 are abutted against each other at the top of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected to the front side in a portion opposite to the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 The projecting portion abuts on the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not in contact (sticking) with the upper side plate member 14 e over the entire surface, and in particular, is in contact with the upper side plate member 14 e in line contact at the lower end.

In this case, a portion which is provided so as to protrude from the upper side plate member 14 e and abuts on the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and in contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin)
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, or a member formed of an ebony may be disposed, or a glass member is disposed. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when disposing a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel or the like. By using these metals, it is possible to make the sound thick.

Moreover, it is desirable that it is a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) etc. correspond. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, with regard to the shape, it may be provided in the form of a long plate, may be provided in the form of spikes, or may be provided in the form of dotted dots. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the part that functions as the above-described insulator is the speaker assembly 45
It is not limited to the back of the lower end of 0. For example, the back of the top end of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, or the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
It may be 50 sides or front.

For example, when arranging on the back of the upper end, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by In this case, a separate locking member for positioning a member functioning as an insulator can be dispensed with, and it can function as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e and an insulator depending on the degree of tightening of a screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The acoustic effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the member to be processed.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 can be inserted into the connection hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) or the connection hole 469 thereof.
And a screw inserted through the through hole provided on the opposite side of the connection hole 469 in the left-right direction and the through hole provided in the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right positions where the through hole is provided. Thus, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, with regard to fixing to the upper side plate member 14 e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 41 is
0 is a fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e other than the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (see FIG. 1).
A screw that is inserted from the rear surface side at 00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)), and fastening and fixing are performed. As described above, in fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, a load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Moreover, the same thing as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above,
The same can be said of the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the main body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the main body frame 14a made of metal can be functioned as an insulator, and in the same manner as the contents described above, the material and the relationship of contact can be designed.

FIG. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . Note that Figure 127.
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state in which the game board 13 is removed is illustrated.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corner portions of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support 12a and the left end rear support 12b are separated in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end of the game board 13. It is arranged.

The left end front supporting portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 which is inclined rearward as it goes leftward from the right end portion of the rear end surface disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 is formed extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

The outer end of the left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be abuttable with the back surface of the game board 13 and formed in a cup shape with an open central portion. . The left rear end support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is disposed in a posture in which the elastic support portion 12b1 protrudes to the front side as it goes leftward in the state of the natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 cooperates with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
The tapered shape is formed to expand to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is disposed in the left-right direction. Thereby, the workability at the time of an operator assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are the same as CXXVIIIa-CXXV in FIG. 127 (b).
129 (a) and 129 (b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support apparatus 600 and the game board 13. FIG. It is. In FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 where the left end is started to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. In FIGS. 128 (b) and 129 (a), the game board 13 immediately before the completion of assembly in the inner frame 12 is illustrated, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly in the inner frame 12 is completed. It is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
The configuration of part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 into the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after aligning the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13
The left end of the slider is slid between the left front support 12a and the left rear support 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid in the attitude in which it is rotated with respect to the inner frame 12 about an axis directed in the vertical direction. Although there is a possibility that the part 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is formed on the left front support 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support 12b interfere with each other
Can be reduced. This can improve the workability.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 with the back side edge of 1 and the contact position of the front face of the game board 13 as an axis. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support 12b1 to the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
Regulated by 2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 90)
Guide rib 1 supporting the game board 13 from below and cutting off the front upper end as an inclined surface
A plurality of 2c1 is provided across the left and right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Each time the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 sequentially from the left side . Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 ° as an angle larger than the after-inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010 pachinko machine. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction by the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
The workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without being inclined to the rear slope of 013 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed to be the same as the inclination angle after the installation of the game arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 runs
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the gaming board 13 is sandwiched between the board supporting devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state described later, and the rear face of the gaming board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, the front claw member 620 for rotation and the front claw member for restriction 630 (a part disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since it retract | saves from the approach path | pass of (1), the workability of the assembly | attachment operation | work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to the fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower surface supporting devices 600 change in state almost simultaneously.

The gaming board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c to be restricted in the vertical position. Figure 129 (a
And as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the lower end portion of the game board 13 is not in contact with the lower surface of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600 (the game board 13 is And the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached as the state of the panel supporting device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the back side, the game board 13 is rotated with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so that the post-rotation claw member 64 is rotated via the game board 13 according to the principle.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the width dimension of the game board 13 being long, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 into the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has the left end portion, the left front support 12a.
And because it is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end rear support 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board supporting devices 600 is not in the fixed state) Even if it exists, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed back by closing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the panel supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction in which the front frame 14 is pushed to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state in which the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is the support 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the surface supporting device 600, and the lower end is restricted by the support bottom 12c in the vertical position.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is
Is connected to various members disposed on the game board 13 and wires connected to various devices, and is supported by the game board 13 so that the position of the game board 13 can be changed in the surface direction A floating connector 13a and a receiving connector 12d disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower surface support device 600 and connected with a control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like on the rear surface It is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are disposed in an inclined posture in which the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is provided with a panel support device 600 which is disposed in the vicinity of the right corner of the inner frame 12 such that a pair of upper and lower members face each other. In addition, since the thing of the same structure arranges facing each other of a pair of upper and lower panel support apparatus 600, the one panel surface support apparatus 600 is demonstrated, and the description of the other panel support apparatus 600 is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 130 (a) is a front perspective view of the panel support apparatus 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the panel support apparatus 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the panel support apparatus 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the panel support device 600. Note that Figure 130.
In (a) and FIG. 130 (b), a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is illustrated, and in FIG. 131 (a) and FIG. 131 (b), the game board 1 by the board support device 600.
A release state where the fixing of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the panel support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the panel support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the panel support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60.
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in top view, a pre-rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and its rotation A regulated front claw member 630 rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front claw member 620, and a rear side of the front claw member 620 Post-rotation claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620
And 40 are mainly provided.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of the main body plate portion 611 which are disposed opposite to each other. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and arc holes 613 drilled in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the front side of the support hole 612 Plate portion 6 along the arc centering on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11a, and the plate 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is formed of a rod-shaped control rod 615 inserted and fixed to the screw 1a and a screw which is extended in a flange shape from the plate portion 611a to the left and right and is inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)) And a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed thereto.

The support holes 612 are through holes into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member whose end on the insertion proximal side is expanded in diameter, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed, whereby the support hole 612 is formed.
It is fixed to The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotation front claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner and formed in a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line in plate portions 621a opposite to each other on the left and right and axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and in a straight line in upper front corner portions of plate portions 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed;
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 formed penetrating in a straight line on the back side of a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

In addition, when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the front claw member 63 is simultaneously
The second shaft member P62 is inserted through the supported hole 632 of zero, and the third shaft member P63 is a support hole 624.
The third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to each other in the left and right direction, and the long portion 621a1 long in the front and back direction
And a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extending portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1, and the upper edge of the plate portion 621a is connected A connection plate portion 621b to be fixed, a back side extension plate 621c extending downward from the rear end of the connection plate portion 621b by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connection plate portion 621b, and extending Section 621a
A drop back plate 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate 621a from the rear end of the back 2 to the plate 621a on the opposite side, and a drop drop back plate 621d from the lower end of the drop back plate 621d And a front side extending plate 621e which is inclined to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b are at right angles, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the drop back plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear side extending plate 621c is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to be able to abut on the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb abuts in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb
Start to abut.

Thereby, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the play board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated to the worker side. Just before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated to the worker side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and back position of the game board 13. The front side extending plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction to bring the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d into close proximity. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in the direction of causing the lower end portion of the claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611 after rotation.

The restriction front claw member 630 is a main body plate portion 631 formed in a letter shape for side view by bending the sheet metal member at right angles at the corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 oppositely disposed to the left and right A pair of supported holes 632 formed in a straight line through the plate portion 631a and supported by the second shaft member P62 and inclined from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the front side And a curved surface 634 curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a panel support device 600.
Is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when it is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts on the control rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), whereby the free posture change of the control front claw member 630 is restricted.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate 641 that is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view vertical rectangular shape by bending the sheet metal member at right angles in the corner, and is disposed opposite to the left and right of the main body plate 641. From the lower end portion of the front connection plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 formed in a straight line to the movable plate portion 641a and supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a An inclined extension plate 643 which is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

The front connection plate 641b abuts against the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89), and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is at an inclination angle that makes a surface contact with the back of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129A). It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the panel support device 600. FIG. In FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), the process of changing the panel supporting device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Moreover, FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG.
In (b), the arrangement of the multi-function cover member 171 disposed close to the board supporting apparatus 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board supporting apparatus 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the released state of the panel supporting device 600 is as shown in FIG.
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated respectively. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 simply by performing a simple operation of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 back through the game board 13 (third process) The shaft member P63 can be prevented from moving upward than the first shaft member P61. Therefore, after rotation, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the biasing force of the direction in which the regulating front claw member 630 approaches the dropping back plate portion 621d is added by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, in the case where no other external force acts, the front regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. While
When the curved surface 634 of the front regulation claw member 630 abuts on the regulation rod 615, the change in posture of the front regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the panel support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state
20 is inclined on the front side where the extension portion 621a2 is disposed, and the front side of the restricting front claw member 630 rises in a mode of separating from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

Specifically, the control rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
While contacting with a resistance portion 634a intersecting with a circle centered at 62 (FIGS. 134 (a) to 13
5 (a)), the front end of the restricting front claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the rotation front claw member 620. In other words, the restriction front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the front rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed opposite to the regulation rod 615.
When the control rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not contact in the circular direction centering on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the front restriction claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the front restriction claw member 630 The tip end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (FIG. 135 (a) to FIG. 135).
(B)).

Angle range in which the front claw member 630 is raised and operates (from FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a
In the range between), even if a downward load, which is a load in a direction to tilt the front side end of the regulated front claw member 630, is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 at the time of the restriction becomes the posture change (the posture change in the rising direction) facing the downward load, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the restriction front claw member against the downward load Attitude change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the front claw member 620 without the game board 13 being pushed back by the game board 13 coming into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621 c.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, thereby rotating the front claw member 620.
Can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the restricting front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the front rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, in the released state of the panel supporting device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is brought into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630. The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length of the inclined extension plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

Also, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side by the game board 13 coming into contact with the back of the back side extending board 621c, the back side extending board 621c
Friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. Thus, in the state of FIG. 134 (b), the game board 1 is
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) described later applies a load to the game board 13,
It can suppress that the upper end part vicinity of the game board 13 moves to the front side (inclination) by the reaction.

Here, when the front frame member 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the panel supporting device 600, the front claw member 620 is rotated by the load from the front frame 14. When the panel support device 600 reaches the fixed state and the panel support device 600 does not reach the fixed state due to the contact aspect of the multi-function cover member 171 and the restricting front claw member 630 that are provided There may be cases where

The panel supporting device 600 is stabilized at a half angle, and in that state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
Can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 becomes short, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunction installed in the front frame 14 When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 abut on each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. This makes it possible for the clerk who has been closing the front frame 14 to notice that the board supporting device 600 is not in the fixed state.

If this is noticed, the clerk will push the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135A, in the state immediately before the front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the restriction front claw are provided. Depending on the contact aspect of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the panel support 600 will reach a fixed state or the panel support 600 will not reach a fixed state and stabilize at a half angle (exclusively The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can abut on the front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. The regulation front claw member 630 is configured not to be regulated in posture by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the back extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 There is not.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 immediately before the front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the front end of the front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is disposed at a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk can not push the game board 13 slightly, 9
In the case where the front frame 14 is not closed up (when installed in a stable manner), the situation where the front frame 14 is not closed is eliminated, and in this case, the multi-functional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14
If a load is applied to the board, the load can change the board supporting device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the gaming board 13 is disposed on the board supporting device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the gaming board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board supporting device 600 abut (see FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, a downward load is not applied to the front end of the regulation front claw member 630, so that the surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front of the game board 13 abuts against the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board supporting device 600 facing the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. Game board 13 in this state
When it moves (tilts) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the torsion spring NBb given to the rotation front claw member 620 via the claw member 640 after rotation. Is applied as a resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) to be described later applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13 is caused by its reaction.
It is possible to suppress movement (tilting) of the vicinity of the upper end portion of the front side.

Also, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the front claw member 630 is inclined by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite to the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 rotates the front claw member 620 by pushing the hanging back plate 621 d, the first shaft member P61 is centered. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resistance portion 634b abuts against the control rod 615, and the resistance to movement (tilting) to the front side of the game board 13 is increased accordingly.

Thus, from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) to be described later applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves to the front by reaction (tilting). Can be suppressed.

In addition, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed such that the radius centered on the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the portion in contact with the portion to the portion in contact with the control rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

As a result, from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed to the back side by the multi-function cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated, thereby the second shaft member P62.
Is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the control rod 615 separate from each other for only a moment. Therefore, when the resistance given from the regulation rod 615 to the regulation front claw member 630 is reduced only for a moment, the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the drop back plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the panel supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multi-functional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which it separates from the restricting front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 in the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the panel supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. , And then, the board supporting device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be disposed at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back side of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board support device 600 It is made operable without interference (for example, it is possible to change the state from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 only when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is temporarily closed when replacing the board). , Can improve the work efficiency of the worker.

In the case where the panel support device 600 is to be released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633
Is pulled upward in the front direction, and the restriction front claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the control rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the control rod 6 in the rotational direction).
(15) and so it is possible to rotate the front claw member 630 with light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the gaming board 13 is fixed, the gaming board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134A). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the game board 1 is not available.
The upper end surface of the third contact panel 3 abuts on the lower surface of the rear extension plate 621 c of the panel support device 600. As a result, when both of the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state, the possibility of the game board 13 falling to the front side can be eliminated.

In addition, it is possible to perform operation which switches a release state and a fixed state one by one, upper and lower board support apparatus 600. FIG. Here, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support device 600, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back position of the game board 13 deviates vertically. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 operated when the panel support device 600 is brought into the release state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64.
The behavior of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 6 supporting the game board 13 in comparison with the amount for displacing the restriction front claw member 630.
20 and the amount by which the claw member 640 is displaced after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, in the case of displacing the pre-rotation pawl member 630 to such an extent that the pre-regulation pawl member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the degree to which the regulation rod 615 regulates the return), the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and back position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load imposed on the game board 13 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, the same effect is produced. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13)
4 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in the direction to widen the angle between the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is assumed.

Therefore, as compared with the displacement amount of the front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed, so the game board at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the front and back position of 13. Thereby, the game board 1
The load that can be applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the lower panel support device 600 and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are CXXXVI-- of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

Also, in FIG. 136, the release state of the panel support device 600 is, in FIG. 137, the fixation state of the panel support device 600, and in FIG. The rotated state is illustrated in FIG. 139 while the state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed is illustrated, and the thick portion of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line Be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the open / close restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. Note that, for ease of understanding, FIG. 136 and FIG.
In FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, the open / close restricting portion 159 seen in cross section at 37 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the open / close restricting portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting portion 159. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
In the state in which the front frame 14 is detached, it is permitted to close the front frame 14, but in the state in which the game board 13 is disposed, the closing of the front frame 14 is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the panel support device 600 is in a fixed state, when the front frame 14 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the open / close restricting portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, thereby causing interference between the game board 13 and the operation portion back member 155 above the opening / closing restriction part 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, closing the front frame 14 is permitted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front claw member 620 of the surface support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed side by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (FIG.
38), the open / close restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if it is attempted to rotate the front claw member 620 by applying a load directed to the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front claw member 620 is operated by the action of the regulating rod 615. (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the restricting front claw member 630 (FIG. 138)
Since the reaction force becomes excessive when the counterclockwise direction is reversed, the difficulty with a normal load is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is disposed, the lower end on the front side of the game board 13 and the back side extension plate 621c may come in contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes strong.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front claw member 620 of the panel supporting device 600 is brought into a state immediately before the fixing state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closing position (see FIG. 139), And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the front claw member 620 by applying a load in the back direction to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulation rod 615. 138 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front claw member 630 (see FIG. 13).
The counterclockwise direction is not reversed, and the fact that it can be easily pushed in with a normal load is as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing in the front frame 14, the control front claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening / closing control portion 159, and the panel support device 600.
Can be fixed, so that the front frame 14 can be closed.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover members for closing the back surfaces of the ball firing unit 112 a and the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launch unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b).
These are back surface perspective views of the ball | bowl emission unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In FIG. 143 (a), a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened is illustrated, and in FIG. 143 (b), a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then inverted back and forth is illustrated. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a is a base member 710 formed of metal or die cast, and a base member centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state partially covering the front surface of the base 710 (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state opening the front surface of the base member 710 (see FIG.
a) Ball feed device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotally supported pivotally between
And mainly.

The base member 710 is a member for supporting the cover member 721, and is a base member 711 which is engaged with the base member 710 by means of a hook or the like that is elastically deformed and disposed on the front side of the base member 710. , A launch solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a launch rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launch solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the regulation of the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 A plurality of fastening portions 716 which are cylindrically convex on the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a which is bulging out in a straight line from the base member 710 in a cylindrical shape and screwed in for fastening the ball receiving member 731 And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-like portion 722 is inserted at the right corner portion, and a locking portion 7 drilled so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a convex portion 714 convexly provided on the front side in proximity to the right side of the locking portion 713, and an opposing arrangement to the attraction force generation solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A). And the defect determination convex part 715 convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion which covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), and in the closed state of the cover member 721 An opposing flat surface 714a disposed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the opposite side to the opposing flat surface 714a and inclined to the right toward the back surface side The surface 714 b is mainly provided.

When the attraction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generation solenoid 741 while the attachment force of the attraction force solenoid 741 is loosened ( In the state of being floated from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and has a height at which the cover member 721 is restricted.

Therefore, the cover member 721 can be prevented from being closed when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely engaged, and the cover member 721 can not be closed, thereby forming a case where the suction force is applied to the store clerk. It can be noticed that the engagement of the generation solenoid 741 is loosened. Therefore, repair (fastening and fixing the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed before occurrence of a defect of the ball firing unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported on the base member 711;
Switching controlled so as to change state in a restricted state that restricts the flow-down of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a permitted state that allows the flow-down of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to the firing rail 730 And the device 740.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the rear surface side (the front side in the posture in FIG. 143A) is opened from the light transmitting resin material, and the pair is loosely fitted in the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711 The rod portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite side of the rod portion 722, and the ball P at a position displaced toward the rod portion 722 from the hook portion 723
The ball passage opening 724 has a size allowing 8 (see FIG. 144) to pass through and a positional relationship extending slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724 A cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 for supporting the ball guiding arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 and mainly.

The switching device 740 is an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 which rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not a magnetic force is generated, and a sheet metal member engaged with the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and attracted by an attraction force generating solenoid 741 A metal plate 743, a guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and inclined downward as it is separated from the ball passage opening 724; Is extended by an interval that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end
And a regulation overhang portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and is a flow-down plate portion 724 that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a and a rib portion 724b disposed opposite to the flow-down plate portion 724a and extending downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 and inclined downward as the extended front end surface is directed to the back side;
A left inner side surface 724 continuously formed with the left end portion of the flow-down plate portion 724a and having a surface formed along the vertical direction
c, and mainly. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward toward the back and to the right.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclination of the inclined surface 714b Flow down to the back side while shifting to the right along the Therefore, ball P8
Flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in the lateral direction, the cutting metal member 7
Even if the ball 25 is arranged in a projecting manner inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the metal member for cutting 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member extended to be inclined upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball P8 (see FIG. 14).
A ball bearing member 731 is disposed at an interval smaller than the diameter of the reference numeral 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member which is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the direction to be elongated are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long long hole along the direction and for passing a fastening screw
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, the bulging portion 716a is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and directed toward the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), having a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a And a control groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protruding height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be aligned with the fastening portion 716 and the fastening and fixing is selected, the ball receiving member 731 is bulged.
It is possible to slide along the straight line where 6a is bulging, and this allows the ball P8 (FIG.
4) can be adjusted (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P 81 (operation handle 51
The launch intensity when the same rotation (see FIG. 86) is performed can be easily adjusted.
In addition, since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and rolling is performed with a rolling plate portion 730 a extending upward and to the left Mounting plate portions 730 b and 730 c depending from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730 a, and the mounting plate portion 73
The base member 710 is attached to the base member 710 by screws inserted into attachment holes 732 formed in plurality (two in this embodiment) at 0 b and 730 c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided along the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and sounds, vibrations, etc. generated by the contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and a ball P8 (FIG. 146 (b
) And the ball P8 is configured to be in contact with the front and rear two points on the circumferential surface of the peripheral surface to guide the ball P8 upward.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launch unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball feed device 720 in time series. Note that FIG. 144 (a) to FIG.
In (c), the illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a restricted state (the supply of power to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guiding arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When it is, the regulation overhang part 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P8 which has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (the power is supplied to the adsorption force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guiding arm member 742 is lifted), the restriction overhang portion 745 The ball P8 retreats above the ball and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, whereby the ball P8 flows above the guiding inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711 so that the further flow is restricted, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guiding inclined portion 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guiding arm member 742 is returned to the restricted state again, so that the ball P8 on the guiding inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Be done. Thereby, the sphere P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guiding inclined portion 744 and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 is also shown in the state shown in FIG. Flow is regulated. Thus, one ball at a time can be supplied to the firing rail 730. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from the opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17 is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a through hole 725a into which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. Between the lower blade portion 725b having the upper surface and the upper side substantially along the upper surface and the lower blade portion 725b, and the tip thereof forms an acute-angled notch and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b Upper blade 72 extended from the
Mainly equipped with 5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes upward than the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in front view.

The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tacho thread fixed to a ball. Then, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG.
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a front view thereof.
Fig. 147 (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and Fig. 147 (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a when viewed in the direction of arrows CXLV Ib of 46 (a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a is a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 146 and FIG.
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launch unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the sphere P guided to the firing rail 730
8 remains in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)), and current is supplied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, causing the plunger 702 to vigorously expand. The ball P8 is given a firing force, and the ball P8 is shot along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is punched out in a state in which one end of the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved and the yarn Y8 is pulled It is known that cheating is caused by repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening by loosening the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cuttable using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner as to approach the back side to the right (See FIG. 146 (b)).

In this state, when the ball P8 is launched, it passes under the falling plate portion 724a and passes through the firing rail 730.
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling the middle portion of the yarn Y8, the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a. It enters into the lower side of the portion 725c, and enters the incision formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

The end (other end) of the front side of the yarn Y8 is held by the player, and a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unfair act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, a sufficient tensile force may not be applied to the yarn Y8, and there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 may not be cut. In that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the ball receiving portion 146, flows down the ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, regardless of how much load is applied to the yarn Y8. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of cheating in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 can be seen from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, and so on. The configuration of is substantially the same.

In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 is disposed. The rendering operation unit 1000 is configured to have a petal operation device 800, a side substrate 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing / retracting unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advancing / retracting operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancement / retraction operation, that is, an operation of advancing the inward of the display region of the third symbol display device 81; The apparatus includes a plurality of movable members involved in the operation including at least one of the operation of retracting outward of the display area of the symbol display device 81), the petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, And the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive side arm member 910 which is pivoted by the transmission of the drive force of the drive motor 921 through 24 and a drive motor 92 which generates a drive force for driving the drive side arm member 910.
1 and the transmission means 920 comprised of a plurality of gears for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910 and sliding movement in the left and right direction interlocking with the pivoting operation of the drive side arm member 910 A thin plate-like slide plate 930, a thin plate-like second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the opposite side of the drive side arm member 910 And 800 generally includes a long plate-like driven arm member 950.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 153 shows the petal operating device 80.
FIG. 154 is a front view of 0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of a petal operation device 800 taken along line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the entire shape is hidden from other members and not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and a substantially rectangular plate And a substrate disposed on the back of the plate-like portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position closer to the upper right end of the central main body of the support base 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is on the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base 801. It protrudes and the below-mentioned 1st gear 804G (refer to Drawing 156) is being fixed to the tip.

An opening 8 at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central body portion of the support base 801
01P is drilled, disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip end portion is integrally formed. An arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided around the screw insertion portion 801S.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side under the lower side (see FIG. 156).

A decoration member 807 is disposed and fixed on the front side of the support base 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically elongated roughly oval area of the central portion. The decorative member 807 is configured to be divided from a horizontally long upper side portion forming the upper end portion region and a substantially U-shaped lower side portion forming the region below the upper side portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 is formed to extend slightly in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operating device 800 is disposed movably in the vertical direction as described later,
The operation space can be reduced if the support base 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than the left and right long shapes.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are concentrically arranged to overlap at the position of the opening 801P as described later, respectively.
Because they are interlocked (linked) to G, they can be disposed at arbitrary positions as long as they are positions on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and do not interfere with each other, but in this embodiment, The two gears 830G and the third gear 810G are respectively disposed on the right side (see FIG. 156).

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight in the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture slightly inclined to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from drooping downward. it can. Therefore, an increase in the distance between the support base 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801 can be prevented, and the drive side arm member 910 Thus, the driving force can be properly transmitted to the support base 801.

Fig. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and Fig. 156 is an exploded back perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed to simulate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which forms a hibiscus flower in a flowering state as a whole. And a flat plate member 803 on the back side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded back perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape extending in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and is shaped to curve so as to gently expand forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15)
4).

An irregular asperity including a large number of wrinkles is formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge is also irregularly shaped in a front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as one another, and although they have slight differences in asperities and the like, they are formed into approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 are nearly transparent with a specific color (red), and the outer peripheral edge is darkened without forming a boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

In each petal 802, a screw-in portion 802S cylindrically extending rearward and having a screw hole internally is formed integrally at two locations near the outer periphery on the back side of each petal 802 and in the radial center, respectively. There is.

The petals 802 have a rear side portion 80 than the rear side portion 802a disposed on the tip end round shape side (counterclockwise in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b disposed on the side of the front end sharp shape (the clockwise side in the front view, the left side in FIG. 157A) from 2a is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802 b is disposed closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802 a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the back side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the back side 802a is superimposed on the back side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other. The petals 802 are arranged so as to be centered on the tip on the inner circumferential side.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are in the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since it can be in a positional relationship in which b and b are superimposed in front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) in the entire petals 802 between the collecting position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is made remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 have a disc-like (donut-like) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, includes the five petals 8 described above.
They are long plate-like resin members separated from each other and fixed to 02, respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extended in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and the outer peripheral edge portion further extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of screwing parts 803S cylindrically extending rearward and having a screw hole inside are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the short direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screwing portion 803S is formed on the both side walls in the circumferential direction (short side direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with the pair of screwed portions in portions along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearwardly of the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribed with the circumferential surface of the screwed portion 803S. As such, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwing portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, screw insertion holes are internally provided at two places corresponding to the screwed portion 802S of the petal 802, and the petal 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 has a corresponding screw 8 of the petal 802.
The 02S is abutted from the front, and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby the flat members 803 are fixed to the corresponding petals 802 respectively.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate. On the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a front shape in which the same five shape portions continue in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the central portion As shown in FIG. 159, substantially cylindrical front and rear peripheral wall portions 812 and 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in the front and back directions.

Referring back to FIG. In the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, among the five places equally spaced in the circumferential direction, two places adjacent to each other and one middle place among the three places except the two places are cylindrically formed back and forth. From the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S having the screw hole is integrally formed and the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five portions, the positioning boss 81 is formed.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. As one of the purposes of this bulging part, sliding friction may be suppressed, but the details will be described later.

The slit member 810 is provided with a central slit 814 and a both side slit 815 as shown in FIG. The central slits 814 are each formed to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 toward the outside, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
The reference numeral 4 extends in the counterclockwise direction in the front view along the direction D12 which is inclined by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the case of the pachinko machine 8010).

The both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel at a slight distance on both sides of the central slit 814.

As described above, a set of three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 is formed at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) in five places in the circumferential direction. The respective ends of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in a front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the both side slits 815 located at the outermost side in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits It has a shape that is substantially rectangular in the extension direction of the 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is included). The rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803 a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral end of the central slit 814 and the both sides slit 815 Is formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Thus, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 81
It can suppress that the flat plate in which 5 is formed deform | transforms in the circumferential direction or axial direction.

In addition, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since each set includes the directions D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, respectively, the five sets of central slits 814 and the both-sides slits 815 are made to be closer to the inside. , And more closely arranged and formed, the slit member 81 is also
The outer shape of 0 is compact.

In other words, it is assumed that five sets of central slits 814 and both slits 815 have circular openings 811.
When it is arranged to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, as compared to the case where it is arranged to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of In this case, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two-sided slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is disposed on the central slit 814 and the two-sided slit 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin-made member having a long plate-like front shape, in which the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed in a semicircular shape in front view Extending portion, a central portion which is thicker than the effect portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extending portion, and a front face from the center of the slide member 820 It has a guide pin 822 which is convex on the side and is inserted through the central slit 814 in an assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner of projecting from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects with the longitudinal direction at a right angle. And disposed so as to cross both side slits 815.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 in the slit member 810
The screwing portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the screwing portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes slightly rearward of the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, washer-equipped screws (washer head screws) 824 are respectively inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and screwed into and fixed to the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803.

Thereby, the slide member 820 interposes the slit member 810 between the flat member 8
It is fixed to the back side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803 almost along the corresponding outer edge of the both side slits 815 in the slit member 810 It is inserted without gap.

Thereby, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is guided by the guide pin 8.
It is regulated by the slide rib 803 a so as to slide in a constant outward direction without turning about the center 22.

160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG.
(A) and FIG. 161 (b) are back perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the fourth gear 880G is not shown. Note that FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotary plate 830 is a resinous disc having a circular pivot opening 831 at the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, on the front side, the rotary plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and is provided with a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall is
It is integrally formed on the rotary plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to close in a slender loop shape in a front view along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of a degree of play. The corner portion at the extension end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to fall off at a corner.

From the position where the guide rail 832 contacts the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831,
It extends in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a substantially intermediate direction between the tangent line and the normal to the pivot opening 831 and then arcs in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front more than the intermediate direction. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 side end portion of the pivot opening 831, ie, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge portion of the pivotal support opening 831 at the center side end, is integrally formed with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivotal support opening 831 The front end portion of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 is projected to the front side of the front end portion of the peripheral wall.

Around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced apart from each other in the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to expand spirally from the periphery to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G having teeth is integrally formed on the outer periphery of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 so as to extend rearward as a peripheral wall. The second gear 830G is disposed to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

The rotary plate 830 is attached such that the pivot opening 831 is fitted on the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 projecting backward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174 (c)).

The outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 in the slit member 810 bulges locally at five places as described above, and therefore, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 in a state of low frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is pivotally rotatably supported.

On the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the second gear 830G is further provided.
The third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed, and is arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

In the center of the third gear 810G, a circular pivot opening 810a is bored, and the pivot opening 81
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to three screwing parts 813S in the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and at positions corresponding to two positioning bosses 813a. Positioning holes 810c are respectively drilled.

The third gear 810G is disposed on the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810, and the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810
On the other hand, the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and the screw (not shown) is screwed through the screw insertion hole 810b (FIG. 1).
56) fixed by screwing.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off and the rotary plate 830 Is held by the rear side peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be separated.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, from the front side of the slit member 810, a central axis rotating device 850 is disposed. The central axis rotating device 850 mainly includes a central axial member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 loosely fitted rotatably about the central axial member 851. Prepare for

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of central axis rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.
63 is an exploded back perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 has an incompletely cylindrical shaft portion 852 in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen 856 which passes through the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen 856 on the front side of the flange 855, a front screwing portion 857 having a screw hole in the inside on two sides sandwiching the lumen 856, and the front screwing portion 857 to the lumen 856 side A holding portion 858 which is bored toward the rear side in a shape having a spot facing at the misaligned position, and two supporting protrusions 859 extending slightly short in a cylindrical shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screwing portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen 856 extends cylindrically along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing locations, and extends further rearward than the rear end of the shaft 852 and internally A rear screwing portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a rear end of the circumferential wall of the shaft portion 852 at an equal distance from the rear screw insertion portions 853 so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is provided on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Screw insertion holes 862 and positioning holes 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning bosses 854 of the central shaft member 851.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED substrate 861 for positioning, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED substrate 861.
By screwing into the front screwing portion 857 of 51, the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, an insertion hole 864 is bored in the LED substrate 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 so that the screwed portion 869 of the central decoration member 868 can be fitted therein.

On the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, as shown in FIG. 162, one point in the center and a large number of places arranged concentrically at equal intervals on multiple concentric circles extending around this one point, LE
Each D865 is fixed in position and emits light forward.

Horizontally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at many places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side and rear side of the LED board 861, and light is emitted outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861 It is supposed to The horizontally oriented LEDs 866 on the front side of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 toward the rear.

A central decoration member 868 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a nearly transparent resin material having a specific color (yellow), extends from the long plate-like base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and forms a screw hole in which a screw can be screwed in the central portion And a pair of threaded portions 869.

The screwing portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 at the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D substrate 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing in the screwing portion 869 that has passed through from the front side and screwing the screwing portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855. Thus, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The loose fitting device 880 is coaxial with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface whose inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and its small diameter cylindrical member 881 And a large diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and these small diameter cylindrical members 881 and the large diameter It mainly includes a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a small diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large diameter cylindrical member 882, and a main cylindrical member 883 rotatably fitted loosely with each other.

The main cylindrical member 883 has cylindrical portions extending in the front and back directions respectively at two of one of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion, and a screwing portion 883S having a screw hole inside is integrally formed. The positioning boss 883a is extended from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 883S is not formed out of the above-mentioned four places.

The main cylindrical member 8 is formed at four locations corresponding to the screwing portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
83 is configured to bulge outward. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in the form of a rib in the outer radial direction with a projecting length similar to that of the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at corresponding four circumferential intermediate positions. Sliding rib 88 extending over the
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the cylindrical body 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861, and the decorative member 884 covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter and has a bottom-off cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastening portion and abuts from the back side to the flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 , Is disposed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in the case of the pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, whereby the side surfaces are mirror-like. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the horizontally oriented LED 866 disposed on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 in the vicinity of the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effect.

The decoration member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED substrate 861. The decoration member 884 forms a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red color) A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having elasticity, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material which constitutes a disk shape having a peripheral wall rising to the back side on the back side An opening 885 is drilled in the central portion in a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The thus configured main cylindrical member 883 is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivoting opening 831 is arranged concentrically.
A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported on and intermeshing with the support base 801 is engaged.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is an intermediate gear 8
It rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G through 08.

In the center of the fourth gear 880G, a circular pivot opening 880a is bored, and the pivot opening 88
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at the positions corresponding to the two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883 and positioning holes 880c are formed at the positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central axis rotating device 850, and the positioning boss for the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 Positioning is performed by inserting the 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is screwed through the screw insertion hole 880b (see FIG. 16).
3) It fixes by screwing.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and the slit The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to be separated.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side than the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plates 880d, five plates of the same shape are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Detection arc plate 880d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C which is accommodated in 1D (see FIG. 152) and disposed so as to be able to detect a member passing through the doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any position, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0 d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7
Detection of 2 ° can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 in which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, the respective rear ends project slightly rearward from the pivoting opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 which protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is a support base 801
(Refer to FIG. 152) is inserted into the positioning notch (not shown) in the positioning notch (not shown) and positioned, and the rear side screwing portion 853 similarly projecting backward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by inserting the screw into the insertion hole and fixing the screw.

At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wire is drawn rearward through the lumen 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above attachment structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to project forward with respect to the support base 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.
The rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall 8 of the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
It is attached so that 12 may fit outside.

At this time, at the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 at eight places along the circumferential direction, screwed portions 883 S,
Since the positioning bosses 883a and the sliding ribs 883b locally bulge, they contact the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 in a line, rather than in a plane, thereby the slit member 810 The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 in a state of low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally rotatably supported in a smooth manner.

164 shows the petal operating device 800, the drive side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
FIG. 165 is a rear perspective view of 0, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of a back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advances and retracts) by being given a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description of FIG. 164 and thereafter, FIGS.
Refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest inside of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and in the lower left corner in front view A support column 1110 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side, and a gear housing portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed above the support column 1110 so as to be accommodated from the front side; Rail fixing portion 1130 disposed in the
And a support long hole 1140 which is formed as a long hole which is inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the opposite side to the left and right of the support column 1110 across the support post 1110.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion rotatably supporting the drive side arm member 910, and
In the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front side end, there are a pair of holes disposed on the left and right sides, and a screw-in portion 1111 formed to be able to screw a screw And a positioning boss 1112 extended to the

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive side arm member 910 is constituted of a long rod-like main body member bent in a rear view shape, and is circularly drilled in the front and rear direction at one end and supported A rotating shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110, a connecting projection 912 which is convexly provided in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member, The petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member and the transmission long hole 913 which is bored in the form of a straight long hole from the bending point of the main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side The supporting portion 914 is mainly provided.

The driving side arm member 910 has a rotation of an arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 internally fitted in the transmission long hole 913, and a flange portion 926 projecting radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction, it pivots around the support column 1110.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a concave portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed, and is constituted by three circular concave portions arranged continuously while being slightly crossed, and is disposed at the left end side and housing the motor gear 922 A first accommodating portion 1121 and a second accommodating portion 11 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 in which an arm gear 924 disposed opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and engaged with the driving side arm member 910 is accommodated.
3 and mainly.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports the operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) supported so that a plurality of metal plates are stacked so as to slide up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted and a positioning boss 1132 which is engaged with the operation rail 1000R to position the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line.
Due to the rigidity of the operation rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operation device 800 is maintained constant.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is disposed so as to be lowered toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° in a front view, It has an extending wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-like main body member formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view, and is convexly provided in a cylindrical shape to the back side at one end. A supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 for supporting the petal operation device 800 at the other end are mainly included.

The supported convex portion 951 has a cylindrical collar loosely fitted, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is internally fitted in the support long hole 1140 Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

166 is an exploded front perspective view of back plate 1100, side substrate 1000S, and second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the longitudinal direction in the form of long holes extending laterally and slidably on the lateral base 1000S so as to be laterally movable. It is connected with the connection convex part 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by the base end side long hole 932 drilled in the front and rear direction in the form of a long hole extending in the vertical direction disposed on the left end side and disposed on the right end side It is connected with the 2nd effect member 940 by the tip side penetration hole 933 drilled in the front and back direction.

The base end long hole 932 is extended vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a formed along the locus of rotation of the connecting projection 912 about the support column 1110 at the upper end portion and the stopping portion 932a And displacing portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side in a front view of the back plate 1100, and a screwed portion 1151 capable of screwing a screw at its tip A plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the support post 1150 having a fastening plate 1001S disposed at a position corresponding to the support post 1150 and having an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; In the positional relationship (3 locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported long holes 931, a support convex portion 1002S convexly formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and circularly drilled in the front-rear direction in the front right corner Together with a shaft support hole 1003S for rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, and an arc concave portion 1004S recessed in an arc shape of the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S Same center as Ridge 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the arc shape
And mainly.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar is supported from the tip end of the support convex portion 1002S.
And a portion for supporting the slide plate 930 so that the slide plate 930 can be slidably moved by screwing in a screw for retaining from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S. Ru.

The axial support hole 1003S is a circular hole rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are disposed for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. Part of the In addition, although the convex streak portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at the regular position, the convex streak portion 1005S is formed with a convex height that can be abut when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. Be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which a lower end portion is divided into two and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft support portion 941 and on the back side at the front right corner portion A shaft-supported column 941 which is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion which is disposed close to the shaft-supported column 941 and which protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back Part 942,
Mainly to

The shaft support column portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller in outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw is screwed into the tip An insertion portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). Shaft support hole 1003 with the collar supported by the supported column 941
The cover member 94 is inserted by screwing the screw into the screwing portion 941a in a state where the disc-shaped cover member 945 whose outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the pivot support hole 1003S is disposed at the tip end when inserted into S
5 plays the role of retention. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar at the distal end. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 interlock with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to be bent, the auxiliary convex portion 942 abuts on the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screwing portions 1161 configured to be able to screw a screw when fastening a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921.
A detection sensor 1162 for detecting a flange portion 926 projecting radially outward from the arm gear 924 in a range of a predetermined angle, and a collar for guiding a coil spring SP8 generating an urging force in a lifting direction of the petal operating device 800 The shaft support 1163 supported, the cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164
A wiring stopping portion 1165 which is concealed in a front view at 00 C and a screwing portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000 C is screwed in are mainly included.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwed portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is disposed at a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the movement end in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use,
Even when the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing,
The screwing portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second effect member 940.

As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixed to the side substrate 1000S and the back plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged in the front and rear direction and are fixed to each other. 1000C, side substrate 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. By this, even in the case of moving a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side substrate 1000S. Can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevation operation of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing and retracting operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operating device 800, the advancing and retracting operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100.
71 and FIG. 173 are back views of the petal operating device 800 and the advancing and retracting operation unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). Is illustrated in FIG. 172 and FIG. 173 in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the connection position of the stopping portion 932a of the proximal long hole 932 and the displacement portion 932b.
Is illustrated on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. It extends in a tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 with a reference point 151) as a base point. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting projection 9 is
Since only the position 25 is displaced, and the drive side arm member 910 has a range (a range in which it makes a free rotation) to maintain the posture, the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, in the range of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, as the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 interlock, visual recognition is made as if the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 interlock. It can be done.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 in such a manner that the second effect member 940 projects to the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, it is as if the second effect member 940 is the petal operation device 8
It can be viewed as operating following 00.

Next, the collecting and dispersing operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (b).
FIG. 176 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted and FIG. 176 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 8 is a front view of a rotary plate 810 and a rotary plate 830.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 177 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
Fig. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and Fig. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (b).
178 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178 (d) is a slit member FIG. 8 is a front view of a rotary plate 810 and a rotary plate 830.

Fig. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and Fig. 179 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
Fig. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and Fig. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation to be at the lowermost position, from the initial position (consolidated position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, FIGS.
The expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 through the expansion position shown in FIG. 178, and the rotational operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position. The operation (third operation) is performed to return to the initial position (collection position).

In the initial position (collection position), as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) has a central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
Located at the inner end (the end at the side of the circular opening 811) of 4 and, as a result, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, five petals 802 are the most concentrated at the central decoration member 868 of the central portion. In position, it is in a consolidating state that constitutes a hibiscus flowering state as a whole.

When the petal 802 is in the initial position (collection position) as described above, the central motor 804
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked therewith to rotate the rotary plate 83.
As indicated by an arrow A10, 0 is rotationally driven clockwise in the rear view.

At this time, as described above, the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so the torque around the front peripheral wall portion 812 easily with small torque. It can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably externally fitted to the large diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, while the third gear 810G is interposed as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so as not to be able to rotate with a torque that is small enough to cause the above-mentioned rotating plate 830 to move initially.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, the rotating plate 8 is
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), on its front side, the guide rail 832 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in such a direction as to be pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is a slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 is linearly guided from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814 so that the slide pin 823 is moved.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832 to apply some torque to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and therefore While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 is the central slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It moves linearly along 14 along the outside.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals spread radially outward from the collecting position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
Ten central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as described above, as shown in FIG. Although a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively fast due to the inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, while the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the spreading operation of the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 radially extends along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in a front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed The decline is all the more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rails 832 extend from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the center as shown in FIG. After this, it extends outward while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to expand outward as a whole by the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 is thus inclined in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rails 832
Is curved toward the clockwise side in a front view more than the direction D15.
Both the reduction of the load on the as well as the reduction of the moving speed become more pronounced.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, while the guide is relatively In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining to the clockwise side in a front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is grooved by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is less risk of deviation, and therefore the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while the load on the slide pin 823 is increased. Is configured.

As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission while the central slit 8 is maintained.
In the configuration, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased at 14 so that the roles are divided.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 and FIG.
When it reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit in 4 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position and are fully open, and the expansion operation is completed.

In the fully-opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially so that they are continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in a front view. The petals 802 are arranged on the As a result, as compared with the case where only the decoration member 884 is visually recognized by the decoration member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is a little larger (Fig. 178 (b)).

Thus, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 and can not move further outside, the slide pin 823 is
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 prevents the rotary plate 830 from further rotating in the same direction as before.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the widening operation is finished.

After completion of the spreading operation, rotational power in the same direction is transmitted from the central motor 804 to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member In response to the damping by the oil damper 805, the motor 810, together with the rotary plate 830, starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d). Thus, after the spreading operation, the petals 802 rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in a fully open state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expansion operation, the operation from the expansion operation to the rotation operation will be continued immediately. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decoration member 884 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Therefore, compared to the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the decoration member 8 is
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, it is possible to make the rotation speed of the petal 802 appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After the above-mentioned rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is moved by the central motor 804 in the reverse direction,
When rotating in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), only the rotary plate 830 is first shown in FIG. 179 (while the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held stopped). As shown by the arrow A15 in b), it is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, whereby a concentration operation in the reverse direction to the above-described expansion operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit at the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and together with this, five sets of petals 802 from the fully open position to the central decoration member 868 of the central portion. Then, it returns to the collecting position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the collecting state, and the collecting operation is finished.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without stopping it or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Again, the central motor 804 further operates the first gear 804.
When G is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates in a front view clockwise direction in the assembled state.

When the petal 802 rotates clockwise in a front view in the assembled state as shown by arrow A16, the decoration member 884 is in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed in front view) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, compared to the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the decoration member 8 is
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, it is possible to make the rotation speed of the petal 802 appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this concentration operation to the rotation operation as well, by controlling the central motor 804,
It is possible to stop and shift at a later time, or to shift immediately and continuously.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801 c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-like ball passage portion 145 closed with walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. However, the passage forming in the ninth embodiment The unit 9140 is notched 9145 in the wall forming the far ball passage 9145
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145 b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the far ball passage portion 9145, a lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 9145 and a front portion. The upper / lower positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the far ball passage portion 9145 has a notch 9145 b recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side at the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped passage SL2 . The sheet metal member 9150 is provided with a thin plate-like thin blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-like portion 152 is bent toward the front side in a manner covering the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145 b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL 2,
The depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the ball.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) which is provided on the back surface side from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the yarn Y8 through the ball ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area to obtain an illegal profit. , And is disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the far ball passage 9145. Here, possible frauds will be described.

Referring back to FIG. As described above, the ball launch unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
In order to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball, a cutting metal member 725 is disposed. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by using the momentum of the ball's firing, but the yarn Y8 is broken if the momentum of the firing is weak. Without it, a ball might be fired.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the ball receiving portion 146, passes through the ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering that the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the yarn Y8
In the state where the ball P8 is guided to the ball receiving port 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Even if punched out, the yarn Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut off the yarn Y8. The ball P8, which has been fired in advance, is a ball passage part 1
After passing through 45, it is discharged to the front of the player and stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a wrongdoer can pull or loosen the yarn Y8 by holding the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 is used as a winning opening. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and it is possible to obtain an illegal benefit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when performing fraudulent action using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends as described above, the thin plate blade in the far ball passage portion 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a person who does wrong acts pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153 to damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the side closer to the front side, that is, on the side to which the yarn Y8 is drawn when pulling the yarn Y8 from the front side, so that the yarn Y8 is disposed inside the cutout 9145b when the yarn Y8 is pulled. And the thin-film blade portion 9153 can be rubbed with the yarn Y8.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the far ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from bending or bending when the thin blade portion 9153 is given a load directed outward of the ball ball passage portion 9145 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, the thin plate blade 915 from the yarn Y8
Most of the load given towards 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the ball P8, so that the ball P8 is prevented from passing the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being broken or chipped by colliding with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the ball ball passage portion 9145 is disposed lower than the lower end portion of the lower door passage portion 9142 on the front door side. In detail, it arrange | positions with an up-and-down difference of a radius Ra grade of a sphere. Thereby, it can be made easy to damage yarn Y8 by a discharge ball. In other words, because the person who cheat is afraid of the detection of cheating,
After holding the ball 8, the ball P8 should be close to the body (eg,
It is easy to carry out the cheating act such as pulling on or loosening the yarn 8 while maintaining it in the pocket of the pants. In that case, the state in which the yarn Y8 extends to the player side along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (abuts on the upper surface) is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is passed through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the winning balls are dispensed, the lower tray 5 from the lower end portion of the front door lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the lower plate 50 is stepped while stepping on the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the yarn Y8 (FIG. 1) (See reference), and flow downward through the bottom opening disposed behind the ball removal lever 52. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the rising limit position when splashing), the front door side lower plate Passage 9
A ball discharged from the lower tray 142 to the lower plate 50 can abut on the yarn Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right side is formed. The right inclined surface 9142 a can make it easy to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

By this, before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower plate 50 declines, the yarn Y8
Can point the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can force the ball discharged to the lower plate 50 along the front-rear direction to the right (toward the far ball passage 9145), and therefore, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on yarn Y8 or hit yarn Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower countersink portion 9142 has a ball guide opening 5
The left part of 3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the far ball passage 9145 is the remaining area in the right part of the ball guide opening 53 (left and right of the ball guide opening 53 An area on the order of 1/3 of the width dimension is occupied, and a riding restriction step 9053 a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the riding restriction step 9053a is a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 9142 and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. The left end (left end side) of the lower base near the outlet of the ball passage portion 9145 is connected, and is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the riding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower countersink passage 91
42 and the far ball passage 9145 communicate with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball which has passed through the front door side lower countersink passage portion 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

The width in the vertical direction of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the ball.
Accordingly, it is possible to roll the far ball passage portion 9145 and restrict the ball in contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a to run up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left and right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts in the other direction (direction from right to left). Act as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-like ball passage portion 145 closed with walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage forming in the tenth embodiment The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall forming the far ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from the upper right, and FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from the upper left. In FIG. 186, the passage forming unit 10140 is The state viewed obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the far ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 which is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back surface side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
It has 145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 which extend in the front side in a manner covering the lower side of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the concave direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the concave depth thereof is approximately equal to twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the ball Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is formed in the through hole The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of a front view of the far ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex part 1 which is provided in a convex shape toward the back side from the side of the back side of
It has 4d2. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided in such a manner that the notch 10145c is partially filled (approximately the radius Ra of the ball (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, far ball passage part 101
Since it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 from colliding or colliding with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The protruding tip end 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the rear side as it goes to the far ball receiving port 146 side (closer to the right). Therefore, the width (longitudinal width) of the gap on the back surface side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 in the notch 10145c is equal to that of the passage portion 14
It becomes wider as it is closer to 5a. Thereby, the thin-film blade portion 1 is disposed on the yarn Y8 disposed in the passage portion 145a.
It becomes easy to insert into the gap on the back side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap in which the 0153 and 10154 are disposed.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 The first thin blade portion 10153 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion.
It is extended to the left in a mode inclining slightly upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, the deep recess portion is an acute angle recess portion 1015 having an acute angle.
5 is formed.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is disposed on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 enters the acute-angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8
Can be easily damaged.

In addition, the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side compared to the first thin blade portion 10153, whereby the yarn Y8 can be pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person performing fraud. However, it is easy to get into the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

The plate-like portion continuously provided on the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
Abut against the lower surface of the ball, and is configured to bear the upward load generated from the inside of the ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing the left and right sides at a bending point at which the internal passage of the ball ball passage portion 10145 is bent in the opposite direction. Ru. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left-right reverse direction.

For example, in order to avoid detection of a fraudulent act, a person who performs an illegal act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right reverse direction is given to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and is retained.

As a result, the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 are allowed to stay inside the ball passage portion 10145, and the yarn Y
By lengthening the time during which the game area 8 is exposed to the game area 8, it is possible to speed up the detection of a fraud.

Alternatively, an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided in the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to be bonded to the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that came to the hand of the injustice is cut, the yarn is adhered to the adhesive member disposed in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area Since it is not discharged | emitted from but maintained on the spot, the discovery of the fraud using thread Y8 can be quickened.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (fowl ball) having a weak firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower tray 50 has been described, but the countersunk path forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment It has a far ball receiving port 2164 for receiving. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the countersink passage formation member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and has a circular arc shape similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment from the resin material. Tip member 206 formed and positioned proximate to the ball launch unit 112a
And 2a and a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 of a flowable possible width between the tip member 2062a and the tip member 2062a.

On the downstream side of the gap V11, a far ball passage 2062c is formed which communicates with the far ball inlet 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper bowl passage portion 161. Fool ball passage 2
The 062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare for the return ball prevention member 68 is disposed above it.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper countersink passage portion 161 is moved leftward to the position where the main body side lower countersink passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls dispensed from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied exclusively to the upper tray 17 via the main body side upper tray passage portion 161. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the filling switch (not shown) disposed on the inner side of the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device The dispensing of the ball from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball which has passed through the far ball passage 2062c is
The balls paid out from FIG. 87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, the balls are adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8, and one ball is passed through the far ball passage 2062c, so that the yarn Y8 is formed.
When considering cheating that is to be inserted inside the game area along the far ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 can be produced regardless of the accumulation of the balls of the upper tray 17 by applying the discharge balls to the yarn Y8. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut early.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed in the upper part of the far ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is referred to as appropriate.

The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 by a metal long screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is disposed on the front side.

In detail, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. In the hollow, there is formed a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 which is cylindrically protruded from the back side surface of the guide member 2062b to the front side and in which a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 is formed on the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4, which closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side, is in surface contact with the tip of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
In the state where b1 is in contact, a long screw B11 is formed with a through hole drilled in advance as an attachment hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 at the same position as the through hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in that state, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side in contact with the guide member 2062b conform to the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right face (the face on the front side in FIG. 189)
It is formed as a slope of the same slope as the slope increasing portion 2062 d of 62 b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d is inclined downward to the surface of the guide member 2062b constituting the outer frame of the game area, as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the gradient increasing unit 206
A straight line L11 extended along the surface 2d toward the tip end member 2062a is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip end member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side).

By configuring in this manner, when firing a ball toward the game area, the slope increasing portion 20
Since 62 d is retracted from the path of the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the lower end of the slope increasing portion 2062 d. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball And the possibility of returning to the ball firing unit 112 a side beyond the tip member 2062 a can be reduced.

A side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the closing plate 2062b4 and
An incision 206 which is smaller than the diameter of the ball so that the yarn can enter (in this embodiment, about 2 mm)
It is recessed on the back side to a position where it can form 2b1. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the far ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side with respect to the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d. The notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

As described above, since the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in the front view right side is exposed at the front and back position where the cut 2062b1 is formed, the same as the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment It is possible to cause the yarn Y8 to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of cheating that is performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the cut 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep portion of the cut 2062b1 when a load is applied to pull the both ends (FIG. 190 (FIG. 190 (FIG.
a) see). In that state, since the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing occurs with the long screw B11, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

In the present embodiment, the incision 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the ball passes. This prevents the cut 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the ball to be fired abuts against the outer rail 2062 (vertical lower portion of the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the ball to be fired. It is possible to prevent the influence of the orientation of the ball and the like.

In addition, a person who performs an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the far ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 projecting to the player side (the ball P8 is fixed Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side (see FIG. 182) to the front side, the yarn Y8 comes close to the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player. Therefore, arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c as compared to the case where the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

In a hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button type switch SW11 provided with a detection portion protruding downward is disposed. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load that is extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility of the button type switch SW11 interfering with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, O.
It is arranged to be able to switch N-OFF.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the far ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the weight 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
In the state shown in FIG. 190 (b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a is shown in FIG. 190 (b).
The open / close portion 68a1 side is inclined toward the far ball passage 2062c. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), it is illustrated that the path of the yarn Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference and the button type switch SW11 is ON, and in FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is made OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives a resistance enough to hold the ball passing through the ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and as shown in FIG. 190 (b), even if the width of the far ball passage 2062c is narrowed by the tilting of the opening / closing part 68a1, if the ball flows away, the figure immediately Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the ball passage 20 is next
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) can be restored by the timing at which the ball is guided to 62c (the shortest time after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, for an object which does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object which advances while filling a passage like an endoscope, the return ball preventing member 68 provides a large resistance. This is a structure as a measure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope causes the far ball passage 2062c to travel in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere inside the game area (for example, You bend a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or take out the laser from the tip Cutting nails etc.) cheating is considered.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the far ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that intrudes illegally is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When advancing the far ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball, the tip of a device such as an endoscope moves the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 while discharging it in this embodiment. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state where the weight 68a2 is removed by the tip of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the tip of the endoscope The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
It will be maintained in a state where 2 is pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to exclude the opening and closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip of the endoscope from advancing further behind.

Here, in the case where the endoscope is forced to advance and the gate member 68a is broken and entered inside, it is not possible to prevent the fraud in this state. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is
By controlling the alarm to sound when maintained for a predetermined time with 1 being in the OFF state, it is possible to detect fraud early.

In addition, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button type switch SW11
Since it is N (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period in which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the delivery of the ball from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the ball ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball preventing member 68
By arranging the above, it is possible to replace the ball promptly when the return ball preventing member 68 disposed on the game board 13 is broken or bent by long-term use. Thereby, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is merely purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage place can be omitted. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

In addition, when the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and replaced, whether or not the effect of preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent action is exhibited depends on the degree of breakage of the return ball prevention member 68 , From the person who misconducts, it does not know whether or not the exchange has been made, and
By not knowing the extent of the damage, even if it has been replaced, the deterrence of fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the collecting position or the full opening position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanding position. Configured in an aspect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting apparatus 2880 in a twelfth embodiment. Figure 192.
As shown in the drawing, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the rear end outer edge in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
And 887 and a restricting portion 2888 which protrudes from the extended end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. A loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is a loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
There is only a difference in the back cover 2886 in comparison with 80, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position (intermediate position) between the back side portion 802 a and the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802. That is, although the restricting portion 2888 can be in contact with the front side portion 802b, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position incapable of coming into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are disposed. However, the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 may be dispersed at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operation device 2800, and FIG.
4 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. In FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in time series, and FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b).
The state of the same point is illustrated in FIG.

In FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the both-sides slit 815 has a screwing portion on the other side centering on the screw insertion portion 803H on the surface facing each other. An inclined surface 2803T inclined in a manner to be away from 2803S is provided.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30 degrees with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed to be inclined. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the petal 802 receives the load In order to change the attitude.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815) illustrated in FIG. From the center slit 814 as shown in FIG. 194 (b)
And, it is possible to change the posture to the inclined posture inclined with respect to the both side slits 815. Petal 8
In 02, a posture change occurs as much as possible.

As described above, the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes, and the restricting portion 28
While the load from 88 is received, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 is such that the slide rib 803a having a small width only abuts on the both-side slits 815, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a as the outer inner wall with respect to the both side slits 815 and the inclined surface 280 as the inner inner wall.
Since 3T is respectively abutted (pressed), frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in the frictional resistance becomes remarkable. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803 T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-sides slit 815 from both directions in the short side direction of the both-sides slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815, thereby increasing the resistance to movement in the longitudinal direction.
Slide pin 823 without waiting for 20 to reach the end of slit 814, 815
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made greater than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal position and the inclined position). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the sliding resistance 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by shaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG.
Start rotating counterclockwise in front view. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied from the restricting portion 2888 to the petals 802 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. FIG. Note that in FIG. 195, FIG.
A state after rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues rotating in the same direction from the state of b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise direction in front view) opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from slide pin 823 to rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is oil damper 805 (see FIG.
Because it exceeds the braking force (see FIG. 156), the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the position during expansion.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. FIG. In FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the spread position to the collecting position is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petal 802 and the slide member 2820 is returned to the normal posture.

Furthermore, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830. The rotational movement of 802 is settled, and the petals 802 slide toward the collecting position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform an operation of rotating the petals 802 at the position during expansion and thereafter returning them to the collecting position.

Although the expansion operation is performed at the position where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 abuts against the regulating portion 2888, if the petal 802 is rotated by a small angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front) Since the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and can be rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

In addition, as the arrangement of the regulation portion 2888, the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 at the collecting position or the full opening position, or the petals 802 even if they abut against the petals 802 rotating at the full opening position.
By setting the position so that it can slip through the restricting portion 2888 by slightly changing its position and setting it to be able to receive the load, the restricting portion 2888 is prevented from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the rendering device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulation portion 2888, the petal 802 is provided.
When it spreads, it can be used as a mark about whether it passes a position close to a star-shaped pattern or a distant position, and the petal 802 spreads to its maximum and the rotational motion is different in its perspective. It is possible to make a difference as to whether the rotation operation is performed by the expansion or the partial expansion.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation differs depending on the degree of expansion at the time of rotation, the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petal 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as an effect part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as a part of rendering device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the back cover 886 in a front view. In this case, there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, so the degree of freedom in design of the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

In the fully open position, the petal 802 may abut on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture as a rendering effect (for example, a rendering that suggests the degree of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be communicated to the player because the petal 802 is simply rotating or it is rotating while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight posture change (with the gills). .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position, but
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change posture changes. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, it is possible to change the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture in a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the slit member 810 is rotated together with the rotary plate 830 regardless of the rotational direction of the rotary plate 830 at the spread position, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates with the rotation plate 830 and the case where the rotation plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is illustrated in time series. Also,
In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the rotary plate 83 is shown.
The arrangement and shape of the zero guide rails 832 are illustrated in phantom lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as that of the 12th embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together with the resistance which is higher than the resistance, the description is omitted here.

Further, in FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 which receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted in the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). And, in the present embodiment, additional concave portions 3814 a, 3815 a, 3815 on the side to receive the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is provided on the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Among the walls extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a which is recessed in a manner to widen the width and the both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view, the clockwise side The radial direction of the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in a clockwise direction concave portion concaved in a manner to widen the width of the both side slits 815 in the wall portion of Of the wall portions extending along the two side slits 81 in the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view
And a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b which is recessed in such a manner as to extend the width in the short direction 5 of 5.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).
It is disposed opposite to the three slide ribs 803a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is a slide member 2820.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position where it is disposed facing the guide pin 822 of FIG.
8 (a) is continuously formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is a flat plate member 28.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03 (
FIG. 198 (a) is continuously formed to the lower side.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length greater than that of the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotary plate 830 of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the rotary plate 830
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the slide rib 803a at the right end enters the clockwise recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198 (b)).

Thereby, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the both side slits 815 and the flat member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 contact portions between the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 and the slit member It rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the 3810 as the fulcrum, as the fulcrum between the part and the 3810 (Fig. 199 (a) and 199 (b)).
)reference).

The central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and thus the slide member 2820 and the flat member 28 described above are used.
Abutment between the guide pin 822 and the central recess 3814a during rotation of the 03, and the screwed portion 280
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise recess 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are watched with a recessed depth such that the rotating tip portion (left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the central slit 814 and the both-sides slit 815 during the rotation described above. The rotation side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to slit member 3810 through slide member 2820 and flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between slide member 2820 and slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied from oil damper 805 to slit member 3810 . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal When the radial center slide rib 803a accommodated in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts on the wall portion of the both slits 815, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum Rotate counterclockwise. Thus, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a
Is moved in the counterclockwise direction in a front view than the concave base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
Since the rotation plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved radially to the center side.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 is rotated in accordance with the rotation plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830; The position of the slit member 3810 can be switched by independently rotating the rotating plate 830.

As a result, the petal 802 (see FIG. 193A) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 can be operated not to be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b ), And the flat plate member 280 before returning the changed posture.
3 and the rotation operation of the petal 802 (refer to FIG. 193 (a)) to be fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotation operation to rotate with the slit member 3810) (FIGS. 195 and 196)
(A) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. a) See, by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in a front view, the attitudes of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b))
. That is, the rotation operation (rotation operation to rotate along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (refer to FIG. 193A) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is returned It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), the rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or attitude)
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are concentrated from the flat plate member 2803 and the position of the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 matched with the arbitrary state (phase or posture) by rotating clockwise from the front. It can start moving toward the position.
Thus, the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 1).
After the rotational movement (see FIG. 195) is made during the expansion (see FIG. 198), various arrangements of the petals 802 are performed at the time of concentration operation toward the collecting position (see FIG. 197). Can be diversified, so that the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200 to FIG. Although the case where the curved surface which comprises the front side part of lower frame member 320 was formed from the plate without an opening was explained by a 1st embodiment, operation device 8300 in a 13th embodiment is lower frame member 8320.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 200 and 202 (a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) shows the second tilting device 310. A state in the middle of changing from the 1 state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment has the lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 is not described, and the other configurations are substantially described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion which is disposed to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction. And the inclination of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 with a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in the direction along the plane of the bottom plate portion 321 at right and left of the vibrating device 5400. And a pair of second through holes 8326b in which the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 are connected at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes having a vertically long rectangular cross section in front view And a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c are for the purpose of facilitating the passage of liquids such as drinking water described above and for the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300 or meaningless by the interested player, the tilting device 310 and the upper frame Member 33
It may be fitted in gaps V13 and V14 between zero and zero.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilt device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilt device 310.
By this, while the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, the gap V13
, V14 is likely to be inserted with foreign matter.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the ring member BR1 (in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end)
14 (b)), that is, since the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the longitudinal direction, It is configured to be easily displaced (deformed) laterally in the vicinity of the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) may be, for example, a positional deviation using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between the members, or a positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member (Deformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 with the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to insert a coin-like foreign object (for example, 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, the left). If the gap V13, which can be the other (for example, the right side), is the tilting device 310 during normal use
Gap V1 of a size obtained by adding the gap V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the
3 and can be of a size that allows insertion of coin-like foreign objects.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to half or less (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin) of the thickness of the coin-like foreign substance If not, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right, a coin-like foreign object may be inserted.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also the tilting device 3 using the play in the vicinity of the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by applying a load in the back direction to the position 10 (deformation), coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, when the tilting device 310 is tilted in a state where a coin-like foreign object is inserted into the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-like foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to narrow toward the left and right inside toward the upper and lower centers, they easily fit the player's fingers. And a coin-like foreign object fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. Downward load from the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-like foreign substance and the protective lens member 311i are rubbed, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may cause an adverse effect on the light emission effect.

In the first place, when a coin-shaped foreign object is caught internally, and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect can not be performed by the operation device 8300, and thus the gap V13,
If it is detected that a coin-like foreign object is inserted in V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately, but in the state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 is removed to remove the coin-like foreign object. I needed to disassemble it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-like foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 3 is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrows CCIIIb in 3 (a), and FIG.
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (d) is a diagram of FIG. 203 (a).
A partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 at line CCIIId-CCIIId) of
Drawing 203 (e) is a sectional view of operation device 8300 in the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of Drawing 203 (a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right direction center as the left-right direction center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibration device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of FIG. 58). Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is an extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
It is disposed below the upper surface of the reference). Therefore, when the coin-like foreign object inserted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right as viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) Tilting device 3 by being curved and formed towards
In the first state of 10, the slope D81 that slopes downward to the left and right center, and the tilting device 310
The coin-like foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) which is inclined downward toward the front side due to the inclination.

This makes it possible to minimize the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a while easily removing the coin-like foreign matter, so that the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily secured compared to the case where the first through holes 8326a need to be widely spread to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is larger than the size of the object assumed as the coin-like foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 m.
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The ball shell 313a is an LED device 341f
It is a portion that transmits light emitted from (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the ball shell 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 continuously provided on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (members subjected to mirror-work are fixed), The light having passed through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light which can be seen by the player through the ball shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is brought into the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the light amount of light by the first through holes 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized bright.

When the coin-like foreign matter is disposed at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the light amount of light which is transmitted by the ball shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-like. It becomes weaker compared to the case where there is no foreign matter (coin-like foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-like foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 with the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-like foreign matter as a clue, so the coin-like foreign matter is not noticed. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. In addition, this effect is the first through hole 832
Not only when visually recognized through 6a, but also when visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326 b is a bottom plate portion 32 in which the coin-shaped foreign matter which falls on the bottom plate portion 321 falls.
It is comprised as a through-hole which can be discharged | emitted in the direction along 1 surface. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a width of about 30 [mm], a bottom plate 321, and a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-like foreign substance (for example, 500 yen coin). Is formed with a width of about 2 mm in the normal direction.

The second through hole 8326 b is disposed near the left and right center of the bottom plate portion 321, so it is easy even after coin-like foreign matter is slipped downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. The coin-like foreign matter can be removed.

The second through holes 8326 b are disposed on the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, and thus, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing through the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through holes 8326 b can be used to discharge the air beforeward.

The third through hole 8326 c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), it is formed as a through-hole which can remove the coin-like foreign matter which has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326 c needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-like foreign substance in a direction view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326 c is about 30 [mm] and the width in the lateral direction is about 2 [mm] as viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate 321.

When removing coin-like foreign matter, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830
By exposing 0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can pass through holes 8326a to 8326c.
You can access to In addition, the covering cover 370 is a fastening portion 3 of the main body bending portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front and rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 is fastened and fixed to a bottom plate formed with a recessed portion 15a by a screw inserted in the vertical direction Therefore, the cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screw while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 opened to the right outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
. Only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4), including the above-described embodiments.

Therefore, even if a coin-like foreign matter can not be taken out, the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 is removed, and the harness HN3 is easily removed from the connector portion 8353 for easy operation. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to immediately replace the operation device 8300 in which a coin-like foreign object is caught with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if the normal operation is not performed due to the coin-like foreign material getting into the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be resumed promptly.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the panel support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, the panel support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is disposed so as to be able to contact the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame 12 in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. FIG. Note that Figure 204
In a), the state where the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 is shown (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 The state is illustrated. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transfer device 2650 is a vertical displacement member 2651 which can be vertically displaced on the front side of a plate portion (a plate portion disposed on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate portion 611; The vertical displacement member 2651
The front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front and rear direction, and a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front and rear displacement member 2652 and the front and rear displacement member 26
52 is a portion that holds 52 from the top and bottom displaceably at two positions in front and rear, and is in contact with the support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611 a and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to the front side of the back and forth displacement member 2652 A biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force directed to the
Equipped with

The up-and-down displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it abuts on the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the surface supporting device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204 (b) (a position displaced above the lower position) abuts on the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is a position where the vertical displacement member 2651 is at a position where a slight gap is formed between it and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward by the front frame 14 (see FIG. 204 (a)) which is disposed by being pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652 a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so as to be inclined downward toward the end. The inclined surface 2652a is the front and rear displacement member 26 from the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is an inclined surface continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the up-and-down displacement member 2651 in the state where the second position 52 is disposed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652 a is a vertical displacement member 2651 at the front position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652.
Is set at the lower position, and the inclination angle and the formation range are set such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is at the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652.

With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes large by the thickness in the front and rear direction. be able to.

This makes it possible to increase the load applied by the claw members 640 after rotation to the game board 13 from the back side, and makes it easy to maintain the state where the game board 13 is in contact with the drop back plate 621 d of the front claw member 620. It is possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required of the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses the game board 13 against the drop back plate 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring employed in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the worker from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, and it is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. The operator's freedom of choice and,
Workability can be improved.

A fifteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are covered above the reverse cup portion 178 against the fraud that the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire and enters the interior as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3
The case where the burnout was detected by heating the piano wire to detect an early detection of fraud was described, but the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is a case where the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the piano wire heated While detecting the heat, it is comprised so that the burnout of harness HN1-HN3 may be prevented.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
(B) and FIG. 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that Figure 205
In b), the state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the reduced shape is shown in FIG.
In 5 (c), the state which returned to the tension | pulling shape (memory | storage shape) is shown in figure by provision of a heat | fever. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is a main body box 2.
It is viewed in cross section at the front and back middle position of 281.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and the reverse cup portion 2
And a back cover member 2282 attached from the back side so as to cover the opening on the back side of the main body box portion 2281;
A space is formed between the two and the back cover 2282.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and is a reverse cup portion 217.
8, an extending portion 2283 in contact with the left surface of the wall portion 2178a, a narrowed portion 2284 extended from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284 The protrusion 2285 is provided on the upper side of the main body box 2281 and is accommodated in a recess in the left side wall of the main body box 2281 from the back side. One end is projected to the outside of the main body box 2281 and the other end is main body box A first conducting portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1 is accommodated in a recess recessed from the back side in the right side wall of 1 and one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end is extended in the lateral direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and the first conduction A second conductive portion 2287 formed to have a length capable of coming into contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 generating a biasing force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286;
And a shape memory spring 2288 supported by the projection 2285 and disposed below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one end of a separate wire is connected to the portion protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is the main controller And 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205 (b) (FIG. 205 (FIG. c) see), the conduction is broken,
It is controlled to output an error signal based on the fact that the conduction has been cut off.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, an alarm is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, etc. Is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIG. 205 (a) to FIG. 205 (c), the main body box 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, compared with the eighth embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left, and the extension portion 2283 is interposed between the reverse cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire by the extension portion 2283 filling the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, the piano wire remains the long cover 173 as it is. It is possible to prevent penetration.

According to this configuration, the piano wire which enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from the lower side and melts the upper wall portion and advances further is guided to the narrow portion 2284 and until the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrow portion 2284 You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, maintains the shape after deformation at a low temperature state, and has a characteristic of returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or more. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80.degree.) Around the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178, and a tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or more by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to a tensile shape, and the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion The conduction with the 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide long hole 2282a drilled in the back and forth direction in the back cover member 2282 in the vertical direction long shape and on the front side Overhang. After returning to the low temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in tension, the operator depresses the extension portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the state (see FIG. 205 (b)). Can be returned to). That is, even after the fraud is found, it can be repeatedly used to achieve early detection of the fraud.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Even though the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, it has been described that the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted on both sides. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes recessed portions having different shapes in each area. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial back view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave formed in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). Fig. 206 (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view schematically showing the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and Fig. 206 (c) schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of Fig. 206 (a). 206D is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 shown in FIG. 206, and FIG. 206D is a light guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) is an upward concave portion 254 concaved in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206 (a), the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are disposed in line with each other in the vertical direction according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

The concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 according to the arrangement described in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed for each area based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 is changed.

That is, a region CCVIb disposed on the upper side and the inner lens member 530 side and a region CCVI disposed on the upper side and the outer lens member 550 with reference to the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed in a region c CCd, which is disposed on the lower side and the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVIe which is disposed on the lower side and the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the region CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b to be concaved is formed by heat pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed) and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the upward concave 2
543b refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206C, in the region CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c concaved is formed by heat pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the downward concave 2
543c refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d to be recessed is formed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543 d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512 a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the downward concave 2
543 d refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downward sloping direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e concaved is formed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed) and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the upward concave 2
543e refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the area facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is about 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, from this part the inner lens member 5
The light emitted to the lens 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the collecting direction, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 in the light spreading direction. It can be done. That is, while forming the light guide member 2540 in a flat plate shape, it is possible to make a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides, so the right panel unit 250
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pressed downward is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be taken as an initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

Although the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 is moved to the final end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push in the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and changes in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "unpressable button" can be performed it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. Preferably, the lower frame member 320 is disposed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of a collision with the lower frame member 320 at the time of operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 has been stretched in advance, and to notice that the button is in the state of being unable to be pushed in only after the tilting device 310 is pushed in. it can.

Although the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344 c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connection pin 344d can be changed in a state in which the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d abut, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rolling direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be switched sequentially) by the drive mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by causing the drive motor 342 to operate in one direction, it is possible to perform rendering in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 for applying a driving force to the tilting device 310.
Although the case where the operation timing of is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the operating direction. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
While lowering operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed with the position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 starts to move upward after reaching the pushing end. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, it is possible to reduce the repulsion force for pushing back the tilting device 310 while pressing the tilting device 310 continuously while increasing the repulsion force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of upward movement of the tilting device 310. .

Although the case where the storage member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate 5321 has been described in the fifth embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage device 543 in the tilting device 310
It is also possible to fix 0 and operate the vibration device 5400 inside thereof. Tilting device 31
In the case where the receiving member 5430 is fixed to 0, for example, the convex leg 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate 5321.
The configuration of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 by disposing the convex leg 5424 on the bottom plate 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end position. To change whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the accommodation member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change of the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed at the time of operating the tilting device 310, so the flexible member 5420 is operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more. The amount of deformation can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the housing member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and pushed in to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. You can increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when making the player perform the operation of the tilting device 310, a display such as "Press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "Press the button. By performing the display as “a great chance.”, It is possible to perform an effect of designating how to press the button (the tilting device 310) to the player. In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (the tilting device 310) in a designated manner is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player.
The player's willingness to operate the button (the tilting device 310) can be enhanced by the designated pressing method, and the operation of the button (the tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

The magnitude relationship between the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 and the degree of the pressing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, a low push-in speed of the tilting device 310 can be set as a condition that the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 can be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow the push-in speed of the tilting device 310 can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing in the tilting device 310 with force, and to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 in force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 can be brought into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be arranged in such a manner that the weight member 5412 can not be brought into contact with the receiving member 5430 under the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the movement end. In this case, the tilting device 31
In the state where 0 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be made lively,
A change in the presentation mode to the player in a way that makes it difficult for the surroundings to notice the vibration that stops when pressing.
Because it can be made to recognize the difference in the degree of expectation), only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change of the presentation mode, except for the surrounding players, to produce a premiere feeling Can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 can not be in contact with each other.
It is desirable to produce both the case 412 and the case where the receiving member 5430 is in a continuously abuttable arrangement, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotational direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the fifth embodiment, the disc cams 5344 are caused to fall over in an axial tilt manner.
Although the case where frictional force arises by contact | abutment 44 and the releasing member 346 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored is partially extended in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344 and configured to abut in the case where the disk cam 5344 is subjected to shaft collapse deformation. It is good. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 abut. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which both of the panel support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only the upper or lower surface support device 600 may be configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to abut the surface support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when attaching the game board 13 to the board support device 600, the game board 13 is
Although the case where the upper and lower positions of (1) and (2) have not changed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c that supports the lower end face of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end thereof is the board support device 60 in the released state.
You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned below rather than the upper surface of the back side extension board 621c of zero. In this case, when placing the gaming board 13 on the board supporting device 600 in the released state, the gaming board 13 is supported by the back side extending plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board supporting device 600 from there, the game board 13 can be run on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 can be placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so the work of fixing the game board 13 Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the far ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be bending back and forth, or a combination of back and forth bending. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Just behind point 3, it is preferable to form a long path back and forth because the ball discharges smoothly. In addition, since the range of the ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by providing a route bent back and forth, interference between the firing passage and the ball passage portion 145 is prevented. It is easy to do.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so as to face the opening 524 is a concave surface, but this is not necessarily the case. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed lightly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not have to be curved in the vertical direction, and, for example, a curved portion and a portion extending straight may be mixed at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, the case of forming the route bent upward and downward by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of top, bottom, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are back side wall portions 461H.
It may be configured to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of in this case,
Since the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the resistance in the sandwiching causes the load on the speaker connecting wire 453 in the direction of pulling out the speaker assembly 450. Speaker connection 4 even if it is
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

Further, while the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the range of the projection length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, the projection convex portion 481Ha is further projected In the range of the length, a step may be formed in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 includes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to a speaker room and the middle main body portion 461M corresponds to a duct. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the proximal main body 461 B and the intermediate main body 461 can be expanded by expanding the width in the front-rear direction of the intermediate main body 461 M in the same manner as the proximal main body 461 B and the distal main body 461 T.
A large speaker room may be configured together by the M and the tip side main body 461T.

Further, although the proximal main body 461 B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal main body 461 T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or may be configured in the same volume. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right end portions, and may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be a position between the left and right end portions and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467 a to 4 constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.
Among the 67e and 487a to 487e, adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the direction in which the proximal main portion 461B and the distal main portion 461T are connected, the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 Although the case where they do not overlap in the visual direction) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, the rib portions 467 d and the rib portions 467 c) may be configured to overlap with each other in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze, for example, the front concave portion 47
By putting a metal fine wire such as a piano wire from the opening formed by 1 and the rear side recessed part 491 and making it difficult to cheat the tip of the game area, the time required for cheating can be extended. It is possible to control cheating. In addition, here, as suppression of the cheating, suppression of cheating itself and obtaining profit of cheating by cheating (successful cheating)
And the like.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
It may be configured to mesh with the G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. in this case,
Since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, it is possible to rotate the loose fitting device 880 not only during the rotation operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the concentration operation. it can. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be simultaneously performed, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract along with the rotation of the rotary plate 830, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 is operated by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper portion of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip end of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. It is good. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 contact in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting portion 159 Also good. In this case, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side when the upper surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state, even if the lower surface support device 600 is in the fixed state. The game board 13 is disposed opposite to the operation unit back member 155 as the right side of the board 13 is inclined to the front side)
Since the part of is also displaced to the front side, the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 can be made to interfere. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device disposed above the inner frame 12 6
It is determined whether or not 00 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation panel back member 155 disposed opposite to the lower surface support device 600 and the game board 13, and the surface disposed above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thus, the function of determining the state of the panel supporting device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, so that the design freedom of the multi-function cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not abut on the panel support device 600 regardless of the state of the panel support device 600 (see FIG.
It may be configured to chamfer. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of a synthetic resin collides with the metal panel support device 600, whereby the multifunctional cover member 171 is formed.
However, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long time in another application (for example, an application as a wiring cover) because it is possible to reduce the possibility of breakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 for emitting the light irradiated to the end face of the light guide member 540 from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be disposed inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, it is configured to be switchable between a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a case in which the other surface is disposed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate 510 By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about a central axis, it is possible to switch the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86. Also, the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the effects by switching between the moving combination and the moving combination that overhangs inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the top opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged with one side on the front side and the other side Consider switching in the case of being placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving object, the moving object disposed opposite to the location (location near the end) corresponding to the top opening 524 emits light while the outer cover member 560 side is When the surface faces the moving object side, the moving objects facing each other over the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wide area compared to the opening 524 at the top) emit light. Therefore, by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512 a to be emitted, it is possible to switch the light emission location of the moving object.

In this case, for example, the rendering effect can be improved by operating the moving combination in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving object, the surface changes on the side of the outer cover member 560 while being reduced to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524. At the timing to face, the moving object may be configured to extend and contract so as to change in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. In this way, switching to change the light emitting location in accordance with the operation of the moving object can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512 a that controls the light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness is increased, light amount is increased, and light emission is clear), and light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is Diffuse (lower luminance, smaller amount of light, lighter light emission). Therefore, by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to emit light (liquid crystal, moving object)
The light emission aspect of can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or liquid crystal (for example, the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or liquid crystal) In the above, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture in which it is disposed on the back side of the support plate portion 510, thereby forming a beam shape on the movable
The light can be emitted in a wide range in the direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal while being irradiated with the light in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to emit light widely at a position apart from the moving object and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving object and the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the far ball passage 9145, 10145
Although the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, and the broken portion is fragile as falling, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling Also good. In this case, it is controlled to issue an alarm and forcibly stop the launch of the ball due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, thereby achieving early detection of the wrongdoing and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss received to the gaming machine hall) obtained by the fraudster.

Although the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as the inclined surface has been described in the twelfth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-like hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810), it is made of resin. The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the both-sides slit 815 disposed opposite to the inclined surface 2803T,
A recessed portion may be formed to such an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, the movement resistance can be improved by the inclined surface 2803T falling into the recess.

In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of light is set to be the light collecting direction or the light expanding direction. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 corresponds to each region CCVIb.
In all the CCVIe, the light is inclined upward, so that the light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking in order to select an aircraft to play. Thereby, the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Also, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
The downward concave portion 2543 c may be formed in Ie, and the upward concave portion 2543 b may be formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward, so to select the aircraft to play the game The light can be made to advance easily to the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling to the player side, the light emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward As a result, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball appear refreshing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
Once you hit a jackpot, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right thing, a three-time right thing) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that And may be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, arelapati, ball sparrows, slot machines,
The present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Variable display of identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player, as a necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one. This is a slot machine that generates a special game, and in this case, coins, medals and the like are representative examples of game media.

In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever,
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or when a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the predetermined game value to the player is determined as the required condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol. A special game for giving a bonus is generated, and the player is paid a large amount of balls on the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287, a first control example of the present invention will be described. In the first control example, the configuration is partially changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments, and the control example is described, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments is given. Is omitted.

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the gaming board 13 in the first control example has a rail 76 in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. , 77, the general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, the sorting device 700, etc. It is attached to the back side of FIG. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general entrance 63, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , Fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. In addition, although details will be described later, a first entrance port 64 to which a ball can enter and a second right entrance port 640r are provided in the inside of the sorting apparatus 700. The ball entering the opening 710a is distributed by the distribution device 700 to either the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r (see FIG. 208).

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 207) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 207) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum strikes the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  In the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 207), first symbol display devices 37a and 37b provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640r or the right second entrance 640r. It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is in the second ball entrance 640 or the second right ball entrance When winning to 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to a probability variation big hit (big hit A, C) or a symbol corresponding to a normal big hit (big hit B) or an off symbol by a lighted state, and indicates the number of holding balls by a lighted state, A seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with fewer LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the second right entrance 640r is won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R hourly short 100 times jackpot (big hit A), 16R positive variation odd symbol big hit (big hit B1), 16R positive variation even symbol big hit (big hit B2), 2R positive variation big hit (big hit C) ing. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, the maximum round number is 16 after being notified that it is a big hit by stopping and displaying the third symbol with the same even symbols even if it is "16 R hour 100 short hit" (big hit A). After the jackpot game of the round, while transitioning to the low probability state, for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of 100 changes) is a jackpot that is a short time. With "16R probability variation odd jackpot" (big hit B1), it is reported that the 3rd symbol is finally displayed in stop by the same odd symbol pattern, and it is informed that it is a big hit, then the maximum number of rounds is 16 It changes to the high probability state after the jackpot and it is a probability variable jackpot that will be in the power support state until the next jackpot game is executed. It is notified that it is a big hit by stopping display of the 3rd symbol with the same even symbol pattern finally with "16 R probability variation even symbol jackpot" (big hit B2), and then the maximum round number is 16 rounds After the jackpot of the transition to the high probability state (until the next jackpot game is executed), it is a probability variable jackpot that will be in the power support state until the next jackpot game is executed. In "2R probability variation big hit" (big hit C), the third symbol is finally displayed with a specific symbol combination (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 2 rounds of big hit (Until the next jackpot game is executed) It is a definite variation jackpot. In addition, when it is jackpot C, a power support state is not set after a jackpot game.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of Further, the “power support state” in the “high probability state” means a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where the ball is easy to win 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During power change during definite change (during play condition) and during time saving, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened It is changed, and a long time is usually set as compared with the middle. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball reaches the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the motorized part 640a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second ball entry port 640 during a definite change or time, and the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second entrance 640 during or during the short period during the electric support during the definite change, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized utility product 640a is opened in each cycle more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, a plurality of general ball entrances 63 are arranged, in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls when balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The first symbol display device 37a, 37b is triggered by a winning (start winning) of one of the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, and the right second entrance 640r in the variable display unit 80. The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") performing the variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for fluctuating display of the second symbol is provided.

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86. The center frame 86 projects to the front side of the game board 13 to surround the third symbol display device 81, thereby preventing the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 9 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238). For example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, while the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the symbol of “o” and the symbol of “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (refer to FIG. 207)) every time the ball passes through gate 67 for a predetermined time. To perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during power saving or during time saving than during normal gaming state. As a result, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more than during the normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second ball entry port 640 during power saving and during time saving during definite variation.

  In addition, during the power supply during the definite change, increase the probability of hitting, increase the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a per hit, etc. by other methods as well. When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win at the entrance 640, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured such that a part of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls fired to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and also displayed in second symbol hold lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700, in which balls can be won, is disposed. When a ball wins (enters) to the sorting device 700 through the opening 710a, the entered balls are alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 or the second right entrance 640r. Be When the ball wins (enters) the first ball entrance 64, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 218) draws a jackpot, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. In addition, when the ball wins the second right ball entrance 640, as in the case of the second right ball entrance 640r, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The main control unit 110 (see FIG. 238) draws a jackpot due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  On the other hand, below the distribution apparatus 700 in a front view, a second ball entry port 640 where balls can be won is disposed. When the ball hits the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is performed due to the turning on of the second entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is made with the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. The second ball entry port 640 normally prevents the game ball from entering the ball by restricting the game ball from entering in a state where the left and right electric role pieces 640a configured in a wing shape are upright. ) When it comes to the hit of a normal symbol to be described later, the motorized symbol 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward as an opening operation in a fixed movement pattern to become a reverse eight character, The game ball is induced to the 2 ball entry port 640, and the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entry port 640.

  In addition, in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640r, five balls are paid out as winning balls when the ball is won, and for the second entrance 640, two balls are awarded. It is also one of the winning openings that are paid out as balls. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the first entrance 64, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball hits the second entrance 640, and the right first 2 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won to the ball entering 640r is configured to a different number, but the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning to the first ball slot 64 and the second ball entering The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins to 640 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins to the right second entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role part 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role part 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win a prize at the second entrance 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, during and after electric support during certain variation, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is also short, so the variation of the second symbol The symbol “o” is easily displayed on the display, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also usually longer than in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time, during definite variation or during time saving.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to get a prize at the second entrance 640, so basically the ball is moved to the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering the ball and distributing the ball to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67 during the electric support during the definite change or during the short time, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is likely to be in the open state. In addition to the ball entering the opening 710a being distributed to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, the second entrance A jackpot lottery associated with entering the mouth 640 is also easily performed. Therefore, since there are more chances of winning a big hit than in the middle, it is advantageous to the player as compared with the middle.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is directed to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the power assistance during the definite change, in the short time, or in the normal time). You can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r becomes a big hit, the predetermined time (variation After the time has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a stop symbol of the big hit, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the distribution apparatus 700 in a front view. For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640 and 640r, is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the distribution device 700.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 238) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 238) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, display control unit 114, voice output unit 226, lamp display unit 227, touch sensor 290, setting switch 291, RTC 292, emission sensor 293, frame button 22 etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. There is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, referring to FIG. 208, the distribution device 700 will be described. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the distribution device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 208, the sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display device unit 80 of the gaming board 13. The passage where the gaming ball entering the opening 710a flows down and the passage where the gaming ball entering the second entrance 640 flows down are stored in the through holes formed in the game board 13 The base member of the distribution device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

  The winning member 730 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the center upper portion in the left-right direction, an electric part 640a located below the opening 710a, and its electric part 640a. A through hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed in the front-rear direction It is formed in preparation for the main.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view and in a laterally-long rectangular shape, and is formed in a box-like body whose front side is opened. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in front view, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the outer side in the left-right direction from the substantially central position in the left-right direction. Further, both end portions in the left-right direction of the distribution member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the above-described winning member 730.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center position in the left and right direction in the front view to the left and right, a distributing member 762 disposed at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 and a distributing member 762 And a casting port formed on the upper side of the main body.

  The distributing member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into the annular shape by three projections 762 a protruding outward from the outer edge at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis. And the shaft portion 762 b.

  The shaft portion 762 b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 about an axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted inside the annular ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is interposed between the interposing member and the distributing member 760, whereby the distributing member 762 is disposed rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for distributing the ball alternately to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball having passed through the opening 710a is thrown, and the direction in which the tip of the projection 762a in the central portion is located The ball is thrown on the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, it is possible to send the ball sent from the opening 710a in the left-right direction by the projection 762a at the central part. The projections 762 a provided at both ends regulate the displacement of the distributing member 762 and, due to the weight applied when the ball passes, displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762 a is located (the distributing member 762 The rotation of the distributing member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip end surface of the protrusion 762 a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the projection 762a at the central portion, the projection 762a not in contact with the inclined surface collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward abuts on the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

  The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as “third ball sending path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the distributing member 762 mentioned above roll and throw the ball. It is formed to be inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. Thus, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed to be inclined in the direction approaching the interposed member so that the rear side increases in thickness toward the end. As a result, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent to the end thereof is the first entrance port 64 of the interposed member disposed in front of the distribution member 760, or the right second entrance port 640r. You can throw to More specifically, a ball which is distributed to the left in a front view by the distribution member 762 and which rolls the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the first ball entrance 64 (enters the ball). On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distributing member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the second right ball entrance 640 r (ball entering).

  The interposing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view and horizontally long, and the variable winning device 65 described above in the lower center in the left and right direction in front view, the first entrance 64 passing in the front and rear direction on the left side, It is mainly provided with the right second entrance 640r which is penetrated in the front-rear direction, and the first entrance 64.

  The first inlet 64 and the second right inlet 640 r are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the distributing member 760 and on the rear side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at the left and right ends of the distributing member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640 r. Accordingly, the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distributing member 760 described above passes the first ball entry port 64 and sends the ball to the through hole of the winning member 730, and the second right ball entrance 640r Can be formed to form a path for throwing the ball in the through hole of the winning member 730.

  The sorting apparatus 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the distributing member 760, and is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the distributing member 762 of the distributing member 760. When the ball to which the third ball sending path KR3 in the left direction is sent is sent to the end of the third ball sending path KR3, the inside of the first entrance 64 of the insertion member 750 disposed on the front side is The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, the game ball having entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64.

  On the other hand, when the ball to which the third ball sending path KR3 in the left direction is sent is sent to the end of the third ball sending path KR3, the right second entrance port 640r of the interposition member 750 disposed on the front side Is thrown to the 4th ball sending path KR4 inside. Here, the game ball having entered the second ball entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entry port 640r.

  As described above, since the gaming balls having entered the opening 710 a are alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 and the second right entrance 640 by the distributing member 762, the first entrance 64 and the first entrance 64 are evenly distributed. It is possible to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 640r and generate the holding ball uniformly. Thereby, the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol can be generated uniformly, and the number of one holding ball becomes the upper limit, and the overflow not stored as the holding ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was set as the structure which does not change with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol simultaneously, you may be comprised so that it may change not only in it but simultaneously. By configuring in this manner, more lotterys of the game can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be performed more efficiently.

  The third symbol is constituted by the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238) to be described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B1", one of the main symbols of the odd number "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is aligned and stopped. Variable display is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit B2", a variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" which are even numbers is aligned with one another. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, it is configured such that the chance eye configured by the combination of "341" is displayed. The combination of chances is configured not to be selected when the lottery result is out. Although this embodiment is configured to display the chance by a combination of a specific third symbol, the present invention is not limited thereto, but a special symbol different from the ordinary third symbol from 0 to 9 (for example, a gold fish symbol) ) May be configured to be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or may be configured to display and notify characters such as “chance”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217, an effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the upper 2/3 of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and other than that The lower one-third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Among them, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which a holding symbol for which a fluctuation is executed is moved and displayed when the holding ball held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). is there. The held symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed with a larger symbol than the held symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol variation is being executed. In addition, when a change is performed, it is comprised so that the lottery result of the special symbol which is changing may be suggested by changing the color of a symbol, or changing the pattern of a symbol.

  The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (retention balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640r. It is an area for displaying the number of balls and the notice effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C is set in which a preview effect image of the character is displayed when the number of holding balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the central part, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small pedestal Ds1 displays a pedestal symbol m0 under execution indicating that the holding ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is an area to be moved and displayed. As shown in a), when the variation of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is executed, a circle symbol is displayed. In addition, the circle symbol displayed on the left side which shows that the order for which it was suspended most is first among the reservation symbols (circle symbol) displayed on small area Ds2 becomes non-display, and then the small area A round symbol whose diameter is larger than the holding symbol is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the holding symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the holding symbols displayed in a row to the position where the leftmost holding symbol that has been hidden is displayed. Be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the symbol being executed, the predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. And the color and pattern of the running symbol are determined and displayed. By configuring in this manner, the player can early determine the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started or the selected fluctuation pattern by the symbol being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. Improve the interest of In addition, the symbol in execution displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, or the like at the start of the change, and the effect of changing the special symbol in a changing period is also performed. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with the same symbol and the middle symbol is scrolled) It is executed at timing, timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed, etc.) is executed, or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the small area Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicates that the reserved symbol indicating that the variation order is the first pending order is the area where the reserved symbol is displayed. It is displayed at the left end. On the right side of the first suspension symbol pedestal m1, the second suspension symbol pedestal m2 indicates that the suspension sequence is the second, the third suspension symbol pedestal m3 indicates that the suspension sequence is the third, the suspension sequence Fourth holding symbol pedestal m4 indicating that the fourth is the fifth, fifth holding symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the holding order is the fifth, and sixth sixth holding symbol pedestal indicating that the holding order is the sixth m6, the seventh holding symbol base m7 indicating that the holding order is the seventh m8, and the eighth holding symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the holding order is the eighth are respectively in a state where no holding symbol is displayed Is also displayed.

  In the upper part of the fifth holding symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth holding symbol pedestal m8, the number of holding symbols suggesting symbol P is displayed when the predetermined number or more of the holding symbols are not displayed. The number-of-retentions indication pattern P is configured with a variable lid shape in which the letter "5" is displayed on the top of the fifth retention pattern base m5, which indicates that the order of suspension is the fifth. Similarly, the letter "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed at the top of the sixth holding symbol base m6, and the holding order is seven at the top of the seventh holding symbol base m7. The variable lid shape in which the character of "7" which shows that it is the second is displayed, and the character of "8" which shows that the reservation order is the eighth is displayed on the upper part of the pedestal m8 for the 8th retention symbol It consists of the symbol of.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), when the number of reservations is 0, the number P of indications for reservation is indicated across the area from the fifth suspension symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth suspension symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed, and it is configured that the player can recognize that the maximum number of holdings is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four for the first special symbol and a maximum of four for the second special symbol are set. Moreover, in this control example, although the maximum number was set to the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, respectively, it sets not only it but the maximum number which put the number of reservations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol together It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of the overflow.

  On the right side of the eighth suspension symbol pedestal m8, a character display pedestal C1 is displayed which indicates that the area is a region in which the forerunner character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can confirm the area in which the character is displayed in advance even when the advance notice character is not displayed, and the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area Dm (when it is in the variation display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right When the game ball enters the second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640, when the number of holdings corresponding to the special symbol entered is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the holding order The hold symbol is displayed on. In (a) of FIG. 210, the display of the holding symbol in the case where the number of holdings is three is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (a), pending number indication symbol P is displayed in the display area where the pending symbols from the fifth to the eighth are displayed until the number of pending balls is three. . Also, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of reservations becomes four, the variable lid symbol in which the fifth suspension of the suspension number suggestion symbol P is displayed is displayed in a variable manner without being displayed. . By configuring in this way, when the holding symbol is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid symbol, it becomes non-display, and the player regards the variable lid symbol as the holding symbol and suppresses the problem of mistaking the actual number of balls held. it can. Also, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of holding balls is four, not only the variable lid pattern in the fifth holding ball number display area is not displayed, but also the character display area C A character pattern is configured to be displayed.

  Note that the character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment indicating the remaining number of balls up to the upper limit of the number of holding balls by a balloon, and the player holds up to the maximum number of held balls. The remaining number of can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of pending items is 7, the comment display shows the character "one more", and when one more pending ball is stored, the upper limit number of pending items is displayed. It is suggested that eight holding balls which are are stored. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reservations, and the first number 64 or the second number 640, right in the state where the number of reservations is the upper number. By entering a ball (a ball opening corresponding to a special symbol that is not the holding upper limit) in any of the second ball entrances 640r, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not held and stored.

  In the present control example, when the gaming ball enters the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the gaming ball that has entered is alternated with the first inlet 64 (the first ball entry port 64 (the first 1) Corresponding to the special symbol) and the right second entrance ball hole 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). As a result, the holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately and easily stored. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about the overflow even when the number of holding balls for the whole (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is seven. The game can be continued to enter the ball.

  Furthermore, when the holding ball number reaches the upper limit value, the character "MAX" indicating that the holding ball is stored up to the upper limit value is displayed, and the player is in spite of the holding ball number reaching the upper limit value. It is possible to suppress the problem that the holding ball overflows by causing the game ball to continue firing.

  In FIG. 211 (a), the fourth holding ball is stored, and the holding ball is judged as the result of the success or failure judgment determined in the prefetching process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. The information with the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113, and the player is determined to be, for example, a jackpot or a variety of super reach out based on the information. The display mode of the holding ball is made variable (for example, the white holding symbol is changed to red) as an effect to give the expectation to the big hit to Display as it is without displaying it. Furthermore, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, a character "as it is" is displayed, and an effect is suggested to suggest that the number of held items is not increased any more. Here, when the fifth holding ball is stored, the character "OVER" is displayed in a balloon from the girl in the character display area C as shown in FIG. In any case, a notification is made as if it had overflowed. As a result, the player can be expected to display the fourth holding ball in a variable manner, and the holding ball having a high degree of expectation for the jackpot is stored, but it is possible to hold the ball It is possible to suppress the player from firing and consuming the gaming ball in vain.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the number of 0 holding balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th holding ball is stored, The fifth and sixth pieces of the variable lid design P of the number of held holdings suggestion pattern P are hidden, the girl is displayed in the character display area C, the character "early" is displayed, and the holding period is In order to be short, a notification is carried out which suggests that the number of held symbols P is displayed in a specially variable manner. Here, normally, when there are four holding balls, the variable lid design of the holding number suggested pattern P is not displayed for the fifth time, but 0 holding balls within 5 seconds. Since the number has increased to four, it is a special display rule in which the fifth and sixth variable lid designs are displayed as non-display. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the effect to be performed depending on the increase period of the number of holding balls or the interval at which the holding balls are stored, and it is possible for the player Can be easily recognized. Moreover, in this control example, although the display aspect of the variable lid symbol P was comprised different from usual, it does not restrict to it, the display aspect of the variable lid symbol P is not changed, but the display aspect (for example, The color, pattern, and shape of the retention symbol may be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 212 (b), a variable display example of the variable lid pattern P in the time saving game state will be described. Unlike the normal gaming state (normal symbol probability determination probability is low probability) in the short time gaming state (normal symbol probability determination probability is high probability), when the fourth holding ball is stored, FIG. 212 (b) As shown in, the fifth (m5), sixth (m6) variable lid pattern P is not displayed. Then, the girl's character is displayed, and a character is displayed to notify the player to urge the game so that the sixth holding ball "up to 6" is stored by the balloon. In the short time game state, since the success or failure judgment probability of the normal symbol is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, the ordinary electric character (power support) 640a is easily set to the open state, The game ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second right ball entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time saving game, the holding ball overflows easily. Therefore, during the time saving game, unlike in the normal game, the variable lid pattern P is not displayed as many as possible, which is the upper limit value of the holding ball 8 By urging the player to play six smaller game pieces, it is possible to play the game so that the holding ball is stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. it can. In the time saving game state, the seventh (m7) variable lid symbol P is not displayed when the holding ball is the fifth, and the eighth (m8) variable lid symbol is not displayed when the holding ball is the seventh. P is hidden.

  In this control example, during the time saving game, the seventh variable lid symbol P is not displayed when the holding ball is the fifth, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and seven holding balls are up to six. It may be configured to maintain the eyes and the eighth variable lid pattern P in the displayed state. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in order to generate six or more holding balls.

  In addition, when the fourth holding ball is stored, the sixth and seventh of the variable lid pattern is hidden by the contents of the prize command, and the girl is urged to increase the holding ball to the sixth. It may be configured to display the letters "put up to 6" to indicate. In this way, by notifying the player in advance whether it is the type of jackpot game (perhaps a probability change or a normal hit) as a bonus by putting up to six, the will to save the holding ball in the player Can be increased.

  As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) and (b), the configuration is such that the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C can be varied according to the pre-reading result of the holding ball (the information indicated by the winning command). It is done. The example shown in FIG. 214 (a) is an example in which a girl's character displayed when the number of holding balls is four is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (b), four are usually displayed. In the case where the eye holding ball is stored, a special girl character different from that of the normal time is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the prefetch result is a specific result. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning the lottery for determining the type of the girl different from that of the normal time, and the probability of winning is set high when the pre-reading result is the jackpot or the outreach super . By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for the jackpot by the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b), the display mode in the case where the number of held pieces becomes the maximum value and then the over winning is performed will be described. FIG. 214A shows “MAX” that the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is a balloon comment and the number of held characters is the upper limit value when the number of held characters is stored up to the upper limit value. Is displayed. Thereafter, when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the word “I over” is displayed to indicate that it has overflowed. As described above, when an overflow occurs, the occurrence of the overflow can be suppressed by notifying the player of the occurrence of the overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing the overflow, but in the case where it is intended to increase the profit on the game arcade side, the character displayed by causing the overflow Depending on the type and content of the comment, the result of success or failure of the special symbol displayed variably displayed, the result of pre-reading of the stored holding ball (the result of success or failure etc.) Also, the current gaming state (normal gaming state or definite variation gaming state) The notification of the type of) may be performed. By configuring in this manner, the player can enjoy various effects by playing while generating overflow, and it is possible to generate overflow while being disadvantageous to the player.

  With reference to FIGS. 215 (a) and (b), a display mode in the case where the on-reach hold effect is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when the fluctuation pattern (normal reach various, super reach various) is changed to be the reach display mode, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is performed and the lottery is performed. If it is determined that the special hold effect is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 215, when the reach display mode is reached, the display mode of the on-reach hold effect is set. When the holding effect during reach is executed, regardless of the number of holding balls, the fifth and sixth variable lid designs P are not displayed, the girl character J1 is displayed, and the balloon comment “store up to 6” The character which suggests to a player that six holding balls "are stored during reach change" is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (b), when the storage balls are actually stored up to six during the reach display, the odd symbol “7” is a symbol type in which the reach symbol of the even symbol “6” becomes advantageous to the player. It changes and is displayed. Furthermore, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game ball from firing and playing even during reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the gaming shop side.

  In this control example, when the number of holding balls reaches the specified number (6), an example of changing the reach symbol is shown, but the result of the pass / fail judgment is the hit type corresponding to the even symbol. In some cases, instead of changing the reach symbol to an odd symbol, a flock of fish is displayed in the main display area Dm, and effects such as swimming from right to left are displayed, and the jackpot expectation is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to give notice, and to display a notice to indicate the result of the judgment of success or failure such as "Congratulations".

  A display mode in the lucky holding effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (a) and (b). When a specific change (a change that has been won in the advance lottery to carry out the lucky holding effect) is executed When the previous big hit, the number of holding balls when the holding ball corresponding to the change is stored is stored The mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of balls held, and the girl character J1 of the character display area C corresponds to the mark symbol n6 of "Aim for 6". A notification to urge the player to store the holding balls up to the held number is held. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when up to six balls are stored during the lucky holding effect, the character “well done” is displayed, and pressing the frame button 22 causes the main display area Dm to be displayed. The character (previous display mode) which shows that a definite variation jackpot is given in the special symbol in the variation of "sure definite variation" to is displayed.

  In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot game. In this control example, the present effect is configured to be executed in the case of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and even if it is a jackpot, a jackpot in the case of jackpot by the judgment value of jackpot type acquired The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and a jackpot may be expected.

  In addition, when the holding balls stored in the variable lid pattern P (five to eight holdings) become a hit, the lucky holding effect stores the number of holding balls and is lucky when the next big hit change is executed It is configured to be displayed as a pending number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player aware of how much the stored number of holdings was when the previous big hit occurred, making it possible to save as many as possible, and keep the lucky A game can be played so that the effect is easily performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), a number corresponding to the number of balls held at the time of winning (the total of the number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). A number indicated by i shown at 216 is given and displayed. The number of pending prizes in the winning position is moved (variable) by sliding to the pending symbol display area where one variation order is young when the pending symbol is digested (the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol is started). Even if it is displayed, it is displayed with the same number. By configuring in this way, even when the variation starts, the number of reservations at the time of winning in the variation can be confirmed.

  In addition, when it becomes a big hit, the number of pending at the time of the winning of the big hit game being executed in the effect (opening production, round production, ending production etc.) in the big hit game is displayed and notified by a number or a symbol etc It may be configured as follows.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 217 (a) and (b), a long time per shot which is one of the hit types of the normal symbol (when the motorized part 640a is open for a longer period than the normal hit, A display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect in (1) is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the player wins the game for a long time with a normal symbol and starts playing for a long time, the main display area Dm displays a comment "It's open". With this display, the player is informed that the game is being executed for a long time, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second right entrance is made without firing the game ball during the long game which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a defect that the game ball misses an opportunity to enter the ball opening 640r. In addition, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second right ball entrance 640r during this long-time hit game, the retention symbol corresponding to the ball entry is black different from that of the normal time Displayed with a hold symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to identify the holding ball stored during long hours per game and the holding ball stored during the other period.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the holding symbol stored during the long-time hit game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start. The symbol of the treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "Oh, if the treasure box is opened!" Is displayed, and the effect that the treasure box is opened during the variation of the third symbol is displayed. It is suggested to the player that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol of is the jackpot is high.

  By configuring in this way, when a long-time hit of a normal symbol is executed, the effect of the holding ball is changed, and a special effect is also executed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball. The effect of the game can be greatly varied by the execution of a long-time hit, and a game with a fresh taste can be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 changes display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed in conjunction with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed, and is stopped after the end of the change. As a symbol, the normal symbol (the second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variation display in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lighted To be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized combination 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time As a result, it is comprised so that it will be in the state which a ball | bowl enters easily into the 1st ball entrance 64 or the 2nd right ball entrance 640r. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present control example, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first entrance 64 and the second right entrance 640r, it is not more than 3 times, or It may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  A sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, the gaming balls having entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762 and the balls are distributed. The first ball entrance 64 and the second right ball entrance 640r are disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r, the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. As a result, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main control unit 110 due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is the first. It is indicated by the LED 37 a of the one symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640r are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  In the present embodiment, the numbers of winning balls when entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are the same, but the invention is not limited thereto, and different numbers of winning balls may be used. Good. For example, when entering the first entrance 64, as the three winning balls, when entering the right second entrance 640r as the four award balls, the award for the right second entrance 640r The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of winning balls for the first entrance 64.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated the number of times set in the type of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, in the case of the jackpot A, 16 times (16 rounds)). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 218) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 218) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 219, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol, and to select the jackpot type of the special symbol Special type of counter C2 to be used, and type of stop for selecting special symbols (type of reach per type, out of reach (outside length A, outside short A), type of out of range reach type selection counter C3, variation pattern selection And the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1. Further, the normal random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 255) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the holding balls of the first special symbol, and the holding balls of the second special symbol. The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is respectively provided, and the common special symbol holding of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is held. A ball execution area is provided. Special hit 1 random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter in each area of special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a according to the ball entering timing to the first ball entrance 64 Each value of CS1 is stored respectively. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the same value is stored according to the ball entering timing to the second right ball entrance 640r.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the normal random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 957) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  Also, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special per-random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special random number counter C1 is a loop counter which can take values of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1. Is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol when it matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Also, this special symbol big hit random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state time period) of special symbol and high probability of high probability of becoming special symbol big win from that low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. In addition, special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to Figure 221 (a)) for high probability of special symbol and special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to Figure 221 (a)) for low probability of special symbol , And in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) , And reaches a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99) and then return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the ball is won in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640r right At the timing, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored.

  Here, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that will be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the is the one at the time of jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. . In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C", and the jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A", One of "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The special per random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special per random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "0-2" is the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of jackpots is 3, so the probability of becoming a special symbol is "3/958".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 27 random number values that become the big hit of the special symbol, and the value "0 to 26" is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability . As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 27, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "27/958".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), in the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first figure corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol are selected. The special figure 2 big hit classification selection table 202d2 which is referred to corresponding to the drawing of 2 special symbols is set, respectively.

  Special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area that the lottery result in the change is the big hit, when the change of the first special symbol is stopped A determination value for collating (determining) the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

  FIG. 222 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special view 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the random number value in the special punch type counter acquired is “0 to 39” is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value was "40 to 75" was "jackpot B2", "80 to 99" when the jackpot type was "big hit B1", "76 to 79" As the jackpot type of the case, “jackpot C” is set respectively.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that four types of per capita types (big per cap A, big per cap B1, big per cap B2, big per cap C) are determined by the value of random numbers indicated by the special per cap class counter C2. It is done.

  In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area that the lottery result in the variation is the big hit when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped A determination value for collating (determining) the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

  FIG. 222 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special view 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, the jackpot type when the value was "40 to 87" was "jackpot B1", the jackpot type when "88 to 91" was "jackpot B2", "92 to 99" As the jackpot type of the case, “jackpot C” is set respectively.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that four types of per capita types (big per cap A, big per cap B1, big per cap B2, big per cap C) are determined by the value of random numbers indicated by the special per cap class counter C2. It is done. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the judgment result is a big hit is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the like. You can be interested in which of the two is being played. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation big hit to which a definite variation is given for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation percentage is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to suppress the failure that the probability variation ratio is not constant as a whole. Also, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than the first special symbol, and is configured to be advantageous to the player There is.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). With the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type or fineness of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 255) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) storing the random value for determining the variation time of the symbol variation from the stop type selection counter C3 and the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to that of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b includes a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use which is used in the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the success or failure judgment probability of the normal symbol is low. A time saving variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (high probability gaming state or short time gaming state) when the success / failure determination probability of the normal symbol is high probability is set respectively. In addition, although it demonstrates in more detail by the description about selection of the fluctuation pattern in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, the value of a decision result of a decision, the number of holding balls, and stop type selection counter C3. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) of the rough fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time are determined, and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 224, fluctuation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal change pattern selection table 202b1. In the variation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter for each of the variation patterns The value of CS1 is assigned. In addition, when the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (a jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special punch type counter C2) Is set. Furthermore, when the result of the determination is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is set for each of the number of holding balls at the start of the fluctuation (any of 1 to 4 or 5 to 8).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the result of the judgment is a hit, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of holding balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of holding balls) If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “0 to 50”, the normal reach jackpot A (fluctuation to the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1). No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (change No. 2) is selected for the value of the change type counter CS1 to "0 to 100", and the change is made Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of classification counter CS1 “101 to 159”, and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) for the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1 for “160 to 198” It is selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit B1” or “big hit B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is “0 to 0” with respect to the number of held 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). In the case of any of 60 ", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value" 0-198 "of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (change No. 2) is selected for the value of the change type counter CS1 to "0 to 100", and the change is made The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the classification counter CS1 of “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is for the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 of “160 to 198” It is selected.

  When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" with respect to the number of held 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). If it is, the super reach jackpot D (variation No 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “super reach” for “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, it is configured such that a normal reach or a super reach change pattern that is a long change time is selected regardless of the number of held items. Therefore, by executing a long fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the success or failure judgment result is a jackpot.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is out of range, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" with respect to the number of holding balls 1 to 4, the fluctuation type counter When out-of-range A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, When normal reach out A (fluctuation No. 8) is selected for the value “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C 3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS 1 is If the super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0-198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "246 to 250", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  In addition, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for 5 to 8 balls held, the value "0 to 198" of the change type counter CS1 When the outlier A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”. Normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected, and when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “240 to 245”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super with respect to “0 to 198”. When reach out A (fluctuation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is superimposed on "0 to 198". Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  As described above, when the result of the determination is out of the range, the variation pattern having a small number of holding balls (in the case of 1 to 4) and a long variation time is set to be easily selected. By entering the game ball into the 1 ball slot 64 or the right second ball slot 640r, the holding ball is easily generated and the period during which the variation of the special symbol is stopped occurs (the lottery game is not performed By the occurrence of the period), it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game. In addition, when the number of holding balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach or super reach is set low, and when the number of holding balls is large, the normal reach or the change of the super reach is executed, and the player is judged as a result Can be expected to be a hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time reduction variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 for each of the variation patterns. Values of and are assigned. In addition, when the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (a jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special punch type counter C2) Is set. Furthermore, when the result of the determination is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is set for each of the number of holding balls (one or two or three to eight) at the start of the fluctuation.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the result of the judgment is a hit, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of holding balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of holding balls) If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “0 to 90”, normal reach jackpot A (fluctuation to the value “0 to 198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1). No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (change No. 2) is selected for the value of the change type counter CS1 to "0 to 100" and the change is made Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of classification counter CS1 “101 to 159”, and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) for the value of fluctuation classification counter CS1 for “160 to 198” It is selected.

  When the jackpot type is “big hit B1” or “big hit B2”, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is “0 to 0” with respect to the number of held 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). In the case of any of 100 ", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value" 0-198 "of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (change No. 2) is selected for the value of the change type counter CS1 to "0 to 100", and the change is made The super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the classification counter CS1 of “101 to 159”, and the super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is for the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 of “160 to 198” It is selected.

  When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" with respect to the number of held 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of held balls). If it is, the super reach jackpot D (variation No 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “super reach” for “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

  As described above, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, it is configured such that a normal reach or a super reach change pattern that is a long change time is selected regardless of the number of held items. Therefore, by executing a long fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the success or failure judgment result is a jackpot.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination is out of range, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" with respect to the number of holding balls 1 to 2, the fluctuation type counter When out-of-range A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, When normal reach out A (fluctuation No. 8) is selected for the value “0 to 198” and the value of the stop type selection counter C 3 is any of “230 to 239”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS 1 is If the super reach out A (variation No 9) is selected for "0-198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " Super reach out B (fluctuation No.10) is selected for the ～198 ".

  When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for 3 to 8 balls held, the value "0 to 198" of the change type counter CS1 When the outlier short B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “200 to 229”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”. Normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected, and when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super with respect to "0 to 198". When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is superseded with respect to "0 to 198". Chihazure B (fluctuation No.10) is selected.

  Here, the variation time (variation period) in the variation pattern of the outlier short B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), and is configured with a variation time shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the general variation pattern selection table 202b1. There is. As a result, if the result of judgment of acceptance is out and the number of holding balls is 3 or more, by selecting outlier short B with high probability, it is possible to perform a lot of fluctuation of the special symbol in a short time The efficiency of the game can be measured by making it easy to shorten the period until the jackpot is determined (period between jackpots).

  The ordinary random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Also, when the per-round random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the same time, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see Figure 221 (c)) is for the low probability of the normal symbol (duration of the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probability that it will hit the normal symbol from the low probability It is divided into two types for high high probability time (period which is a time saving state of a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each is set differently. Furthermore, the types of hits for the normal symbols are set as normal hits and long time hits, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, the normal hit of the normal symbol is the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the electric character 640a is operated to the open state in the open time of 0.2 seconds is performed once. It is a hit. In addition, during a short period of time, in the definite change period, an operation in which the motorized accessory 640a is operated to the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is the hit twice repeated. On the other hand, for the long time, regardless of the gaming state, the operation in which the motorized accessory 640a is operated in the open state in the open time of 2 seconds is a hit repeated twice.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a performed in the definite variation period and the opening operation in the long time are set to be the same during the short time in the normal time but not limited thereto. It may be an opening operation of Specifically, for example, the operation in the open state may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, when hitting for a long time, it is possible to enter a ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r more, and during the normal game, the variation in the second special symbol The display can be made easy to execute, and the change display of the game effect can be enjoyed for the player by the variable display of the second special symbol on which a notice display etc. having a fresh taste is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired is at any of 5 to 6 at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the normal hit of the normal symbol is It is determined that Moreover, if it is any of 7 to 8, it will be discriminate | determined that it is a long-time hit of a normal symbol. On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, if the value of the acquired ordinary hitting random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that it is the ordinary hitting of the ordinary symbol. In addition, although it was set as the structure in which the long time contact of the normal symbol is not set when the high probability of the normal symbol is set, the opening operation of the motorized actor 640a is the same as the long time contact at the high probability of the normal symbol. It is also essentially the same as per time.

  Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit. Therefore, when the probability is low, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the motorized accessory 640a is operated, and to reduce the frequency at which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, it is possible to increase the gaming machine's profit by increasing the consumption of the game balls of the player. On the other hand, in the time variation during which the probability is high and the probability variation period, it is possible to give an opportunity to operate the motorized accessory 640a with the probability of 1 / 1.2, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance It is possible to increase the chance to enter 640r. Therefore, it is possible to set the gaming state advantageous to the player by suppressing the consumption of the game ball of the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play more time games.

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the motorized accessory 640a is opened (opened operation) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the motorized role object 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened. Further, if the value of the normal random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second ball entrance 640r is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long time.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the high probability normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  If the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) As the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed, the electrically operated accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the second right ball inlet 640r Since the open period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second right ball entry port 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second right ball inlet 640r is opened only for “two seconds × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) , And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the cancellation of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power interruption. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 255), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 221) and the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221 (b)) described above. In addition to the ordinary hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, a program, and the like in addition to the above.

  FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the pre-reading process (Z320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the winning command table 202e determines the determination result such as the variation pattern or the like at which the stored holding ball is selected at the start of variation It is a table for determining the prize-winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 225, when the lottery result in the pre-reading is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the jackpot type to be determined and the variation pattern type to be selected is determined. As a result, it is possible to notify not only the variation pattern type and the success / failure determination result but also the jackpot type by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. In addition, when the lottery result is out, the winning command corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type is decided. It is to be noted that the variation pattern type, outliers A, outliers A and outliers B, are all outliers, and the same prize command “C100” is set in the prize command table 202e.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, opening number counter 203g, long time opening flag 203i, time saving middle counter 203j, variation execution It has a flag 203k, a probability change flag 203m, a large hit middle flag 203n, a change order storage area 203p, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In the vacant area of), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see Z205 of FIG. 33).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35) . The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the holding ball based on winning in the second right ball entry port 640r, and the other configuration is the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 controls the main control device according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls of the variable display which is suspended at 110. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the number of balls stored in the actual variable display has deviated, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

  When the ball passes either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 252 Z 503: No).

  The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening number of the motorized accessory 64c. The open time counter 203h is a counter for counting the open time of the motorized accessory 64c.

  The long time release flag 203i is a flag indicating that a long time is in progress. The long time release flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In addition, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (Z106: Figure 250), when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game is executed for a long time, the fluctuation of the next normal symbol is started Is set to off.

  The hour-time counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 23 j is 0. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203 j is set to zero, and a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control unit 110, and a value according to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot Be done. That is, when it becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the value according to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many the value of the time-and-time middle counter 203 j is.

  The fluctuation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the fluctuation of the first special symbol or to execute the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the variation is started in accordance with the order in which the first entrance 64 and the right second entrance 640r are entered (the order stored and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the holding ball is started, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (Z204: FIG. 245) It is determined whether the next stored variation corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the order data of the hold storage stored in the change order storage area 203p, which will be described later. Then, according to the determination result, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

  The probability change flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability change gaming state. If it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 (the probability variation flag 203m) Z1111: No) is set to on. Further, in the processing of Z220 in the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the variation display of the special symbol that is a big hit is stopped.

  The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is a jackpot game. The jackpot flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of Z1114 of the jackpot control processing (Z256: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to be off when the jackpot game end timing comes.

  The fluctuation order storage area 203p is an area in which the holding order is stored when the gaming ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second right entrance 640r and is stored as a holding ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbol is configured to be executed in the order of being stored pending, and one of the special symbols is not executed with priority. Further, in the present control example, the distribution device 700 is configured to be alternately distributed to the first entrance 64 and the second right entrance 640r, so that the fluctuation is started in the order of storage and storage Therefore, even in the special symbol variation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed, and only one of the holding balls is digested, so that the holding ball of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

  In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, storage data and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but the details are omitted.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 displays a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, reserve lid color change selection table 222f, lucky reserve command table 222g, background mode selection table 222h, reserve character selection table 222i, reserve character change table 222j, balloon selection table 222k, in-reach effect lottery table 222m, reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky holding lottery table 222p are stored.

  The variation pattern selection table 222 a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, respectively, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine 1 fluctuation pattern.

  The pending change selection table 222b determines whether or not the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be displayed variably based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the contents of the change It is a selection table for acquiring various pending change values.

  FIG. 227 (a) schematically shows the contents of the hold change selection table 222b. In the pending change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is distributed with respect to the type of the received winning command, and a display for changing the pending symbol of the sub display area Ds with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The mode (see FIG. 211 (a)) and the pending change value are set. The details of the obtained hold change value will be described in the hold effect mode selection table 222c described later.

  Specifically, when the winning command type is out, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 180", the display mode of the holding symbol is not changed from the normal holding symbol. Is determined, and the pending change value gets 0. When the value of the effect counter 223 h is any of “181 to 198”, the display mode of the holding symbol is variable from the white round symbol (the normal holding symbol display mode) to the blue round symbol (change A) It is determined that the pending change value is 1.

  If the winning command type is out of the normal reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. In the case of any of "51 to 100", change A is determined, and a pending change value of 1 is acquired. In the case of any one of "101 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed into the green circle symbol and displayed, and the holding change value is 2.

  If the winning command type is out of the super reach, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 30", no change is determined, and the hold change value of 0 is acquired. In the case of any of “31 to 90”, the change A is determined, and the pending change value acquires “1”. In the case of any of “91 to 198”, change B is determined, and the pending change value of 2 is acquired.

  If the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 20", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. In the case of any of “21 to 90”, change A is determined, and the pending change value acquires “1”. In the case of any of “91 to 198”, change B is determined, and the pending change value of 2 is acquired.

  When the winning command type is the super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of “0 to 10”, no change is determined, and the hold change value is “0”. In the case of any of “11 to 100”, change A is determined, and the pending change value acquires “1”. In the case of any of “101 to 189”, the change B is determined, and the pending change value of 2 is acquired. In the case of any of "190 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed into the red circle symbol to be displayed, and the holding change value of 3 is acquired.

  In this way, by receiving the prize command, the color of the holding symbol is changed and displayed depending on the content thereof, so that not only the special symbol in the variable display but also the holding symbol being displayed is held and stored. It is possible to predict the success or failure judgment result corresponding to the holding symbol. In addition, the player can be informed in advance that the reach display mode will be displayed when the variable B is displayed in a variable manner, so that even if the special symbol changes, the pending storage is performed. For example, the player can be expected to start the fluctuation, and even if the fluctuation of the special symbol falling off during that time is executed, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting the hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via different execution effects even with the same hold change, and the player can be surprised by the effect. It is possible to attract.

  The holding effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared in accordance with the holding change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 227 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the holding effect mode selection table 222c, the holding effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the holding change value acquired in the holding change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the hold change value is “0”, the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the normal mode, when the number of holding balls is 4 or more in the case where all the holding symbols being displayed are not changed (state), the interval between the holding symbol and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is one. This is a mode displayed in a variable manner (see FIG. 210 (b)).

  When the hold change value is one of “1 to 2”, the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the advance notice A mode, when any change (any of change A to change C) is set to the holding symbol being displayed (state), the number of holding balls is 4 or more, the hold This is a hold effect mode in which there is no space between the display range of the symbol and the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 211 (a)). Note that FIG. 211 (a) is not strictly a display mode representing the advance notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a hold effect mode of a notice B mode to be described later. In the advance notice A mode, the contents of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 211 (a) are different. In the advance notice A mode, when the holding ball is generated later than the holding symbol whose color is changed and the holding symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is not displayed accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 211 (a) A comment that indicates the expectation to jackpot for the color-changed holding symbol that is made variable display P from which the character of 5 is put in the display) by increasing (generating) the holding ball by 1 unit The display is performed by a balloon. In this manner, in the advance notice A mode, after the color of the holding symbol is changed, in order to play the game so as to generate the holding ball, each time the holding ball is generated, the jackpot against the variable holding ball is generated Is configured to notify the degree of expectation of

  When the hold change value is “3”, the notice B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where there is a change in the holding symbol being displayed, and when the number of holding balls is 4 or more, any change to the holding symbol being displayed (the change A as in the notice A mode) , When any of change B and change C) is set (state) and the number of holding balls is 4 or more, the display range between the holding symbol and the variable lid pattern P is displayed without a gap Or (see FIG. 211 (a)), it is a mode in which the holding symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid pattern P (see FIG. 211 (b)).

  By configuring in this way, the display range of the variable lid pattern P can be variously changed not only by changing the color of the holding symbol but also by increasing or decreasing the number of holding balls. The fun to do is spread and it is possible to attract the player. Also, unlike the advance notice A mode, this is a hold effect that causes the player to play a game so as not to generate the hold ball any more, and allows the player to interrupt the game (playing operation of the game ball) and the color is variable. It is possible to concentrate on the start of the variation (dynamic display) of the special symbol corresponding to the held symbol and increase the expectation. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The holding lid range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring holding lid range values necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

  Here, special effects performed in the normal mode will be described. In the normal mode, short-term winning effects, on-reach on-hold effects and lucky on-hold effects are provided as special effects.

  The short-term winning prize effect is an effect that is executed when the required time from the state where the number of holding balls is zero to the number of holding balls being stored after the number being zero is less than 5 seconds, it is normal. In the mode, the interval between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is set to be one holding ball (the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. 212 (a) The number of the holding lid symbol P is changed and displayed so that the interval between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is two as shown, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is an effect that a comment “early” is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the gaming state is the normal state, other special effects are not executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of holding balls increases from 0 to 1 or more In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of holding balls reaches 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time passes 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 267) And the execution is started (see FIG. 212 (a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223 q passes 5 seconds, 0 is set in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 270), and the execution is terminated It is.

  Hold effect during reach is an effect of setting a notice display mode prompting the player to play a game so as to accumulate the hold number to a predetermined number (for example, six pieces in FIG. 215A) during reach fluctuation. . In the on-reach on-hold effect, when the change type is reach, whether or not to execute is lottery based on the on-reach effect lottery table 222 m to be described later, and on the other hand, the reach start time to be described later is calculated. The value of the holding effect start timer 223r set based on the fluctuation type by the table 222n becomes 0 after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If the special effect status storage area 223n has not been set (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) (see FIG. 215A). It is an effect that ends at the end of the change.

  With the lucky holding effect, the number of holdings in the case where the holding ball (holding symbol) is stored (displayed) is stored, and when the big hit (specific determination result), the big holding ball that became the big hit A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 216 (a)) is displayed in the holding symbol display area corresponding to the stored number of holdings at the time of entering the ball entrance, and the holding ball is stored to that mark symbol This is an effect of displaying a notice display mode for prompting the player to play a game. When the reserved symbol is stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), pressing the frame button 22 causes the current gaming state (probable variation gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming) An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In lucky reserve production, the value of the number of holding balls when other special effects are not executed (value of special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and it becomes big hit with the result of the qualification judgment that started in the past, Is stored when the lucky retention memory value 223p, which is stored when the value is 5 or more, whether the execution is lottery based on the lucky holding lottery table 222p described later and the execution becomes possible The execution is started by setting the value of the special effect status storage area 223n to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261) (see FIG. 216A), and the effect is ended when the next change starts.

  As described above, even in the normal mode in which there is no hold change, the hold effect relating to the hold symbol is determined by the time interval of the start winning, the number of balls held during reach change, and the result of the judgment of success or failure by the start start in the past. Various effects can be provided and memory effects can be enhanced by memory contents and the like.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the holding lid range selection table 222d. In the reserve lid range selection table 222 d, a normal reserve lid range selection table 222 d 1, a notice A mode reserve lid range selection table 222 d 2, a notice B mode reserve lid range selection table 222 d 3, a short term prize reserve lid range selection table 222 d 4, during reach effect A reserve lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving reserve lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

  The normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal holding lid range selection table 222 d 1. The normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 acquires a holding lid range value with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls. In the case of the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the gaming state is the normal state (the low probability gaming state Holding lid range value is acquired in the case of obtaining the holding lid range value in the gaming state)) (see Z2354 in FIG. 263) and in the lucky holding effect (when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3) (FIG. 263) See Z2346)).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is “0 to 3”, the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “4”, the holding lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “3”, the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “2”, 1 is obtained for the holding lid range value. When the value of the number of holding balls is “1”, the holding lid range value of 0 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “0”, “0” is acquired as the holding lid range value.

  The notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 228 (c) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2. In the advance notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is “0 to 3”, the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “4”, the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “3”, the holding lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “2”, the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “1”, 1 is obtained for the holding lid range value. When the value of the number of holding balls is “0”, “0” is acquired as the holding lid range value.

  The notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice B mode.

  FIG. 228 (d) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3, the holding lid range value is acquired for the value (range) of the number of holding balls and the value (range) of the holding notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is "0 to 4", when the value of the holding notification counter is "0 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the holding ball number is "5 to 8", when the value of the holding notification counter is "1 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired and the value of the holding notification counter is "5" If the hold lid range value is 3 and the hold notification counter value is “6”, the hold lid range value is 2 and the hold notification counter value is “7”, When the holding lid range value is 1, and the value of the holding notification counter is “8”, the holding lid range value is 0.

  The short-term winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229 (a)) is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the short-term winning effect is performed. FIG. 229 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4. With respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls, the holding lid range value is acquired (see Z2342 in FIG. 263) in the short-term winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is “4”, the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is "5", 1 is acquired for the holding lid range value. When the value of the number of holding balls is "6 to 8", the holding lid range value of 0 is acquired.

  Reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 is a table used for acquiring the pending lid range value in the case of the on-reach pending effect. FIG. 229 (b) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during reach effect. During the reach effect, the holding lid range selection table 222d5 acquires a holding lid range value for the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 263).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is “0 to 8”, the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired.

  The special effect is not being executed (time of special effect status storage area 223n is 0) in the time saving lid range selection table 222d6, the holding effect mode is normal mode and the gaming state is short time (time counter value is other than 0) It is a table used in order to acquire a reserve lid range value in.

  FIG. 229 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving cover lid selection table 222d6. The time saving cover lid selection table 222d6 acquires the holding lid range value (see Z2353 in FIG. 263) with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is “0 to 6”, the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is "7", 1 is acquired for the holding lid range value. When the value of the number of holding balls is "8", the holding lid range value of 0 is acquired.

  By configuring in this manner, the display range of the variable lid pattern P to be displayed is variously changed according to the on-off determination at the start winning or the on-hold effect switched according to the change type, for the player. Therefore, it is possible to express the stage effect that enhances the participation.

  The holding lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid design P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222d. Is a table used to select a command for

  FIG. 230 (a) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid command selection table 222e. The holding lid command selection table 222e sets a holding lid command to be transmitted to the display control device with respect to the holding lid range value (range) acquired by the holding lid range selection table 222d.

  Specifically, when the holding lid range value is “0”, the holding lid command BF00 is determined, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is the shortest display (see FIG. 214A). When the holding lid range value is “1”, the holding lid command BF01 is determined, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only in the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is “2”, the holding lid command BF02 is determined, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (areas of holding 7 to 8 (see FIG. 212 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "3", the holding lid command BF03 is determined, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (areas of holding 6 to 8 (see FIG. 213 (a))). When the holding lid range value is “4”, the holding lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid design P is 4 (areas of holding 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211 (a))).

  The setting of the hold lid command is performed in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the start winning, and is executed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. Storage lid setting processing (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting the display holding lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) based on the holding lid range value each time the number of holding balls changes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 211 (a), the holding lid color change selection table 222f indicates that the advance presentation effect that suggests not to increase the held number shown in FIG. 211 (a) is being executed. When a holding ball generate | occur | produces beyond 4 pieces, it is a data table for discriminate | determining the holding lid pattern P corresponding to the area | region where the holding symbol is displayed. The storage lid pattern P determined in the storage lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally a black frame and a white inside with transparency, and a number indicating the number of storages corresponding to the storage display area is displayed inside) The display mode is changed and displayed in a specific color (internal color is transparent green). In the reserve lid color change selection table 222f, the secondary display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the reserve announcement counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the color-retained reserve symbol to be described later and the current number of reserve balls. It is a table which selects the command for setting the range of the color change of the holding lid pattern P displayed on the area | region Ds.

  FIG. 230 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid color change selection table 222f. In the reserve lid color change selection table 222f, when the reserve effect mode is the notice B mode, a color change range is designated for the value (range) of the reserve notification counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of balls reserved. Set a holding lid command to change the display range of the variable lid pattern P from green to green (see (b) in FIG. 211) according to the change range (see Z 2348 in FIG. 263) Do.

  Specifically, when the value of the hold notification counter 223g is any of "0 to 4", if the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 4", the hold lid command is Not set, there is no color change range. When the value of the number of holding balls is "5", the holding lid command BF10 is determined, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of holding balls is five. When the value of the number of holding balls is “6”, the holding lid command BF 11 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the region of the number of holding balls 5 to 6. When the value of the number of holding balls is “7”, the holding lid command BF 12 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the region of the number of holding balls 5 to 7. When the value of the number of holding balls is “8”, the holding lid command BF 13 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the region of five to eight holding balls.

  When the value of the hold notification counter 223 g is “5”, the hold lid command is not set when the value of the hold ball number is “5”, and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of holding balls is “5”, the holding lid command BF 20 is determined, and the color change range is designated by the region where the number of holding balls is six.

  When the value of the number of holding balls is “6”, the holding lid command BF 21 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the region of the number of holding balls 6 to 7. When the value of the number of holding balls is “7”, the holding lid command BF 22 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the region of the number of holding balls 6 to 8.

  When the value of the holding advance notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the holding ball number is "6", the holding lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of holding balls is “7”, the holding lid command BF 30 is determined, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of holding balls is seven. When the value of the number of holding balls is “8”, the holding lid command BF 31 is determined, and the color change range is designated in the range of the number of holding balls 7 to 8.

  When the value of the hold notification counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of holding balls is "8", the holding lid command BF 40 is determined, and the color change range is designated by the region where the number of holding balls is eight.

  When the value of the hold notification counter 223g is "8", the hold lid command is not set when the value of the hold ball number is "8", and there is no color change range.

  As described above, it is possible to further increase the attention to the player by changing the display mode in the area different from the holding symbol changed by the judgment (pre-reading judgment) of the success / failure judgment result in the previous winning. At the same time, it is possible for the player to freely enjoy the degree of the number of holding balls depending on whether or not to stop the launch, thereby widely enjoying the mode of the holding symbol and the subsequent fluctuation advance presentation effect.

  The lucky reservation command table 222 g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable lid design P displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of target holding balls.

  FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky reserve command table 222g, when lucky reserve effect is being performed, the area of the target number of pending balls is stored by the lucky reserve memory value 223p, and the display reserve lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 261) See Z2306).

  Specifically, when the lucky reserve storage value 223p is 5, the reserve lid command FB50 is determined, and the region of 5 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserve storage value 223p is 6, the reserve lid command FB51 is determined, and the area 6 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled (see FIG. 216 (a)). When the lucky reserve storage value 223p is 7, the reserve lid command FB 52 is determined, and the area 7 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled. When the lucky reserve storage value 223p is 8, the reserve lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of 8 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled.

  In this way, by notifying the number of holding balls for which the success or failure judgment result is a big hit in the previous start winning, the interest of the game is enhanced, and at the same time the number of holding balls is small (less than 5). It can work to urge to win a prize, and it is possible to realize the effect of improving the operation.

  The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected for the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

  Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is The background C (river background) is determined when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, and the background D (city background) is determined when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3. .

  The reserved character selection table 222i is based on the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode and the effect counter 223h. Is a table for selecting (determining).

  FIG. 232 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222 i. The holding character selection table 222i holds the holding characters for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the holding effect mode stored in the holding effect mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The contents of are set (see Z2363 in FIG. 264). The reserved character is a girl whose J0 has a short hair (see FIG. 210 (b)), a girl whose J1 has a hair cut (see FIG. 213 (a)), and a girl whose J2 has a long hair (see FIG. 213 (b) ), J3 is an image that can be easily identified by the player, such as a long-haired blonde girl (not shown).

  Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 210 (b)) is determined as a reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 213A) is determined as a reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213 (b)) is determined as a reserved character. When the holding effect mode is the "notice A mode" or the "notice B mode", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the holding character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as a reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as a reserved character.

  When the background mode is any of “background B”, “background C”, and “background D”, when the hold effect mode is “normal mode”, the value of the effect counter 223 h is “0 to 150”. In any case, J0 is determined as a reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as a reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as a reserved character. When the holding effect mode is the "notice A mode" or the "notice B mode", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the holding character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as a reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as a reserved character.

  As described above, by determining the reserved characters with high degree of expectation by the difference between the holding effect mode changed from the start winning combination and the background, the display mode of the high expected degree of holding effect is obtained without impairing the atmosphere of the background effect. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize the high-predictive notice with a high degree of change by combining the change content of the hold symbol and the change of the hold character.

  In addition, having acquired the symbols and characters to which the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 have been given during the game, the number of times of variation executed, the number of big hits, the number of times of super reach execution, and the game effect The history information such as the number of points obtained by the above may be stored, and the selected character may be varied in consideration of the history information. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to change the character to be selected as the game is played, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Further, an RTC (real time clock) may be provided so as to vary the character selected according to the date and time information and the like. By configuring in this manner, the character to be selected can be varied as time passes after the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, and it is possible to suppress the problem of being bored with playing a game.

  The held character change table 222j displays the contents of the held character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the background, the held effect mode, the current held character and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on.

  FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The reserved character selection table 222i has a background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, a reserved rendering mode stored in the reserved rendering mode storage area 223m, the current reserved character in the display mode, and the value of the rendering counter 223h. The content of the reserved character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the number of balls held is the upper limit and the start winning is achieved and the over winning is achieved (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 264). . Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is identical to the currently displayed character, the reserved character is changed. It becomes an aspect which is not (variable).

  Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the holding effect mode is "normal mode", when the current holding character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is " In the case of any of 0 to 180 ", J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214 (b)) is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the holding effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", if the current holding character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 80" , J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  When the background mode is "background B", "background C", or "background D", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", the current hold character is "J0". When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the holding effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", if the current holding character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50" , J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as a reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

  In this manner, the player can have a means to confirm the pass / fail result in the current number of balls held by changing over the winning character by the over winning, thereby raising interest in the game. it can. In addition, the character to be changed has a higher expectation for the character after the change than before the change, and when the hold effect mode is other than the normal mode, the change rate of the character to be held is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the holding effect mode, the player can have a means for knowing the result of the pass / fail judgment through the means for intentionally generating the over winning, and it is possible to provide a game feature that enhances the operation. It becomes.

  In the balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 211 (a)) displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  FIG. 234 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. In the balloon selection table 222k, a normal balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, a reach effect balloon selection table 222k5, a lucky storage balloon selection table 222k6, A time shortening balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. Further, the balloon content to be set is the content of the comment display emitted by the reserved character in the character display area C.

  In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the holding effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210B) and the gaming state is the normal state. , It is a table used to acquire the balloon content.

  FIG. 234 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the balloon content is acquired (see Z2393 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is any of “0 to 4”, the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the value of the number of holding balls is “5”. In this case, YES is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "6", two more balloon contents are obtained, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of holding balls is “8”, MAX (see FIG. 214 (a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

  The notice A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211 (a)).

  FIG. 234 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A balloon selection table 222k2, the balloon content is acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls and the determination result of the prize information command.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 3", the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "4", the result of the judgment of success or failure is In the case of a hit, the balloon content is throbbing, and in the case of a gap, the balloon content is a throbbing. When the value of the number of holding balls is "5", if the result of the judgment is "yes", the balloon contents are expected to be obtained with expectation, and if out of order, they are obtained with expectation. If the value of the number of holding balls is "6", if the result of the judgment of success is a hit, the balloon contents have an expectation of 70%? In the case of outliers, the balloon content is 60% expected? Is acquired. When the value of the number of holding balls is “7”, if the result of the judgment of success is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected 80%? In the case of outliers, the balloon content is expected 70%? Is acquired. If the value of the number of holding balls is "8", if the result of the judgment of success is a hit, the contents of the balloon are extremely hot! In the case of getting out and out of place, what happens to the balloon content! Is acquired.

  Although configured in this manner, the advance notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of holding balls and the success / failure determination result of the winning information command. Furthermore, it is good also as an effect which expresses various feelings of expectation.

  The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211 (b)).

  FIG. 234 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222k3, the balloon content is acquired (see Z2388 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls and the value (range) of the holding effect counter.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is acquired as it is (see FIG. 211 (a)), and the value of the number of holding balls is "5" If the value of the hold effect counter is “0 to 4”, the balloon content is OVER (see FIG. 211 (b)), and the value of the hold effect counter is “5”. In the case where the balloon content is STOP, and the value of the number of holding balls is "6", the balloon content is OVER if the value of the holding effect counter is any of "0 to 5". Acquired, when the value of the holding effect counter is "6", the balloon content is obtained STOP, and when the value of the holding ball number is "7", the value of the holding effect counter is "0 to 6" In either case, the balloon content is OVER, and the hold effect counter There the case of "7", balloon contents STOP is determined, if the value of the pending cell count is "8", balloon contents MAX is obtained.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the winning combination when the change of the holding symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs by the balloon content, and continue the launch more than the value of the current number of holding balls and hold the number of holding balls. It is possible to inform the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, and it is possible to suppress the generation of useless launch and to play the game efficiently. Also, even when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the balloon content may be changed to continue the launch.

  The short-term winning combination balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon in the case of short-term winning (see FIG. 212 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, the balloon content is acquired (see Z2382 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is "4", the balloon content is early! (See FIG. 212 (a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "5", the balloon content is very early! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "6", the balloon content is very fast! Is acquired, and when the value of the number of holding balls is "7", the balloon content is the speed of sound! ! Is acquired, and if the value of the number of holding balls is "8", the balloon content is fast! ! ! Is acquired.

  By this configuration, the interval between the start winnings is short, and the player can recognize the degree of increase in the number of holding balls by the balloon of the holding character, and the effect can be enhanced.

  During reach effect, the balloon selection table 222k5 is a table used to acquire the balloon content in the case of reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 235 (b) schematically shows the content of the balloon selection table 222k5 during reach effect. During the reach effect, the balloon selection table 222k5 acquires the balloon content (Z2384 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the holding effect counter and the value (range) of the number of holding balls.

  Specifically, when the value of the holding effect counter is "0", and the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is stored up to 6! (See FIG. 215 (a)) is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, "7 to 8 In any case, OVER is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the holding effect counter 223h is "other than 0", the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 4". , Save up to six balloon content! Is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is well done (see FIG. 215 (b)), and "7 In the case of any one of “8” to “8”, the balloon content acquires OVER.

  By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the reserved character during the reach effect, when the number of balls held is small, it is possible to urge launch, and in the reach effect during the holding effect, the balloon is You can change and play games without getting bored.

  The lucky on hold balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the contents of balloon in the case of a lucky on hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)).

  FIG. 236 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. A lucky reserve storage value 223p in which a value corresponding to the reserve ball value is set as the number of lucky reserve balls in the lucky reserve balloon selection table 222k6 when the success or failure determination result of winning in the past becomes a big hit (see Z2444 of Z268). The balloon content is acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value of, the value of the number of holding balls (range), and the value of the holding change value (range).

  Specifically, when the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is "5", the reserve change value is "0 to 3" when the value of the number of reserve balls is any of "0 to 4". In any case, the balloon content is aimed at 5 and when the value of the number of holding balls is "5", when the holding change value is "0", OK is acquired for the balloon content, If the hold change value is one of “1 to 2”, GOOD is obtained for the balloon contents, and if the hold change value is “3”, the balloon contents are obtained well but the number of balls held When the value of is one of "6 to 8", the balloon content is OVER when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3".

  When the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is "6", when the value of the number of reserve balls is any of "0 to 5", the case of the reserve change value is any one of "0 to 3" The balloon content is aimed at 6 (see FIG. 216 (a)), and when the value of the number of holding balls is "6", the balloon content is OK if the holding change value is "0". If the hold change value is “1 to 2”, the balloon content is determined as GOOD, and if the hold change value is “3”, the balloon content is obtained although it is well done. When the value of the number of holding balls is "7 to 8", the balloon content is OVER if the holding change value is any of "0 to 3".

  When the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is "7", when the value of the number of reserve balls is any of "0 to 6", the case of the reserve change value is any one of "0 to 3" If the aim of the balloon content is 7 and the value of the number of balls held is “7”, the balloon content is “OK” if the hold change value is “0”, and the hold change value is “7”. In the case of any one of “1 to 2”, GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is “3”, although the balloon content is well done, the value for the number of holding balls is “8 In the case of “1”, when the hold change value is any of “0 to 3”, the balloon content is OVER.

  When the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is "8", when the value of the number of reserve balls is any of "0 to 7", the case of the reserve change value is any one of "0 to 3" If the aim of the balloon content is 8 and the value of the number of holding balls is “8”, the balloon content is “OK” if the hold change value is “0”, and the hold change value is “8”. In the case of any of 1 to 2 ", GOOD is acquired as the balloon content, and when the hold change value is" 3 ", the balloon content is acquired although it is well done.

  In this manner, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of holding balls to be won by changing the content of the balloon by changing the number of lucky holding balls. In this way, if the result of the judgment of the number of balls held for starting and winning is a winning result within the range of 5 to 8 with hold, the display mode of lucky hold can be updated, and without getting tired The game can be continued.

  The special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the time-saving balloon selection table 222k6 is in the normal mode with the hold effect mode and the time-saving state (other than 0 in the time counter). It is a table used to acquire the balloon content.

  FIG. 236 (b) schematically shows the short time balloon selection table 222k7. In the time-shortening balloon selection table 222k7, the balloon content is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (Z2392 in FIG. 265).

  Specifically, when the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 5", the balloon content is inserted up to 6 (see FIG. 212 (b)) and the number of holding balls is "6 to 7" In any case, the balloon content is OK.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify of the optimum number of holding balls in a short time, and the player can grasp the transition situation of the number of holding balls by the notification mode. If the situation of the optimum number of holding balls can be maintained, it will be possible to avoid the occurrence of over winning that the start winning is over the upper limit of the number of holding balls and the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and becomes standby state and time efficiency is poor. It can be a judgment standard that can be played efficiently.

  The on-reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the on-hold on-hold display effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  FIG. 237 (a) schematically shows the contents of the in-reach effect lottery table 222m. In the on-reach effect lottery table 222m, it is determined whether or not the on-reach on-hold effect can be performed with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (Refer to Z2324 in FIG. 262.) Specifically, in the case where the value of the effect counter 223h is “0 to 99” when the value of the number of holding balls is any of “0 to 3”, during reach. The display of the hold effect is not performed, and in the case of “100 to 199”, the display of the on-reach hold effect is possible. When the value of the number of holding balls is "4 to 5", when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the display of the on-reach holding effect is not performed, and "141 to 199" In the case of "", it is possible to display the on-reach hold effect. When the value of the number of holding balls is any of "6 to 8", when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the display of the on-reach holding effect is not performed. As described above, by setting the ratio at which the on-reach holding effect is displayed when the holding ball number is small, the effect of prompting the player to save the holding is performed when the holding amount is low.

  The reach start time calculation table 222 n is a reach pattern in the change pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode to be executed (display mode in which the symbols of the left and right symbol rows are stopped with the same third symbol). It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) which starts holding production during reach in time (period) used as a display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, a hold effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the on-reach hold effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) acquired by the on-reach effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 215 (a)).

  FIG. 237 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n is set by the hold effect start timer based on the change type when it is determined that the on hold effect during reach obtained by the on-reach effect lottery table 222m is executable (FIG. 262). See Z2326).

  Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach jackpot A, the holding effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot A, the holding effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, If the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the hold production start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and if the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the variation type is super If the reach jackpot D is, the hold production start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and if the fluctuation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold production start timer is determined to be 20000 ms, and the fluctuation type is the normal reach out A In this case, the hold effect start timer is 10000 m There is determined, if the change type is normal reach out B are pending effect start timer is determined 10000ms, when the variation type is normal reach out C is pending effect start timer 10000ms is determined.

  In the lucky on hold lottery table 222p, on the basis of the number of holding balls and the effect counter 223h, it is acquired whether or not the lucky on-hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) is executable. FIG. 237 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky on-hold lottery table 222p. With respect to the value of the number of balls held and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h, the lucky holding lottery table 222p acquires the possibility of executing the lucky holding effect (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

  Specifically, when the value of the number of holding balls is any of "0 to 2", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 99", execution of lucky holding effect is performed Is not performed, and in the case of any of "100 to 199", it is possible to execute a lucky holding effect. When the value of the number of holding balls is "3 to 4", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the execution of the lucky holding effect is not performed, " In the case of any of 190 to 199 ", it is possible to execute a lucky holding effect. When the value of the number of holding balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the execution of the lucky holding effect is not performed. As described above, by setting the ratio of performing the lucky holding effect to a high value when the number of holding balls is small, an effect that urges the player to store the holding when the holding is small is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Prize information storage area 223f, hold notification counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW effective time counter 223k, hold effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky hold storage value 223p, short-term winning A timer 223 q, a hold effect start timer 223 r, a sensor effective time counter 223 s, a touch counter 223 t, and other memory areas 223 z are provided at least.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the first one held in the main control device 110 A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting count) of variation effects for special symbols up to four times for each type of special symbol, and the number of pending balls when receiving a prize information command or when receiving a variation pattern command is Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a. If the winning information command has been received with a counter that counts the number of balls held (number of waits) for the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control unit 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, It is updated in accordance with the timing at which the number of balls on hold increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 You can not get the value. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the start winning combination is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted. When being, it sends to the voice lamp control device 113 a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, The values can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b after storage, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 holding The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the holding ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223 b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is the main While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 or the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and the third symbol is displayed. It is turned off when the variable display setting on the display device 81 is made (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See Z 2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The prize information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first to fourth areas) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first to fourth) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected in the main controller 110, the special hit random number counter C1, which is acquired according to the start winning, From the values of the special hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1, various information (hit or miss, big hit type in the case of a big hit, change pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed Various information predicted (estimated) in main controller 110 and the predicted various information is notified from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information Are stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the four areas (first area to ...) corresponding to the type (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) of the entrance where the extracted winning information has detected entry. Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control unit 110 determines various information (a big hit type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a variation pattern) obtained when a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed. Although the configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the sound lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a starting winning combination occurs, various information which is predicted corresponding to the starting winning combination is already stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. In addition to the setting means for setting a prize information command, and when the prize information command is received, it is included in various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223f and the received prize information command It is good also as composition provided with a judgment means which judges whether various information (winning information) agrees. As a result, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223 f is stored appropriately.

  Also, in the first control example, a winning information command is set when a new start winning occurs, and the configuration is used to notify the voice lamp control device 113, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). For example, storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the start winning timing, (For example, every 5 seconds), when gaming conditions are variable (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state, or when the big hit game starts or ends), or the variation start of the special symbol (or At the time of stop), a configuration may be used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of a winning information command stored in the storage means. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called, pre-reading effect) using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f.

  In this control example, based on each piece of prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change of the display color of the holding symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this manner, by executing various effects (pre-reading effects) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified to each holding ball before the variable display is started. We can have a sense of expectation to be a big hit. In addition, it is also possible to perform long-term effects using a plurality of variable display periods.

  When the hold notification counter 223g executes the change of the hold color of the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of hold numbers changes (the display position of the hold symbol where the hold ball is digested and the hold color is changed) Is a counter for determining the position of the holding symbol whose display color is changed. In the hold notification counter 223g, the value of the hold notification counter 223g is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case where there is a change in the holding symbol (other than 0 (Z2405: No)) the holding change value acquired from the variation type of the winning command of the special symbol received (Z 2403: YES) (see FIG. 211 (a)) The hold ball value is set to (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the value of the number of holding balls at the time of starting winning is 4 is, 4 is set as the holding notification counter 223g. The set suspension notice counter 223g was decremented by 1 at each variation start of the special symbol in the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the beginning of variation, and the value subtracted was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area is cleared (Z2226), whereby the above-described hold effect mode is set to the normal mode.

  The effect counter 223 h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Each time the main processing is executed, 1 is added and repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Specifically, in the selection table of various effects selected using the effect counter 223h, the hold change selection table 222b, the hold character selection table 222i (hold character), the hold character change table 222j (hold character), in reach There are an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not the on-reach hold effect can be executed), and a lucky on-hold lottery table 222p (whether or not the lucky on-hold effect can be executed), and various effects are selected by the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

  In addition, when performing these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to avoid synchronization between the effect counter 223h and other counters or the update period of the timer value, and the selection result is a partial It does not bias the selection results.

  The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and in which numerical values necessary for determining the background mode are stored. When switching the background display mode, it is determined in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (Z2107) whether or not the demonstration screen is displayed in the standby state (Z2801), and is determined to be in the standby state (Z2801: Yes) If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i are added by 1 and set (Z2804) When the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. In the background image, for example, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared such that the background A is a sea, the background B is a mountain, the background C is a river, and the background D is a city.

  The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting an effective time (effective period) in which the operation can be performed in the effect accompanied by the pressing of the frame button 22 performed during the change of the special symbol or the like. In the SW valid time counter 223k, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), when the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), a variation pattern accompanied by pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed. If it is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW valid time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. When the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and when the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW If the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), during the announcement effect (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (0 is set), and the notice display command for display Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

  The holding effect mode storage area 223m has information for determining a plurality of holding notification modes prepared according to the holding change when executing the notice effect concerning the holding symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is memorized.

  In the hold effect mode storage area 223m, the hold notification counter 223g is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case (Z 2403: Yes), the holding effect mode is set (Z 2404) according to the value (range) of the holding change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, and if the hold change value is "1-2", the notice A mode is set, and the hold change value is "3". For example, the notice B mode is set.

  The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223m is the value of the hold notification counter 223g which is decremented by 1 at each fluctuation start of the special symbol in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the fluctuation start of the special symbol. Is 0 (Z2225: YES), the on-hold effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the on-hold change value to 0 and clearing the on-hold effect mode storage area 223 m (Z2226).

  The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the hold effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, special effects include short-term winning effects (see FIG. 212 (a)), on-reach hold effects (see FIG. 215 (a)), and lucky hold effects (see FIG. 216 (a)). The special effect is executed according to the change of the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

  In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed upon reception of a winning command, the short-term winning effect is that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 when the gaming state is normal (Z2421: Yes) Yes (Z2422: Yes), short-term winning timer counting the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of holding balls for special symbols is 4 and the number of holding balls for special symbols is 4 (Z2423: Yes) When the value of is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts to be executed. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 in the short-term winning management process (Z2111) (Z2605: Yes) The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

  During reach holding effect is the reach pattern during the reach effect setting process (Z2228) during reach processing performed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol If the holding effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes) and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the on-reach effect drawing table 222m is displayed. If it is determined that the execution effect is permitted (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect start timer 223r is set based on the change type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327), the subsequent operation At time lapse, in the on-hold holding effect management process (Z2112), the holding effect start timer If 23r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), in announcement display setting command (Z2706) Succoth performing pending effect in reach, hold demonstration in reach begins execution. While the on-reach holding effect is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing (Z2707: Yes) at the end of the variation of the special symbol, and the on-reach holding effect is ended.

  When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the lucky storage effect is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), and the lucky storage value is stored. Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky on-hold lottery table 222p is judged to be acceptable (Z2305: Yes) (Z2307), and the lucky holding effect starts executing. While the lucky reserve effect is being executed, if the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation when the effect is started. The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky on-hold effect ends.

  The lucky reserve storage value 223p is determined to correspond to the reserve ball determined to be the big hit when it is determined that the success or failure determination result of the winning information command output at the timing of starting winning is determined as the big hit Is a storage area in which the value of the number of pending balls is stored. The lucky reserve memory value 223p is a lucky reserve memory process (Z2408) executed in the prize command reception process (Z2209) executed at the start winning case, and the lottery result of the prize is a big hit (Z2442: Yes) If the value of the number of holding balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of holding balls is set to the lucky holding storage value 223p (Z2444). Also, as described above, when the hold effect mode is lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set based on the lucky hold memory value 223p (see Z2306 in FIG. 261), and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216 (a)).

  The short-term winning timer 223 q is a timer for counting an elapsed time from when the value of the number of holding balls in the special symbol changes from 0 to 1 or more to 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223 q is set to 5 seconds as a timer value when the number of holding balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z 2601: Yes), and is other than 0 (Z 2601: No) until it becomes 0. The winning timer 223 q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the hold effect mode becomes the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), the short-term effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223 q becomes zero. As described above, by performing the short-term winning effect in the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter the period until the four wins (shorter), the longer the execution period of the short-term effect, the player You will be able to recognize the speed of the period required for winning four prizes.

  The short-term winning effect may be configured to be performed for a predetermined period (for example, three seconds) after winning four prizes. By doing this, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

  The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the on-reach hold effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) which is an effect on the hold symbol is executed during reach fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The holding effect start timer 223r is a within-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the fluctuation type of the special symbol is the reach fluctuation If there is (Yes in Z2321), the holding effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach presentation lottery table 222m If it is determined that the acquired execution effect is more acceptable (Z2325: Yes), the reach start time calculation table 222n sets a timer value (Z2326).

  When the timer value is set in the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 until the hold effect during reach is started in the reach hold effect management process (Z2112) ((2) If the holding effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted. Also, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), the other special effects are not performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes) By setting (Z2706) the display command for advance notification to perform holding effect during reach, the holding effect during reach starts to be executed.

  The sensor valid time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time when the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The sensor valid time counter 223s is notified when the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (Z2107). When the effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set to the advance effect is set to the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If it is not 0, the set sensor valid time counter 223s is decremented (Z2824), during which the touch sensor detection is valid. When the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. At (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2809).

  The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times the detection of the touch sensor 290 is on while the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (Z2107), the touch counter 223t detects the touch sensor 290. If it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 is added (Z2826), and if the added value is the upper limit (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (variation Control). The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that constitutes the control program In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the power-on main image (see FIG. 239). The third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. Judge the result, if it is "big hit of the special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped the fluctuation production Displayed for a fixed period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64, the power fluctuation image is displayed when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident in the area 235 b, and the images showing “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can.

  Referring back to FIG. 238, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 is generated, the variation display is started in the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boys" and "girls" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235 The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data previously resident in the symbol area 235e. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first ball entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric symbol becomes a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters a second entry If it becomes easy to enter the ball mouth 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get the expectation that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols given the numbers from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time rendering) according to the back surface type, the player of the background is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as the drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified along with the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 240) indicates the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 241 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 241).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on time image (power-on time main image and power-on time fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 276) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 276 (b), see Z3309). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later (see FIG. 242) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (Z3303 in FIG. 283) In (see), pointer update processing (see Z4305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233 f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 242), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, obtain the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see FIG. 283) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286) The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is performed, the process is performed (see Z4902 of FIG. 287).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process of Main Controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 243 to 256. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is changed to the RAM 203. In the corresponding buffer area of

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this embodiment, 299 respectively). , 99, 239), each clear to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 as well as processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z104), and thereafter, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed To do (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 290 and fires the ball, provided that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244, special symbol variation processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (Z104). This special symbol variation process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (Z201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium flag 203 n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big hit is in progress. As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the discrimination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z201: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are obtained (Z203) . After obtaining the value of each counter, the variation execution determination process is executed (Z204). In addition, although the detail of a fluctuation execution determination processing is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 245, in this fluctuation execution determination processing (Z204), the process in which the special symbol used as the order which changes next is discriminate | determined is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is the special view 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the change execution in the special view 1 (first special symbol) If it is, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z206), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set ( Z207). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 a of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing for starting variable display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary to start fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

  When it is determined in the process of Z205 that the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (Z204) is not the change execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (second special) It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is executed with the symbol) (Z210). If the special figure 2 is not changed (Z210: No), that is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a state in which the holding ball is not stored, the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), processing similar to processing about a holding ball of special symbol 1 mentioned above is performed about a holding ball of special symbol 2 above.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z211), and the holding ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation The number command is set (Z212). Among the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) described later stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 by the holding ball number command set here and executed by the MPU 201 , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 247.

  In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. To do (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or a special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. , Lottery of special symbol is done. More specifically, according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is determined is determined, and in the case of the jackpot of the first special symbol, according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. Whether the jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C is determined, and if it is the jackpot of the second special symbol, according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 jackpot A and It is determined whether to become jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 or jackpot C.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot becomes C, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of Z217 is finished, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (Z218). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (Z218: Yes), the big hit start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time saving counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). Thereafter, the big hit flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this processing is ended. That is, during the jackpot game, a low probability gaming state is set, and the power support gaming state (time saving gaming state) is also canceled and the non-power support gaming state is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), the value of the time counter 203j Is greater than or equal to 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving / midday counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the process of Z223 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the change execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). The variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display Based on the values of various counters stored in either execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (the variation effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the device 81 Is a process for determining whether to execute.

  In the fluctuation execution determination processing, first, the fluctuation execution flag 203k is set to off (value "0" as a value) to perform initialization (Z241), and data of the fluctuation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired Yes (Z 242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the special view 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is the special view 1 (Z244: Yes), the change execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special view 1 (Z245), and the process is ended.

  In the process of Z244, if the data of the execution area is not the fluctuation execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is judged whether the data of the execution area is the fluctuation execution in the special figure 2 (Z246) If the variable execution is performed (Z246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this processing is ended. If it is determined in the process of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not the fluctuation execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 change start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is the process for determining the production | presentation pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed by the.

  In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is obtained To do (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). The determination as to whether or not it is a definite variation period is performed by determining whether the positive variation flag 203m is on. The probability change flag 203m is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the variation is in progress (Z252: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special variation state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to the processing of Z253. In the processing of Z253, based on the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 221 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit Acquire (Z 253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As described above, 27 random numbers from "0 to 26" are set as random number values for the special symbols in the probability variation gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these When it matches with the random number which becomes a hit, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the processing shifts to the processing of Z255.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z252 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state of special symbol (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the processing of Z254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is hit or not is acquired based on the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 978 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. Three random numbers from "0" to "2" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value for the special random number counter C1 and the randomness for these hits are set. If the numbers match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the processing shifts to the processing of Z255.

  In the processing of Z255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z253 or Z254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a Determine whether it matches the judgment value that has been set) (Z255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 Set the display mode at the time of jackpot (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 are compared with the jackpot of the special symbol which has four types (big hit Of A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R big hit, 100 times saving time), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75" , Big hit B1 (16R positive odd odd symbol big hit), if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined big hit B2 (16R positive odd variable even hit pattern), "80 to 99" in the range If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is C (see FIG. 222 (b)).

  In the process of Z256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z257). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of Z 257, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal change pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the determined jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, if it is within the range of “normal reach” and “51 to 250” Determine the variation pattern of super reach.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol to notify of the result of the judgment of acceptance, and notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the determination of success or failure. In the main controller 110, even in the display mode of the outreach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the display mode of the out which is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappear normal reach", "disappear super reach", and "disappear special reach" ing. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, jackpot C common use, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z255 that the special symbol is out (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a The fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of outliers is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, super Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as reach.

  When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z275 or the process of Z259 is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214). The special symbol 2 change start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of "big hit of a special symbol" or "out of a special symbol" is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is the process for determining the production | presentation pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed by the

  In this special symbol 2 change start process (Z214), as in the special symbol 1 change start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b acquired by the process of Z271 first The values of the per-random number counter C1 and the special per-class counter C2 are acquired (Z271).

  Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in a definite variation period (high probability gaming state) (Z272) If it is determined that a false variation period is in progress (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol Since it is a definite change state, it shifts to processing of Z273. In the process of Z273, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 958 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As mentioned above, 27 pieces of "0-26" are set as a random number which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number which becomes these hits are matched In this case, it is determined that it is a jackpot of a special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the processing shifts to the processing of Z275.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z272 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the definite variation state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is hit is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value of 978 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. Three random numbers from "0" to "2" are set as random numbers that will be the big wins for the special symbol, and the special symbol is the special symbol if the value of the special random number counter C1 matches the random number for these hits. It is determined that the jackpot of. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the processing shifts to the processing of Z275.

  In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is the jackpot of the special symbol (Z275), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (Z275: Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the big hit of the four types of special symbols (big hit Of A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), it is determined what jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that the jackpot A (16R big hit, 100 times saving time), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87" , Big hit B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol big hit), if it is in the range of "88-91", it is determined big hit B2 (16R positive variation even symbol big hit), in the range of "92-99" If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is C (see FIG. 222 (c)).

  In the process of Z276, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z277). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third pattern display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal change pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the determined jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 50”, if it is within the range of “normal reach” and “51 to 250” Determine the variation pattern of super reach.

  In the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol to notify of the result of the judgment of acceptance, and notifies the sound lamp control unit 113 of the fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the variation time and the result of the determination of success or failure. In the main controller 110, even in the display mode of the outreach, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to the display mode of the out which is not the reach display mode as long as the change time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappear normal reach", "disappear super reach", and "disappear special reach" ing. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, jackpot C common use, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

  When it is determined in the process of Z275 that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a The fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of outliers is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as reach.

  When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of Z277 or the process of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (Z105). The start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not the first ball entry 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (Z302) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (Z303).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (Z301: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (Z303: No), the over winning combination information command is set (Z304), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z309. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, the first special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 a of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Are stored in the first of the free storage areas (storage area 1 to storage area 4) of the special symbol 1 storage ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding area 1 is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the pending area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the pending area 4 is set to the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the lowermost position of the variation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the prefetch process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes of Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning on the first entrance 64 has won on the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640r. Since the same process is executed only by changing to the process for the event, the detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second right ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, each value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is also stored as a holding ball. It is acquired and memorize | stored in the vacant reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the special hit random number counter C1 similar to the first special symbol also for the second special symbol based on entering the ball into the second right entrance ball hole 640r or the second entrance ball opening 640, the special hit type counter By acquiring each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3 and variation type selection counter CS1, since it is possible to execute lottery using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, with the first special symbol Even with the second special symbol, the hit probability can be made constant.

  After the process of Z308 or the process of Z316 is performed, the prefetch process (Z320) is performed. The details of the pre-reading process (Z320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 249 as described above, but to the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r, the second entrance 640 Based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the ball, processing of determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the ball entry, but may be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the hit / not determination at the time of entering the ball can be obtained, and a counter not involved in the hit / off determination can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, prefetch processing (Z320) which is one of the start winning processing (Z105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (Z320).

  In the pre-reading process (Z320), first, based on the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether the variation start or not is appropriate (Z351). In this success / failure determination, the same processing as the processing of Z255 in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: refer to FIG. 246) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: refer to FIG. 247) is executed . In addition, this success or failure judgment is the processing of Z255 in the success or failure judgment (discrimination) at the start of fluctuation (special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: refer to FIG. 246), Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: refer to FIG. 247) It corresponds to the prior judgment (pre-judgment) executed prior to the processing in Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). If it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is obtained (determined) from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. (Z 353). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning prize command table 202e (Z354), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z352 that the result of the determination is out of step (Z352: No), the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. Acquire the type (Z355). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the winning combination information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and the present process is ended.

  As described above, since the result of the determination of the qualification in advance before the start of the fluctuation is output as the winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment and the hit type. Therefore, the advance notice effect (for example, changing the color of the holding symbol to a color notifying the judgment result of the judgment on the color of the holding symbol) by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the winning command. It is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying of the determination result of the success or failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is one winning command output to the holding ball each time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, normal symbol variation processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation processing (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 640 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (Z401). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the discrimination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (Z401: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: No), the long time opening flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) To get (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (Z406).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (Z408).

  Next, normal symbol variation start processing is executed (Z409), and this processing is ended. In addition, although normal symbol fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 251, the normal symbol (second symbol) is subjected to the pass / fail judgment, and based on the result of the pass / fail judgment, the normal symbol fluctuation period (variation time or Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the judgment is a hit, the process etc. of setting the opening operation (the operation pattern of the game per common drawing) of the motorized prize 640a corresponding to the hit type Run.

  In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. To do (Z410). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set in advance by the processing of Z 437 in FIG. 251 or the processing of Z 438 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time of the currently executed fluctuation display has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 of FIG. 251 or the processing of Z431, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is the second symbol display The apparatus 83 is set to display a stop (lighting display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of Z 435 in FIG. 251, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. If the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, then the second symbol display updating process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 or the process of Z435 in FIG. In the present control example, the symbol "o" symbol is lit and displayed even when it is a long time hit and a normal hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a symbol according to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit (e.g. In the case of a long time, it may be configured to be "◎", and in the case of a normal hit, "○").

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (Z412). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is set (Z413), and this processing is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the processing of Z412, next, when the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) is performed, The open / close control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of Z430 or the process of Z434 in FIG. 251 end. In addition, since the opening operation data of the motorized jackpot 640a corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol variation start process (Z 408: refer to FIG. 251) described later, in Z413, the hit type of the normal symbol The opening / closing control corresponding to is set. On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 251, the normal symbol variation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation start process (Z408). This normal symbol variation start process (Z408) sets the setting at the start of variation of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). It is a process to execute.

  It is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of discrimination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421: Yes), the processing shifts to the processing of Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is a definite change or a time cut (Z422). If it is neither definite nor time-saving (Z422: No), the processing shifts to Z424.

  If the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the ordinary symbol if it is a definite change or time in the middle (Z422: Yes), the ordinary hit acquired by the processing of Z407 in FIG. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is normally detached (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the process of Z424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 acquired in the process of Z407 in FIG. Then, based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is obtained (Z424). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" , It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 221 (c)).

  In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specified winning opening 65a, so the motorized role 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the ball intended to be won by the specific winning hole 65a enters the second ball entry port 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second entrance 640, even if the second entrance 640 is inhibited from entering the ball in the jackpot of the special symbol, the second Many balls enter the ball entrance 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the second entrance 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of an ordinary symbol (Z425), and when it is determined that it is a hit of an ordinary symbol (Z425: Yes) , It is determined whether the type of hit of a normal symbol is a long time hit (Z426). The hit type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal hit type counter obtained when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset judgment value. In this control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2 within the range of 0 to 198, and the value of the obtained ordinary hit type counter is If it is any one of "0 to 3", it is determined that it is a long time contact, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined that it is a normal hit.

  If it is determined that the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long hit (Z 426: Yes), the display mode at the long hit is set (Z 427). In the processing of this Z 427, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long time start command is set (Z428), and the long time open flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to the processing of Z430.

  When it is determined in the process of Z 426 that the type of the normal symbol is a normal hit (Z 426: No), the display mode at the time of the normal hit is set (Z 431). Next, it is determined whether or not a definite change or a time cut is occurring (Z432). Then, if it is a definite change or in the middle of a short time (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a jackpot of a special symbol (Z433). As a result of the discrimination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z433: Yes), the processing shifts to the processing of Z434. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times and the opening time of the motorized utility 640 a are set.

  In the processing of Z433, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z433: No), the opening period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the opening number is two The setting is made (Z430), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z436. In the process of Z430, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

  In the processing of Z432, if it is neither definite nor short (Z432: No), the processing shifts to processing of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second entrance port 640 is While setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (Z434), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set to the open number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set to the open time counter 203h.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z425 that the normal symbol is dislocated (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of disengaging is set (Z435). In the process of Z 435, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of Z436.

  In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not a definite change is in progress (Z436). If a positive change is in progress (Z436: Yes), the fluctuation display of the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437) , End this process. On the other hand, if it is not in a definite change by the process of Z436 (Z436: No), the change time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and the present process is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the open period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening per unit of time are the same operations as in the case where the normal symbol is hit in the definite change state and time saving state, but not limited thereto. It may be configured to set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the through gate passing process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passing process (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and when there is a ball passing, a normal random number is hit. This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (Z503).

  If the ball has not passed through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the ball has passed through gate 67, the value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (Z503) : No), end this processing. On the other hand, if the ball passes through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 After storing in the area (Z505), the process ends. In the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 254, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed in response to power on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904). If it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the processing is shifted to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905); Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the processing is shifted to Z 913 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, since the backed up data is destroyed, the processing is shifted to Z 913 also in this case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of Z 913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z 913). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (Z 914, Z 915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (Z 914, Z 915) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (Z 914 and Z 915), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z 914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z 915). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of Z911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (Z905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes) A state command is transmitted based on the long time release flag 203i (Z908). Next, while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (Z910), and the process shifts to processing of Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of Z 911, a rendering permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) or the start winning process (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process and the pre-reading process (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the motor-operated part opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized part 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (Z1005). In the motorized product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is started.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation is performed by the processing of Z 257 or the processing of Z 259 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 246) or the processing of Z 277 or the processing of Z 279 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the process of Z257 or the process of Z259 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 246) or the process of Z277 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 247) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 is ended, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 246) In the display mode set by the processing of Z258 or the processing of Z258 or the processing of Z276 or the processing of Z278 of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 247), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 Stop display (lighting display).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display updating process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 251), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of Z410 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 250), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of Z 427 or the processing of Z 431 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process proceeds to Z1001, and the above-described processes from Z1001 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, ie, until the execution timing of the next main process The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (Z1010, Z1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1) The initial value of the random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of Z1008, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 253 has been executed, so the processing at the time of power shutoff after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of Z1008 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed in the remaining time It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of Z1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 255), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening (large Opening) is a process for releasing or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is judged whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The processing of Z219 of special symbol fluctuation processing (Figure 244) is executed, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, and when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), end this processing.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the external output process of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. Sent towards. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of Z1108 (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z1102). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of Z1102, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z1102: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201 is voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the timing for starting a new number of rounds in the process of Z1103 (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of Z1106, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing ends. Do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds or 2 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the process of Z1108, when it is the start timing of ending effect (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223 f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the selected display mode of the ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the big hit end (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is timing when a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. When it is determined that it is not the timing of the big hit end (Z1110: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z1110 that it is the timing of the big hit end (Z1110: Yes), it is determined whether the present big hit type is the big hit A in the process of Z1111 (Z1111). If the present jackpot type is the jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the present jackpot type is not the jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability change flag 203m is set on (Z1113), and then the middle hit flag 203n is set off (Z1114). End the process.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 257 to 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 257, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed in response to power on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of Z2118 is performed (see FIG. 258) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of () (Z2002). As described later with reference to FIG. 258, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 of FIG. 258), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-down process of Z2118. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of Z2118 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (Z2002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of Z2118 is cut off. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the processing moves to Z2008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (Z2003: Yes), and the process moves to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process moves to the processing of Z2208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is performed during the execution of the power-down process of Z1318. The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to Z2004 to start initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the process of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of Z2 118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed, the process of Z2008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up processing is instantaneous This is a case where it is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of Z2 118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (Z2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010). Set permission (Z2011), and shift to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of Z2008 when the power-off flag is turned off is, for example, because the startup processing this time was started after the power was completely shut off, the processing of Z2008 through Z2004 to Z2006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009 which is the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processing is shifted to Z2010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), it shifts to the main processing. After that, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (Z2012). Note that this status command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is being hit for a long time based on the long time release flag 203i in the process of Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the process of Z2012 that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long time release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013) . Here, if the received status command indicates that the long time hit is in progress, the long time open flag 203i is turned on, and if the long time open flag 203i is not indicated, the long time open flag 203i is changed. Set to off.

  As described above, the main control unit 110 outputs a command capable of determining whether or not the symbol is being hit for a long time when the power is turned on, and the voice lamp control unit 113 also determines the state thereof. Can.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that, when the process of Z2008 is reached from the process of Z2004 to Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of Z2101 has been executed (Z2101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (Z2101: No), the processing of Z2113 is performed without performing the processing of Z2102 to Z2112. In the processing of Z2101, it is the processing concerning display (rendering) mainly in Z2102 to Z2112 that it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (Z2102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, notification by power on notification processing is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2105.

  In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. The frame button input monitoring and effect process (Z2107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing of Z2110 is finished, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 270, but the period in which a predetermined number of holding balls are generated is measured, and if it is within the predetermined period The process of performing) is performed.

  After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the process of the on-reach holding effect management process (Z2112) is performed. The details of the on-reach holding effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271, but the number of holding balls is a predetermined number during the period in which the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode. A process of setting a specific effect (notice effect) notifying the player that he or she plays a game to save up is performed.

  When the process of Z2112 is completed, the command determination process is executed (Z2113). The command determination process (Z2113) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 259. After executing the command determination process (Z2113), the variable display setting process is performed (Z2114). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off processing is executed (Z2118). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116) and the RAM 223 is destroyed If not (Z2116: No), the processing returns to Z2101 and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the command determination processing (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control apparatus 110 Further, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), fluctuation pattern reception processing is executed (Z2202), and this processing is ended. Details of the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this processing ends. .

  When the stop type command is not received in the process of Z2203 (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (Z2206). If the holding ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the holding ball number is extracted from the received command, and stored in the corresponding special symbol holding ball number counter (Z2207). Thereafter, the process ends. Here, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b Stored.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, when the ball holding ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning symbol command of the special symbol is received (Z2208). If a special symbol winning command has been received (Z2208: Yes), a winning command reception process is started (Z2209), and this process is ended. The details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266, but based on the winning command output from the main control unit 110, the success / failure determination result of the special symbol held or the variation type Setting processing for executing each holding effect determined to be executed based on the result of the predetermination. On the other hand, if the special symbol winning command is not received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (Z2261), and the present processing is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 260, details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2113), the fluctuation pattern (rendering mode) of the special symbol in detail, the advance notice display mode, the display mode of the hold notice, etc. are set based on the received change pattern command.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). Thereafter, a display advance notice display command is set in the variation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display advance notice display command is a command for instructing to display various advance notice effects (for example, a comment notice suggesting a result of the determination of a pass or a mini character notice etc.) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

  When the process of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the hold notification counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). If it is determined that the value of the hold notification counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), 0 is set as the hold change value, and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the hold notification counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z2227. Next, lucky display determination processing (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), even when the effect of changing the color of the holding ball is performed based on the result of the pre-reading determination, the value of the holding notification counter 223g After the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball in which the color of the holding ball is changed is started by changing the display position to follow and change according to the digestion, the display is hidden by the stopping of the change, and the holding change value Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the holding ball is changed, it is possible to correctly inform the player of the order in which the variable display of the holding ball is started.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 261, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) performed in the fluctuation pattern reception process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), the number of holding balls at the time of winning a big hit in the past is determined, and processing of displaying and setting a mark symbol (holding effect) in the display area corresponding to the number of holding balls Run.

  In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not a special hold effect is not being executed. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether it is in the normal mode (Z2302). If the normal mode is not in progress (Z2302: No), this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z2302 that the normal mode is in progress (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky reserve storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process ends. Here, when the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of balls reserved at the time of winning of the special symbol determined to be a big hit is not stored.

  If it is determined that the value of the lucky reserve memory value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect can be made based on the lucky reserve lottery table 222p (see FIG. 237 (c)) provided in the ROM 222 Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky on hold lottery table 222p, processing of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and determining whether to execute the lucky on-hold effect by the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of balls held Is executed.

  Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky holding effect (execution effect) is executable (Z2305). If this is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), a display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 231) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308) . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky on-hold effect has been executed by the previous change. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (set to 0 as an initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. Finish. When it is determined in the process of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process is ended as it is. As described above, the lucky holding effect is set at the start of the change and is ended by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next change. In this control example, the lucky holding effect is the effect performed during the period in which the special symbol is changed once, but is not limited thereto, and is configured to be performed in the period in which a plurality of changes are performed. May be The number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky holding effect may be determined, and may be ended by the execution of the fluctuation of the number, or the lottery of whether to end the each variable lucky holding effect The game may be set to end when the player has won the end lottery, or when all the holding balls are digested or when a demonstration display is performed.

  Referring back to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed, the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the on-hold holding effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when the variation of the special symbol to be the reaching display mode is executed, the on-reach holding for performing the game so as to accumulate the holding ball in the reaching display mode Execute a process for executing an effect (one of special holding effects).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 262, the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart of the on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228).

  In the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2 228: FIG. 262), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z 2321). If it is determined that reach change is not being performed (Z2321: No), this process ends. If reach change is being performed (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), this processing ends. If the change is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not a special hold effect is not being executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this processing ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, another special hold effect is being executed, so that the judgment of Z2323 is executed to prevent the hold effect from overlapping. . If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes) based on the number of holding balls and the value of the effect counter 223h, it is executed by the on-reach effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 237 (a)) Acquire the availability of the effect (Z2324). Here, in the in-reach effect lottery table 222m, the determination value of the effect counter 223h is set with respect to the current number of holding balls, and whether or not in-reach in-reach effect is determined is determined based on the determination value.

  It is determined by the processing of Z2324 whether or not the on-reach holding effect (execution effect) is executable (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is executable (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is calculated from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 237 (b)) based on the change pattern type (change type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, according to the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display type type) to be the reach display mode is determined, and another special holding effect is not executed. If it is, the lottery to execute the holding effect during reach is executed, and the timing to start the execution during the reach effect is set by winning the lottery, so the variation of the special symbol to be the reach display mode is When it is started, the lower the holding effect during reach is, the higher the current holding ball number is, the higher the execution frequency is set, so that it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the firing of the game ball during the reach. It can increase the profit. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Next, returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After executing the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the holding lid setting process (Z2229) is performed. In the storage lid setting process (Z2229), a process necessary for displaying the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub display area Ds is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the storage lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this storage lid setting process (Z2229).

  In the holding lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether a short-term winning presentation (short-term winning holding effect), which is one of special holding effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the hold on the short-term winning in the hold cover range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 The holding lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)) (Z2342). A display storage lid command is set based on the value of the storage lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2342 (Z2355), and this processing ends. Thus, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current holding ball The value (display mode) is selected and set from the short-term winning prize holding lid range selection table 222d4 (refer to FIG. 229 (a)), and the display manner of the variable lid symbol P different from normal times (normally holding) It is possible to set a display mode to be displayed in accordance with a rule in which a rule for displaying at intervals of a symbol and one reserved symbol spacing is displayed with two reserved symbols spaced and displayed.

  Thereby, when the period required for storing the holding balls from one to four is within the predetermined period, the variable lid pattern P is displayed according to a rule different from that at the normal time, so the variable lid symbol Also from the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for the storage ball to be stored is a short period. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game so as to store the holding ball more quickly, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2341 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the on-reach holding effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the reach effect in progress cover range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 228) (see FIG. 228). The holding lid range value is acquired based on FIG. 229 (b) (Z2344). A display storage lid command is set based on the storage lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2344 (Z2355), and this processing ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display holding lid command indicating the holding lid range value acquired in the reach effect holding lid range selection table 222d5, the reach indicating that it is the timing to execute the on-reach holding effect. By receiving the notice command for notice performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable lid pattern P is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold lid command for display.

  As described above, when the execution of the on-reach holding effect is determined, a mode in which the display of the variable lid pattern P is variable is set, and the display mode is set in accordance with the on-reach holding effect execution timing. Since the variable lid pattern P is displayed in a variable manner, the variable lid pattern P can be used to determine that a special holding effect different from that at the normal time has been executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 in the procedure of Z2343 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345) . That is, it is determined whether the execution of the lucky holding effect which is one of the special holding effects is set. In the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228) (see FIG. 228). Based on 228 (b)), the holding lid range value is obtained (Z2344). Thereafter, the process of Z2355 described above is performed, and the process ends. As described above, when the execution of the lucky holding effect (see FIGS. 216A and 216B) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable lid pattern P similar to the execution of the holding effect in the normal state The display form to be displayed in the rule of emptying a one-time reserved symbol from the last held symbol being displayed) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2345 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211 (a) and (b), it is suggested to the player not to let the holding ball enter more balls in a state where the holding ball is four or more and the color of the holding symbol is variable. It is determined whether the hold effect is being performed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display showing the color change of the variable lid pattern P based on the holding lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 230 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 The storage lid command is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the color is displayed in a variable manner on the holding symbol, and a notice B is provided to notify the player that the game is to be performed so as to regulate the increase of the holding balls further than that. A variable lid symbol at a position where the variable lid symbol P overlaps the reserved symbol displayed when more than one balls are stored in a state where a game with a mode (number of balls held is 4 or more) is being played. A setting is performed to change and display the display color of P to a color (for example, green etc.) different from that in the normal time. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has played a game contrary to the notification mode for notifying the player not to store the holding ball.

  After executing the processing of Z2348, the holding lid range value is acquired based on the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (refer to FIG. 228 (d)) (Z2349), and the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed. End the process. In the case of the holding effect in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 211 (a) by the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)), the holding ball 5 is in the normal mode. It can be configured such that the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the position of the first one is hidden and displayed according to a special rule that the display state is obtained. Thereby, in the notice B mode in which the holding effect instructing not to increase the holding balls is performed, the player seems to the player as if the four holding balls have the upper limit value using the variable lid pattern P. You can Therefore, it can be informed that the upper limit value of the holding ball is changed by the display mode of the variable lid design P.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2347 that the advance B mode is not set (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the advance A mode is set (Z2350). That is, the number of holding balls is four or more, and the color of the holding symbol is changed and set or set, and the variable lid symbol P is a rule different from the normal mode (normal state) with the holding symbol It is determined whether or not a hold effect to be displayed without an interval is being executed.

  If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the hold lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222 d 2 (see FIG. 228 (c)) Z2351). Thereafter, the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice A mode is not set in the processing of Z2350 (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is short (Z2352). Here, the determination as to whether or not the time is short is determined by the gaming state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, in addition to the fluctuation type (reach out, hit) data, whether the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state (power support gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state (high Data indicating whether it is the probability power support presence gaming state) or the normal gaming state (low probability power support absence gaming state) is also added and output.

  When it is determined that the time is short (when the short game state or the probability change game state is set) (Z 2352: Yes), based on the time storage lid range selection table 222d 6 (see FIG. 229 (c)) To obtain the holding lid range value (Z2353). Thereafter, the process of Z2355 described above is performed, and the process ends. In addition, in the time game (in the state with power support), unlike in the normal gaming state, in the state where the number of holding balls is from 0 to 6, the variable lid symbol P holds the seventh holding ball and the eighth holding symbol Is displayed, and the number of holding balls is seven, so the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the seventh holding symbol is displayed is hidden and eight holding balls are displayed. As a result, the variable lid pattern P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. In this way, the variable lid pattern P is configured to display less than the normal gaming state during the presence of power assistance where the motorized role product 640a is likely to be in the open state, and a large number of holding balls are frequently generated. It is suppressing that the load of display control of variable lid pattern P increases.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2352 that the time is not short (Z2352: No), that is, if it is determined that the normal mode hold effect is being performed, the normal hold cover range selection table 222d1 (FIG. Based on 228 (b), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and the present processing is terminated.

  Referring back to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the holding lid setting process (Z2229) is executed, the held character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2 230), a process of determining a girl character etc. to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the reserved character setting process (Z2230).

  In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of holding balls changes from three to four, the first ball entrance 64, which is the starting opening, is also one digested by one where the holding ball newly starts to change. , The number of holding balls was 3 by entering the second right ball entrance 640r and the second ball entrance 640 (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter From the state where the sum of the values with 223b is 3), the number of holding balls is 4 (the total of the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is 4) It is in the state of changing to the state.

  If it is determined that the number of balls held is changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the held effect mode set. And the effect counter 223h, select a reserved character from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232 (b)), set a display character command (Z2363), and end this processing. As described above, when the number of holding balls is four, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the holding effect mode set and displayed. . As a result, the characters displayed can be made different depending on the background type and the hold effect mode, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of the present control example, the type of the character to be determined may be varied according to the determination result of the special symbol during variation or the variation pattern type (for example, super reach etc.). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit, the special symbol in the movement or the pending decision is judged as a hit depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the holding ball being stored is stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set in the case of being displayed in super reach depending on the character type, the character is displayed, whereby super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation to the jackpot, is executed. Can be expected early.

  Further, in the present control example, the advance notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the change pattern type (for example, super reach type) having a high expectation of the big hit according to the pre-reading judgment or the success / failure decision result in advance. Since it is easy, by displaying the J2 character and the J3 character, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the super reach type, the jackpot determination result being a big hit, and the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of holding balls has not changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of holding balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of balls held is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the held character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. As described above, since the character is set to non-display at the timing when the number of holding balls becomes less than four, it is possible to inform the player of the decrease in the number of holdings in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether an over winning condition has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether the over winning status has occurred is determined by whether the main control unit 110 receives an over winning information command that is output when the starting winning combination is exceeded by exceeding the upper limit of the number of holding balls. Ru. If it is determined that over winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the character is changed by the held character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the held effect mode and the effect counter 223h. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and this processing ends. When it is determined that the over winning has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), the present process ends. As described above, in the present control example, when the over winning occurs, the change of the character displayed in the character display area C is executed. The change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character, as is apparent from the reserved character change table 222 j (see FIG. 233). When a J3 character that is easy to be determined in a state in which a notice A mode or a notice B mode is easy to be set when the judgment result is a big hit (per shot) or a variation pattern type and the expectation of the big hit is high Is configured such that characters other than J3 are not selected. Further, when the character of J2 is selected, and when the character of J0 or J1 which is hard to be selected is selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, the character of J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, step-up to J3, which is set high as the expectation for selection of the jackpot or the fluctuation pattern type having high expectation, is configured to be possible, and the player enjoys the hold effect by generating the over prize. It is configured to be able to. The fact that this character is changed corresponds to a benefit advantageous to the player.

  Referring back to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. After the reserved character setting process (Z2230) is executed, the balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process is ended. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of a comment displayed in a balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the balloon setting process (Z2231).

  In the balloon setting process (Z2231), first, it is judged whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether the short-term winning reserve effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the short-term winning balloon selection in the balloon selection table 222k (refer to FIG. 234 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 The balloon content is acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235A) (Z2382). After the processing of Z2382 is executed, a balloon command for display is set based on the balloon content acquired (Z2394), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the on-reach hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the balloon effect during reach effect selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 235 (b)) (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385) . That is, it is determined whether the lucky holding effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the lucky on hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236A) (Z2386), and the processing of Z2394 described above To complete this process.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z2387 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the notice B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-described Z2394 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2387 that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the contents of the balloon are obtained based on the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-described Z2394 The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is not set in the processing of Z2389 (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not time saving (time saving gaming state or probability variation gaming state) is set (Z2391). If it is determined that the time saving mode is set (Z2391), the balloon content is acquired based on the time saving balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236 (b)) (Z2392), and the above-described processing of Z2394 is performed. Execute and complete this process.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2391 that time saving is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon content is acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234 (b)) (Z2393), The processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, since the comment of the corresponding content is controlled to be selected for each of the hold effect modes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by displaying the comment contents according to the hold effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the winning command reception process (Z2209) which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). The winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, the hold change value is obtained from the hold change selection table 222b (FIG. 227 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the change type of the received command and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h (Z2402) .

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold notification counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the holding symbol is changed is set. If the value of the hold notification counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notification counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227 (b)) based on the hold change value. To set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the processing of Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the current holding ball value (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b The total value of) is set (Z2406).

  After the processing of Z2406 is finished, short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267, but it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the short-term winning hold effect, and if it is the timing to execute (condition to execute If it is the process of setting the execution of the short-term winning reserve effect is executed. Next, lucky hold processing is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky reserve storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but it is determined whether it is a timing to execute the lucky reserve effect (whether the condition is satisfied). Set the execution of lucky hold production. Next, the above-described holding lid setting processing (Z2409), holding character setting processing (Z2410), and balloon setting processing (Z2411) are executed, and this processing ends. Since the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 263, the detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, since the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 265, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning determination process (Z2407). The short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined that the probability variation gaming state or the time reduction gaming state (during the time reduction) (Z2421: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of holding balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is not four (Z2423: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of holding balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223 q is 0 (Z2424: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term pay timer 223 q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223 n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this processing is ended. As described above, when the period of time taken to establish the four holding balls is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term prize holding effect is set is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing this lucky storage process (Z2408). The lucky reserve storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the lucky reserve storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the winning is obtained based on the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the processing of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442). When it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a jackpot (2442: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of holding balls is four or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of balls held is set in the lucky reservation stored value 223p (Z2444), and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the current number of balls held is 4 or less (Z2443: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (Z2114). This variation display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 performs variation representation. The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (Z2 114: FIG. 269), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (Z2501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control unit 110, and thus Z2505 Transfer to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the processing moves to Z2505.

  In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (Z2505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2509.

  In the process of Z2509, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the short-term winning management process (Z2111) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the short-term winning management process (Z2111). In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until generation of four holding balls necessary to determine whether or not the short-term prize holding effect is to be performed is executed.

  In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether the current number of balls held is 0 (Z2601). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2604.

  In the process of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether the short-term winning hold effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of holding balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of holding balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 in the processing of Z2604 (Z2604: No), or it is determined that the number of holding balls is larger than 4 in the processing of Z2605. In the case (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process is ended.

  As described above, when the short-term winning reserve effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to an initial value based on the fact that the number of holding balls is less than four. In addition, it is not limited to that, and the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning reservation effect is finished (the holding ball enters up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). You may configure it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the on-reach hold effect management process (Z 2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the in-reach hold presentation start process (Z2112). In the on-reach holding effect management process (Z2112), a process for setting the display mode of the on-reach holding effect at the execution timing is executed by determining the execution timing of the on-reach holding effect.

  In the on-reach holding effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether the execution of the on-reach holding effect is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702 ). If it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is decremented by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command indicating that the on-reach pending effect is to be performed is set (Z2706). Thereafter, this process ends.

  In the process of Z2702, when it is determined that the value of the holding effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing when the fluctuation time (variation period) of the special symbol during fluctuation ends (variation period elapses To determine if it is the timing to execute (Z2707). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2707 that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this process is ended. As described above, in the on-reach pending presentation, the special presentation status is set to 0 at the timing when the variation time of the special symbol in the reach variation mode elapses, and the on-going presentation is initially set to the normal mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 272, a frame button input monitoring and effect process (Z2107), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring and effect process (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and execution of a notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing.

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether a value larger than 0 is set in the SW effective time counter 223k as the SW (switch) effective time (effective period) (Z2801 ). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2801: Yes) The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW effective time counter 223k (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is a value larger than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is incremented by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2806 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is being executed (during notice effect) (Z2809). If it is determined that the preview effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a display preview indicating the preview effect determined by the lottery The command is set (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 273, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing a sensor input process (Z2813) which is one process of the frame button input monitoring and effect process (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

  In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in a valid period. If it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether a notice effect display that uses the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). If it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the sensor effective time counter 223s has a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is decremented by the elapsed time and updated (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, the player moves the hand or the like close to the touch sensor 290 (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is incremented by 1 (Z2826), and the notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t The display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set in the selected touch advance presentation effect display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 272, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2801, when not in standby (Z2801: No), or when it is determined in the process of Z2802 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: No), the SW effective time counter 223k It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the preview effect is being performed (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a notice for display indicating the preview effect determined by the lottery Set the command (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. The sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z2808 that the preliminary rendering is not being performed (Z2808: No), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 described above is executed, and then this processing ends. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 are skipped, and the sensor input process (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 273 is performed. To complete this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2805 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2811). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW validity time is set in the SW validity time counter 223k based on the set fluctuation pattern (Z2812), and sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and complete this process. In the process of Z2811, when the fluctuation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and the process is ended. Here, some variation patterns include those for which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and those for which the effect is not set, and in the case where they are not set, “0” is set to the SW valid time counter 223 k Be done.

Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of Z3102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (Z3001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of Z3102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is Z3101. The processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of and Z3102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (Z3003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, next, the power-on fluctuation image A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, next, the simplified image display flag 233c On (Z3005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. In this way, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and simplified display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 If it is via the device 113, that is, if the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of Z3006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 276 (a), the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 276 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 276 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (Z3302) is performed, and then a display setting process (Z3303) is performed.

  In the command determination process (Z3302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the display setting process (Z3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, task processing is then executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is notified of continuous notification even when a continuous notification command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the back image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (Z3304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Z3305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 242 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of Z3307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (large per cap A, large per cap B1, large per cap B2, large per cap C) indicated by the display stop type command The stop type counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image (Fig. 239) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (Z3308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (Z3309) is executed, the process of Z3304 Transition to

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277), first, as shown in FIG. 277, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (Z3401: No) ends the command determination process and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag to notify display setting processing (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (Z3402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (Z3403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern Command processing is executed (Z3405), and the process returns to the processing of Z3401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 278 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described. FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278 (a)), first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of Z 3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3504), Initialize 233f to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (Z3506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of Z3502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z3404 that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406), If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 278 (b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276 (b) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect is set (Z3602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is Set to off (Z3603). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of Z3401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is described. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3406 that there is no display type command for suspension (Z3406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a notification display command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the display advance notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), a notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation to the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variation display of the special symbol It performs setting of a notice display mode for giving a notice of notice to the player that a jackpot or a jackpot has been made.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 279 (a), the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described. FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing the preliminary announcement effect display process (Z3409).

  In the notice effect display process (FIG. 279 (a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z 3701). The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for notice for display to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (Z3702).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by the time counter It is set to 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

  As described above, the notice display is set based on the notice display command for display output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they are different display modes.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the advance notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The notice display selection is performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the display data table is already set, the notice display is set and overwritten. Good.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3408 that there is no display advance display command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). When it is determined that the display switching command is present (Z3410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b). However, based on the operation of the frame button 22, the process of switching to the display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 279 (b), the mode switching process will be described (Z3411). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is moving (Z3802). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to be active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

  As described above, when the special symbol is being changed, the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

  The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

  The rear image change flag is set to ON to notify the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image according to the reception of the rear image change command. Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image determination flag. Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is The rear image type to be displayed is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored (resident video The RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command may be turned on, or it may be determined later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3410 that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display holding lid command (Z3412: Yes), a holding lid command process is executed (Z3413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 280, the holding lid command process (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing the hold lid command process (Z3413).

  In the storage lid command process (Z 3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the storage lid for display effect corresponding to the received storage lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (display data table of the display data table buffer 233 d currently set as active). Ru. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for holding lid set in Z3901 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each of the variation display data tables corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the process of Z3901 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for other storage lids is set to ON (Z3903).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for storage lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3904 ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0, and return to (Z3905) command determination processing.

  When the reserve lid command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the reserve lid command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. Set the display data table. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, display modes corresponding to the set background mode may be set for display modes after the addition time, display The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, the display data table may be newly set.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3412 that there is no display holding lid command (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display reserved character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display reserved character command (Z3412: Yes), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

  Here, the reserved character command process (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flow chart showing this reserved character command processing (Z3415).

  In the reserved character command process (Z 3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the reserved character of the display effect corresponding to the received reserved character command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (display data table of the display data table buffer 233 d currently set as active). Ru. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for the other reserved characters is set to off (Z4003).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, set the time data representing the fluctuation time in the clock counter 233h (Z4004 ), Initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and return to the command determination processing.

  When the reserved character command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the reserved character command, the variation pattern set, and the background mode. Set the display data table. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, display modes corresponding to the set background mode may be set for display modes after the addition time, display The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, the display data table may be newly set.

  Referring back to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3414 that there is no display reserved character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a balloon command for display (Z3416: Yes), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 281, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the balloon command processing (Z3417).

  In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 281), first, a display data table for balloon for display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (display data table of the display data table buffer 233 d currently set as active). Ru. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each of the variation display data tables corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and others The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table for balloon is set to OFF (Z4103).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for balloon set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4104) The pointer 233 f is initialized to 0 (Z 4105), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  When the balloon command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. , Set display data table. By configuring in this way, even if it is necessary to switch different display modes in a plurality of modes, display modes corresponding to the set background mode may be set for display modes after the addition time, display The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is set in addition to the set display data table. However, the display data table may be newly set.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and the error command is For example (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error command is generated. The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error generated is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process determines in Z4202 that error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are turned on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the process of Z3401.

  In the processing of Z3401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes ), Execute the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 again. Then, the processes of Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of Z3416 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 239, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of Z3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 In the process of Z3502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 283 to FIG. 284, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z 3303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (Z4301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, the process of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of Z4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (a). FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (Z4401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of Z4303 (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4305.

  At Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (b). FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (Z 4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of Z450, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is the End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (Z4503), and if it is the demonstration display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (Z4505), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table in the process of Z4503 (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (Z4502: No), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 284, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of Z4306 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is judged whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (Z4309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (Z4309: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (Z 4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (Z 4311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (Z 4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (Z4315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In task processing (Z3304), until the predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by Z4315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of Z4309, if the finalized display flag is not off but on (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (Z 4317), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (Z 4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (Z4321), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the processing of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 276B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image (FIG. 239) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the above-described transfer setting process (Z3305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (Z4602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 285 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (Z4602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Z4701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer processing of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4702: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4702: Yes), the process moves to the process of Z4703. Further, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z4703.

  In the processing of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703). If there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing of Z4703, if all resident target image data has been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command determination process is performed, not the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276 b) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)). (See FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)), the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The image of normal time is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 286, a normal image transfer setting process (Z4603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the display setting process (Z3303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the processing shifts to the processing of Z4805.

  In the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is null data (Z4802: No), the process of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of Z4805. In the process of Z4805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

  In this processing of Z4806, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined by the process of Z4806 that the transfer process is not completed (Z4806: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process moves to the process of Z4807. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (Z4805: No), the processing shifts to the processing of Z4807.

  In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process moves to the process of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

  In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the process of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of Z4809 (Z4809: Yes), the character ROM 234 does not need to transfer the image data to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (Z4810). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, details of the above-mentioned drawing processing (Z3306) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (Z3304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 242 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (Z 4902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of Z4902, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  Moreover, in the said control example, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  Further, in the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, the audio lamp control unit 113 transmits it to the display control unit 114. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described control example, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time during which important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. Also, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by using the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, an image can be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to be displayed. be able to.

  In the above control example, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR ROM 234 d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234 d 1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above control example, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and an internal bus (a bus connected to the MPU 231, the character ROM 234 and the image controller 237) It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above control example describes the case where one display video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above control example, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the 1 port type (1 input / output port is 1) DRAM is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are constituted by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. One RAM is used as the resident area and the normal area. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the contents of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above-mentioned control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to make it resident, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above control example, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored at the time of power failure cancellation. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  In the above control example, although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above control example, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 after power on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is turned on after the power on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on fluctuation image area Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above control example, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a is the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the definition of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said control example, it replaces with a vibration sensor or with a vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. Also, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying of the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident When the display control device 114 is configured to receive an error command for conveying a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, and thus the player is made to act illegally. It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite for which the color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d and the color tone in the sprite If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above-described control example, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above control example, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above control example, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above control example, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is completed. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above control example, a case has been described where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above control example, in the display control device 114, first, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, first, after power on, only image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents (drawing contents) of the image to be drawn at that time, and to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above control example, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and it is determined whether the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described control example, only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but this is not necessarily the case. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may control the rollers 237. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above control example, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of part of the image changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  In the above control example, the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the information on the various counters (special random number counter C1 and special per-class counter C2) acquired at the start winning combination as the holding ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and information of various counters (special random number counter C1 and special per-class counter C2) acquired at the start winning combination is not limited to this. It may be notified.

  In the above-described control example, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is described. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above control example, although the case where one first entry hole 64 where the lottery of the big hit of the special symbol is started when the ball enters the ball is arranged in the game board 13, it is not limited to this. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances for which ball entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started independently of each other. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above control example, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are respectively held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first entrance 64, a second right entrance 640r, and a second entrance 640 as starting openings (ball entering means, starting means), and the game ball is the starting opening. By entering one of the balls, the player wins with a predetermined lottery probability, and the out-side lottery (determination) is executed. If the lottery result (judgment result) is a hit (specific judgment result), a jackpot game (a bonus game advantageous to the player) is executed. In the jackpot game, a plurality of types are set, and the benefits given to the player are set to be different depending on the types. For example, the difference in the number of rounds of jackpots, the type in which the high probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after the jackpot game, the short time gaming state after jackpot gaming (the player's profit is smaller than the first special gaming state A second special game state) is set, and a hit type etc. is set.

  Judgment result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 After the variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the display is stopped in a display mode for indicating the determination result of the pass / fail (determination result), and the determination result is notified to the player . When the gaming ball enters the starting opening during the variable display period, the lottery for the entering ball stores the right to be drawn as the holding ball. The holding ball is up to 4 balls for entering the ball to the first entrance 64 (drawing of the first special symbol), entering the ball for the second right entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special) The game is configured such that up to four balls are stored as upper limit values in total for the symbol lottery).

  When the holding ball is stored, one holding symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is configured to be displayed for one holding ball. For the holding ball, before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the holding ball is variably displayed, the variation display mode of the success or failure judgment result (determination result) determined at the start of the fluctuation or the special symbol Predetermination in which (variation pattern type) is determined in advance is executed. If the pre-discrimination result is a specific discrimination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined, etc.), the color of the holding symbol is displayed variably (varied to a specific display mode). When the color of the holding symbol is displayed variably, the type of the special holding effect is set by the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding symbol is changed, a variable holding is generated by generating an overflowing prize that causes the holding ball to be generated further or to cause the starting opening to enter more than the upper limit number of holding balls. A comment display (prediction display mode, suggestion mode) indicating the degree of expectation for hitting a ball, the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (a preview A mode). As a result, the player can be made to win more game balls to the starting opening, and the profit of the game arcade can be increased. In addition, by entering the game ball in the starting opening, a comment display is displayed, and it is possible to determine the result of the judgment of the success or failure, the type of fluctuation, etc. by the content of the comment. It can be granted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as one of special holding effects, a holding effect (notice B mode) is set which is executed so as to play a game so as not to generate a holding ball from a state in which the color of the holding ball is changed. In this holding effect, the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area in which the holding symbol is displayed, and the position of the holding symbol displayed when the variable lid symbol P wins next to the holding symbol whose color is variable By displaying on the screen, the player is notified that the game is played so that the holding ball does not occur. In addition, content that indicates that the holding ball should not be increased is also displayed by the comment display.

  In addition, the number of balls held for the first special symbol is 4 and the number of balls held for the second special symbol is 4 and the number of held symbols up to 8 in total is the third symbol display device 81 (display area of display means) Is displayed, and the area in which the reserved symbol is displayed is secured in advance and set. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the base symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and even in the state where the reserved symbol is not displayed that the area is the region where the reserved symbol is displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved symbols are displayed, four variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved symbols are displayed, respectively, even during normal times, and the respective variable lids are displayed. In the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of holding balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of holding balls can be identified.

  Thus, by displaying the variable lid pattern P, it is determined that the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is 8 even if the reserved symbol is not displayed by the numerical information of the variable lid pattern P can do. Furthermore, the display aspect of the variable lid pattern P is also changed by generating a holding ball and displaying a holding symbol. In the holding effect in the normal mode at the normal time, when the number of balls for holding is three, the variable lid symbol P changes the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth holding symbol is displayed. Then, similarly, the sixth variable lid pattern P is not displayed with four holding balls, the seventh variable lid pattern P is not displayed with five holding balls, and the eighth with six holding balls Variable lid symbol P is changed so as not to be displayed, that is, variable lid symbol P is displayed in a variable manner so that two holding symbol portions are open with respect to the holding symbol with respect to three or more holding balls. Ru. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the holding symbol is variable depending on the number of holding balls.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that the special holding effect which changes the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P according to the generation | occurrence | production period of a holding ball, or changes the variable rule by the fluctuation | variation type displayed by fluctuation is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold effect is being performed by the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P. Furthermore, since a special holding effect is set also by the decision result of the pre-decision held decision, the change type, and the decision result of the special symbol displayed variably or the change type being executed, By changing the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict a fluctuation type.

  In this control example, even if the game ball is fired to the left or right of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, the second ball entrance 640 In the same manner, the object 640a enters the open state), but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the route which easily enters the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r enters The arrangement of nails and the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform effects such as performing a lottery with only the second special symbol and playing a game so as not to let the game ball enter the second entrance 640. Furthermore, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the second ball entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 288 to 324, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be alternately changed. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. The first control example is different from the first control example in that the first special symbol and the first special symbol change in order depending on the game state and change. The other configuration is the same as that of the first control example, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 288, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when the ball enters from the opening 710a, the sorting device 700 causes the first ball entry. In the second control example, the ball is distributed to the opening 64 and the second entrance 640, but in the second control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are not installed. The difference is that they are configured to be installed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293, the electrical configuration of the main control unit 110 and the audio lamp control unit in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, a part of the effect display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed with respect to the first control example described above, and part of the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 The difference is that the content of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. In the first control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately displayed as the special symbols for which the start of fluctuation is executed. The difference is that it has been changed to execute.

  FIG. 289 (a) and FIG. 289 (b) are the figures which showed typically the flow of the special symbol fluctuation and continuous rendition in this 2nd example of a control. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the special symbol variation continues to be executed with the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the effect display is continuous effect Run. The continuous effect is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. Also, this continuous effect can be extended based on the winning combination in the execution of the continuous effect.

  FIG. 291 (a) is a diagram showing that the third symbol is fluctuating during continuous rendition. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the second control example, a pedestal symbol m0 is displayed during execution in the small region Ds1 of the sub display region Ds provided below the third symbol display device 81, and the small symbol In the area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to an eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and a reserved symbol are displayed. In addition, characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm. By executing the effects having the story character with the characters G1 to G3, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the continuous effects are being executed. Further, even during the continuous effect period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292.

  Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIG. 291 (c) (d) is a figure which shows the flow of the production at the time of performing the 2nd special symbol change during continuous production. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), when the second special symbol variation is executed during the first special symbol variation execution, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), with the first special symbol During the interruption period, the special effect with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

  FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing that the continuous effect period is interrupted, and the third symbol is fluctuating during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the holding ball is changed to red and displayed. Also, in the display area Dm, a shellfish K1, a shellfish K2, and a shellfish K3 are displayed, and are displayed in a display mode having a story character. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that it is the special effect execution period. Furthermore, a white hold symbol is displayed on the third hold symbol base m3 to the fifth hold symbol base m5, and the white hold symbol of the third hold symbol base m3 is moved to the small area Ds and the symbol is being executed. When it is displayed, the continuous effect period interrupted by the special effect period is resumed.

  Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 (c) and (d). In the second control example, even if the variation in the first special symbol is being executed, the variation execution in the second special symbol is preferentially performed if the ball enters the second entrance 640. As shown in FIG. 289 (c), when there is a variation in the special figure 2 while continuous effect with the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 289 (d) Interrupt the continuous performance during the fluctuation execution of and execute the special performance during the fluctuation execution with the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), there is a change execution with the second special symbol, and when the special effect is started, the number of holding balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shellfish are displayed at the corners of the display area Dm, and effects with storylines are executed. By configuring in this manner, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special effect period from the continuous effect period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, the continuous effect with the first special symbol being executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special effect with the second special symbol, and resumed as soon as the special effect period is over. Specifically, the holding balls of the third holding symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth holding symbol pedestal m5 are on standby in order to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The execution of the variation with the pedestal symbol m0 to the second suspension symbol m2 during execution, which is a special effect period, is finished, and the retention ball of the third symbol suspension symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and the special effect period The interrupted continuous production period is resumed.

  The relationship between continuous rendering and background display will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 290 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an effect display mode during a special symbol change and a flow of background display at that time. As described above, even during the period of continuous effect, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22. In the second control example, when changing from a background mode in which continuous effects are being performed to another background mode, a normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

  FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous rendering period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol, the mountain mode is set as the background mode from the sea mode which is the period of the continuous effect. As described above, the mountain mode does not display the continuous effect but the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed. However, when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed again to the sea mode, the marine continuous effect is restored. . In the second control example, when the sea mode is in the period of the continuous effect, "the continuous effect executing in the sea mode !!" is displayed in the display area Dmb, and the sea mode is in the continuous effect period in the player And is configured to be easily recognized. In addition, in the display area Dma, “The background changes with the button PUSH” is displayed, and the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even in a state in which the third symbol changes.

<Electric Configuration of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the continuous rendering execution selection table 222aa is added.

  The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform the continuous effect (FIG. 291 (a)). In the winning information related process (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off If it is present (Z5004 in FIG. 300: No), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 300) and used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

  In the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of the effect counter of 1 that the effect counter group 223aa has, the current number of balls held, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the currently received winning information The presence or absence of execution of continuous rendition is specified. Specifically, the continuous effect is more easily executed as the number of balls currently held is larger, and the lottery result shows that the lottery result of the special symbol included in the prize information received this time indicates the big hit It is defined that continuous rendition is easier to be executed than in the case of showing.

  By configuring in this way, a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol variation to be executed) becomes easy to be performed, and when the continuous effect is performed, a sense of expectation for a jackpot against the player Can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time in a state of having a high expectation for the jackpot, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect is ended, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect is ended (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball is The value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous effect again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect with reference to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute continuous effects even on game balls that have newly won during continuous effect execution, so it is possible to increase the frequency with which continuous effects are performed. In addition, since it is possible to make the period in which the continuous effect is executed longer than the upper limit number of holding of the special symbol 1 (four pieces), it is possible to the player which continuous symbol is being executed for which holding symbol. It can be made difficult to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

  In the present control example, the continuous rendering execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not the continuous rendering is to be performed is defined as the content described above, but other content may be defined. For example, the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with clock means (for example, real time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in correspondence with the clock contents of the clock means. It may be defined in

  In this case, it is preferable that, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10 am), the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. By configuring in this manner, even if the same continuous effect is executed, the player can play the game early because the expectation for the big hit changes according to the timing (time) when the continuous effect is executed. You can suppress getting bored. Furthermore, during the predetermined period described above, a guide notification means for notifying the player that continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the predetermined period described above It is preferable to provide a period notifying means for notifying. In this way, it is possible to play the game while expecting the player to execute the continuous effect.

  Further, there are provided means for judging the contents of operation to the operation means (for example, frame button 22) which can be operated by the player, and judgment means for judging the shooting situation (or ball entering situation) of the gaming ball, It may be specified to change the rate at which the continuous effect is executed in association with the determination result of, or the plurality of contents described above may be appropriately combined, or each may be used individually.

  Furthermore, in this control example, stop command processing (see FIG. 3017) is performed using the continuous presentation execution selection table 222aa, which is referred to when determining whether or not continuous presentation is to be executed in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300). However, although it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed, when determining whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) and the stop command process (see FIG. 301). The selection table to be referred to may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301) is a big hit of the special symbol when the continuous effect is executed rather than the selection table referred to in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 300). It is preferable to define the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous effects are continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, and the more interesting the game can be.

  Next, contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (b). FIG. 293 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, for the first control example described above, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect flag 223ac, the continuous effect interrupt flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae, The difference is that the effect number counter 223af, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah, the short time counter 223ai, the fluctuation number counter 223j, the operation invalid flag 223ak, and the state storage area 223az are added. ing.

  The effect counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of effect counter means. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selection of a variation pattern for variation (variation pattern of the third symbol), selection of various notice effects, and the like. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are all in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generating IC (not shown) electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113. The random value is stored. The operation clock (operation frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC operable with an operation clock (for example, 1 MHz) to such an extent that determination can be performed by updating different random numbers to at least each of the effect counters. Is adopted.

  The values of a plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as determination of variation patterns for variation (variation pattern of the third symbol), execution availability of continuous effects, and various advance effect types. The counter values are updated so as not to be synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are configured by 1-byte loop counters updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time main processing 2 (see FIG. 298) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The update process is performed so as to obtain different values (every 1 ms).

  In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process. Even in this case, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effect is biased. For example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process When it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect modes.

  In addition, in this control example, although a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used, for example, random values are calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be selected. By configuring in this manner, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the effect counter, the value of the lower first digit, the value of the lower second digit, and the value of the first digit multiplied by the value of the second digit lower the last digit of the value of the effect counter. It may be calculated such that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

  The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) of the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined to execute the continuous effect (Z5007 of FIG. 300: Yes), the stop command processing of the voice lamp control device 113 ( When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (see FIG. 301) (Z5110 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 300), and effect setting processing (see FIG. 303) of fluctuation display setting processing 2 (see When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed at Z5204 in 304, it is set to off (see Z5401 in FIG. 305).

  In other words, does the continuous effect flag 223ab execute continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control unit 110 when a new gaming ball enters the first entrance 64? Is determined, and the determination result indicates that the continuous effect is to be executed until the timing of setting the variable display corresponding to the change of the special symbol 1 next time.

  In this control example, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set on (Z5008 in FIG. 300). And the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed to execute the continuous effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. In the set state, when the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to start the continuous effect in the current variation display, and the continuous effect is performed based on the lottery result. May be configured to determine a variable indication to start. By configuring in this way, the timing at which a new gaming ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the timing at which the continuous effect is started (the gaming ball enters the first entrance 64) After that, it is possible to start the continuous effect on both sides of the variable display which does not execute the continuous effect, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

  Further, in the prize information related process (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new gaming ball enters the first entrance 64 can be brought close to the timing when the continuous effect starts, so the ball that is the object of the continuous effect can be It is possible to make the player easily grasp. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous effect, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 actively during the fluctuation of the special symbol (during the execution of the fluctuation display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

  In addition, when changing the production corresponding to the fluctuation display under execution to continuous performance, the display content or the elapsed period of the fluctuation display under execution is determined, and the condition which can change the performance (for example, the third symbol display device Only when the variable display displayed at 81 shows a display mode (during high speed fluctuation) in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to continuous effect Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the sudden change of the effect being executed.

  In addition, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the currently displayed variable display to continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the currently displayed variable display. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to continuous rendering. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous effect is suddenly executed.

  The continuous effect in progress flag 223 ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed to set the continuous effect command for display If it has been set (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

  Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 306), and in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) When it is determined that the continuous effect is not continued (Z5106 in FIG. 301: No or Z5110: No), the process is set to OFF (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

  The continuous effect interruption flag 223 ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, an event in which the continuous effect is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, the continuous rendering is performed based on the winning information on the first special symbol (special figure 1) which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed in a normal state (a state not being a definite change state or a short time state). Configured to run. In addition, in this control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be prioritized and digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the second entrance slot 640a The game characteristics (the type of the special symbol variation to be executed) are different depending on whether the ball is likely to enter the ball in a definite change state or a short time state and a normal state.

  In addition, in this control example, in order to make it easy to temporarily receive the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) even if the gaming state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit The electric combination 640a, which is attached to the second entrance 640a and restricts the game ball from entering the second entrance 640a, is opened for a longer time (2 seconds) than normal (0.2 seconds). It is configured to perform a hit game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the game ball enters the second entry ball opening 640a while executing the continuous effect using the plurality of winning information on the first special symbol, In some cases, the second special symbol variation (lottery) may be executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed even though the continuous effect performed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is being executed. There is a problem that the contents of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different and give the player a sense of distrust.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol (the first special symbol ( It is comprised so that the continuous production which was interrupted when the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1) is performed is restarted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the contents of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different, and it is possible to prevent giving the player a sense of distrust.

  When the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the continuous effect interrupt flag 223ad is set. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 306: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223 ad is set to ON, the “standby” display (FIG. 291 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the continuous effect is interrupted). A display interruption command for executing ma) is set (Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304), when the special symbol to be targeted is the first special symbol (special figure 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 304). ).

  By configuring in this manner, during execution of the continuous effect set for variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), variation (lottery) is given priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1) When the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) where) is performed, the continuous effect is interrupted, and the timing (special figure 2) the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed Of the second special symbol (special figure 2), because it is possible to resume the continuous effect which was interrupted at the timing when the fluctuation of the second symbol (the special figure 2) is interrupted. It is possible to execute continuous rendition according to.

  Moreover, based on the fact that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the continuous effect execution, if the continuous effect is interrupted, the effect that the continuous effect is interrupted for the player The game is performed while expecting the player to feel discomfort if the continuous effect is suddenly ended, and the expectation is to resume the continuous effect. be able to.

  In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, and the background of the display screen This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous rendering when the background color is changed to another background ("mountain background", "river background").

  As described above with reference to FIG. 87 (a), in this control example, continuous effect is displayed only when "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be run. The background of this display screen is configured to be variably settable by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state (standby state) in which the special symbol variation is not executed or immediately after the start of the special symbol variation ( In high-speed fluctuation), the player operates the frame button 22 so that the background of the display screen is “sea background (sea mode)”, “mountain background (mountain mode)” (see FIG. 292), “river background ( It is comprised so that it may switch in order of "the river mode."

  Then, as a variation effect corresponding to the set background, a variation effect dedicated to each background and a variation effect common to a plurality of backgrounds are executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect mode of the fluctuation effect for showing the result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the special symbol different based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide various effects for the player, and to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the sea mode is set, the background of the display screen is variably set while the fluctuation mode dedicated to the sea mode (for example, consecutive announcements) is being performed. In addition, the process of rewriting the display data relating to the fluctuation effect is executed so that the fluctuation effect corresponding to the background after being variably set is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous effect and switches the background of the display screen from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data regarding the continuous effect is erased. Even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode" again, continuous rendering is not performed, and there is a problem that the rendering effect is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the present control example, a continuous effect update area 223 ae is provided, and even when the background of the display screen is switched to a mode other than the “sea mode” during execution of continuous effect, continuous effect The execution data of the image is temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae, and after switching the background of the display screen to other than the “sea mode” during execution of the continuous effect, the background of the display screen is again “sea When the mode is switched to “mode”, the remaining continuous effects can be performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the continuous effect disappears due to the player's erroneous operation.

  In this continuous effect update area 223ae, after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it was determined that the background mode is not "sea mode" In the case (Z 5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data regarding the determined presentation mode is stored (see Z 5409 in FIG. 305).

  Then, in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (see FIG. 307), when the background mode is switched to the “sea mode” (Z2871 in FIG. 308: Yes), it is stored Information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, the information (display data indicating the effect mode) stored in the area is erased when the continuous effect ends (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

  The effect frequency counter 223af is a counter for indicating a period (the number of times of special figure fluctuation) in which the continuous effect is executed. The effect number counter 223af determines that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command. Is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when it is determined that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), the continuous effect is set. The continuous effect setting process for is performed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

  Every time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (Z5407 in FIG. 305). By configuring in this manner, a period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is performed by the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. The continuous effect can be performed using a period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect from the variable display performed in the set state is performed.

  In the control example, the continuous effect is performed using the above-described period, but another period may be set as a period for executing the continuous effect, for example, the continuous effect You may start the continuous effect by changing the effect mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to execute the first special symbol (special figure 1 in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON The continuous effect may be performed when the number of fluctuations of 2) is two. In addition, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, when setting the display mode of a new variable display (when performing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed. Execution determination means may be provided, and the continuous effect may be executed when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed by the execution determination means. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous effect is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

  The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing setting of a new continuous effect during continuous effect execution, and is set to on during a period in which the continuous effect is being executed. The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process (process of Z5005 to Z5007 of FIG. 300) for determining whether or not continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being dissatisfied by starting a new continuous effect while the player is closely watching the progress of the continuous effect. Then, when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) that the continuous effect is finished (setting prohibition cancellation flag 223 ah is set to on) (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to be off. (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

  In this control example, in addition to the timing at which a new winning command is received, that is, the timing at which a winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is performed, it is determined whether or not continuous rendering is to be performed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), at the timing of receiving the stop command when ending, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301). Configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), it is set to ON also when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

  The time saving counter 223 ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number (the number of remaining fluctuation of the special symbol) for which the time saving state is set when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. At this time, when the state command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main control device 110, the value corresponding to the set number of times (100 in this control example) is set In the stop command process (see FIG. 301), every time the short-time process (see FIG. 302) is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is short (Z5101 in FIG. 301: Yes) 1 is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

  Then, in the processing during time saving (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the time shortening counter 223 ai is 0 (Z 5152 in FIG. 302), and when it is determined that it is 0 (Z 5152 in FIG. 302: Yes) The value of the number counter 223aj is set to 5.

  The fluctuation number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, the special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is configured to be executed when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. ing. It is against the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates in the normal state in which the game ball does not easily enter the second ball entrance 640. It is for giving and giving. However, when the gaming state is short, that is, the game ball easily enters the second entry ball opening 640 (when the electric role object 640a is easily opened), the reservation of the special view 2 is obtained, The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (special figure 2 hold) may be executed in the normal state after the time saving end. Even in such a case, when the special effect is executed, the special effect frequently occurs after the time-saving end, which makes it difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special effect.

  With respect to the problem described above, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within a predetermined period after the time reduction end. Specifically, discrimination processing is performed to determine whether the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed after the time saving end has reached a predetermined number (five times in this control example), and has not reached the predetermined number (five times) When it is determined that the special effect is not set. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which special effects frequently occur after the time saving end.

  In addition, in this control example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the time saving end is 5 times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (four) of the number of balls in the second special symbol (special figure 2) Since it is set as, even if the time saving state ends with the number of holding balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the holding sphere of special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state The conditions other than this control example mentioned above may be set as a condition where the special effect is not executed although it is surely prevented that it is carried out, for example, of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, the special effect is executed if the number of holding balls in the special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit at the time reduction end, so the holding balls of the special drawing 2 are motivated to the player. It can be made to save and the operation of a game can be raised.

  Moreover, in this control example, the condition using the number of times of variation of the special symbol is set as the condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set. For example, after the time saving state is finished A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the second time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special effect. Thus, by setting the conditions based on the elapsed time, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (when the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered, the game is performed without changing the special symbol Can be prevented from restricting the execution of the special effect for the game played by the next player.

  In addition, a game state determination means is provided for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the time saving state is by the game state determination means. If it is determined that the ball is a ball, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the special effect from being executed as a variable display for the entering ball.

  When the fluctuation counter 223aj determines that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is 0 in the time-and-hour process (see FIG. 302) (Z 5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), the special effect is restricted (prohibited). A value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times of fluctuation of the symbol is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is decremented by 1 each time fluctuation display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 99) is performed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) for setting the special effect, when the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is referred to and it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No) The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

  The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period in which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to on during a period in which the operation of switching the background of the display screen is inactivated. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched while this special effect is being executed. It is configured not to. By configuring in this manner, the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during a period in which a difficult-to-execute effect (special effect) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special effect is being executed.

  The operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON when the special effect setting mode is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and the first special symbol in the effect setting process (FIG. 304) When setting the fluctuation effect of (special figure 1) (Z 5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to be off (Z 5302 in FIG. 304). Then, while the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen in the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 2 (see FIG. 103) (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) is It will be skipped.

  The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, when it is determined in command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 299) that a state command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), state information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control unit 110 is configured to output a state command for indicating the current gaming state, so the power is turned off (power failure) Even in the above case, it is possible to properly determine the game state on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<About control processing by main controller in second control example>
Next, control processing performed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 294), the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 247) are special In the symbol change start process 2 (FIG. 295), the start winning process (FIG. 248) is changed to the start win process 2 (FIG. 296) and the pre-reading process (FIG. 249) is changed to the pre-reading process 2 (FIG. 297) It is the main difference.

  With reference to FIG. 294, special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. The difference is that it has been changed. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the present is in the jackpot of the special symbol (Z201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z201: Yes), the present processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

  Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value of the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter changed by calculation A pending ball count command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). Among the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) described later stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 by the holding ball number command set here and executed by the MPU 201 , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the processing of Z331 (Z331: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d To get (Z335).

  Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation A ball holding ball number command indicating a value is set (Z338). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201 is a voice. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 a of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in such a manner as holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3 and so on. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). The special symbol variation start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 295, the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example will be described. In special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start processing in the first control example (214: FIG. 247) The difference is that the processing of is performed collectively. The processing content is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example, the process of Z308 and Z316 is not performed with respect to the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example. The difference is that the process is collectively executed by the process of Z360. The processing content is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 297, prefetch processing 2 (Z360) which is one of the start winning processing 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of this pre-reading process 2 (Z360).

  In the pre-reading process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z 361: Yes), a special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the current winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area, a special hitting type counter C2, a stopping type selection counter C3, a fluctuation type The respective values of the counter CS1 are obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results defined in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, the hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, among the determination results defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d, a hit type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2 is obtained (Z364).

  Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, winning information including hit determination result information indicating the obtained hit determination result, hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and change type information for indicating the change type determination result A command is set (Z367), and this processing ends.

<About control processing by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 308. FIG. In the second control example, frame button input monitoring / rendering processing (Z2107), which is one process in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, is compared with the first control example. In the process 2 (Z2151), the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), and the variation display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153). It is a difference.

  Referring to FIG. 299, command determination processing 2 (Z2152) in the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination processing 2 (Z2152).

  In command determination processing 2 (Z2152), first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this processing ends Do. The processes of Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when it is determined in the process of Z2206 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). If a winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, a winning information related process (Z2255) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning information related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2253 that a winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that a state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), state information indicating the gaming state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2256 that no status command has been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2258). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop Execute command processing (Z2259). The details of the stop command process (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2258 that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 300, the winning information related process (Z2255) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (Z2255).

  In the winning information related process (Z2255), first, information on the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a read out is 2 or more (Z5003). If the number is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this process ends.

  In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether continuous rendering is to be performed (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is The value is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 301, stop command processing (Z2259) which is one of the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process (Z2259).

  In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that the time is short (Z5101: Yes), the process (Z5115) is performed and the process ends. The details of the time saving processing (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z5101 that the time is not short (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). If the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to OFF (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a Are read out (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a read out is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5105 that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is 2 or more, the winning information Reading from the storage area 223f is executed (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is jackpot winning information (Z5107). If it is determined that there is no jackpot winning (Z5107: No), the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and the present process is ended. If it is determined that there is jackpot winning information (Z5107: Yes), readout of the continuous rendering execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is executed (Z5108), and execution of the continuous rendering is determined (Z5109). After the processing of Z5109 is performed, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the above-described processing of Z5116 is executed, and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a corresponding to the big hit is set as the value of the effect frequency counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is performed finish.

  With reference to FIG. 302, a process (Z5115), which is one process in the stop command process (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process (Z5115) in this case.

  In the time saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is larger than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes of Z5204 to Z5208 are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired by the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, an effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. The details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is decremented by 1 (Z5208). If it is determined in the process of Z5207 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z5209.

  With reference to FIG. 304, an effect setting process (Z5204) which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (Z5204).

  In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the present fluctuation is a fluctuation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). If it is determined that the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z5303 that the continuous effect suspension flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the process of Z5304 described above is skipped.

  After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (Z5305: Yes), a continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process is ended. The details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z5305, when the value of the performance number counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern of an aspect not involving continuous rendering is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), the present process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition cancellation flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z5301 that the current variation is not the variation with the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

  In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to OFF (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). If it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the continuous effect final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the processing of Z5405 is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the current background mode is set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous effect command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the effect frequency counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407) ), The continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5408), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined rendering mode is stored in the continuous rendering update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating continuous rendering standby is displayed. Set (Z5410). Thereafter, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and the present processing is ended.

  The special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

  In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is time saving (Z5501). If it is determined that the time is not short (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on. (Z5504).

  Next, it is judged whether or not the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to on (Z5505). If it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), it is then determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). If it is set to OFF (Z 5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223 ad is set to ON (Z 5507), and an interruption command for display is set (Z 5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5501 that the time is short (Z5501: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z5502 that the value of the variation counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), The effect mode of the normal effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the process of Z5509 described above is executed, and the present process is ended. Further, in the processing of Z5505, when it is determined that the flag during continuous rendering 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or when it is determined that the continuous rendering suspension flag 223ad is set on in the processing of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), the above-described processing of Z5507 to Z5508 is skipped, the processing of Z5509 is executed, and the present processing is ended.

  With reference to FIG. 307, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (Z2151). The present second control example is different from the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that processing of Z2851 and processing of Z2852 are added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  The processing of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). If it is determined that the operation invalidation flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803 to Z2804 in the first control example is executed, and then a presentation return process (Z2852) is executed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 308, the effect restoration process (Z2852) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be explained. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return process (Z2852).

  In the effect return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not the “sea mode” (Z2871: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the background mode is the “sea mode” (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 307, the description will be continued. The effect recovery process (Z2852) is executed, and then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is ended.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 312. In the third control example described above, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the change of the special figure 2 Was used to resume the continuous effects that had been interrupted at the start of the first special symbol change after the. In this way, it is possible to execute continuous rendition in response to the change of the first special symbol, and it is possible to enjoy the last rendition.

  However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always resumed after a predetermined period (after the special figure 2 fluctuation end), so whether the continuous effect is resumed or not Because it is not possible to make the player get excited, it has been required to further enhance the rendering effect. On the other hand, in the third control example, interruption is performed based on the game content (number of times of fluctuation of the special figure 2) when the continuous effect is interrupted or the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be the object of the continuous effect It is determined whether or not to resume the continuous effect in the medium, and the continuous effect is restarted based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous effect is resumed while enjoying the special effect executed as the variable effect of the special figure 2 when the continuous effect is interrupted. The effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the third control example, the continuous effect is easily resumed when the lottery result of the special view 1 to be the continuous effect is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to play a game while expecting the player to resume the continuous effect. Further, in the third control example, as the number of times of special figure 2 fluctuation (the number of times of special effect execution) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted is smaller, the continuous effect is more easily resumed. As a result, when the period from the interruption to the resumption of the continuous effect is short, the continuous effect can be easily resumed, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, when a long period has passed since the continuous effect was interrupted, and the lottery result of the special figure 1 targeted for the continuous effect is out, the player is not given a sense of useless expectation for the jackpot. In order to do so, it is configured so that it is difficult to resume the continuous effect.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 309 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification. The third control example is different in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223 ba is added in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above. The other elements are the same as in the second control example, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223 ba is a counter for measuring the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 312) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is One is added (Z5551 of FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to (Z5602 of FIG. 311) in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 310). If it is determined in the processing of Z5602 that the value of the special view 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 in FIG. 311: Yes), the value of the special view 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 311). Z5603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z 5602 in FIG. 311: No), that is, while the continuous effect is interrupted, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more If it is determined, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a big hit among the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if it is determined that there is no (Z5605 in FIG. 311: Yes) The value of the effect frequency counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the above-described processing of Z5603 is executed.

  That is, in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311), when returning the interrupted continuous effect, it is assumed that the number of times of fluctuation of special figure 2 executed during the interruption of continuous effect is equal to or more than a predetermined number (three times) Based on the lottery result included in the winning information in the special figure 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to resume the continuous effect, and if the continuous effect result is out, the continuous effect is resumed. Since the player is only disappointed as well, the value of the effect frequency counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous effect is not resumed. As a result, when a long period has passed since the continuous effect was interrupted, and the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be subjected to the continuous effect is out, the player is given a sense of useless expectation to the jackpot. It is possible to suppress the end effect, to give expectation to the jackpot when the continuous effect is resumed, and to enhance the effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one process in the variation effect setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303), is partially changed from the second control example. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 310, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204) which is one process of the variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example is a point that the process of Z5310 is not executed with respect to the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example, and the special effect process (Z5311). It differs in the point which changed the processing content of) and the point which added the continuous effect return process (Z5351). The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

  In the continuous effect return process (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read (Z5601). Next, it is judged whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter read out is smaller than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that it is larger than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: No), the readout of the prize information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223f is executed. To do (Z5604). Next, it is judged whether or not there is a winning in the winning information read out (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and the above-described processing of Z5603 is executed to end the present processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5605 that there is a win (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  With reference to FIG. 312, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in the third control example is the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example. The difference is in that the process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Fourth control example
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The fourth control example is different from the above-described control examples in that the player has an adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

  First, with reference to FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to a third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has the first control example described above in that the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume is provided. The other configurations are the same. About the same composition, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  Here, the real time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and is configured of a real time clock capable of clocking the current time. The RTC 292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. Further, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC 292. The RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even in the power-off state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. For example, a button-type battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and power is supplied to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

  An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292. The input / output port is connected communicably to the audio lamp control device 113. The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as clocking of the current time and writing of data.

  The register is a storage area capable of temporarily storing data or performing an operation on the stored data. The register is provided with at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

  The clock register is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Whether or not it is an execution period of the time effect is determined based on the clocking information clocked in the clocking register.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the time register is stored in the input time storage area of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on (time information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) It is configured to determine whether to store the time information stored in the time information storage area or to store the time information stored in the time information storage area. That is, when the power is turned on in a state where the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the timing information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the insertion time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clocking register (clocking information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the charging time storage area. .

  As a result, the store clerk in the hall turns on the power at the same time without opening the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time from the power on grasped by each pachinko machine 10 Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of time production can be made to correspond. On the other hand, when turning off the power of some of the pachinko machines 10 during hall hours (for example, in the case of canceling an error, etc.), the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed down when the power is turned on again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to store the clocking information stored in the time information storage area in the insertion time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution timing of the time effect from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power is shut off and the other pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 314 and X, a display screen regarding volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 314 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and FIG. 314 (b) is not a game being played It is the model which showed typically the display screen (the customer waiting screen) of the 3rd symbol display 81 in a standby state, and X (a) is the power to a pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the special symbol change is executed. X (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the first special symbol fluctuation after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, in which is there.

  As shown in FIG. 314 (a), when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the return process of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is finished on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. While a comment of "Please wait for a while" notifying the period up to is displayed as the returning display mode S1, a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed of a horizontally long gauge for visually displaying the current volume and a set value display for indicating the current volume by a numerical value on the right side of the gauge. "1" is displayed, and the diagonal line area corresponding to the set value "1" is displayed on the gauge. Although the details will be described later, in the present control example, the setting value “1” is set as the initial value of the setting value of the volume when the power is turned on.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), pressing the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed displays the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3. Ru. When the volume switching display S3 shows "switching" display to indicate that the volume can be switched, the volume reduction display mode S3a indicating that the volume is lowered when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and the right volume button 23b is pressed. It is formed of a volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. The volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b while the volume switching display S3 is displayed.

  Here, in the conventional game machine, when performing cheating on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally operating the control contents of the main control device 110 and aiming for a big hit), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily once There is something that turns off and does cheating. In order to make it easy to detect such a fraudulent act, there is a device that is made to emit a loud noise when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  However, in recent years there are many pachinko machines 10 that emit a loud sound temporarily as a method of enhancing the rendering effect, and in the game arcade where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating, the loud volume emitted when the power is turned on. There was a problem that the salesclerk of the game arcade missed out. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the setting range of the sound volume that can be variably set by the player from the time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 to the end of the first special symbol fluctuation. Even small sounds are configured to be output. By configuring in this way, in the gaming machine where a loud sound is emitted during the normal game, it is possible to create an uncomfortable state as compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting a smaller sound than necessary. It can be made easy to be discovered by the salesclerk of the game arcade.

  Further, in this control example, the player can not adjust the volume between the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the end of the first special symbol fluctuation, so it is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player who has performed an action from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machine 10 by operating the volume button 23 after the power is turned on.

  Specifically, as shown in X (a), on the customer waiting screen after power on, the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314 (b) described above is displayed, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. Configured. As described above, although a volume smaller than the set value "1" of the volume is internally output, it is illegal to display the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the set value "1" on the display screen. It can be suppressed that a player who performs an act sees the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and recognizes that the player is the pachinko machine 10 subjected to the fraud countermeasure.

  Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the special symbol fluctuation during the first rotation after power on (during which a volume smaller than the set value "1" is output), the volume button 23 is pressed. The volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value can not be changed by operating the volume button 23.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in each control example described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. It differs in the point which provided the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a, the right volume button 23b) with respect to each control example mentioned above, and other than that is the same.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 317 (a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 317 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is largely different from the ROM of each control example described above in that a volume table 222 ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

  The volume table 222 ca is a data table in which setting values of volume that can be set by operating the volume button 23 are defined. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the volume table 222 ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in the volume table 222ca, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power on is satisfied. A set value (set value “A”) to be set in the case of being set is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

  Specifically, a set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special figure variation) at the first rotation after power-on is completed. When the setting value "A" is set, a sound with a magnitude of 15 db (decibel) is output. Further, when the set value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, the magnitude of 75 db (decibel) When the setting value "3" is set, a sound of 85 db (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, the size of 95 db (decibel) Sound is output.

  In this control example, although the setting value “1” is set as the initial value after power on, it is configured to set the initial value of the volume corresponding to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the power is first turned on after shipping the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and if the flag is set to ON, the setting value “3” is set as the initial value. It may be configured such that the time when the power is turned on is determined, and different set values are set as initial values based on the determination result.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 317 (b). In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalidation flag 223cb, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. There is a difference in points. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (stores) the set volume currently set, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 319). The set values are stored (Z6003 and Z6004 in FIG. 320). Also, the setting value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the audio lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

  The volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in setting value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is invalidated, and the change in volume based on the operation of the volume button 23 (setting value Change is set to on during the period when the change is invalid. When it is determined that the clocked time of the RTC is during business hours (for example, 10:00 am to 10:00 pm) in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) (Z6002 in FIG. 320): In the case of Yes), it is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 320), and is referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined in the process of Z6107 that it is set to ON (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314A) is not displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314B). Setting a display volume command for displaying only the display (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, the volume related process (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command process 4 (FIG. 323) is set to off (Z5122 in FIG. 324). That is, when the special symbol variation is stopped, the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to off when it is set to on.

  The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is a thing. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first depress the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is pressed by mistake during the game.

  When the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation in a state where the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed state) at the time of power-on, the operation-set maximum It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM is cleared at a volume higher than the volume or the maximum volume set for operation. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the fraud such as illegally executing the RAM clear and aiming at the random number value.

  Further, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume smaller than the minimum volume to be operated and set until one fluctuation at the time of power on is ended, but the invention is not limited thereto. A sound such as BGM or effect sound (voice for presentation) when the special symbol is variably displayed at a volume smaller than the minimum volume to be operated and set, and the volume setting state to the third symbol display device 81 May be displayed until the player operates the volume button 23, and the volume may be maintained and output. By configuring in this manner, a large volume can be obtained by outputting sound by the previous player's volume setting (volume setting on the previous day) at the start of a game at the time of opening of a game arcade after power on. Thus, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by the output. Furthermore, by setting the volume smaller than the minimum volume, the player can be noticed while suppressing harm to the player that the volume is small, and the volume adjustment can be performed by the operation of the volume button 23 You can notice that it is configured. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching the volume to a volume smaller than the minimum by switching to the demonstration screen regardless of the power-on time. Furthermore, after the game is started (the change of the special symbol starts), the volume button 23 is not operated, and during the period when the setting of the volume smaller than the minimum volume is continued, the change of the special symbol Depending on the lottery result (pre-reading result), the display color (volume pattern and volume button (volume up with right operation, volume down with left operation)) can be changed according to the lottery result (pre-reading result) though it is held and stored You may comprise so that it may be made to alert | report the degree of expectation of a hit. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enjoy playing a game with a quiet volume and increase the volume at a timing when the degree of expectation increases until the fluctuation with high expectation or storage is stored.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to Z324. In the fourth control example, an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the startup process to the first control example, a volume setting process (Z2171) in the main process, and a sound editing / output process (Z2109) The main differences are the addition of the process and the addition of the volume related process (Z5120) to the stop command process which is one process in the command determination process.

  With reference to FIG. 319, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 319) in the fourth control example is different from the startup process (FIG. 275) in the first control example in that an initial sound volume setting process (Z2051) is added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 320, initial volume setting (Z2051) which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of the initial volume setting (Z2051).

  In the initial volume setting, first, the calculation time of the RTC is read out (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the present time is during business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the setting value 2 is read out from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the setting value 1 is read out from the volume table 222ca and stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6004). Then, the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to on. (Z6005), this processing ends.

  Main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 4. The main process (FIG. 321) in the fourth control example is different from the main process (FIG. 258) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z 2171) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 322, a volume setting process (Z2171) which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume setting process (Z2171).

  In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button is operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read setting value is set (Z6104). Next, a voice setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to on (Z6107). If it is determined that the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and the adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to ON in the processing of Z6107 (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for indicating a volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing is ended.

  With reference to FIG. 323, stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 4 (Z2259). A stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example is different from the stop command process (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that a volume related process (Z5120) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 324, the sound volume related process (Z5120) which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sound volume related processing (Z5120).

  In the volume related process (Z5120), first, it is determined whether the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalidation flag 223cb is set to off (Z5122), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z5121 that the volume operation invalidation flag is off (Z5121: No), the process of Z5122 is not executed, and the present process is ended.

<About the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 325 to 345, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, control processing regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Only the differences from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

  In the fifth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the initial operation of the tilting device 310 and the error processing during the initial operation, and the control processing and errors in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game The process will be described.

  With reference to FIGS. 325 (a) and (b), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In FIG. 325 (a), in the initial operation at power on (tilt initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110), the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (the tilt device 310 will be described later). The display mode of the error notification displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when it is not detected at the origin position even when the initial operation period ends and the initial operation period reaches the origin position) (Display) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 325 (a), even if the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends is elapsed, the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position. The text “Please call a button return error A person in charge” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is configured to notify the hall employee or the like that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, at the time of initial operation, when the tilting device 310 is not moved to the home position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error display as shown in FIG. 325 (a) is performed. There is. In addition, although details will be described later, a normal game in which the player can not normally perform the normal operation defined by the effect etc. by obstructing the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding down the operation with his hand etc. During this time, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, a predetermined specific condition (for example, operating the tilting device 310 every three variations of the special symbol is performed four times without displaying an error immediately) Consecutively, when an abnormality is detected until an abnormality is satisfied (eg, when an abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310), it is configured to notify an error, and the progress of the game is neither a mechanical abnormality nor Regardless of the problem, it is configured to be able to suppress the problem that it prevents.

  It should be noted that the error display during the initial operation is a mechanical (including a control abnormality) abnormality by making the display distinguishable as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. 325 (a). It is comprised so that it can be discriminate | determined easily.

  As shown in FIG. 325 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in the effect of the game during normal gaming (during game after completion of the initial operation of the tilting device 310), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. When the movement to move to the home position is completed when movement to move the home position is not detected by the home position sensor even if the movement to move to the home position is completed, an error is not displayed immediately and an error occurs internally. Is made to be a status indicating a detected state, and then it can be moved to the origin position every three variations of the special symbol, and if it can be moved to the origin position continuously for four, the third symbol display device The letters “Please call a button return error B person in charge” are displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 to inform the player and the hall employee etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. Over display is executed.

  Here, by displaying characters different from those in the initial operation of "button return error B", it is possible to easily identify that it is an abnormality in the normal game. As described above, in the present control example, when the normal game is in progress, the error display is performed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing the game that hinders the operation of the tilting operation 310. It is configured to be able to suppress problems that are frequently executed. In addition, when the error display is executed during the normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a gaming method which prevents the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented early by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. In FIG. 326, when the variation of normal reach out A is executed as the variation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol), the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed, and the period during which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin It is a timing chart in an example which is not detected by an origin sensor even if it becomes a period when return is completed.

  When the fluctuation display of normal reach out A (fluctuation time (fluctuation period) 30000 ms) is determined, the value of effect counter 223 h is acquired, and the judgment value “0 to 149” set in operation effect selection table 222 da described later If it matches with the value of the effect counter 223h acquired and collated with either of these, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (refer FIG. 333 (a)) mentioned later will be determined. The tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 333 (a)) is a position where the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 33 as a turning operation after the tilting device 310 is raised to the highest position (see FIG. 32). After the operation of repeating the highest position (see FIG. 32) at an interval of 0.5 seconds is performed, the operation to be lowered to the position shown in FIG. 22 as the origin position is performed (set).

  When normal reach removal A is executed, the third symbol is a reach display mode (18 symbols after the start of variation of the special symbol (T1)) (the third symbol of the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol) It becomes temporary stop (stop). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, it is described that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of variation of the special symbol. An operation effective period (T5) is set in which the detection is determined to be valid when the detection sensor 324 detects the detection.

  As shown in FIGS. 326 and 333 (a), at 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the start of fluctuation of the normal reach out A (T1), the drive motor 342 is rotated 210 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 22). Step rotation causes the disk cam 344 to rotate clockwise 210 degrees from the home position (the position in FIG. 22), and is moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 30 (see the operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333 (a)). ). Thereafter, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (the operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After stopping for 3 seconds, the drive cam 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 30) to rotate the disc cam 344 counterclockwise 20 degrees to release the locking position. It is moved to (see FIG. 32) (see action pointer 3 (see FIG. 333) (a)).

  Here, when moving from the cam release position to the lock release position, as described in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the release member 346 is moved downward (counterclockwise). By being rotated, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated clockwise, the engagement (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is a torsion spring 315. It is raised by the energizing force by. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide assistance to the tilting device 320 in the front-rear direction, whereby the rising force is increased and the rising speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period of time until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited (see the operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Thereafter, the drive cam 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) to rotate the disc cam 344 50 degrees counterclockwise and downward 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 32). It is moved to the turned and lowered position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Then, after 0.5 seconds, the disk cam 344 is rotated by 50 degrees clockwise by driving the drive motor 342 50 steps in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 33) again by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is rotated again. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (action pointer 6 (see FIG. 333 (a))).

  Then, after 0.5 seconds again, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest position to the downward position (the operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333 (a))), and 0.5 seconds after that, the highest position from the downward position The tilt device 320 is driven to the raised position (action pointer 8 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (the operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333 (a))). When the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect return operation process (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed to drive based on an origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 334A) described later. By driving the motor 342 in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disc cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise to drive the tilting device 320 downward to the home position. Is transmitted.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to be lowered by the player at the highest position. In such a case, as described in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b, and the transmission gear 343b is idled to drive the drive motor 342. Also, the disc cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

  Here, even if the tilt operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334A) of the drive motor 342 has elapsed, the detection sensor 324 detects that the origin position is If not, the tilt operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an abnormality of the tilt device 310, which is an internal state (an abnormal state that is not a state of notifying the outside) described later.

  As described above, even if the tilt device 320 may not be returned to the home position from the highest position by being held by the player, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343 b) is configured by the movable clutch 343 c. By idle rotation, damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343b, and the like can be suppressed. Further, by being configured to be able to determine that there is an abnormality in the origin return operation based on the tilting operation status, it is configured to be able to internally identify an abnormal state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 327, when the effect that the tilting device 310 rises (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, the origin sensor is detected even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 ms) has elapsed. The control executed after the tilting operation status is set to “4” without turning “on” will be described. In FIG. 327, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation is performed to return the tilting device 310 to the home position every time three fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure) are performed. Is a timing chart in the case where

  When the tilt operation status is set to “4”, as shown in FIG. 327, a retry operation is performed in which the drive motor 342 is operated to move the tilt device 310 to the home position every three fluctuations of the special symbol. Be done. In this case, the home position sensor should not be turned on in the retry operation four times continuously (4 times of the retry operation for every 3 changes) while maintaining “4” as the value of the tilt operation status until the home position sensor is detected. The error display shown in FIG. 325 (b) is executed.

  Thereby, the effect that the tilting device 310 rises is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player plays a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to prevent the operation and the origin position Even when there is an abnormality that is not moved to the retry operation, retry operation is performed every time the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times (three times) without notifying the abnormality immediately as in the case of the abnormality at the initial operation. If it is determined that the player can not move to the home position continuously, an error is displayed, and the player frequently displays an error due to mischief etc. by the player and the work by the game store employee is It is possible to suppress busy problems.

  Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, when the preview effect using touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control in the case where the origin detection operation (retry operation) is performed based on the timing when it has become is described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing an operation of the tilting device 310 which is performed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is performed. The change of the special symbol is started, the notice effect that the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective is selected, the effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290, etc. The operation is performed, and the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven at the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 has detected ON, and the origin detection operation is performed. FIG. 328 shows the case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilt operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, when the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilt operation status is maintained while being set to "4". . As a result, the retry operation is subsequently executed every three variations, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be executed.

  Usually, the player operates the launch handle with the right hand, and the operation of the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 is performed with the left hand. When the player is playing while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the original position, it is conceivable that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand, so the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on By causing the tilt device 310 to perform the origin detection operation, the origin detection operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilt device 310 is released, and the tilt device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is on, but only when the touch sensor 290 is on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is on. The origin detection operation may be performed so that the origin detection operation can be performed in a state where the player's holding is released more reliably. Further, not only the touch sensor 290 but also the frame button 290 may be used, and the third symbol display device 81 may execute a notice effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "get both hands up", etc.) An effect of reading a three-dimensional code or the like may be performed by a mobile phone or the like, and the origin detection operation may be performed in that period. Naturally, it may be an effect of informing to use both hands by voice.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The tilting device 310 has already been described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, and the detailed configuration is the same as that described above, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The drive motor 342 is configured by a stepping motor, and is driven such that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is released from being locked so as to prevent the lifting at the lower limit position. When the lock is released, the vibrational force of the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, to the back and forth direction of the pachinko machine 10 assists and lifts to the highest position by the biasing force of the spring. .

  On the other hand, in a state where the tilting member 310 is positioned at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the home position by rotating the drive motor 342 in the reverse direction to the case of raising. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the home position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), and the lifting of the tilting device 310 is restricted.

  The detection sensor 324 is configured of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13 and is configured of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R. The tilting device 310 shown in FIG. In the restricted state, the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Thus, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both of the left side detection sensor 324L are turned ON. The tilt device 310 can be determined to be operated by the player at the lower limit position.

  As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect to be pressed (operated) by the player not only when being moved to the highest position but also when being restricted at the lowest position. It can be used for various effects. For example, if the probability that the tilting device 310 is raised and pressed is performed during the change of the special symbol that the success or failure judgment result is a hit is set high, the expectation of the success or failure judgment result is determined by the tilting device 310 Can be represented.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed on the back side of the tilting device 310, and is driven to repeat vibration from the back side direction to the front side direction of the tilting device 310, and vibrates the tilting device 310. When the player touches the tilting device 310, it is for performing an effect that can feel a vibration. Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 is raised, it rises by the biasing force of the spring against gravity, but the rising force is weakened by the weight of the tilting device 310, but by driving when the voice coil motor 352 is raised. Ascending force is applied by vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and a problem that the ascending force is weakened by its own weight can be suppressed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 330 (a). FIG. 330 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The fifth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the operation effect selection table 222da, the tilt operation scenario table db, the origin detection operation A table 222dcc, the origin detection operation B table 222dd, and the tilt initial operation table 222de are added. doing.

  The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a judgment value of the effect counter 223h is set which determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability depending on the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting operation scenario is set with respect to the determination value for performing the operation effect. In the tilt operation scenario, an operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining an opportunity to start the operation effect of the tilt device 310 with the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the tilt device 310. The operation valid start time (operation valid) which is the timer value of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operating time (operating period) of the timer and the start time (start period) at which the operation of the tilting device 310 becomes valid. A start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period) which is a timer value for determining that the period in which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid is ended are set. That is, according to the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be performed, and when it is performed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 The setting of the effective period (T5) for effectively determining the operation when the user presses the button is executed.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach out A", it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and the operation effect is to be executed. When it is determined that the effect selection is executed from the effect selection table 222da (when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any of “0 to 149”), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is The tilt operation scenario A table 222bd1 described later is selected, 8800 ms is set in the tilt operation timer 223db (T2) (Z 2923 in FIG. 341), 18000 ms is set in the operation effect start time (T1), and the operation valid start time (T3). ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms. .

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is “Super reach jackpot A” or “Super reach out A”, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223 h is acquired and the operation effect is to be executed. If it is determined that execution is performed from the selection table 222da and the operation effect is to be executed (if the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting device will be described later as an operation scenario of the tilting device. Operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, 7900 ms is set in tilt operation timer 223db (T2) (Z 2923 in FIG. 341), 38000 ms is set in operation effect start time (T1), and 41500 ms in operation effective start time (T3) Is set, and 45900 ms is set as the operation valid end time (T4). Thus, according to the variation type of the special symbol, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period for which the operation is effective are set in advance, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

  The tilt operation scenario table 222db sets origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilt device 320 to the origin after executing the type of tilt operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da and the tilt operation scenario. The data table for setting is set.

  FIG. 332 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilt operation scenario table 222db is provided with a tilt operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilt operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

  The tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the operation content in the tilt operation scenario A is defined, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is normal reach A out or normal reach A, and the tilt device 310 is movable. The operation data of is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of variation of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. When the change of the special symbol is started, when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started.

  The operation of the tilt operation scenario A table 222db1 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer during the required time corresponding to the lapse of the time of the tilt operation timer 223db in order from the operation pointer “1” (Z2953 in FIG. 343) ) Until the motion pointer becomes “10” (the tilt motion timer 223 db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the trigger for the operation effect start time (18000 ms) starts after the variation of the special symbol starts, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (210 steps during 2100 ms backward direction) Movable) is performed, and the cam removing operation (the second pull-in portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 rotates the release member 346 clockwise) to move the second overhang portion 344c3 to the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) The cam is moved to the cam release position (i.e., the second overhang portion 344c3 is moved to the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotation claw member 347). Next, a standby operation is performed by executing operation data of which the operation pointer is “2” (stopping for 3000 ms). The motion data of motion pointer “3” (moving 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the locking release operation (the second overhang portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward) The disc cam 344 is moved to the unlocking position by rotating the rotating claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the lifting of the tilting device 320 is started.

  Next, motion data with motion pointer “4” (stop for 500 ms) is executed to wait for rise, motion data with motion pointer “5” (50 steps movable forward in 500 ms) Is performed, the position shown in FIG. 33 is performed, and the movement pointer is set to the position shown in FIG. 32 and the operation data of “6” (50 steps is movable backward for 50 ms) is performed. The motion data of the motion pointer “7” (moving 50 steps in the forward direction for 500 ms) is executed and the position shown in FIG. 33 is obtained again, and the motion data of the motion pointer “8” (50 steps during 500 ms The movement pointer is moved to the position of FIG. 33 again, and the movement pointer “4” to “8” are repeated twice, and the movement pointer has movement data “9” (during 1000 ms). Is executed, and the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 32, and the operation pointer becomes "10" to end the operation.

  As described above, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222 db1 is such that after the tilting device 320 is moved from the state at the origin position to the highest position, the tilting device 320 is at the highest position. After the crawling operation is performed, an operation of returning to the home position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts rising, the detection thereof is validated. It is discriminated, and a specific notice effect (for example, an effect notifying the degree of expectation of a hit, etc.) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also have sound effects adapted to the notice effect. And the lamp lighting mode is lighted. If the tilting device 320 is pressed before the player has 3.5 seconds of the operation effective period (T5) after the tilting device 320 starts to rise, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is performed, the depression device 320 is moved to the home position by the pressing operation, and when the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the home position, the home position detection The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed to move the disk cam 344 to the initial position (origin position).

  When the transmission gear 343b is idled by being held by the player at a position where the tilting device 320 is raised or the like, the left side detection sensor 353L is turned ON and it is determined that it is the initial position. A control operation is performed to return to the home position.

  The tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation content in the tilt operation scenario B is defined, and stores operation data when the tilt device 310 moves when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of variation of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. When the change of the special symbol is started, when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da becomes a trigger, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started.

  The tilt operation scenario B table 222db2 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the time of the tilt operation timer 223db in order from the operation pointer “1” (Z2953 in FIG. 343). The defined action is performed until the action pointer becomes “11” (the tilt action timer 223 db becomes 0).

  Specifically, when the trigger for the operation effect start time (38000 ms) starts after the variation of the special symbol is started, the operation data of the action pointer is “1” (50 steps in the forward direction for 500 ms) Motion is performed, the lock is released, motion data with motion pointer “2” (stop for 3000 ms) is executed, and standby is performed, motion data with motion pointer “3” (200 ms Motion data of 20 steps is moved forward), motion data with motion pointer “4” (20 ms backward motion in 20 ms) is executed, motion data of motion pointer is “5” During 200 ms, 20 steps are moved in the forward direction), and motion data with an operation pointer of "6" (20 steps in the backward direction) is performed. The operation data of “7” (20 steps movable in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the movement data of the operation pointer “8” (20 steps movable in the backward direction for 200 ms) is performed Motion data of which motion pointer is "9" (120 steps can be moved forward for 1200 ms) is executed as the motion pointer "3" to "8" repeated three times of motion. The operation data is raised to the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation data of which the operation pointer is “10” (stop for 2000 ms) is executed, the operation is stopped at the position of FIG. .

  With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs the turning operation during the reach effect to urge the player to operate, and changes the turning operation according to the change type, while the operation effect is being performed. By stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation can be created and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In this control example, the type of tilting operation scenario is set to correspond to the type of fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and tilting operation scenarios A and B are performed depending on whether the pass / fail judgment result is hit or not. Alternatively, the selection rate may be changed and set according to the result of the pass / fail judgment by distributing and setting the judgment value of the effect counter 223h. By configuring in this manner, for example, the player can be judged as a result of the determination whether the tilting operation scenario is executed in which the probability of being selected is higher when the result of the determination is a win than in the case of the removal. Can be expected to be a hit.

  Also, as in the tilt operation scenario B table 222db2, after performing the swing operation at the start of the operation, the tilt operation scenario type to be operated to move to the origin position without rising to the highest position is set. It is also good. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilt operation scenario B is set so that it is easy to be selected when the pass / fail judgment result is a hit, and when the pass / fail judgment result is out, the tilt action scenario of only the turning action is By setting to be easy to select, it is possible to have a high expectation for the jackpot by being beaten.

  The origin detection operation A table 222 db 3 stores the inclination device 310 at the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the inclination device 310 performs the operation of the inclination operation scenario A. The operation data for is stored.

  FIG. 334 (a) schematically shows the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilt operation scenario table, the operation pointer is sequentially operated from the operation data of “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (the tilt operation timer 223 db becomes 0).

  Specifically, motion data of motion pointer “1” (190 steps are movable forward in 1900 ms) is executed, motion pointer becomes “2”, and the motion ends.

  When the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table is finished and the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes) Or, when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da. By performing (Z2959), the operation contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 are read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the return-to-play operation processing (FIG. 343, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. If (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 That (Z2973: No) until, homing operation is performed.

  The origin detection operation B table 222 db 4 stores the inclination device 310 at the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the inclination device 310 performs the operation of the inclination operation scenario B. The operation data for is stored.

  FIG. 334 (b) schematically shows the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilt operation scenario table, the operation pointer is sequentially operated from the operation data of “1” until the operation pointer becomes “2” (the tilt operation timer 223 db becomes 0).

  Specifically, motion data of motion pointer “1” (190 steps are movable forward in 1900 ms) is executed, motion pointer becomes “2”, and the motion ends.

  When the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table is finished and the player operates the tilt device 310 during the operation valid period and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes) Alternatively, it is executed when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959), whereby the effect return operation process (FIG. 343, Z2911) is performed. The operation contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 are read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin operation is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) The home position return operation is performed until.

  The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing the origin point detection when the origin point detection is not performed although the origin point detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. There is.

  FIG. 334 (c) schematically shows the content of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry operation table 222dc, similarly to the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above, whether the operation pointer becomes “2” (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) sequentially from the operation data of the operation pointer “1”, The process is performed until the origin point is detected (Z2989: Yes).

  Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc is ended when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-described origin detection operation, and 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975), In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting 3 in the detection fluctuation counter 223dc (Z2976) and setting 4 in the detection check counter 223dd (Z2913: Yes) If the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983). If the detection variation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), retry is performed based on the contents of the retry operation table. Operation time (900 ms) Set between 223db is (Z2985), the detection check counter 223Dd 1 is subtracted (Z2986), the value after the subtraction is 1 or more: If (Z2987 Yes), sets the detection variation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the home position (Z2989: No) and the tilt operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read (Z2991), and the retry operation is the tilt operation timer. It is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the home position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is performed once in three times of the variation of the special symbol, and is performed up to four times if the origin point detection is not performed.

  The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting an initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 334 (d) schematically shows the contents of the tilting initial operation table 222dd. In the tilt initial motion table 222dd, the motion pointer becomes “2” sequentially from the motion data of “1”, and the tilt motion timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes), similarly to the motion of the tilt motion scenario table described above. Or until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

  Specifically, when the content of the RAM is normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms) is obtained based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. Is set to the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilt operation status is set to 1 (Z2062) to start the operation.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 331 is a schematic view schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In the second control example, the tilt operation status 223 da, the tilt operation timer 223 db, the detection fluctuation counter 223 dc, the detection check counter 223 dd, the tilt operation flag 223 de, and the depression advance notice effective with respect to the first control example described above. The difference is that a timer 223 df is added.

  The tilt operation status 223 da stores information for determining the operation state of the tilt device 310. The tilt operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilt device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operation state is established.

  The tilting operation status 223 da is determined in the tilting device control process (Z 2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 3 (Z 2161) according to the value of the tilting operation status 223 da. . Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223 d is “0” (Z 2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z 2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for an operation start. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is “1” (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is under execution of the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the processing during operation effect (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is a state during operation effect during special symbol variation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the effect-returning operation process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the returning operation after the scenario operation.

  When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the middle of executing the retry operation for detecting the origin. If the value of the tilt operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the execution in this processing is ended when the value of the tilt operation status 223d is "5", but the above-described initial operation and return operation are This is an error state in which the origin point can not be detected when it is performed, but in the case of an error state, there is no change in the tilting operation until the power is turned on again.

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, the tilt operation status 223da is set to 2 when starting to change the special symbol and becoming a trigger for the operation effect start time (Z2921: Yes) It is set (Z2922), and the tilting operation is in the state of operation effect during the variation operation of the special symbol.

  In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), 0 is set when the initial operation detects the origin of the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: Yes) when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes) When the home position of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

  In the processing during operation effect (Z2909: FIG. 343), when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), there is an origin detection of the detection sensor 324 ( In Z2961: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in a standby state.

  In the return operation process after presentation (Z2911: FIG. 344), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set to the tilt operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilt operation is in a standby state. Finish.

  If the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2971: No) when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No), 4 is set to the tilt operation status 223da, and the retry operation is in progress for the tilt operation. It becomes.

  In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2989: Yes) after the start of variation of the special symbol (Z2989: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972 If the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 5 (if the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2989: No). Z2994), and the tilting operation is in an error state.

  The tilting operation timer 223 db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. When the power is turned on, the initial operation time is set (Z2061), and each time the main processing (FIG. 336) is executed, the tilting operation timer 223db is incremented by one and repeatedly updated.

  In the standby state in which the value of the tilting operation status is “0”, the operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the value of the tilt operation status is "2", the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes) when the operation effect is in progress. The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. While the retry operation is being executed when the value of the tilt operation status is “4”, the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc.

  The detection variation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of variations during the retry operation performed when the home position is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation by the tilting device 310. The detection variation counter 223dc is tilted when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) in the after-effect return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value 223da of the tilt operation status is "3". When the operation timer 223 db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation.

  During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the start timing of variation of special symbol (Z2981: Yes), it is judged that the retry operation remains and the following judgment processing is performed Do. First, when the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983) and the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is judged that the fluctuation is to be performed for the retry operation, and the tilt operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. After the setting (Z2985) is performed, if the result of subtracting 1 (Z2986) of the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). The detection variation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

  The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the home position is not detected in the return operation after the tilt device 310 performs the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd is tilted when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) in the after-effect return operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if there is no origin detection.

  When the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player and moved to the home position during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag 223de is a rotating claw member It is a flag which shows having been locked by 347. This tilt operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilt device 320 is pressed and operated during the operation valid period by the processing of Z2956 of the operation in-progress processing (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Is set to on. On the other hand, after the tilt operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3 and is set to be off after the origin return operation is performed (see Z2960).

  The depression advance notice valid timer 223 df is detected when the tilting device 320 is pressed as an effect switch when the tilting device 320 is not lifted (that is, held by the rotating claw member 347 at the home position). It is a timer for determining the effective period which determines the detection of the switch 324 effectively. The depression advance notice valid timer 223 df is based on the start timing of the effective period when the notice advance effect using the tilting device 320 as a switch for effect is determined as the notice effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Data corresponding to the determined effective period is stored. When data corresponding to the valid period is set in the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 337), the cam removing operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is to be executed due to an operation sound at which cam removal is performed or vibration transmitted to the player from the pachinko machine 10. Further, the pressing advance notice valid timer 223 df is updated by being decremented by one by the pressing Z 2873 (see FIG. 337).

<About control processing by main controller in fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 335 to 345, control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, a part of the startup process (FIG. 335) and the main process (FIG. 336) is added to the first control example, frame button input monitoring / rendering process (Z2107: FIG. 272) is changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) is changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338), retry processing during touch input (Z2860) 339), tilt device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340), operation effect setting processing (FIG. 341), tilt initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342), operation effect processing (Z2909: FIG. 343), effect return operation The difference is that processing (Z2911: FIG. 344) and retry operation processing (Z2913: FIG. 345) are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The start-up process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example is different from the start-up process (FIG. 257) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example, after the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013 is executed, the tilt initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 334 (d)) provided in the ROM 222 is obtained. Based on this, the tilt operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main processing described later (FIG. 336) is executed.

  As described above, since the tilt operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilt device 320 is executed by the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, the game can be started in a state where the initial operation is performed at the time of power-on and moved to the home position. Further, although illustration is omitted, the step counter etc. is set to an initial value based on the fact that the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on. Control can be performed stably.

  The main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process (FIG. 336) of the fifth control example, frame button input monitoring / rendering process (Z2107) is performed with respect to the main process (FIG. 258) of the first control example. It differs in that it changes to). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 337, frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), which is one of the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (Z2161).

  In frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is currently in the process of changing the special symbol for which execution of the pressing notice is determined (setting of pressing notice) (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing notice is determined. If it is determined that the pressing advance notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice valid period is underway (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing notice is being executed, and it is determined whether the pressing notice valid timer 223 df has a value larger than zero. If it is determined that the pressing advance notice valid period is underway (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice enable timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display press notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2890. It should be noted that in the process of Z2881 (Z2881: No) if the pressing notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2884 that the player does not press the button (Z2884: No) Skip other processing and move to processing of Z2890.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2882 that the pressing advance notice effective period is not in progress (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pressing advance notice effective period which is the start timing of executing the depression advance ( Z 2886). In addition, the start timer which is not shown in figure at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a special symbol is set, and the start timing of a press alert is discriminate | determined by the value of the start timer (when updated to "0" which is a specific value).

  If it is determined that it is the start timing of the effective period (Z2868: Yes), the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the pressing advance notice effective timer 223df is set, and 2100 ms of cam removal operation The post-rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z 2887). With this configuration, the cam removing operation is always performed even when the tilting device 320 does not perform the rising operation, so that the player can be expected to perform the rising effect.

  If it is not the start timing of the pressing advance notice effective period (Z2868: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the end timing of the pressing advance notice effective period is reached (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing advance notice valid period timer 223 df is zero. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing advance notice effective period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the pressing advance notice effective timer 223df is reset, and a post-rotation operation is set for 1500 ms as an origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2888 that it is not the end timing of the effective period (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the process of sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

  The details of the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a tilting device control process (Z2891) is performed, and the process ends. The details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 338, sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example will be described. In sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example, processing in Z2286 to Z2829 is not executed with respect to the sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example, and retry during touch input It differs in the point which adds processing (Z2860). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Referring to FIG. 339, a touch input retry process (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the contents of retry processing (Z2860) during touch input.

  In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is an origin detection (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor does not detect the origin (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the rolling direction one step later (Z2864), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is the origin detection (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process is ended.

  The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

  In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is judged whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is decremented by one. When it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the present process is ended.

  As described above, when the tilt operation status indicating the return-to-origin abnormality of the tilt device 320 is “4” at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the retry operation of the return-to-origin is executed. Retrieving the tilting device 320 to a home position by performing a home position return retry operation at a high probability of using both hands (one hand operating the firing handle and the other hand operating the touch sensor 290) Can.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 341, an operation effect setting process (Z2905) which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

  In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time effect start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilt operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2924), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation status 223 da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilt initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process is ended.

  A tilt initial operation process (Z2907) which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation processing (Z2907).

  In the tilt initial operation processing (Z2907), first, it is judged whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2931). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilt initial operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2931 whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the home position (Z2933: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2934), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the home position (Z2933: No), 5 is set as the tilt operation status (Z2935). Next, a tilt error A command is set as a display error command (Z2936), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the abnormality at the time of origin return in the initial operation performed at the time of power-on, unlike in the game, by immediately displaying an error (abnormal process), a defect of the tilting device 320 may be found early. it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2906 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the processing during operation effect (Z2909) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 343, the processing during operation effect (Z2909) which is one of the tilting device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of a process during operation effect (Z2909).

  In the processing during operation effect (Z2909), first, it is judged whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this processing ends. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation valid period is in progress (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation effective period is not in progress (Z2954: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation valid period is in progress (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is pressing detection (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing is detected (Z2955), this processing ends. If it is determined that pressing has been detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). If it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin point detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2957 that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the home position (Z2961: No), the above-described processing of Z2958 to Z2960 is executed, and this processing is ended. When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the home position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2908 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect-after-reverting operation process (Z2911) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 344, an effect return operation process (Z 2911) which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z 2891: FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect-returning operation process (Z2911).

  In the return operation processing after effect (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the home position (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2971 that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read (Z2974), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2973 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set in the detection variation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), 4 is set in the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of Z2910 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), the present process is ended as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 345, the retry operation process (Z2913) which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

  In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether it is a fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is judged whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985) The value of the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2981 that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the home position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990). If it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read (Z2991), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Z2990 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), a tilt error B command is set as a display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223 da is set to 5 (Z 2994), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position in the process of Z2989 (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and the process is ended.

  In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in the present control example, when the player holds down or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 is immediately after the locking removal operation. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and a problem that it can not be raised occurs. As such a countermeasure, the locking release operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 333 (a)) which is the locking release operation. 31 is configured to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31 and configured not to perform the turning operation, so that the tilting device 320 can be configured to ascend at the timing when the hand is released.

  Furthermore, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or the unlocking operation is performed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324 or on the upper surface of the tilting device 320. Position the touch sensor and determine whether the touch sensor is sounding on. If it is on (if it is pressed), wait without waiting for the lock release operation and wait until the off state Alternatively, the lock release operation may be performed at the timing of turning off. In addition, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed or the player is touching, the hand is released from the tilting device 320 by display notification, voice or the like (the player is prevented from disturbing the rising operation). May be notified.

Sixth Control Example
Next, a sixth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370. In the first control example, when the jackpot A is executed in which the probability of judging whether the hit or not is set to the low probability (up to 100 times for the power support) after the jackpot game, the even symbol is displayed with an odd number of symbols, It has been informed that it is a jackpot A, but in the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot A is executed, if a holding ball which is a jackpot is stored in the holding ball, the jackpot to be executed first Make the stop symbol of A or the effect in the big hit as if it were the big hit B1 or the big hit B2 as if the high probability gaming state (probable change gaming state) is set even after the big hit game It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Also, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even symbol showing the jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which the probability variation gaming state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game A plurality of promotion effects to be notified are set, and the type of the promotion effect is drawn and determined at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion content is subsequently executed according to the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, presence or absence of promotion etc.) It differs from the first control example in that the type of effect is switched and set. The detailed description of the same points as the first control example is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 346, an example of the stop display mode of the special symbol of the result of the success or failure judgment that becomes the jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 346 (a), the pre-reading result (pre-discrimination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed for the third one This is an example showing the case where the pre-reading result is also the jackpot A. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, normally, it is displayed by the even symbol even if it is displayed, but the odd symbol is displayed stopped at the start of the change Switch to be displayed. That is, the same stop symbol as when the variation of the special symbol to be the big hit B1 is executed is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), while suggesting that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time as "Super jackpot! Next also expect it!", As if the probability variation gaming state is set Notification is performed as if it were a jackpot. By this, in fact, by holding ball which becomes jackpot A being stored also when jackpot A is executed, effects such as jackpot B1 are executed may be executed even when jackpot A is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the ratio at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, and to improve the interest of the game.

  With reference to FIG. 347 (a), an effect mode in the case where the variation of the special symbol in the short time gaming state (low probability power support presence gaming state) after the big hit game in the example shown in FIG. FIG. 347 (a) is a state in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in a state (hold symbol h2) in which the holding ball for the jackpot A is stored (hold symbol h2). It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 347 (a), the character "in super time" displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when it is in the probability variation gaming state despite being the short time gaming state Is displayed, and further, the character "in a big hit expectation UP" is displayed, and a display mode which indicates that the probability of high probability is not actually set is high, and a display mode indicating that the degree of expectation is high is displayed. In this way, by giving a false notification to the player that is different from the actual one, it is configured to suppress a defect that significantly impairs the player's trust. In this way, a notification that approximately approximates the probability variation gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

  FIG. 347 (b) is an example showing the stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 held in FIG. 347 (a). Since the retention symbol h2 is a hit / fail judgment result of the jackpot A, and a holding ball which is a jackpot (any of jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is also stored in the holding ball, it is normal time In the same manner, a notification indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is executed by stopping and displaying the even symbols in the same manner.

  FIG. 348 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the short game state is set after the jackpot game of the jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 347 (b) is executed. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. As a display mode indicating the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the characters “chance (100 times)” are displayed, and the time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed 100 times and stopped It is informed that in-game is set. Also, each time the variation of the special symbol is finished once, the number (number) is subtracted by one and displayed.

  FIG. 348 (b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. A character of "during super time (during a definite change)" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the probability change gaming state is set, and the player is informed that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode is different only in the case where the time saving game state is set in a state where the holding ball serving as the big hit is stored and the case where the probability change gaming state is set. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same character (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. Moreover, it is comprised so that a game state may be alert | reported by a background color, without displaying a character, and when a time saving game state is set in the state in which the holding ball which becomes a big hit is memorized It may be configured to be displayed in an approximate color (for example, a red background color (probable variation gaming state), a pink background color (time saving gaming state in a state in which a holding ball serving as a big hit is stored)). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think of the time saving game state as if it were a probability change gaming state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 349 to FIG. 350, the promotion effect to be executed during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 349 (a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect performed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Jumping !! Start !!" are displayed for a period until the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the player is notified that the jackpot game is started.

  FIG. 349 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over winning promotion effect that is one of the promotion effect. With over-promotion promotion effect, it becomes an end condition of 1 round by winning 10 balls in specific winning opening 65a in 1 round, but it is based on 10 game balls entering in specific winning opening 65a, It is an effect that a promotion effect is performed in which information on the jackpot type is notified based on the fact that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 65a during the period until the open / close door 65b is changed to the closed state.

  In the over winning promotion promotion effect, the characters “Attack a ball and get a key are displayed on the third symbol display device 81” are displayed, and a game ball is put to a specific winning hole 65a (corresponding to an attacker) to display a key A display is suggested to indicate that the symbol is displayed (to be given to the player). In addition, by displaying 11 characters that "the treasure box chances are stored when 11 keys are stored," when 11 keys are stored, the promotion effect (over winning promotion effect) indicated by "the treasure box chances!" Is executed. Is reported to the player. Since the key is configured to be displayed one by one each time winning is made in the specific winning combination opening 65a, one over winning is generated at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, the "treat box chance!" Is executed by the occurrence of the over prize. Here, when “treasure box chance !!” is displayed that a treasure box is empty and a treasure is contained therein, the type of jackpot game being executed is stored as a jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned jackpot becoming a jackpot It is notified that it is jackpot A (promoted) in the state where it is. Further, when the treasure is not displayed in the treasure box, the notification of the type of the jackpot game being executed is not performed. If the big hit ball is not stored, and the type of big hit game being executed is big hit A, the effect of being notified of the promotion is not performed. However, the display mode (representation that a treasure is displayed in the treasure box) to notify that it has been promoted is configured to be displayed based on the fact that the holding ball that becomes the big hit is stored during the big hit game May be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion during the round which is one of the promotion effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 350 (a), when the promotion effect during round is selected, when the specific round (the fifth round in this control example) is reached, the “promotion chance !! Is displayed, the promotion effect during the round is executed, and it is suggested (notified) that information on the jackpot game type is notified by pressing the frame button 22. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the jackpot in the state in which the holding ball serving as the jackpot described above is stored. If it is A, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right direction to the left direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is informed that the high probability gaming state of "probable variation GET !!" is set after the big hit game Be done. In addition, when it is the jackpot A in the state in which the holding ball which becomes the jackpot as described above is stored, the character “probably variable GET !!” is notified as if the probability changing gaming state is set to the player. Is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 350 (a) is executed after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot round of 16 rounds is ended (the closing condition of the specified winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10 ball winning or 30 seconds elapsed) is established)) It is an example of the display mode in the normal ending effect which shows the end of the big hit game.

  On the other hand, FIG. 351 (b) is an example of the display mode in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, at the end of the jackpot game (16 rounds of the jackpot round ended (the closing condition of the 16th round specified winning opening 65a (10 ball winning or 30 seconds elapsed) is established)) During the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is executed, the characters "LUCY !! super chance time !!" are displayed, and the left direction to the right direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A special display mode (a production mode different from the normal time) where a school of fish (fish school) swims is displayed, and the time saving game state is stored in a state in which the holding ball which becomes the probability change gaming state or the above mentioned big hit is stored after the big hit game A display mode is displayed that suggests that the.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, control processing by main controller 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 352 to 353.

  The ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (a). The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the promoted lottery table 222 df is added to the first control example. The other configuration is the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (b). FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promoted lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222 df determines whether to notify that the game has been promoted as an over-winning promotion by the value of the effect counter 223 h acquired based on the occurrence of the over-winning to the specific winning opening 65 a during the round. It is a lottery table for Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or the pseudo probability change flag 223dm indicating that the execution of the jackpot A is suggested to the player as the jackpot B2 is executed is on. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating that the game has been promoted (in the present control example, an effect that a treasure is displayed in the treasure box) is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic view showing the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, for the first control example, the flag 223dg for winning change, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, the big winning counter 223di, the promoted flag 223dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223dk, and the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm It differs in the point added. About the same composition as the 1st example of control, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The hit variation flag 223 dg is a flag for determining that the variation of the special symbol to be the big hit A is being executed in a state where the big hit ball is not stored. If the period during which the variable display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the holding ball which becomes the big hit by the winning command is newly stored when the hit changing flag 223dg is on, the odd symbol is displayed A process of switching to a symbol is executed. Thereby, even if the variation of the special symbol to be the jackpot A, it is possible to make the player think as if the jackpot B1.

  The stop symbol replacement flag 223 dh wins a substitution lottery which is executed with a predetermined probability if a change of the special symbol to be the big hit A is started, and if the holding ball to be the big hit is already stored. It is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd-numbered, for example, symbol pattern. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223 dh is on, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, it is switched and set in the odd symbol array.

  The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winning on the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big hit game.

  The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted effect (effect in which a treasure is displayed from a treasure box) is executed in the over winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. By this flag, it is possible to suppress a defect that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

  The promotion effect type storage area 223 dk is a storage area where the type of promotion effect to be executed during the big hit game is determined when the big hit game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion effect is stored.

  The pseudo probability change flag 223 dm stops the stop symbol of the special symbol with the odd symbol in the state of the odd symbol when the change of the special symbol to become the big hit is started and the holding ball to be the big hit is already stored. It is a flag which shows that it was disqualified to the substitution lottery controlled to display. An effect (see FIG. 347 (a)) is executed as if a promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or if a probability game state is set for the short time gaming state set after the jackpot game.

<About control processing by main controller in sixth control example>
Control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in changing the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 256) to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. A big hit control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example is different from the big hit control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of Z1110, when it is not the timing of the big hit end (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening has entered a ball (Z1120). If the ball has been hit (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing is ended. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no ball entry (Z1120: No), this process ends. With this entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a during a round, and it is also possible to determine an over winning.

<About control processing by voice lamp control device in sixth control example>
Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 366. In the sixth control example, for the first control example, command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 259), command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356), fluctuation pattern reception processing (Z2202: FIG. 260), fluctuation pattern reception Process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), prize command reception process (Z2209: FIG. 266), prize command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358), variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) 365), the frame button input monitoring and effect process (Z2107: FIG. 272) is changed to frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366), and the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 359), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 359), open Processing (Z2282: Figure 360), a special winning ball entrance processing (Z2284: Figure 362), round processing (Z2286: Figure 363), ending the process: are different in that you have added the (Z2288 Figure 364). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z2113). Command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example in that processes of Z2279 and Z2280 are added and processes of Z2240 and Z2270 are changed. It is different.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z 2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2279 that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process is ended.

  With reference to FIG. 355, the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example is different from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, with regard to the gaming state, it is configured to be added from the main control device 110 in addition to the fluctuation pattern command. As the gaming state, a low probability electric support absence gaming state (normal gaming state), a probability change gaming state (power support), and a short time gaming state (low probability electric support presence gaming state) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding gaming state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, a display state command is set (Z2431), and the processing of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, when there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 described above is not executed, and the processing directly shifts to the processing of Z2227.

  Referring to FIG. 357, about the stop symbol switching process (Z 2450: FIG. 357) which is one process in the fluctuation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

  In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the change is not the jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is a variation of the jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and a substitution lottery is executed (Z2453).

  After the processing of Z2453 is executed, it is determined whether or not a replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the substitution lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the replacement lottery is won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2452 that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the in-hit flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing ends. .

  As described above, when starting to change the special symbol to be the jackpot A, if the holding ball to be the jackpot is stored, a lottery (determination) as to whether to replace the stop symbol is executed, and the lottery is made When it is determined, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that symbol replacement is to be performed is set to on. On the other hand, if it is disqualified for replacement lottery, stop display at even number eyes and make a big hit game start, execute promotion effect during the big hit game, or is it a probability change gaming state after the big hit game Special notification such as

  With reference to FIG. 358, winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The prize command reception process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example is different from the prize command reception process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that the stop symbol change process (Z2460) is added. The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 359, description will be given of stop symbol change processing (Z2470) which is one of winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Do. FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop symbol change processing (Z2470).

  In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether the in-the-hang flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223dg is not on (ie, off) (Z2461: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit variation flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received prize information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prize information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After the processing of Z2463 is executed, it is determined whether it is a high speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that it is a high speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2464 that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed, and the process ends.

  As described above, at the time of starting to change the special symbol to be the jackpot A, the holding ball to be the jackpot is new during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation) even if the jackpot to be the jackpot is not stored. If it is stored in the high-speed fluctuation period of the special symbol, the replacement of the stop symbol (the replacement of the odd symbol to the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. As described above, since it is limited to the high speed fluctuation period, it is possible to make a replacement without a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, the stop symbol may be controlled to be replaced by performing effects such as sliding.

  Referring to FIG. 360, the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2 113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Will be described. FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280).

  In the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), first, it is determined whether the opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, referring to FIG. 361, the opening process (Z2282: figure) which is one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: figure 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 361). FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

  In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process shifts to the process of Z2295.

  After the processing of Z2294 is executed, it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295). If it is determined that the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Z2296: Yes), the gaming state is set to be in the jackpot (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing is ended. If it is determined in the process of Z2295 that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z2297. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2296 that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to off (Z2298), and the gaming state is the pseudo probability change flag 223dm. The jackpot game which is in the OFF state is set (Z2299), the above-described processing of Z2300 is executed, and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2281 that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether the entering command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the special winning game ball processing (Z2284) is executed, and this processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 362, the big winning ball entering process (one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example Z2284) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special winning combination ball processing (Z2284).

  In the big winning game winning process (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the big winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is incremented by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion effect type is an over winning (Z2312). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over winning (Z2312: No), a display large winning command indicating the value of the large winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big win counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the large winning counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), the display large winning command indicating the value of the large winning counter 223di corresponding to during the over winning effect is set (Z2315), This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the big winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the promotion lottery table 222df is obtained based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm or the jackpot type. Further, a promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

  After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a display large winning command indicating the value of the large winning counter 223di and the winning of the promotion effect is set (Z2318), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a display special winning command indicating the deviation between the value of the special winning counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and the main processing is finish.

  Referring back to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2283 that the entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 363, about round processing (Z2286) which is one processing in the jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

  In round processing (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is an over winning (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the over winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is the ending (Z2332). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect Is set (Z2335), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the process of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the process of Z2332, it is (Z2332 : If it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the process of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this process ends. .

  Referring back to FIG. 360, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2285 that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: Yes), the ending process (Z2288) is executed, and this process is ended. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the processing of Z2287 (Z2287: No), processing according to the other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing is ended.

  36. Referring to FIG. 364, the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) which is one process in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

  In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is the ending (Z2371). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). If it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the present jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), the display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2373 that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability change flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374). If the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the above-described process of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2374 that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the process of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the gaming state is set at the end of the big hit (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is ended.

  Thus, in the present control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined whether the content promoted by the over winning promotion effect is notified during the big hit game, and if it is not executed, the ending promotion effect or the promotion effect during the round A process to switch to is performed.

  Thus, even if the over winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the entering frequency to the specific winning opening 65a is low.

  With reference to FIG. 365, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). The variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example does not execute the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 with respect to the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515. It differs in the point which added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). If it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and a display stop type command is set (Z2513), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2511 that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), a stop type for setting the odd jackpot symbol as the stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the above-described processing of Z2513 is executed, and this processing is ended.

  The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring and rendering process 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 with respect to the frame button input monitoring and rendering process (Z2107 in FIG. 272) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, and Z2840 differ in that they are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2807 that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether an effect setting is in progress (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and sensor input processing is executed (Z2813). After the sensor input process is performed, another SW process is performed (Z2840), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect is not set in the processing of Z2830 (Z2830: No), the processing of Z2803 to 2804 described above is executed, the sensor input processing (Z2813), and the other SW processing (Z2840) To complete this process.

<Control Process by Display Control Device in Sixth Control Example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 to 370. FIG. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (Z3302). Command determination processing 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processing of Z3340 to Z3435 is added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of Z3408 that there is no display advance display command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), symbol replacement setting processing (Z3431) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 368 (a), the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described. FIG. 368 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of symbol replacement setting processing (Z3431).

  In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, it is replaced with a stop type table of odd jackpot symbols and is set (Z3441). Next, the stop type table is compared with the stop symbol counter to set a stop symbol (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z3430 that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: Yes), a game state setting process (Z3433) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the gaming state setting process (Z3433) will be described. FIG. 368 (b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the gaming state setting process (Z3433).

  In the gaming state setting process (Z3433), first, the gaming state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the processing of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this processing is ended.

  Returning to FIG. 367, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z3432 that there is no display state command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434: Yes), the jackpot related display processing (Z3435) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 369, the jackpot related display processing (Z3435) will be described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

  In the jackpot related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether a display opening command has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large win command for display has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the large win command for display has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the large win command for display has been received (Z3463: Yes), the big win process (Z3464) is executed, and the present process is ended. Details of the special winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3463 that the big win command for display has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), the display data table of the round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3465 that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether a display promotion round command has been received (Z3467). If it is determined that the display promotion round command has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3467 that the display promotion round command has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the display ending command has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3469 that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (Z3471), and this process is ended.

  With reference to FIG. 370, the special winning process (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one process in the jackpot related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special winning process (Z3464).

  In the big winning process (Z3464), first, in the process of Z3463 of the big hit related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether or not the received display big win command for display has been won for promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the number of winnings indicated by the received command and the display data table corresponding to the winning effect are set (Z3481), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), a display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and the over prize corresponding to the effect is set (Z3483), and the process is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3482 that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: Yes), the over winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3484 that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10 ( Z 3486: No). If it is determined that the winning number is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over winning effect is set (Z3487), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3486 that the number of winnings indicated by the received number of commands is smaller than 10 (Z3486), the present process is ended as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 371 to 379, a seventh control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, a lottery opening based on a first special symbol, a lottery based on a second special symbol that is more likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the sorting device 700 for winning a ball alternately to the winning opening that is a trigger for (variation), as a result of the pass / fail determination of the second special symbol normal symbol, when winning for a long time per wins the electric role 640a The ball is opened for a long time (two seconds), and the ball is made easy to win in the second winning opening 640. Then, when winning for a long time of a normal symbol, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to make the player win a ball in the second winning opening 640 for the player. The game was configured to be played enthusiastically (see FIG. 207).

  Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric winning object 640a is controlled to make it difficult for the ball to be won in the second winning opening 640, and the normal state is in progress. When variation of the second special symbol is started, the special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed to provide the player with a special feeling. Furthermore, in the second control example, even when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends. Was configured. In this way, when a predetermined number (up to 4 pieces) of holding balls for the second special symbol is secured (when the second special symbol reserved in the short time state is left), execution is performed when the short time state is ended It is configured such that the special effect described above is not performed in the second special symbol variation being performed. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special effect.

  On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the player wins per winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of the normal symbol, the game is executed using the variation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The second control example is different from the first control example in that it is configured to execute an effect (long-time open effect) that suggests winning for a long time in a lottery of a normal symbol for the person.

  Moreover, it differs from a 1st control example by the point comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of a long-time open | release production | presentation may be varied according to the timing which won for a long time as a result of lottery of a normal symbol. In addition, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the same point as each control example mentioned above.

  With reference to FIG. 371, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" as a guide display mode ZR1 that serves as an indication of the position at which the ball is fired when playing a game (left-handed game) forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13) In the case where the member to be moved is an acrylic resin having high transparency, it is decorated (provided) inside the game board 13 so that the player can easily visually recognize the guidance display mode ZR1.

  In addition, when playing a game (right-handed game) for letting the ball flow down to the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80, "turtle" as a guidance display mode ZR2 that serves as a guide for the position of firing the ball. The character imitating the character is decorated (disposed) on the surface of the game board 13 (or in the case of a highly transparent acrylic resin, the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is inside the game board 13), the player Is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily viewed.

  By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp where on the gaming board 13 the right-handed game or the left-handed game can be executed by firing a ball. In addition, by decorating the character (fish, turtle) for guiding a right-handed game or a left-handed game on the surface of the game board 13, the game direction for the player on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to easily grasp visually.

  In addition, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region where the second winning opening 640 can be won when the left-handed game is performed with respect to the first control example described above. When the opening 640a is in the opening operation, the restriction nail ZK1 is implanted so that the rate at which the ball flows down in the area winning in the second winning opening 640 is low. On the other hand, it is different in that the nail is implanted so that the ratio of the ball passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low when the right-handed game is performed. By configuring in this way, aiming at the sorting apparatus 700, the left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuated (lottery), and the second winning opening 640 is aimed, 2) A player can be provided with a right-handed game (second game) in which only a special symbol is varied (lottery).

  In the same manner as the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the player is inevitable because the electric winning part 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is difficult to open. In the case where the player plays a left-hand game and the time saving state is set, the player is inevitably in the right-hand game because the electric role object 640a is easily released. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if the number of holding balls in the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (four), the game is played further right Since even if it is not possible to acquire the suspension of the special symbol (right to draw the special symbol (variation)), it is possible to play a left-handed game and also play a game to acquire the holding ball of the first special symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (a), in the seventh control example, an effect aspect will be described which is displayed during normal symbol fluctuation in the case of winning for a long time per normal symbol. FIG. 372 (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode (long open effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol variation won for a long time. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "I'll be opening soon" as an effect (long open effect) that suggests winning for a long time per normal symbol. The character of is displayed, and an opening object aspect Za2 imitating the electric character 640a to be opened and a guidance display aspect Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed to the player are displayed. As a result, since the motor-operated role 640a is opened to the player, it is possible to visually and easily grasp that the right-handed game is to be performed.

  When the long open effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduction display area Za3. In the seventh control example, the third symbol is configured to be displayed in the reduced display area Za3 when the long open effect is executed, but instead of this configuration, for example, currently being executed On the basis of the determination means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result (big hit, small hit etc.) advantageous to the player, and the result of the determination of the determination means, the long open effect and the third symbol And a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determination means for determining which of the variation effects is to be displayed with priority. It may be provided. By configuring in this manner, since it is possible to preferentially display the effect display for indicating the game result which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to provide the game easy for the player to understand.

  In the example described above, the effect (priority effect) determined to be displayed preferentially is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect (non-priority effect) determined not to be displayed preferentially Other than that, for example, a plurality of areas of the reduced display area may be prepared differently and non-prioritized according to the game result indicated by the effect determined to be the non-preferential effect. The size of the area for displaying the effect may be varied. Further, the effect display on the side determined to be the non-priority effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in the above-described example, the configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (fluctuation effect, long open effect) is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol during fluctuation and the lottery result of the normal symbol during fluctuation. In addition to that, for example, there is provided a holding ball number determination means for determining whether the number of holding balls in the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, and based on the determination result of the holding ball number determination means The display area of the long open effect may be varied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (b), a description will be given of an effect mode during a long game with a normal symbol (during open). FIG. 372 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (during long open effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time hit. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 372 (b), the character "OPEN" indicating that the current release is in the long open state is displayed at the center of the main display area Dm, and the open target imitating the motorized role piece 640a in the open operation. The aspect Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, as in FIG. 372 (a), a guidance display form Za1 imitating a “turtle” indicating the game direction instructed to the player is displayed, and a third symbol is displayed in the reduction display area Za3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long open effect is regulated will be described. FIG. 373 is a view showing an example of the display mode in the case where the long open effect is restricted among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time hit. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long open effect described above with reference to FIG. 372 (a) is configured to be executed, and the normal state (first In a state where it is difficult to win the ball in the 2 winning opening 640), when the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 (when the normal symbol is won for a long time), a state advantageous to the player (first It is configured to surely inform the player of the state where it is easy to perform the second special symbol fluctuation (lottery drawing) which is more likely to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the special symbol.

  When it is configured in this way, it is a normal condition immediately after the time saving condition is finished, for example, in a state where the number of holding balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (four), Even when winning for a long time, the above-mentioned long opening effect is executed. As described above, in the state where the holding ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the motorized role object 640a is released long and multiple balls are won in the second entrance ball hole 640, a new holding ball is obtained There is a problem that the player can not be provided with the special feeling of the long opening effect to the player.

  Therefore, in the seventh control example, the predetermined period (the period until the variation of the special symbol is performed five times) after the time saving state ends is the above-described even if the regular symbol is won for a long time It is configured such that the long open effect is not performed (the effect during long open effect regulation is performed). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the long open effect being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 373, in the state where the long opening effect is regulated, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 372 (a) is not executed, and the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is performed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display form Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as a game direction for instructing the player. As described above, even if the player wins a long hit of a normal symbol in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the timing is a predetermined period (the special symbol fluctuation is 5 times after the time saving state ends) If it is within the period until it is executed, by preventing the long opening effect from being executed, it is possible to reliably suppress providing the player with a meaningless long opening effect. it can. In addition, immediately after finishing the short time state when the variation of the second special symbol becomes main, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed excessively by making the holding balls of many second special symbols get again. It is possible to suppress the

  In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress that a long opening production is performed when the number of holding balls of a 2nd special symbol is an upper limit (four pieces), the period (regulation period) which regulates a long opening presentation , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but besides that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues continuously for a predetermined time after the time saving state ends. It may be a period until the time required to be executed five times has passed. In addition, during the regulation period mentioned above, when the number of balls held by the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), the regulation period mentioned above is cleared and the long open effect is executed You may configure it.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long open effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the time reduction end, but the long open effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example, When special symbol variation under execution is won by a big hit, or when the continuous effect is set to span multiple special symbol variations, or special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) In the case where it is determined that the holding balls in the table include winning information for winning a big hit, the long open effect may be restricted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Seventh Control Example
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. The seventh control example is different from the second control example in that a long release effect flag 223e1 is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the second control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control unit 110 in the seventh control example are the same, various control processing related to the balls of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is the first control example described above Is the same as On the other hand, the various control processes (examples of control of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effects of the seventh control example are the same as the second control example except for the points described above. Therefore, about the various control processing in connection with a ball, the same part as a 1st control example attaches the same numerals, omits the explanation, about the various control processing in connection with a production, the same part as a 2nd control example is the same The symbol of is attached and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj is described above in the second control example, the detailed description is omitted, but a predetermined value (5) is set when the time saving state ends, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed. When setting (if special symbol variation is made), it is a counter that is decremented by one. In the seventh control example, the long release effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj becomes zero.

  The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. The long release effect flag 223e1 is a case where the long time release command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 377: No). Is set to ON (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to OFF when a long-time hit end command of a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<About control processing by main controller in seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example is different from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). The other processes are the same as in the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 375, normal symbol fluctuation processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example is different from the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that processing of Z451 to Z453 is added. . The other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 375, when the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processing of Z401 and Z402 as the first control example is executed, and it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not in the processing of Z402. If it is determined (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, the long time opening flag 203i is determined that the normal symbol is won for a long time in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) (Z426: Yes) , Is set to ON (Z 428).

  If it is determined in the process of Z451 that the long time release flag 203i is set to ON (Z451: Yes), the long time release flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and a long time per-end command is set. (Z452), the processing proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z451 that the long time release flag 203i is not on (is off) (Z451: No), the process of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z404. Then, the same processing of Z404 to Z409 as the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is ended.

  That is, as described above, the long time open flag 203i is a flag set to ON from the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol winning for a long time is started until the long time end is completed.

  In the process of Z402, when it is determined that the present is during the normal symbol variation (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, The middle command is set (Z453), and the process ends. The long time hitting medium command set in Z453 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the command for a long time has created a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is for a long time (during a long opening), and sends it to the display control device 114. Do. Then, an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 372 (b)).

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example>
Control processing by the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377. In the seventh control example, with respect to the second control example, the point that the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 376) and the long open effect process (Z2272) It is different in the point added. The other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 376, the command determination processing 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 4 (Z2181). The command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processes of Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

  Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the above-mentioned second control example are executed. If it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the process of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether a long-time hit related command has been received (Z2271), and it is determined that it has been received (Z2208: Yes), the long opening effect processing to be described later is executed (Z2272), and this processing ends. In this long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2271 that the per-long-time related command has not been received (Z2271: No), Z2256 to Z2260 and the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above. The same processing of Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing is ended. That is, in this control example, the main control unit 110 is configured to receive the command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the predetermined command (that the winning for a long time in the lottery of the normal symbol is When a command to be displayed is received, an effect for notifying the player of that effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

  Next, the contents of the long open effect process (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long open effect process (Z2272). This long opening effect processing (Z2272) is to execute processing for setting the effect mode of the long opening effect when winning for a long time of the normal symbol, the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state Or, within the predetermined period after the end of the time saving state), the effect mode according to the operating state (during variation, during a hit game) of the normal symbol is set.

  When the long open effect processing (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long received time related command received this time is a long open hit command (Z2901). This long time open command is a command which is set when the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main control unit 110 is won for the normal symbol long time. If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the command is a long-time open command (Z2901: Yes), next, the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted gaming state is short (time is set) (Z2903), and when it is determined that the time is short (Z2903: Yes), an object to execute the long opening effect Since this is not a period, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is not short (in the normal state) in the process of Z2903 (Z2903: No), it is then determined whether the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (more than 1) ( Z2904). A detailed description is given in the second control example described above, and thus the explanation will be made briefly. However, the fluctuation number counter 223aj is set to a predetermined number (5 ) Is set and the value is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display setting process is executed, and a period from the end of the time saving state until the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (five times) Is a counter referred to in order to determine

  In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not larger than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, at least 5 times of the special symbol fluctuation is executed after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the game is in the normal state, since it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed in the normal state set as the gaming state, the display long effect command is set (Z2906) The long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and the process ends.

  Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (a)).

  On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in the state that the special symbol fluctuation has not been executed 5 times since the time saving state is ended. If it is determined that there is a period in which the long opening effect can not be performed in the normal state set as the gaming state, the display left strike long effect command is set (Z2905), and the book End the process.

  Here, the set display left-handed long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) of the audio lamp control device 113. When the display long effect command is received, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long open effect is being restricted on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

  When it is determined in the process of Z2901 that the long-time-per-hour related command received this time is not a long-time per-hours open command (Z2901: No), it is next determined whether a long-time moderate middle command has been received (Z2908) . This long-time hit-time command is set after the opening / closing control start of the motorized role is set in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 375) of the main controller 110, and the long-time hit is in progress It is a command indicating that there is.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2908 that a long-time hit medium command has been received (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long release effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long release effect flag If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a long display release command is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2909 that the long open effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and the present process is ended. .

  Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, similarly to the first control example described above, the winning lottery at the timing to start the variation of the normal symbol (the timing at which the normal symbol variation start process is executed), and the motorized prize 640a at the time of winning It is configured to determine the operation mode (whether or not the long release is performed), and is configured to set the release command for a long time at that timing. And, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (3 seconds at the shortest, 30 seconds at the longest) has passed since the opening command was set for a long time, the stop display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set, and then the motorized The operation control of the accessory 640 a is configured to be started.

  Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and a maximum of 30 seconds at the longest occur between receiving the open command for a long time and the command for a long time for a long time. In the state where the value of 223 aj is greater than 0, the open command for a long time is set, and thereafter, there is a possibility that the command for a long time hitting may be received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation number counter 223 aj is 0.

  In the seventh control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the motorized combination 640a, in the process in the case where the open command is received for a long time In a state where the release effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the display long release command is not set even if a long hit middle command is received. By configuring in this way, for example, the effect (see FIG. 373) of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display is suddenly the effect of the display mode based on the long open command for display (FIG. 372 (b) It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by switching to the reference).

  Referring back to FIG. 377, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2908 that the long command is not received during the long time (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether the end command for the long time has been received (Z2911), the command for the long time end Is determined (Z2911: Yes), the long release effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), a display long release end command is set (Z1913), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2208 that a special symbol winning command has not been received from the main control device 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received from the main control device 110 ( Z 2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2279 that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process is ended.

<Control Process by Display Control Device in Seventh Control Example>
Next, control processing by the display control apparatus 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379. FIG. The seventh control example is different from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z3321). Command determination processing 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that processing of Z3441 to Z3442 is added. The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of Z3408 that there is no display advance display command (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined in the process of Z3441 that there is no display long release related command (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a display long release related command (Z3441: Yes), the long release related process (Z3442) is executed.

  In the long release related process (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long release effect corresponding to the received display long release effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

  Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time The clock counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

  As described above, in the seventh control example, when the normal state (the state in which the second special symbol lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed) is set as the gaming state, a long time per hit of the normal symbol is made. When winning, it is configured to execute a long open effect during the variation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reliably play a game in which the motorized role thing 640a is opened for a long time to the player and the second winning opening 640 is made to win a ball.

  Furthermore, in the seventh control example, even when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the predetermined period after the time reduction end is highly likely to have acquired a large number of holding balls of the second special symbol in the normal state When it is inside, it is comprised so that execution of the long open presentation mentioned above may be controlled. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the quality of the benefit (a benefit for easily securing the holding ball of the second special symbol) to be given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

  In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress that a long opening production is performed when the number of holding balls of a 2nd special symbol is an upper limit (four pieces), the period (regulation period) which regulates a long opening presentation , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but besides that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues continuously for a predetermined time after the time saving state ends. It may be a period until the time required to be executed five times has passed. In addition, during the regulation period mentioned above, when the number of balls held by the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), the regulation period mentioned above is cleared and the long open effect is executed You may configure it.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the long open effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the time reduction end, but the long open effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example, When special symbol variation under execution is won by a big hit, or when the continuous effect is set to span multiple special symbol variations, or special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) In the case where it is determined that the holding balls in the table include winning information for winning a big hit, the long open effect may be restricted.

  Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 in the long open effect process (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether the flag under continuous effect 223ac is set to ON is provided, and continuous If it is determined that the in-effect flag 223ac is set to ON, the present process may be ended as it is so as not to execute the long open effect. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without breaking the priority with the effects to be executed elsewhere.

  Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen in the case where the long open effect is regulated and the case where the long open effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is caused to perform a right-handed game to win a ball, and when the long opening effect is regulated, the sorting device 700. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to play a left-handed game to win the ball. Thereby, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is at the upper limit (large), the first winning opening 64 and the second right winning opening 640 are aimed by the left hitting game, and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aiming at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

  In the seventh control example, the game board 13 is arranged to make the flowability of the balls to the distribution apparatus 700 and the second winning opening 640 different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it comprises, without restricting to this, for example, it becomes easy to reach a ball to the 2nd winning a prize mouth 640 by firing a ball weakly in a left hitting game, and playing a left hitting game strongly The game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, since the game result can be largely different by a slight operation change to the launcher, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, although the seventh control example describes the configuration based on the control content of the main control unit 110 in the first control example described above, the control of the main control unit 110 used in the first control example described above Without being limited to the content, the control content of the main control unit 110 of the second control example, that is, even if used in a game machine of the type that executes the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol prior to the first special symbol good.

  In addition, the number of holding balls (for example, three or more) at a specified number or more at the end of the power support present gaming state (low probability power support present gaming state (time reduction gaming state) or high probability power support present (probability change gaming state)) Based on the condition that is stored for the second special symbol, prohibit (do not execute) the effect of a long symbol per hour for normal symbols, or an effect that encourages the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 And may be configured to execute. By configuring in this way, even when the game is switched to the normal gaming state, when there are few holding balls of the second special symbol, it can be configured such that the effect of the long hit per normal symbol can be executed. (2) It is possible to suppress the problem of losing the winning chance to a special symbol.

  Also, in this control example, when switching to the normal gaming state, until the variation of the special symbol is finished a predetermined number of times (five times in the present embodiment), the effect of the long symbol per normal symbol is not made or Is configured to switch to a different effect, but not limited thereto, regardless of the gaming state, when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), the long time of the normal symbol Alternatively, it may be configured to switch to an effect different from that of normal time. In this way, by configuring, it is possible to make the player play an advantageous game according to the state of the game. Furthermore, as a condition for switching to an effect different from that of normal time, or when a specific variation pattern is being executed regardless of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol (for example, for example, , A fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, or a fluctuation pattern of the super reach) or the like. In addition, time information from the RTC may be acquired, and if it is a specific time close to closing the store (for example, 5 minutes before), it may be set as the switching condition. The conditions to be switched may be set by combining the conditions described in this control example.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 411. In the eighth control example, based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when the gaming machine is powered on (see FIG. 239) and the operation of the frame button 22 with respect to the first control example described above. Control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when changing the background mode and effect contents executed when the number of holding balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (8 which is the upper limit number) The difference is that the control contents of the sound lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 are different in that detailed descriptions are added.

  In the first control example described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, startup processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 254) and startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 257); Is executed and each startup process is being executed (power on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 239, a dedicated display screen (power on screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The notification for indicating that the power is currently turned on (notification during the power on period) is configured to be executed using the voice output device 226.

  In the first control example configured in this way, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbol, and then the power is turned on (turned on), Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol variation is resumed from the state immediately before the power off, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the output from the voice output device 226 Since it is configured to highlight and notify the player that the notification sound being played is the power on period, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, and it is executed before the power is turned off. There was a problem that it would seem as if the special symbol variation that had been erased was eliminated.

  On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, if the special symbol variation is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, the special symbol variation is resumed after the power on. The BGM is configured to output BGM indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating during the power-on period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player easily grasp that the special symbol variation being executed before the power is turned off is resumed. Also, rather than creating data of a display image (a variation image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, voice data output from the voice output device 226 is created Since the amount of data processing is small if it is done, it can be informed that the special symbol has changed immediately after the power is turned on. The details of the audio output control at the time of power on will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing at which the background mode is changed is changed according to the changing speed of the special symbol when the frame button 22 is operated to change the background mode. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during high speed fluctuation with a high speed of fluctuation of the special symbol, the background mode is immediately changed, and the frame button 22 is moved during low speed fluctuation with a speed of fluctuation of the special symbol slower than high speed fluctuation. When operated, the background mode is configured to be changed after the variation of the special symbol is finished (after the special symbol stop display or at the start of the next special symbol variation).

  Generally, the variation display of the special symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the predetermined period (first half period) after the start of the variation fluctuates at a high speed and then fluctuates slowly (the second half period), the special symbol It is comprised so that the presentation based on the lottery result of a special symbol may be performed using the period by which the variable display is carried out at low speed. Therefore, by configuring as in the eighth control example, the background mode is changed while the dedicated effect corresponding to the set background mode (effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol) is being executed. Can be suppressed. The details of control for changing the background mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the eighth control example, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number (for example, eight, which is the upper limit number), the special symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored It is comprised so that a specific period presentation may be performed using a fluctuation time. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm so that the number of holding balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number.

  In the case where the period effect is performed within a predetermined range (within the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored as reserved) as in the eighth control example, As in the first control example, the first hold is made in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 in order to notify the player of the current number of holding balls of the special symbol (upper limit number 8). Form a pedestal m1 to a pedestal m8 for the reserved symbol, and display the reserved symbol in order from the pedestal m1 for the reserved symbol according to the number of balls reserved for the special symbol (refer to FIG. 210 (a)) If stopped, the holding symbol corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the period effect is displayed in the small area Ds2, so it is difficult for the player to grasp up to which holding symbol the period effect is targeted Become a player who can not understand There is a problem that to will is.

  On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the period effect is not executed, the holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above. When the effect is executed, the number of holding balls to be subjected to the period effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 as the effect holding symbol. By configuring in this way, even if new winning information is acquired during the period effect, the effect suspension symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 does not increase, so the suspension symbol to be subjected to the period effect to the player is displayed. It can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed contents of the period effect in the eighth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388.

  In addition, in the eighth control example, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22, the operated (pressed) frame button 22 vibrates, and the amount of vibration is varied. Is configured to be able to Thus, by configuring the frame button 22 to vibrate, when the player presses the frame button 22, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22, thereby enhancing the rendering effect. be able to. Furthermore, since the effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is performed, the game is performed before the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). The vibration level of the frame button 22 can be suggested to the person. By configuring in this manner, the frame button 22 can be operated in a state in which the player is allowed to predict the vibration level. Further, since it is possible to make the player predict that the vibration level has changed, the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated a plurality of times.

<About the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 380, the board structure of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 380 is a front view schematically showing the gaming board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is for holding at the lower position of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the LED 900 is provided, that the variable display unit 80 is provided with the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d, and that the touch sensor 2900 is provided at the position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device. , Otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The LED for retention 900 is used to indicate the number of balls reserved for a special symbol, and is composed of eight LEDs. The eight LEDs are configured to light in order from the left, and the ball holding ball number command indicating that the number of balls in the special symbol output from the main control device 110 increases or decreases Based on the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the holding ball number command to indicate, after being increased, lighting control is performed according to the number of special symbol holding balls after decreasing.

  Thus, by providing an area for notifying the number of holding balls of the special symbol outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display displayed in the sub display region Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 381) Even if (b) is temporarily erased or used for another purpose, it is possible to reliably notify the current number of balls reserved for special symbols. Although the detailed description is omitted, this retention LED 900 uses a full color LED, and is configured to be able to reveal light emission modes of at least three or more colors, Lighting control is performed so that the holding ball of the special view 2 can be identified. As a result, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of holding balls corresponding to each symbol type.

  In addition, when changing the color of the holding symbol as a pre-reading effect to be executed based on the result of pre-discrimination (pre-reading) performed on the hold information stored in the hold, the LED at the corresponding position of the holding LED 900 Is controlled to emit light in a color different from that of the normal time. Furthermore, the display mode (light emission mode) of the hold LED 900 is configured to be less noticeable than the hold symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the eighth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of balls for holding a special symbol is provided at the lower position of the third symbol display device 81 which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as the player can visually recognize the lighting area. For example, the lighting area may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13. Further, in the eighth control example, the maximum number of holding balls of the special symbol can be stored up to eight, so eight LEDs identical to the upper limit number of holding storage in the holding LED 900 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and four LEDs may be configured to report the number of balls reserved for special symbols. Furthermore, in the eighth control example, control is performed to always display the number of balls for holding the special symbol on the LED for holding 900, but in addition to that, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In the case where the displayed holding symbol is erased or used for another effect, that is, the player can not easily grasp the number of holding balls of the special symbol simply by the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When it becomes, you may be comprised so that lighting control with respect to LED900 for holding may be performed.

  The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as notifying means for notifying the player of the background mode currently set. In this control example, the background mode for executing the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation effect of the third symbol) for indicating the result of the special drawing lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (for example, a display mode imitating a brow) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 The player can select one of the background modes from the “mountain mode” in which a display mode (for example, a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as a background of the screen.

  The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to emit light in a light emission mode that can notify the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, the fluctuation representation of the third symbol using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and even if the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is grasped Even if the current background mode can not be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the light emission mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in this control example, mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a light emission mode informing the current background mode in the first half of special figure fluctuation (the third symbol is in high speed fluctuation). In the second half of the special figure change (period from the end of the high-speed change of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are not the current background mode, but in the suggestion mode that suggests the lottery result It is configured to emit light. Then, even in the second half of the special figure change, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in the notification mode in which the current background mode is notified by the player performing a specific operation on the operation means (frame button 22) Are configured to

  By configuring in this manner, light emission control of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d can be performed according to information (current background mode, special drawing lottery result) desired by the player, and thus information useful to the player Can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910 a to 1910 d are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operation means) having a predetermined detection range, and detects that the player's hand has intruded into the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period. It is determined that an operation by a person has been performed. Although the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 can not be viewed directly by the player, a frame indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. By displaying, it is configured such that the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (it is easy for the hand to enter the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

  Further, although detailed description will be omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be capable of determining the movement (direction) of the hand intruding into the detection range, for example, from the right to the left By moving or moving from the bottom to the top, effect display corresponding to the movement of the hand is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute a rendering operation corresponding to the operation of the player's operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that it is possible to play a game while giving the player an interest.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 381 (a) and (b) are the schematic diagrams which showed typically the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in this control example. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the third symbol (with the special symbol displayed, with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above The point where the scroll direction of the decorative symbol is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (right to left) and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 209 (a) And 38) (see FIG. 381 (a)) and the difference in the notification mode of the information related to the game. There are also elements that are the same as (same as) the first control example, but different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, and for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle and lower) Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 381 (a)). The third symbol (the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) decorative symbol that fluctuates in response to the variable display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is Each of the ten main symbols is provided with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each piece of identification information that simulates a number. In this manner, by using the characters corresponding to the respective identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, and the variation display The jackpot is configured to occur after the session is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  The main display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 at the top, middle and bottom respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and variable display is performed by scrolling in the horizontal direction with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are configured such that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed variably The symbol row is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the symbol row Z3 is configured to be scrolled and displayed from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) not showing the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (a), the main display region Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. In the state where each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third symbol is aligned and stopped with the combination of big hit symbols on the effective line (the combination of the same main symbols in this control example), A big hit animation is displayed as a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 381 (a), in the present control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3, so the third symbol display device It is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol until all the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make an interest in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the final symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and the number of the symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol rows, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol obtained by combining an image such as a figure or character and a numeral may be configured as a third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation display area of the third symbol is displayed. Makes it difficult for the player to see if the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may do it. Also, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), and may be changed again.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which the player can not distinguish Although it is configured to include the difference in (3), the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be made different so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

  Next, contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (b). As shown in FIG. 381 (b), the small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and the small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating whether or not the lottery condition of the special symbol (during lottery or not) and the lottery result is displayed. , The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is comprised so that the 4th symbol (special figure 2 4th symbol) for showing may be displayed on small display area Dm2.

  By thus providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (See the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 381 (b)), and indicates the situation in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth display is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 381 (b)). 381 (b) (see small display area Dm2), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but it is not limited thereto, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol, a plurality of colors Showing that the special symbol is changing depending on the display mode that changes the number or color using the display mode that indicates the symbol, and by stopping the display mode that shows a specific symbol or color, the lottery result of the special symbol Can be configured to indicate .

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being performed (during variation), and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be configured so as to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in a lottery (during a change) without a warning. Further, as shown in FIG. 381 (b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery situation of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed An example is shown that is formed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the area Dm, but the position where the fourth symbol display area is formed, and the size, the effect of the fluctuation effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm It may be different depending on the mode.

  By comprising in this way, the area | region where a fluctuation production is performed is restrict | limited by 4th symbol display area, and it can suppress that a rendering effect falls. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to run.

  The display content displayed in the sub display area Ds is substantially the same as that in the first control example, and thus the detailed description is omitted. However, in the first control example, the sub display area Ds is as shown in FIG. Is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub display area Ds is limited to the small area Ds1 only, and in the small area Ds1, the executing area Ds1a And the waiting area Ds1b. The display content of the in-execution area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and in normal times, a holding symbol for indicating the number of balls in the special symbol is displayed as in the first control example described above. doing. On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the holding symbol is displayed on the pedestal m8, that is, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), the eight holding symbols stored and stored. Dedicated effect (period effect) using is performed (see FIG. 386). While this effect is being performed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a holding symbol to indicate the number of balls held for the special symbol, but a period in which the period effect is performed (holding symbol to be subjected to the period effect) It is comprised so that the holding symbol for effects only showing may be displayed.

  By configuring in this way, even if a new holding ball is obtained during the period effect, no new holding symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player will know how long the period effect will last. It can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 381, the display mode which shows the following display content is also displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Specifically, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction (game direction) in which the ball is fired is displayed. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be launched toward by simply viewing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Since it is possible, it is possible to provide the gaming machine which is easy for the player to understand.

  In the guidance display area, a display mode of “right strike” for guiding the player to perform the right strike game, and a guide mode for directing the player to perform the left strike game The display mode “left-handed” is displayed, and the display mode “right-handed” is a game state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a definite change state, a time reduction state And, it is displayed during the jackpot game, the display mode of "left hitting" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hitting game is finished. In addition, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in the normal state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) "left-handed" Are configured to be displayed.

<About the contents of effects in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 382 to FIG. 388, among the various effects executed in the eighth control example, characteristic effects of the effects will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 382 and FIG. 383, the contents of effects when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 382 is a timing chart showing the flow of the sound effect when the power is turned off (power down) while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuation pattern A, and then the power is turned on.

  In this control example, power interruption occurs during the special symbol variation (special figure variation), and then, while the power is turned on, while the start-up processing of the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is being executed. A display mode indicating that power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (during recovery processing) (see FIG. 383 (a)). Then, when the special symbol variation is executed during the return processing period, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the BGM in the special figure variation. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the special figure fluctuation is being executed during the return processing period.

  More specifically, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if power is interrupted, and power interruption occurs in the memory area when power interruption occurs. It is configured to execute a power-off process to store previous game information (a variation pattern for effect, BGM information, a background mode, a remaining variation time, etc.). The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) for storing various information in the storage area described above after the power supply from the outside is cut off. The game information is stored in the storage area only when a power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part ("B" in FIG. 382) output at the time of the power failure occurrence is stored, and the BGM part ("B") output at the time of the power failure occurrence during the recovery processing period after power on. Is configured to output audio from.

  In the example shown in FIG. 382, the progress of BGM output at the time of power interruption is stored, and the flow of reproducing BGM from the place stopped at power interruption is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to reproduce from the start position of the BGM part output at the time of disconnection. With such a configuration, storage processing to the storage area at the time of power failure can be simplified.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the game information related to the special figure fluctuation that has been executed before the power interruption (the selected fluctuation pattern) is a return command indicating that the start processing of the main control device 110 is completed (initial setting is completed). , The remaining fluctuation time, the lottery result) is included in the voice lamp control device 113. Thus, when the start-up process is completed (when the command indicating completion of the initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the initial screen (see FIG. 383 (a)) to the normal screen. It is possible to shift the display mode to (Fig. 383 (b)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure fluctuation that has been executed before the power failure has resumed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 383 (a) is a schematic view showing the display content immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 383 (b) is a schematic view showing the display content after the completion of the initial setting. The content shown in FIG. 383 (a) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. 239 (b) of the above-described control example, so the detailed description thereof is omitted, but in the eighth control example, When the special figure variation is executed in a state where the screen during this initial setting is displayed, BGM corresponding to the variation pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power failure (see FIG. 382).

  Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 382 (b), a return-only fluctuation pattern based on the remaining period of the special map fluctuation being executed is executed. In this control example, a first determination to determine whether the remaining fluctuation time at the completion of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, a second determination to determine whether it is less than 5 seconds in 2 seconds or more, and 5 seconds or more And a third determination to determine whether the

  Here, if it is determined by the first determination that it is less than 2 seconds, initial setting is performed until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (until the special figure fluctuation under execution ends) without setting a fluctuation pattern dedicated to return. The setting screen (see FIG. 383 (a)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a short-term fluctuation display which makes it difficult for the player to identify to be executed.

  Also, when the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the reach state (the symbol row Z1 on the effective line and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol, and only the symbol row Z2 is variably displayed A return-only reach effect is executed in which the variable display is executed from the state). The return-only reach effect is an effect using fluctuation data of fluctuation patterns in which the ratio of the jackpot among the fluctuation patterns in normal reach, ie, in the reach state, among the normal fluctuation patterns, is set to a small percentage.

  Then, fluctuation data corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. By configuring in this way, when the special figure variation being executed at the time of power-on is a big hit, it is possible to notify the player of the big hit with a change pattern that is normally difficult to encounter, and provide the player with added value. be able to. Further, among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively used by using the image data (image data showing a fluctuation pattern that is a big hit in normal reach) which is rarely used in practice.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 to 385, the contents of the change operation of the background mode during the special figure fluctuation will be described. FIG. 384 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) in accordance with the background change operation timing during special figure fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 384, in the eighth control example, in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is variable. Specifically, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, low speed". Thereby, it is possible to play a game while making the player predict the timing at which the third symbol is stopped. In the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is easier to select a longer fluctuation time than when the lottery result is out. Since it comprises, it can be made to predict the lottery result (the length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol based on transition of the fluctuation speed of the 3rd symbol.

  In this control example, the player operates the frame button 22 during the variable display of the special symbol, so that the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (the background can be changed). The timing at which the background change is performed is made different according to the timing at which the user operates the frame button 22.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 384, when the background change operation (depression of the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special drawing (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high, the background change is performed. A background change is performed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 384 (a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, when the background change operation is performed, the background change is made immediately after that. Is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 385 (b)).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (b), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special drawing is not high speed fluctuation (medium speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special drawing The background change is not performed until the end of, and the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 385 (a), the "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In the comment display area Dm2a provided on the right of the display area Dm1a, characters of “next change in background change” are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. Thus, the player can be notified that the background change operation has been performed during the special figure change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), so the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the background change operation is repeatedly executed.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed during the special figure change, the timing of the background change is different according to the change state of the special figure (the change speed of the third symbol). It is configured to Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the background change from being performed while the effect (for example, reach effect) having a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a hit is performed, for example. Since it is possible to execute a background change immediately if it is a period (a high speed fluctuation period) in which it is difficult to execute an effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to cause the player to experience various effects (background). be able to.

  In the flow of background change described with reference to FIG. 384, when the background change operation is executed except during the special pattern fluctuation and during the high speed fluctuation of the special graph, the next special graph fluctuation is started. Although the example which performs a background change by timing is shown, it does not restrict to this, for example, the stop display mode (combination of three third symbols) the stop display mode for the third symbol to show the lottery result of the special figure The background change may be executed at the timing when the timing is reached (the timing when the effect indicating the lottery result of the special drawing is finished).

  Furthermore, in the eighth control example, when the background changing operation is executed during the special drawing fluctuation and other than the high speed fluctuation of the special drawing, at least the background of the result of the special drawing lottery this time is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured to suppress that the effect suggesting the result of the special drawing lottery becomes incomprehensible by the execution of the background change, and in the variation of the special drawing The execution of the background change may be delayed until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background changing operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special drawing is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable that the background change is executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special drawing switches to the low speed fluctuation. .

  In addition, when the background changing operation is performed during special drawing fluctuation and other than high speed fluctuation of the special drawing, the timing at which the background change is executed is switched based on the result of the special drawing lottery this time. For example, when the special figure fluctuation during fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, a predetermined timing during the fluctuation period (for example, timing to switch to the low speed fluctuation) than when the special figure fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation. It is good to configure to make it easy to execute background change. Furthermore, even when the background change operation is performed during high speed fluctuation of the special drawing, the timing of executing the background change may be switched based on the result of the special drawing lottery this time.

  Thus, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and to allow the player to execute the background change operation vigorously. .

  In FIG. 384, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure) in execution is used as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is performed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the process of effect display performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of steps (for example, five steps), and according to the process of effect display at the time of background change operation It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

  Specifically, the effect display performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially referred to as "variation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", "effect result" For example, the "variation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the fluctuation state "high-speed fluctuation" of the special view of the eighth control example, "reach effect period", "development effect period" The “rendering result notification period” may be configured to correspond to the fluctuation state “medium speed fluctuation”, “low speed fluctuation”, and “stop” of the special view of the eighth control example.

  As described above, even when the timing of background change performed after the background change operation is changed according to the progress degree of the effect display, not the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure), this control example and Similar effects can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the eighth control example, when the background changing operation is executed during special drawing fluctuation and other than during high speed fluctuation of the special drawing, the background changing is executed after the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, for example, the lottery result of the following special figure fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation next to the special figure fluctuation for which the background change operation has been performed) or the following special drawing fluctuation The presence or absence of the execution of the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be variable based on the lottery result of (pre-determination (pre-reading) result for the prize information stored on hold). .

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to perform background change operation eagerly in order to grasp the lottery result of the special drawing in advance. Then, by actively performing the background change operation, a variety of effects can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, the contents of the effect of the treasure box effect (eight hold effect) will be described. In this control example, when the number of balls held for a special symbol reaches eight, which is the upper limit number, eight pieces of hold effect which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight hold are executed. doing. This eight hold effect is a dedicated effect using eight hold symbols, and as a hold symbol for effect corresponding to each hold symbol, a hold symbol for effect of a display mode imitating a treasure box is in waiting area Ds1 b Is displayed (see FIG. 386 (a)).

  And, when the special figure fluctuation corresponding to the retention design which becomes the object of 8 retention productions is executed, as shown in figure 386 (b), the retention design pattern tb0 of the 1st one is indicated in execution territory Ds1a The contents tb10 of the treasure box indicating the lottery result of the change are displayed. Although the details will be described later, the contents tb10 are configured to display different colors according to the lottery result of the special drawing.

  Thereafter, when new winning information is held and stored during a period in which eight holding effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIGS. 387 (a) and (b). The new holding symbol 900z is displayed only by the holding lamp 900 without displaying the holding symbol corresponding to the new winning information in the waiting area Ds1b. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner to which hold symbol a period (rendering period) in which eight hold effects are continuously executed can be notified.

  Then, when the last special figure variation to be subjected to eight hold effects is executed, as shown in FIG. 388, the hold symbol for effect tb7 is displayed in the executing region Ds1a and the current waiting region Ds1b is displayed. A holding symbol corresponding to the number of holding memories is displayed. In other words, when there are no holding symbols to be subjected to the eight holding effects, a holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls currently held and held is displayed. Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is puzzled without knowing the number of holding balls currently acquired at the end of the eight holding effect.

  In the present control example, the eight hold effects shown with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388 are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, eight hold effects are being performed, and for effect Even during the period when the holding symbol is displayed in the waiting region Ds1b, when the player performs a specific operation on the operation means, the waiting region Ds1b is not the holding symbol for effect but the current holding symbol You may comprise so that the holding symbol which shows the number of holding balls may be displayed. Also, when it is determined that there is winning information to be won in the jackpot in the predetermination process executed during the eight holding effects, the eight holding effects are continued until the special view change corresponding to the winning information is performed. It may be configured as follows.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Eighth Control Example
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example, and FIG. 389 (b) is a diagram of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. It is the model which showed the content of RAM223 typically. In the eighth control example, eight holding lottery table 222fa, special effect selection table 222fb, and vibration pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222 with respect to the first control example described above, the next background change flag 223fa is held in the RAM 223, and holding The difference is that the effect executing flag 223 fb and the hold effect counter 2223 fc are added. The other elements are the same as in the first control example, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  The eight hold lottery table 222fa is a data table used when performing lottery (determination) whether or not to execute eight hold effects (treasure box effects), and the number-of-holds control process (see Z 2243 in FIG. 398) The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter) is the upper limit value “ If it is 8 "(Z2473 in FIG. 398: Yes), it is referred to determine whether eight hold effects are to be executed (Z2475 in FIG. 398). When it is determined to execute the eight hold effect, the eight hold effect described above with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388 is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 390 (c), the contents of the eight-piece holding lottery table 222fa will be described. FIG. 390 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the eight hold lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 390 (c), the eight hold lottery table 222fa is a prize showing a lottery result (winning) that is advantageous to the player within the hold of the special view (within the hold used for eight hold effect). It is determined whether or not the information is included, and the execution probability of the eight hold effect is variable based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when there is prize information indicating winning within the suspension of the special view (when the determination result within the suspension is "perhaps"), the value of the acquired suspension effect counter 223 fc is "0 to 140". In this case, the eight hold effect is performed, and the eight hold effect is not performed in the case of “141 to 198”. On the other hand, in the case where the in-hold determination result is "only out of place", eight pieces of the hold effect are executed when the acquired value of the hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 90", and in the case of "91 to 198" Stipulates not to execute eight hold effects.

  That is, in the present control example, the case where winning information indicating the lottery result (winning winning) which is advantageous to the player is included in the pending target for the eight pending effects is more than the case where it is not included. It is comprised so that eight piece reservation production | presentation becomes easy to be performed. As a result, by executing the eight hold effects, it is possible to make the player think that it is likely to win the jackpot soon, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  In addition, in this control example, when the number of holding balls of a special symbol becomes eight which is the upper limit number, whether or not eight holding effects which are continuous effects (period effect) using eight holdings are executed or not Whether or not the number of balls held reaches the upper limit, and whether or not continuous effect (period effect) is to be executed when the number of balls held reaches the predetermined number (for example, 7 pieces) It may be configured to perform a lottery. In this case, for example, the execution probability of eight holding effects may be varied between the case where the number of holding balls corresponding to one special symbol type is three and the case where the number is seven among seven holdings.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, the jackpot having a large bonus (the number of balls, the gaming state set after the jackpot game) given to the player in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won Set the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol type (advantage special symbol) on the side where the game is easy to be executed and the other special symbol type (disadvant special symbol) to be different so that the execution probability of eight hold effects is different In this case, when there is winning information indicating a big hit in the holding of the special special symbol, it is preferable that eight holding effects be performed more easily than the other conditions. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation for the eight hold effect.

  The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table to be referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 at the time of operation of the frame button 22 according to the lottery result of the special symbol, Different vibration amounts are set based on the result).

  Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIG. 390 (a). FIG. 390 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 390 (b) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. It is the figure which showed the content of vibration pattern data 222fc which has (vibration type).

  In the eighth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate, and the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 can also be varied in three steps. It is done. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the prior discrimination result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player, the frame button 22 is easily vibrated by a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to be driven when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured.

  Therefore, since the player can not recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates unless the frame button 22 is pressed, the amount of vibration in the case of vibration can not be recognized. be able to. Furthermore, this control example is configured such that the amount of vibration corresponding to multiple frame button presses is defined as one vibration amount scenario (vibrator type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to be more easily vibrated by a larger amount of vibration. As a result, the player can be made to press the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

  In the eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets a variation pattern for variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 399), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence / absence of the effect (operation effect) and the type of the operation effect. Then, when the special effect (part of the operation effect) for vibrating the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibrate type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed, The vibration operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set vibration type is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 390 (a), the special effect selection table 222fb is a case where a hit is included in the reservation of the special view, and the value of the effect counter is a vibration amount scenario in the range of “0 to 79”. “Vib A” is defined as (vib type), “vib B” is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vib type) in the range of “80 to 139”, and a vibration amount scenario is in the range of “140 to 175” “Vib C” is defined as (vib type), and “vib D” is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vib type) in the range of “176 to 198”.

  In addition, in the case where the hit is not included in the special view's hold (only out of place), the value of the effect counter is in the range of “0 to 49” and “Vibe B” is included as a vibration amount scenario (vibrator type). "Vib C" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vib type) in the range of "50 to 90", and "vib D" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vib type) in a range of "91 to 198" It is prescribed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390 (b), the detailed contents of each vibration type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be described. As shown in FIG. 390 (b), in the eighth control example, four types of vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) can be set, and the number of times of operation of the frame button 22 (PUSH times) for each vibration type The amount of vibration corresponding to) is specified.

  Specifically, "None (do not vibrate)" is specified for the first PUSH frequency for "Vib A" of the vibrator type, and "strong" is specified for the second to fourth PUSH, and "Vibe B" for PUSH The first is "weak", the second is "medium", and the third and fourth are "strong", and the "Vibe C" has the first PUSH "none (do not vibrate)" and the second "Weak", "Medium" for the third time, "Strong" for the fourth time are defined, "Weak" for the first PUSH frequency is specified for "Vibe D", and "Medium" is specified for the second to fourth time ing.

  As described above, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated is made different according to the set vibration type, and the presence or absence of the change of the amount of vibration is made different according to the PUSH frequency. When the frame button 22 is pressed next, it can be enjoyed which vibration amount causes the frame button 22 to vibrate. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the eighth control example, the vibration amount defined for each vibration type is configured to be larger (not smaller) as the number of PUSH increases, but the present invention is not limited to this. The amount of vibration may be reduced. In this case, when the special figure variation being executed is a big hit variation, or when there is winning information indicating a big hit winning within the holding of the special figure, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is likely to be reduced halfway in the special effect It should be configured to be As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the amount of vibration decreases.

  Further, in the eighth control example, although the vibration amount is set for a specific number of PUSH times (four times), whichever vibration type is set, the present invention is limited thereto. The number of times of PUSH for setting the amount of vibration may be made different depending on the type of vibration without any problem.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, in the eighth control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 multiple times according to the process of the fluctuation display (reach fluctuation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this manner, the frame button can be operated a prescribed number of times (four times) simply by operating the frame button 22 along the effect (operation effect) of the variable display executed by the third symbol display device 81. It can be done.

  In addition, the eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to special effects. The display effect dedicated to this special effect is stepwise (up to four stages) in the display mode during a specific period within the special figure fluctuation period (for example, 10 seconds of 2 to 12 seconds after the special figure fluctuation starts). An effect that can be stepped up is executed. This effect is configured in an effect mode that can indicate that the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) by pressing the frame button 22.

  By using such special effects, it is possible to positively operate the frame button 22 while expecting the player to further increase the vibration amount of the frame button 22. In addition, although the vibration amount scenario (vibrator type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount defined in the set vibration type. It is possible to suppress the end of the special effect without causing it.

  In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured not only based on the set vibration type, but based on the lottery result of the change, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is Although not changed, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode steps up.

  Here, the definition of the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 will be described. In this control example, “the number of vibrations (frequency) indicating the number of vibrations per unit time” which is the definition of the amount of vibration as the amount of vibration. The magnitude of the amount of vibration is defined on the basis of the magnitude of the amplitude among “amplitude indicating the width of vibration of the vibration” and “a period of time taken to one unit of the vibration (period)”. Therefore, the fluctuation width of the vibration felt when the frame button 22 is pressed is made different depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, so that it is possible for the player to easily recognize the variable state of the vibration amount.

  In the special effect described above, when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times, it may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations, and vibration modes (amplitude, frequency, duration of vibration, time of vibration, Any period may be used as long as the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed to when the vibration starts, or the like may be used in combination. In addition, a plurality of vibration means (such as a motor) capable of applying vibration to one operation means (frame button 22) is provided, and the drive control is performed on the plurality of vibration means to vibrate the frame button 22 The position of the source may be varied, or the vibration mode felt by the player may be varied by varying the drive start timing of each vibration means. Also, the player may be able to select the variable contents of the vibration mode.

  Furthermore, in the eighth control example, the frame button 22 does not vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 in the state where the special effect is set, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be vibrated with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set in the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this manner, it is possible to easily inform the player that the special effect is currently being performed.

  The vibration pattern data 222fc is a data table in which the contents of the vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb are stored. The contents are omitted because they are described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222fb.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 389 (b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described focusing on differences from the first control example described above. . As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example adds a next background change flag 223fa, a hold effect executing flag 223fb, a hold effect counter 2223fc, and an SW special effect counter 223fd to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Is different.

  The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that a background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. Is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is performed to change the background mode, the timing at which the background is changed is made different depending on the timing at which the background change operation is performed. In such a case, a time lag occurs between when the background change condition is satisfied and when the background (background mode) is actually changed (transitioned) by performing the background change operation. Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is satisfied, the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON.

  Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 403), the variation state (the speed of the variation display of the third symbol) of the special figure at the time when the background change operation (the operation to the frame button 22) is performed is If it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation is not in progress (Z2964 in FIG. 403: No), it is set to on (see Z2965 in FIG. 403). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON in the change stop process 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 397) executed when the stop command indicating the stop of the special view change is received (see Z2242 in FIG. 397) Next, Z2266 in FIG. 397: Yes) determines whether there is a reserve storage of the special view (Z 2267 in FIG. 397), and if it is determined that there is no suspension (Z 2267 in FIG. 397: No) A background change is performed at the timing. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a suspension of the special drawing (Z2267 in FIG. 397: Yes), a background change is executed at the timing when the next special drawing fluctuation starts (see Z2258 in FIG. 396).

  Hold effect executing flag 223fb is a flag indicating that eight hold effect (see FIG. 386) is being executed, and is set to ON when eight hold effect is executed. . Then, when the eight hold effect is finished, it is set to off (see Z2534 in FIG. 399). In addition, although detailed illustration is omitted, while this holding effect underway flag 223fb is set to on, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol Even if the value obtained by adding up the value of the 2 holding ball number counter 223b) reaches the upper limit number (8), it is configured not to execute the lottery for executing the new eight holding effect.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter is 8 in the holding ball number control process (see Z 2243 in FIG. 398) (Z 2473 in FIG. 398: Yes), next, the holding effect The processing is configured to execute the processing of Z2474 and Z2475 in FIG. 398 when it is determined whether the flag 223fb during execution is set to ON and it is determined that the flag 223fb is not set to ON (is OFF). .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the eight hold effects are continued for a long time more than necessary, so it is possible to enhance the sense of values of the eight hold effects. In addition, different from the configuration of this control example, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the eight holding effect, whether to execute a new eight holding effect You may comprise so that a lottery may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to configure a lottery different from the lottery as to whether or not to execute the first eight pending effects as a new event to perform the eight pending effects. Specifically, it is preferable that the new eight hold effect is configured to be easier to be executed when a jackpot is included in the target hold than the initial eight hold effect. As a result, when the eight hold effects are executed for more than eight special figure fluctuations, it is possible to further enhance the expectation to the jackpot. In addition, even during the eight holding effect, it is possible to play the game eagerly to accumulate the holding balls up to the upper limit number again.

  The hold effect counter 223 fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and every time the main processing (see FIG. 394) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond) ), And update processing is performed so as to have different values. The value of the hold effect counter 223 fc is acquired when making a reference to the eight hold lottery table 222 fa to determine whether eight hold effects are to be executed in the hold number control process (see Z 3343 in FIG. 398). (See Z2474 in Figure 398).

  The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period when the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect process (see Z2841 in FIG. 402). In this case (see Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 402). Here, in the present control example, even if a special effect of any type is set, since a special effect for four frame button operations is set, a value of 4 is set in the SW special effect counter 223 fd.

  Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is decremented by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 402), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after subtraction is corresponded The SW motor data is set to execute the effect to be displayed (see Z2947 in FIG. 402).

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in Present Eighth Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. In the eighth control example, the contents defined in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are different from the contents defined in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 with respect to the first control example described above. Otherwise identical. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 391 is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration of the display control apparatus 114 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 391, in the work RAM 233 of the eighth control example, eight display setting flags 233fa, eight displays effect counter 233fb, display pending ball number storage area 233fc, and display effect counter 233fd are added. Are different from the first control example described above.

  The eight display setting flag 233fa is a flag for indicating that eight hold effects are being executed, and is set to ON when the eight hold effects are performed. While the eight-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to ON, in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 383 (b)) of the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol Not the number of holding balls, but the number of remaining holding symbols (the holding symbol for effect) to be subjected to the eight holding effects is displayed (see FIG. 388). As a result, it is possible to easily notify the player of the execution period of the eight hold effect which is a continuous effect (period effect) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

  In the eighth control example, eight remaining symbols are displayed in synchronization with the remaining number of the pending symbols to be the target of the eight pending effects and the number of pending symbols for effects. It is sufficient to display the number of holding symbols for effect so that the player can be informed of the execution period of the game in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, the third symbol is stopped during the eight holding effects or the number corresponding to the number of temporary stops The number of reserved symbols for holding may be set, or one reserved symbol for effect may be set for two or more special figure variations. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress condition of the eight-arranged effect (the current time being the variable display corresponding to what number of the reserved symbol).

  The display eight effect counter 233fb is the number of effect holding symbols to be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 383 (b)) of the sub display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the eight hold effect. Is a counter for measuring In this control example, the number of holding symbols for effect is varied according to the remaining number of holding symbols to be targeted for eight holding effects, so eight for display from the sound lamp control device 113 In the eight-piece display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 409) executed when the hold command is received, the value of the counter is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 409).

  Then, in the variation pattern command processing 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 408) executed when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 408), and after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the counter of 0 is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 408). When the value of eight for display effect counter 233fb becomes 0, it is a case where all eight holding symbols to be the target of holding effect are used, so eight display setting flag 233fa is for ending the display of the holding symbol for effect It is set to OFF (see Z3525 in FIG. 408), and in the pending display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 410), a pending symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1 b (see FIG. 388). Thus, when the final special drawing variation to be subjected to eight holding effects is executed, the holding symbol indicating the number of holding balls in the special drawing is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and the eight holding effects are ended. At the time of playing, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the holding ball number of the special drawing is accumulated.

  The display holding ball number storage area 233 fc is a storage area for storing the current special drawing holding ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives the display holding ball number command output from the audio lamp control device 113 In this case, the number of holding balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

  The display effect counter 233 fd is configured of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and has a different value each time the display control device 114 command determination process (see Z3302 in FIG. 407) is executed. The update process is performed to become The value of the display effect counter 233fd is acquired when making a reference to the eight hold lottery table 222fa to determine whether eight hold effects are to be executed in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 398). (See Z2474 in Figure 398).

  Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 391, the NAND flash memory 234a of the eighth control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234a of the first control example described above in that eight presentation scenario selection tables 234a3 are added. ing.

  The eight production scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the production result of eight holding production, and is based on the remaining number of holding symbols to be targeted for the eight holding production and the lottery result of the special symbol. This is referred to when selecting an effect mode of eight hold effects.

  Here, the detailed contents of the eight rendering scenario selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 392 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the eight rendering scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIG. 386 to FIG. 388, in the eighth control example, when eight special effects are started when the special effect change is started, the displayed treasure chest of the executing area Ds1a is open. From the above, it is configured to display a suggestion mode for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the suggestion mode is configured to be selected with reference to the eight presentation scenario selection table 234a3.

  The variation result (lottery result of the special figure variation to be executed this time) is a hit (big hit) in the eight presentation scenario selection table 234a3, and the value of the eight presentation counter 233fb is “7 to 4”. In the case, that is, when 4 to 7 suspension symbols simulating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the value of the display presentation counter 233fd is in the range of "0 to 50" and the suggested aspect "rainbow" Is defined, the suggestion aspect “red” is defined in the range of “51 to 90”, the suggestion aspect “blue” is defined in the range of “91 to 150”, and “white” is in the range of “151 to 198” It is prescribed.

  In addition, when the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 suspension symbols for effects imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting region Ds1b, the display effect counter The suggestion aspect "rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" for the value of 233fd, the suggestion aspect "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", the suggestion aspect "blue" in the range of "150 to 179" Is defined, and “white” is defined in the range of “180 to 198”.

  On the other hand, when the variation result (lottery result of the special figure variation to be executed this time) is out, and the value of the eight display counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, the treasure box is simulated in the waiting region Ds1b. In the case where four to seven of the effect holding symbols are displayed, the indication aspect “red” is defined in the range of “0 to 39” as the value of the display effect counter 233 fd, and in the range of “40 to 149” The suggestion mode "blue" is defined, and "white" is defined in the range of "150 to 198". In addition, when the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 suspension symbols for effects imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting region Ds1b, the display effect counter The suggestion aspect "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233fd, the indication aspect "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" in the range of "160 to 198" It is prescribed.

  As described above, in the eighth control example, as the suggestion mode to be displayed as eight holding effects, since it has a hit suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a win, When the suggestion mode “rainbow” is displayed, the player is notified of the advantageous lottery result at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, so it is possible to play the game with confidence.

  In addition, as the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is smaller, that is, as the eight display effect is advanced, various colors are more likely to be displayed as a suggestion mode of the eight display effect. It is possible to enjoy the production without getting tired to the end with respect to the eight hold production which is a continuous production to be executed across the special figure variation of.

  In the eighth control example, when the eight hold effects are executed, a hold symbol (treasure box) for effect for showing the target special figure fluctuation is displayed in the waiting area Ds1 b, and the target of the effect is displayed. In the case where the special figure variation is executed, the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the variation is displayed while the treasure box displayed in the execution area Ds1a is open. For example, when displaying a holding symbol (treasure box) for effect in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure box is set based on the result of prior determination for each holding symbol. Also good.

  Specifically, it is possible to set a plurality of colors of the treasure box that are more easily selected in the case where the information indicating the big hit is included in the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol than in the case where the information indicating the big hit is not included. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to give an expectation to the special figure fluctuation that is executed during the eight-piece holding effect from the stage before the special figure fluctuation is executed.

  In addition, an effect (pre-reading effect) for changing the mode (color of the treasure box) of the suspension pattern for effects displayed in the waiting area Ds1b and an effect for changing the display mode of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the executing area Ds1a In the case where (the variation effect) is combined and executed, it is preferable to set the variable aspect such that the player looks at the variation effect executed later than the pre-read effect executed earlier. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the pre-read effect, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the holding symbol for which the effect mode is set may be set in advance, When selecting the said fluctuation production, it may be constituted so that the said fluctuation production may be chosen based on the presentation mode of the pre-reading effect set to the reservation design corresponding to the current fluctuation production concerned this time. Thereby, with respect to one reserved symbol (winning information), it is possible to give relevancy to effect modes of a plurality of effects (previous effects, the relevant fluctuation effects) to be executed at different timings, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute continuous rendering without giving.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 to 406. In the eighth control example, effect setting processing (Z5204: FIG. 304) which is one of the main processing variation effect setting processing 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303) of the start-up processing with respect to the first control example described above. The main difference is in that the content of the content was partially changed. The other processes are the same, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 393, the start-up process (see FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This startup process is different from the startup process (see FIG. 257) of the first control example described above in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 257) in the case of receiving the status command is deleted. . Furthermore, it differs in that the content of the process performed in the initial setting (Z2001) is changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the start-up process (see FIG. 393) is performed, the processes of Z2001 to Z2011 are performed as in the first control example described above, and this process ends. Here, regarding the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example, points different from the first control example described above will be described. In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 382, BGM of the special figure fluctuation is output when the special figure fluctuation is performed during the period when the initial setting is being performed. It is composed of That is, in the initial setting (Z 2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393), a process of reading game information at the time of power off is executed, and the game information at the time of power off read by the process is in special feature fluctuation. If it is determined that there is a voice change command for causing the voice output device 226 to output BGM of the special figure change.

  Although details will be described later, in the eighth control example, when power is cut off in the pachinko machine 10, power is received from the internal power supply provided inside the audio lamp control device 113, and The game information (the presence or absence of a special figure change, the lottery result of the change, the BGM for change, the remaining change time, etc.) at the time of disconnection is temporarily stored in the display storage area. As a result, it is possible to read out the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the contents of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 394 is a schematic diagram showing the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example.

  The main process of the eighth control example is different from the main process (see FIG. 258) of the first control example described above in the pending number display updating process (Z2106 of FIG. 258) and is the pending number updating process 8 (FIG. 394). Of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (Z2107 of FIG. 258), and the command of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (Z2172 of FIG. 394) is replaced with the command determination processing (Z2113 of FIG. 258) The point that the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 394) is provided instead of the determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 394) to the variable display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 258), and the short-term winning management process (FIG. The difference is that Z2111), the on-reach hold effect management process (Z2112 in FIG. 257) is deleted, and the lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 394) is added.The other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the main process 8 (see FIG. 394) is executed, first, the processes of Z2101 to Z2105 that are the same as the main process (see FIG. 258) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of Z2105 is finished, next, the pending number display update process 8 is executed (Z2171). The detailed contents of the pending number display updating process 8 (Z 2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of Z2171, the process of frame button input monitoring and effect process 8 is executed (Z2172). The detailed content of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of Z2172 is completed, the processes of Z2108 to Z2110 that are the same as the main process (see FIG. 258) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the lamp setting process is executed (Z2173). The lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emission mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit 80. The detailed contents of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of Z2173 is completed, or when it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed in the process of Z2101 (Z2101: No), the command determination process 8 is executed (Z2174), and then the variable display is performed. The setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as the first control example described above is executed. The detailed contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, and the detailed contents of variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 399.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z2174). This command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the ball-storing-number command output from the main control unit 110 with respect to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 259) of the first control example described above. In this case, the contents of the process to be executed are different, the process (variation stop process 8) to be executed when the stop command output from the main control unit 110 is received, and the output from the display control unit 114 This is different from the point that processing to be added is added when the display start command to be displayed is received. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 259) of the first control example described above, the eighth process (Z2204 and Z2205 in FIG. 259) is executed when the stop type command illustrated is received. Although the same processing is executed also in the control example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that it is executed in processing (Z 2261 in FIG. 395) according to other commands.

  When command determination processing 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: Yes), then variation pattern reception processing 8 Is executed (Z2241), and the present process ends. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 396, but with respect to the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 260) of the first control example described above, Is different in that it is configured to execute processing for background change in.

  Referring back to FIG. 395, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2201 that a change pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received (Z2203), and if it is determined that a stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is finished. This fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs the process of setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the process of executing the background change when the special view is stopped. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2203 that a stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is then determined whether a pending ball count command has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that a pending ball count command has been received If it is determined (Z2205: Yes), the number-of-holds control process is executed (Z2243), and the process ends. The detailed contents of the hold number control process (Z 2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 398.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 2205 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (Z2205: No), Z2207 identical to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 259) of the first control example described above The processing of Z2208 is executed, and then it is determined whether the display rising command is received (Z2244). The display start-up command is set when the display control device 114 finishes the initial setting process after the power is turned on, and the display control device 114 is executed by the command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114. Are output to the audio lamp control device 113.

  When it is determined in the process of Z2244 that the display rising command is received, that is, the initial setting process of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 When it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen of (Z2244: Yes), the set audio data is started and set (Z2245), and this processing is ended.

  In the processing of Z2245, processing for reading out the game information (voice data) stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, and outputting the voice data to the voice output device 226 is executed. Thus, as described above with reference to FIG. 382, the voice output device 226 is synchronized with the timing when the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen. The voice based on the voice data stored in the display storage area can be output.

  In this control example, as game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is changing (special map changing information), which is executed during the special figure changing Information (BGM type information) indicating the type of voice (BGM) can be stored, and when setting audio data in the process of Z2245, read out special pattern in-motion information and BGM type information, and read out the read information Based on this, the rising voice data is set.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2244 that the display rising command is not received (Z2244: No), the process according to the other commands (including the process when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261) , End this process.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241). This fluctuation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241) deletes the processing of Z2225 to Z2231 from the fluctuation pattern reception processing (see Z2202 of FIG. 260) of the first control example described above, and processes background change at the start of fluctuation. It differs in the point which added. Since the processing content other than that is the same, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same processing content, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed, the same processing as Z2221 to Z2224 as the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) of the first control example described above is performed. It is determined whether the background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256). Here, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2257), and the set background mode is set. The display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this processing is ended.

  That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high speed fluctuation period during the special figure fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern reception processing 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed in the state where the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON. Then, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special feature change. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2256 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Z2256: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) will be described with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242). When the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

  Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2266), and if it is determined that the flag is set to ON (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether there is a suspension of the special view ( Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are read out and determination is performed. If it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is no suspension of the special drawing (Z2267: No), the next special drawing fluctuation is in spite of the fact that the condition to execute the background change is satisfied by the next special drawing fluctuation. Since the background mode is not executed, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2268) in order to execute the background change triggered by the stop of the special image fluctuation this time (Z2268). A display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to OFF (Z2270), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (Z2266: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2267 that there is a suspension of the special view (Z2267: Yes Since the background change is not executed at the timing of executing this processing (the fluctuation stop timing of the special drawing), the processing of Z2268 and Z2269 is skipped and the present processing is ended.

  In the present control example, as described above, when the condition for executing the next special figure fluctuation is not established while the next background change flag 223fa is on (the special figure is suspended at the timing when the current special figure fluctuation stops). In the case where there is no), it is configured to execute the background change at the stop timing of the special figure fluctuation this time, so that the background mode after switching is provided early to the player who desires the background change. Can.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the above-described control example. For example, the on-state of the next background change flag 223fa may be continued until the next special drawing change is executed. In this case, a predetermined effective period (for example, one minute) is set as a period until the next special figure fluctuation starts, and when the special figure fluctuation is not executed next within the predetermined effective period, the next background is set. The change flag 223fa may be set to be off.

  By configuring in this manner, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to prevent the background change from being executed immediately after.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243) will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number-of-holds control process (Z2243). In this hold count control process (Z2243), a process for managing the special view hold ball count on the voice lamp control unit 113 side based on the information included in the hold ball count command received from the main control unit 110, and the special figure Execution processing of an effect (eight hold effect) in which the number of holding balls reaches a predetermined number is an execution condition.

  In the number-of-holds control process (Z2243), first, the number of balls held in the special drawing is extracted from the received number-of-balls received command, and the corresponding special symbol holding number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 holding ball It stores in the number counter 223b) (Z2471), and sets the display ball holding ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding number counter stored in the processing of Z2471 (Z2472). Then, whether the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b) is an upper limit value of 8 It discriminates (Z2473).

  If it is determined in the process of Z2473 that the value of the counter (number of special drawing reserved balls) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2474), and the obtained value of the effect counter 223h is used. Based on the eight pending lottery table 222fa, the lottery result is obtained (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result indicating execution of eight pending effects (Z2476).

  If it is determined that it is a lottery result indicating that eight units are to be performed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding eight units are set (Z2477), and eight units for display are set for display (Z2478). ) And the on hold execution flag 223 fb is turned on (Z2479), 8 is set to the value of the on hold presentation counter 223 fc, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2476 that the lottery result indicates that 8 pieces of reserve effect are not to be executed (Z2476: No), the process of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped because 8 units of effect are not carried out. This process ends.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). The variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is different from the variation display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 269) of the first control example described above in that control processing relating to hold presentation (eight hold presentation) is added And otherwise the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the fluctuation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is judged whether the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (Z2501), and if it is judged that the fluctuation start flag is not set to ON (Z2501: No), As in the first control example, the process skips to the process of Z2505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (Z2501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223 fc is larger than 0 (Z2531), and is larger than 0 If it is determined (Z2531: Yes), the value of the holding effect counter 223fc is decremented by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the holding effect counter 223fc after subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

  If it is determined in the process of Z2533 that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is 0 (Z2533: Yes), it is the end timing of the eight hold effect, so the hold effect executing flag 223fb is set to OFF (Z2534) ), The processing of Z 2502 identical to the first control example described above is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2531 that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not larger than 0 (is 0) (Z2531: No), it is not the case that eight present effects are under hold, Z2532 The processing of ~ Z2534 is skipped to shift to the processing of Z2502.

  Moreover, in the process of Z2533, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), eight hold effects are being executed, and the end timing of eight hold effects is not reached. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped to shift to Z2502. When the process shifts to the process of Z2502, the processes of Z2502 to Z2509 that are the same as the variable display setting process (see Z2114 of FIG. 269) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the number-of-holds display update processing 8 (Z 2171) will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the contents of pending number display update processing 8 (Z 2171). In the reserve quantity display update process 8 (Z2171), a process is performed to turn on the reserve LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol.

  When the number-of-holds display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b) Set the lighting LED 900 for lighting (Z2631), and then, the number-of-holding balls command for display corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b) The setting is made (Z2632), and this processing ends.

  In this control example, in the process of Z2631, lighting is performed so that the holding LED 900 is lit in the same manner in correspondence with a value obtained by adding the number of balls in the special figure 1 and the number of balls in the special figure 2 Although the setting is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding LED 900 is displayed in such a manner that the player can identify the number of holding balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of holding balls in Special Figure 2. The lighting may be set to light, or may be set to light the holding LED 900 corresponding to only the number of holding balls in one of the special views according to the current gaming state. You may.

  Furthermore, in this control example, although it is configured to always perform lighting setting indicating a special figure holding ball to the holding LED 900, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a period in which a specific game condition is established (for example, A period during which eight holding effects are being performed, a period during which a movable member (character) for effect is moved so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to see, a display of the third symbol display device 81 Configured to turn on the hold LED 900 only during the period when it is difficult to visually recognize the number of holding balls in the special symbol display 81 with the third symbol display device 81, such as a period during which variable display is performed using the entire screen It is good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 401, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 8 (Z2172) will be described. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring / rendering process 8 (Z2172) is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed and the processing content to be executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the other is the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing of Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring and rendering process of the first control example described above (Z2107 in FIG. 272) is executed, and the Z2805 is performed. When it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process (Z2805: No), the process regarding various effects performed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped, and the process moves to Z2842.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of Z2805 (Z2805: Yes), the SW rendering process is executed (Z2841), and then the process moves to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed when the switch in contact when the frame button 22 is pressed continues to be on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned on (after the frame button 22 is moved to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to the initial position. When performing this operation, it is configured to require a return period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at a position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds of the return operation. Configured.

  With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is continuously turned on for at least 0.15 seconds, so the on state is When the detection is continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short time (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it can be suppressed that the frame button 22 is erroneously determined to be pressed.

  Next, the contents of the SW effect process (Z2841) executed in the process of Z2841 of FIG. 401 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect process (Z2841). In the SW effect process (Z2841), the control process related to the special effect to vibrate the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, the background change process for changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22, and The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring and rendering processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example is executed. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / presentation processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above is denoted by the same reference numeral and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the SW effect process (Z2841) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, when the display current variation pattern command is set in the process of Z2504 in the variation display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 399), the variation pattern including the special effect is set as the SW effect, and In the process of Z2804 in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401), it is determined whether the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is the set timing.

  In the process of Z2941, when it is determined that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the operation to the frame button 22 this time is an operation to the frame button 22 during the special effect, so the control process for the special effect Execute (Z2942 to Z2947). First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (Z2942).

  The SW special effect counter 223fd has a value set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. It is. If it is determined that the value of the counter is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of Z2942 (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained (Z2943), and the value of the effect counter 223h is obtained The special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

  In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is operated is four, regardless of which special effect is selected, so 4 is set to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd in the processing of Z2945. Ru.

  Subsequently, a display special effect command corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of Z2942, when it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0, that is, the special effect is already executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 1 After subtraction (Z2948), the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is executed according to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after subtraction, and this processing is ended.

  Here, the process of the special effect described above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 390 (b) when the type of special effect (vibrator type C) is selected. First, while the special effect is included in the current variation pattern, the first frame button 22 is operated, and the type of special effect (vibration type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, in the process of Z2945, 3 is set to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd, and in the process of Z2447, the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set (FIG. b) see).

  In addition, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and its button A pressing suggestion display mode of executing an action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the special image fluctuation of this time and the type of the selected special effect, for example, the next frame button When vibration larger than the vibration amount generated at the time of frame button operation this time is applied at the time of operation, large vibration occurs when vibration larger than the vibration amount generated at the time this frame button operated is applied The display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is configured to be more easily displayed than in the case where it is not provided.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the special figure lottery result this time is a big hit, it is also configured so that the display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is easier to be displayed than when the lottery result is not a big hit (out). When the next frame button is operated, a vibration larger than the amount of vibration generated at the time of the frame button operation this time is applied and the special figure lottery result is a big hit, the next frame button operation is It is configured such that the highlighted display mode is easily displayed.

  As a result, it is possible to predict the current special drawing lottery result based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration amount generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. it can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated at the time of the next frame button operation becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated at the time of the current frame button operation, the player may forget to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set effect can be enjoyed sufficiently.

  Next, when the second frame button operation is performed during the special effect, in the process of Z2942, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is determined to be larger than 0 (3) (Z2942; Yes), and the SW special effect is performed. The value of the counter 223fd is decremented by one. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2 is set in the SW motor data. Thereafter, the same processing is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223 fd becomes zero. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is finished with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

  That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). Is configured. In this control example, the variation pattern is made to correspond to the setting, and the special effect can be set as the SW effect, so that the execution period of the special effect falls within one special pattern fluctuation period. However, the special effect may be set regardless of the setting of the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the special pattern fluctuation period), for example, at the start of the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and to set a special effect based on the determination result. In addition, when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22), a special effect may be set.

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to execute the special effect regardless of the variation time of the set special figure. In addition, the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special drawing lottery during fluctuation, the winning information in the hold, and the set gaming state.

  Referring back to FIG. 402, the description will be continued. In the process of Z2941, when it is determined that the SW effect set is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), next, frame button input monitoring of the first control example described above The same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, and Z2811 in the rendering processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) is performed, and the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2806 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the present time is the timing at which the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: No), since the present frame button 22 is a background change operation for changing the background mode, the background change processing is executed (Z2949), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the contents of the background change processing (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed, and the background change is performed based on the operation timing of the background change operation. A process is performed to vary the timing of executing.

  In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 403), first, it is determined whether the timing at which the background change operation is performed is the fluctuation period of the special drawing (during the fluctuation of the special symbol) (Z2963), and the fluctuation period of the special drawing If it is determined that there is one (Z2963: Yes), it is then determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period during which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, when it is determined that the high speed fluctuation period is not (medium speed, low speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: No), the background mode can not be changed immediately, so the next background change flag This processing is ended by setting 223 fa to ON (Z2965).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2963 that the present is not a fluctuation period of the special figure (for example, it is a customer waiting period) (Z2963: No), or that the current is a high-speed fluctuation period in the process of Z2964. When it is determined (Z2964: Yes), since the background mode can be changed immediately, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2966), which corresponds to the set background mode. A display switching command to change patterns is set (Z2967), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 8 (Z2172) of FIG. 401 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In the sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

  In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, and the notice effect display is set with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above. It differs in that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when there is no such case, and otherwise the process is the same. About the same part, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is larger than 0, but in the present control example, the touch sensor It differs in the point which uses sensor effective time counter 223s in order to measure the effective period corresponding to the production set based on a fluctuation pattern among the periods which can distinguish the operation to 2900 effectively. Therefore, even when the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Further, also in the eighth control example, a period counter not shown is provided, and a period in which the operation on the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined is provided as in the first control example described above, but the description is omitted.

  When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, the processes of Z2821 to Z2829 that are the same as the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), the mode identification processing is executed (Z2968), and this processing is ended. In this mode identification process (Z2968), a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on an operation on the touch sensor 2900.

  Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, first, it is determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969). When it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969: Yes), the current background mode is supported. A mode display command is set (Z2970), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated in the process of Z2969 (Z2969: No), the process of Z2970 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  That is, in the eighth control example, the player can be notified of the current background mode only by operating the touch sensor 2900. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode in the limited space of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore, within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to secure a wide area used for the effect of the variable display.

  In the eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 385 (a)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, based on the operation to the touch sensor 2900, the production mode of the fluctuation display production being executed is determined at the timing to display the current background mode, and the display mode of production based on the determination result Is determined, and the background mode is displayed on the display area. Thereby, the background mode can be displayed without disturbing the variable display effect being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In the lamp setting process (Z2173), control is performed to vary the lighting mode of the frame lamp (the lamp for lighting the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 380) according to the game situation.

  When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure is currently changing (Z2131). If it is determined that the special figure is not changing (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is selected. A frame lighting command for lighting in green is set (Z2135), and then a mode lighting command for lighting mode lamps 1910a to 1910d so as to notify the currently set background mode is set (Z2134). Finish.

  Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED), which is a light emitting means, is embedded in the frame button 22. By lighting the light emitting means, the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light in any color. ing. Then, the player is notified of various information by the lighting color of the frame lamp.

  Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating a state in which the special figure variation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is in high speed variation. The red color is defined as a lighting mode that indicates that the special figure (third symbol) is in the process of fluctuating other than the high speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

  Furthermore, for the player who is going to execute the background change operation, in order to cause the frame lamp to emit light by the frame lamp, the surface of the frame button 22 to be operated when the background change operation is performed (the surface that the player contacts). Since the current special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) can be easily grasped, the timing to execute the background change is made different according to the special drawing fluctuation state when the background changing operation is performed. Even when the control is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, in the eighth control example, the timing to execute the background change is different according to the fluctuation speed of the third symbol, and what speed is the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the display screen There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to identify the problem, but the problem mentioned above is solved by changing the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol). Can.

  In this control example, the frame lamp directly emits light on the surface of the frame button 22. However, the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this, and it is in the viewpoint of the player who performs the background change operation. Any position is acceptable. For example, a frame lamp may be provided in the vicinity of the frame button 22.

  Referring back to FIG. 406, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of Z2131 that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), then it is discriminated whether the special figure (third symbol) is in high speed fluctuation (Z2132), and the high speed fluctuation is in progress. When it is determined that the frame lamp is determined to be (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is turned on in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to the process of Z2134, and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2132 that the special drawing is not in high speed fluctuation (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then the lighting command for lighting all the mode lamps Is set, and this processing ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Eighth Control Example
Next, control processing of the display control device 114 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth control example, in place of the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 407) is replaced with the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278). Instead of the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 408) in place of the Z3405 in FIG. 4) and the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631 in FIG. 411) instead of the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (b)). This embodiment is different in that the reference display process (refer to Z3493 in FIG. 409) and the hold display setting process (refer to Z3495 in FIG. 410) are added. The other control content is the same, and the same control content is assigned the same reference numeral and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), in contrast to the above-described command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), a process to be executed when eight display effect hold commands are received and a loop of this process The process of updating the value of the display effect counter is added to the content of the process executed when the display variation pattern command is received, and the content of the process executed when the ball holding ball command is received , Is different in that it changed. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When command determination processing 8 (Z3302) is executed, processing of Z3401 to Z3404 identical to the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 of FIG. 277) is executed, and the display variation pattern in the processing of Z3404 If it is determined that a command has been received (Z3404: Yes), variation pattern command processing 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to Z3496. The detailed contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the effect counter for display is executed. In the eighth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated each time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is performed once. The command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes in accordance with the type of command (display command) received by the display control device 114. Therefore, the timing at which the process of Z3496 is performed can be made irregular at all times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter is to be updated. Then, when the process of Z3496 is finished, the process proceeds to the process of Z3401, and the command determination process 8 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3404 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (Z3404: No), the processes of Z3406 to Z3411 identical to the command determination process described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277) are executed. , Shift to the processing of Z3496 described above. If it is determined in the process of Z3410 that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), it is then determined whether the eight display effect display hold command has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that the display switching command has been received If it is determined (Z3492: Yes), an eight-display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to the process of Z3496.

  The eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data related to eight-piece hold effect (see FIG. 386), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z3492 that eight display effects for suspension have not been received (Z3492: No), it is then determined whether or not the number-of-hold ball count command has been received (Z3414), and the number-of-hold ball count command If it is determined that it has been received (Z3414: Yes), the hold display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to the process of Z3496. This hold display process (Z3495) is to execute a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detailed contents thereof will be described with reference to FIG. Will be described later.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z3414 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 that is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 of FIG. 277) And then move on to the processing of Z3496.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 408, contents of the variation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of fluctuation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) is different from the above-described variation pattern command processing (see Z3405 in FIG. 278) in that control processing in the case where eight hold effects are executed is added. Other elements are identical. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the processes of Z3501 to Z3506 that are the same as the variation pattern command process described above (see Z3405 in FIG. 278) are executed, and then eight display setting flags 233fa are selected. It is determined whether it is set to ON (Z3521). Then, if it is determined that the setting is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the eight hold effect is not being executed (Z3521: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z3521: Yes), the value of the eight display counter 233fb is decremented by one (Z3522), and eight displays after subtraction By referring to the counter, the effect mode (the content of the treasure box) is selected using the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3 (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined that it is 0 (Z3525: Yes), the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to be off (Z3526) , End this process. In addition, in the process of Z3525, the value of the eight displayed effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, even in the case where the eight reserved effects continue even after the next special feature fluctuation (Z3525: No), this process is directly performed. finish.

  Next, the contents of the eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the eight-piece display setting process (Z3493). When the eight display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5701), an eight effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

  Then, the set data table for eight effect display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), time data is set based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and eight displays are set to eight. , End this process.

  Next, the contents of the hold display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display process (Z3495). When the hold display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of hold balls is set in the display hold ball number storage area 233fc based on the information contained in the currently received hold ball number command (Z5801).

  Then, it is determined whether the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5802), and when it is determined that the flag is set to ON (Z5802: Yes), eight present effects are currently being performed, so A pointer corresponding to the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is set (Z5803), and the present process is ended. That is, while eight holding effects are being executed, the number of effect holding symbols (treasure box) corresponding to the value of the eight displayed effect counters 233fb is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the eight display setting flag 233fa is not set to ON (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display holding ball number storage area 233fc is set (Z5804) , End this process. That is, while eight holding effects are not being executed, a holding symbol (circle) corresponding to the number of holding balls in the special view is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). In the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631), the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above is performed in that a command (display start command) for indicating that all resident object image data has been transferred is set. And is different. The other components are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same components and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When resident image transfer setting processing 8 (Z4631) is executed, processing of Z4701 to Z4705 identical to the resident image transfer setting processing described above (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (b)) is executed, and processing of Z4705 is completed. Then, the display start command is set (Z4721), and this processing ends. As described above, a command (display for indicating that transfer processing of various image data to be executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) is finished in the main processing (see FIG. 274) of the display control device 114 By configuring the start-up command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing at which the display control device 114 has become able to operate normally.

  Further, in the eighth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226) Since the display start-up command is output from the display control device 114, an instruction to display a normal screen after power on and an instruction to output various sounds (BGM) can be synchronously executed.

<The ninth control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 to 419. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 314) of the fourth control example described above. And the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and part of the control contents are different from the eighth control example described above, and the other configurations are the same. About the same composition, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the eighth control example described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing to change the background mode according to the operation timing (executes the background change By configuring the timing to be variable, it is possible to suppress, for example, a situation in which the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute the background changing operation with confidence and to perform the background changing operation positively.

  However, in the technique of the eighth control example described above, only the timing of the background change performed based on the background change operation is made different, and since the effect mode to be performed is the same, it is executed by the background change operation. There is a problem that the player gets bored with the effect (background change effect).

  On the other hand, in the ninth control example, it is configured to execute a background notice effect that suggests a background mode after transition between the time when the background change operation is performed and the time when the background change is actually performed. And, according to the timing (for example, special figure non-fluctuating timing, special figure fluctuating) which performs background change operation, it is constituted so that the production feature of background advance notice production is changed. With such a configuration, the player can be provided with different effect modes depending on the timing at which the background change operation is performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored prematurely in the effects to be performed. .

  Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can be made to execute the background change operation eagerly to see the background notice effect.

  Further, in the ninth control example, similarly to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period in which the special figure fluctuation is not performed (during the customer waiting period) There is. Here, the conventional pachinko machine is a gaming state in which special figure variation is easy to be executed (for example, a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol)) and a gaming state where special figure variation is difficult to be executed (For example, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol)) can be settable, and when the time saving state is set, the normal state is set. It is configured such that a short fluctuation time can be easily set as the special drawing fluctuation time.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a period in which the special figure variation is not performed during the time saving state occurs, a new special figure variation is easily started immediately, and a period in which the special figure variation is not performed in the normal state When it occurs, it becomes more difficult to start a new feature change than during the time saving state.

  In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, a display for waiting for a customer (for example, the name of a gaming machine) during a period (waiting period for a customer) in which special figure variation is not executed without considering the set gaming state. The display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are switched needlessly during the time saving state when the function (for example, the volume control function and the light control function) is executed during waiting for customers. And there is a problem that the player is provided with an inconspicuous display. Moreover, the process for creating each image data displayed on a display screen will be performed complicatedly, There existed a problem that the control load of the pachinko machine 10 will be increased. Furthermore, during the time saving state, since special figure variation can be executed efficiently by continuously firing a ball, for example, functions (volume control function, light quantity control function) are made during waiting for customers. Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special image fluctuation is started until the adjustment operation using the function is completed, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling.

  On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses in a state where a new feature map variation is not executed after the feature map variation stops, the above-mentioned function for waiting for customers is enabled. By configuring, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem, but when the player who is playing a normal state tries to adjust the volume and the light amount, it is necessary to stop the game for a predetermined period, so the player New problems that the operation of the game would be reduced.

  In order to solve the various problems described above, in the ninth control example, if the special feature variation is not executed according to the set gaming state and the period during which the function can be executed during the customer waiting period is different It is configured to Thereby, for example, during a high probability state (time reduction state, definite change state) of a normal symbol for which special figure variation is easy to be executed, waiting for a customer after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after special figure variation is not performed During the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol which can execute the function during the period and the special figure fluctuation is hard to be executed, it is possible to execute the function during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure fluctuation is not executed. it can.

<About the contents of effects of the ninth control example>
Next, among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, background notice effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 414 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 414 (b) is a display in a state where the background mode shifts due to the next change. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen. Among the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those in the eighth control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the ninth control example, when the background change operation is performed, the notice effect that suggests the background mode of the transition destination is performed before the background mode is switched. The display mode of the advance notice effect will be specifically described. The “mode display”, which is a display mode indicating the background mode of the transition destination by a comment immediately before the transition of the background mode, and the transition destination of the transition mode immediately before the transition of the background mode It is configured to be able to display "silhouette display" which is a display mode that suggests the background mode by the silhouette of the character.

  Then, when the timing to execute the background change operation is outside the special map fluctuation period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only the "mode display" is selected, and when the special map fluctuation period is in the "mode display" And one of the "silhouette display" is selected. By this configuration, it is possible to make the effect (background advance presentation effect) to be performed different according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed, so the player is allowed to perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation period, if the selection ratio between the “mode display” and the “silhouette display” is different according to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation I'm sorry. In addition, when the display mode of the pattern in which the background mode to be suggested and displayed in the background preview effect and the background mode to which the actual transition destination is different is selected, the possibility of winning a big hit is high. (In order to be higher than the display mode of other background preview effects). Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively perform the background change operation to predict the drawing result of the special drawing. In addition, by actively performing a background change operation, effects corresponding to various background modes can be provided to the player, so it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early in the game. .

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 414 (a), the background mode is switched to the sea mode by the background change operation, and a silhouette K100 imitating a fish that suggests the sea mode is displayed as the background advance notice effect. As described above, in the present control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the background mode transition, so the player is displayed in the background notice effect It is comprised so that visual comparison with an aspect and the background mode which actually shifted can be carried out.

  Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 414 (b), a comment “background change at next change” indicating that the background change operation is executed and the background mode shifts at the start of the next special figure change is the comment display area Dm2a Is displayed on. Then, a silhouette K100 imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode is displayed as a background preview effect. That is, the state shown in FIG. 414 (b) is the state in which the current mode is the "mountain mode" and the background mode shifts (transition to the sea mode) in the next change, and a background that suggests the background mode after the shift. A silhouette K100 indicating a mountain mode is displayed as the preliminary effect. As such, when there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestion display mode of the background advance presentation effect, the possibility of winning a jackpot is high due to the change.

<Electrical configuration in ninth control example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413. FIG. FIG. 412 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and FIG. 412 (b) is a diagram in the ninth control example. It is the model which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to RAM223 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 typically.

  As shown in FIG. 412 (a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibration pattern data 222fc is deleted and the background notice selection table 222ga is added. And the other elements are identical. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The background notice selection table 222 ga is referred to when selecting an effect mode of the background notice effect when the background change operation is performed. Here, the contents of the background notice selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the background notice selection table 222ga.

  As shown in FIG. 413, the background advance notice selection table 222ga has a result of determination of yes / no (lottery result of the special figure change being executed when the background change operation is performed), the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, and the value after transition. In accordance with the background mode, background notices of different display modes can be selected.

  Specifically, in the case where the success / failure determination result is a hit and the background mode after transition is the “sea mode”, “Silhouette A” is in the range of “0 to 69” in the value of the effect counter 223 h, “70 to 159 "Silhouette B" in the range, "Mountain mode display" in the range from "160 to 169", and "Sea mode display" in the range from "170 to 198" respectively, and the background mode after transition In the case of “mountain mode”, “Silhouette B” is in the range of “0 to 69”, “Silhouette A” is in the range of “70 to 159”, and range of “160 to 169” in the value of the effect counter 223 h The “sea mode display” is defined in “, and the“ mountain mode display ”is defined in the range of“ 170 to 198 ”.

  On the other hand, if the result of judgment is out of step and the background mode after transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119" and "silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". If “Sea mode display” is specified in each and the background mode after transition is “Mountain mode”, “Silhouette A” is in the range of “0 to 119” in the value of the effect counter 223 h, “120 to 120”. "Mounting mode display" is defined in the range of 198 ". Furthermore, when the background change operation is performed during the customer waiting period, when the background mode after transition is the “sea mode”, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 198”. When the background mode after transition is "mountain mode", "ocean mode display" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0-198".

  Here, each display mode selected as a display mode of background advance production will be described. In this control example, “silhouette display” displaying a silhouette of a character suggesting a background mode after transition and “mode display” displaying a character indicating a background mode after transition as a display mode of background notice effect; Are configured to be configurable.

  And "Silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree that suggests the mountain mode shown in FIG. 414 (b) among "Silhouette display", and "Silhouette B" is shown in FIG. 414 (a). It is a silhouette of a character imitating a fish that suggests the sea mode shown. In this control example, a display mode formed by a still image is displayed as a silhouette display, but if it is a display mode that suggests the player the background mode after transition, it changes dynamically. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which background mode is suggested immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, for example. The background mode of the transition destination may be gradually changed to a display mode that is easy to be grasped based on an operation on the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background advance effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, “silhouette display” and “mode display” can be displayed as the display mode of the background notice effect, and the background during a period in which the special figure does not change. Only the "mode display" is selected when the change operation is executed, and the "silhouette display" can be selected when the background change operation is executed during the period in which the special drawing is fluctuating. . Thereby, by performing the background change operation during the special figure fluctuation, a special effect mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, a display mode that suggests a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination can be set as background advance presentation effects, and the display mode is selected only when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a hit. Are configured to be Therefore, by giving a sense of discomfort to the contents of the background advance presentation effect and the actual background mode transition situation, it is possible to notify (suggest) in advance the lottery result which is advantageous for the player, so it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

  In this control example, two background modes (sea mode, mountain mode) are used. However, three or more types of background modes may be used. Furthermore, the background mode to be shifted by the background change operation is It may be set randomly. Further, as a result of performing the background change operation, it may be configured to shift to the same background mode as before the shift. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the current background notice effect based on the background mode before the change and the suggested content of the background mode after the change displayed in the background notice effect, and the background after the change Fun can be provided to predict whether the mode matches.

  In addition, in the ninth control example, after the background change operation is performed as in the eighth control example described above, the period until the background mode shifts is changed according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed. It is configured as follows. The background notice effect described above is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, according to the timing which performed background change operation, the display period where only background advance notice effect is displayed can be varied.

  In this ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of background notice effect, it is configured to select the display mode based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation during execution, but it is limited to this Alternatively, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of pre-determining the winning information included in the special map reservation. In this case, for example, when the background mode can be shifted (changed) during the special figure change in which the background change operation is performed, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the change, and the background change operation is When the background mode is shifted (changed) by the special figure fluctuation next to the executed special figure fluctuation, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the next special drawing fluctuation lottery result (predetermination result) Good to configure.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (b), the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth control example is different in that a customer waiting flag 223 ga and a delay counter 223 gb are added to the RAM 223 of the eighth control example described above, and the other is the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The customer waiting flag 223 ga is a flag for indicating that the present time is a customer waiting period, and is set to ON when the customer waiting period is reached. When the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), the customer wait flag 223ga waits for a customer to be executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417). It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) (see Z2734 in FIG. 418). In addition, if the gaming state is a short time state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) or a positive change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), wait for customers In effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 419), the value of the delay counter 223gb is set to ON when the value becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 419). And, when the special figure fluctuation is started, it is set to off.

  In the ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period in which the customer wait flag 223ga is set to ON, and the player is notified that the volume is now adjustable. A notification display to notify is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the customer waiting flag 223 ga is also a flag for indicating a period in which the volume can be adjusted. Furthermore, although the detailed description will be described later, in the present control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON is made different according to the set gaming state, and the gaming state is normal. More specifically, the customer waiting flag 223 ga is configured to be less likely to be turned on in the case of the time saving state or the definite variation state.

  By configuring in this manner, a notification display for notifying the player that the volume can be adjusted during the definite variation state or the short time state may be difficult to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. it can. That is, the time saving state or the probability changing state is configured to be easy to set the special figure fluctuation time shorter than the normal state, and there may be a case where the special figure fluctuation is not temporarily executed. However, since the time saving state or the probability changing state is also a gaming state in which a new feature map change is more easily performed than the normal state, the period in which the feature map change is not performed is easily ended in a short period. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to ON, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be complicatedly switched to make the player feel unpleasant. was there.

  On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has not elapsed during a time saving state or a probability changing state. Therefore, the problems described above can be solved. In addition, as a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required in order to set customer waiting flag 223ga on during the time saving state or the probability change state, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol (electric time It is preferable to set a period longer than the period in which the accessory 640 a is open and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON only by playing the game continuously during the definite variation state and the time reduction state.

  The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring a period from when the special figure fluctuation ends to when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on during the positive change state and the time saving state. To delay the timing of

  In the delay counter 223gb, in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) executed in the variation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) executed when the special figure fluctuation stops, the gaming state is a definite change state If the time is short, a predetermined period (5 seconds) which is a delay period is set (Z2733 in FIG. 418). Then, each time the waiting for customer effect processing 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 419) is executed (Z2759 in FIG. 419), it is subtracted and the waiting for customer flag 223ga is set to ON when the value of the counter becomes 0 (FIG. 419 Z2761). Thus, it is possible to delay the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the definite variation state or the short time state than to the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON in the normal state.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device of ninth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the ninth control example, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 419) is monitored in place of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main processing with respect to the eighth control example described above. The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 is replaced with the effect processing 8 and the command determination processing 8 is executed instead of the command determination processing 8, and the other process is the same. About the same control content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, main processing 9 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 9. As shown in FIG. 415, the main processing 9 is different from the main processing 8 (see FIG. 394) in the customer waiting rendering processing 9 (Z2181), the frame button input monitoring and rendering processing 9 (Z2182), and the command determination processing 9 ( Z2183) is different from the other in that it is the same.

  The contents of the frame button input monitoring / presentation processing 9 (Z2182) are background change processing (FIG. 403) as compared to the frame button input monitoring / presentation processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401) in the eighth control example described above. The difference is that the background change process 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 416) is executed instead of Z2949 in (4), so only background change process 9 which is a subroutine of frame button input monitoring / presentation process 9 (Z2182) is performed. Description will be made with reference to FIG. 416, and illustration of control contents other than that (control contents identical to the eighth control example) is also omitted.

  Also, in the command determination process 9 (Z2183), the variation stop process 8 (Z2242), which is a subroutine, is substituted for the command determination process 8 (see Z2174 in FIG. 395) of the eighth control example described above. Since only the point of executing step 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) is different, only the variable stop process 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 417, and the other control contents (the same as the eighth control example) The control content is not shown.

  Next, the contents of background change processing 9 (Z2541) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change processing 9 (Z2541). This background change processing 9 (Z2541) is different from the background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 403) in the eighth control example described above. The difference is that processing for setting the display mode of background notice effect is added.

  When the background change processing 9 (Z2541) is executed, the processing of Z2963 to Z2967 which is the same as the background change processing described above (see Z2949 in FIG. 403) is executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2978) Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, the effect mode of the background notice effect is selected using the background notice selection table 222ga (Z2979). Then, a background notice command for display indicating the effect mode selected in the process of Z2979 is set, and the process ends.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the display switching command set in the process of Z2967 and the background notice command for display set in the process of Z2980 are set in the same process, The display control unit 114 first performs the display using the image data based on the background notice command for display, but the display control unit 114 outputs 0.5 seconds thereafter. The display is configured to execute display using image data based on the display switching command with an interval. In this way, it is possible to execute the background preview effect earlier than the background shift.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651). This variation stop process 9 (Z2651) is the customer wait setting process (Z2652) after the processes of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 are finished with respect to the variation stop process (see Z2242 of FIG. 397) of the eighth control example described above. The other contents are the same. About the same content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In the customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process for setting a customer waiting period is executed after the special map fluctuation has stopped.

  When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is judged whether or not the special map reservation exists (Z2731). In the process of Z 2731, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 a and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b are both zero.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2731 that a special figure reservation exists (Z2731: Yes), the next special figure change is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped. Then, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2731 that the special figure suspension does not exist (Z2731: No), it is then determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a definite variation state (Z2732), If it is determined that the time saving state or the probability changing state is not (normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735), This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2732 that the current time is a short time state or a positive change state (Z2732: Yes), then a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the delay counter 223gb (Z2733), and this process ends. Do. The value of the delay counter 223gb set here is subtracted in the main processing executed every one millisecond.

  Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181). In this wait for customer effect processing 9 (Z2181), subtraction of the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the wait for customer setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) is executed, and the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes zero. A process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to ON and a volume adjustment process when the volume button is operated in a state where the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON are executed.

  In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), first, it is judged whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2751), and if it is judged to be ON (Z2751: Yes), the volume button Among them, it is determined whether the up button (right button) for raising the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2752). If it is determined that the upper button is pressed (Z2752: Yes), next, the volume level is set to increase the volume level by 1 (Z2753), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2754) , End this process.

  If it is determined in the process of Z275 that the upper button is not pressed (Z2752: No), it is determined whether the lower button (left button) to decrease the volume among the volume buttons is operated (pressed) ( Z2755). If it is determined that the lower button is pressed (Z2755: Yes), next, the volume level is set so that the volume level drops by 1 (Z2756), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2757) , End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2751 that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (more than 1) ( Z2758) If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2758: No), this process is ended as it is not during the stop of the special figure fluctuation.

  If it is determined in the process of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then the value of the delay counter 223gb is decremented by 1 (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223gb after subtraction Is determined whether it is 0 (Z2760). When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb after subtraction is not 0, that is, the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, and five seconds have not elapsed since the last special figure fluctuation stopped. If it is (Z2760: No), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of Z2760 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 (Z2760: Yes), the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, and it is 5 seconds after the previous special figure change is stopped. Is an elapsed time, the customer waiting flag 223 ga is set to ON (Z2761), a display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and the process proceeds to the above-described Z2752.

<10th control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 to 427. The tenth control example is different from the above-described ninth control example in that an operation effect (a cracked crack effect) for changing the effect mode based on the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 is executed, and the third control example. The fluctuation is displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the third symbol (special symbol (special figure)) which is stopped on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, and the lottery result of the special figure is informed to the player intelligibly by the stop display mode The difference is that the effect (background change effect) for changing (changing) the background mode is executed based on the display mode of the decorative symbol for (a), and the other points are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the contents of effects of the tenth control example>
Here, among various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, contents of characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, unlike the control examples described above, a crack generation effect and a background change effect based on the display pattern of the stop symbol are executed.

  With the crack generation effect, the variable display mode imitating a plurality of cracks is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the variable display mode at the time when the variable display mode is variable It is an effect of switching the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol based on the mode, and based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) during the above-described effect period, and the number of operations. The variable display mode is configured to be variable.

  With this configuration, the player positively operates the frame button 22. Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced. Also, in this control example, the variable contents of the variable display mode based on the second and subsequent frame button operations are configured to be different based on the first frame button operation timing to be executed during the production period of the crack generation effect There is. Specifically, the number of times of operation to the frame button 22 for changing the number of "bumps" displayed as the variable display mode is made different.

  That is, the crack generation effect in this control example is to change the number of "bumps" displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of frame button operations, and the number of "bumps" Based on the number of "hibbings" displayed at the end of the variable period, the following presentation modes (for example, the variation display presentation (reach in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (reach It is an effect to switch the development destination (display mode when reach effect is developed to super reach effect)), and the frame button operation of the predetermined number of times (the first operation timing in this control example) The conditions under which the number of "drops" varies are set in accordance with.

  With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing of the operation means and the number of operations, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation performed during crack generation, but the present invention is limited thereto. Alternatively, according to the timing of the second and subsequent frame button operations, the variable patterns of the subsequent variable display modes may be selected. Further, in this control example, all variable patterns (variable scenarios) of the variable display mode during the presentation period are selected by the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to select partially.

  Furthermore, in the cracked crack effect of this control example, it is assumed that the frame button operation is performed at any timing when the first frame button operation causing the selection of the variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode is performed. Also, the same variable display mode (for example, a display mode in which "one crack" is displayed) is displayed. That is, in the cracked crack effect of this control example, the first frame button operation informs the player of the execution of the cracked crack effect in an easy-to-understand manner, and based on the first frame button operation. The player can not easily grasp the selected variable display mode variable scenario.

  In this way, it is possible to play the game while watching how the cracked crack development progresses. In addition, the crack cracking effect of this control example makes the ratio at which the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected to be different based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Thus, the player can be made to pay attention to the cracked crack effect, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in the crack generation effect of this control example, the second effect after the first effect period (five seconds) and the first effect period have elapsed with the player making the operation means (frame button 22) effective period. A period (10 seconds) is set, and the variable pattern of the variable display mode is executed by executing an operation (first frame button operation) for selecting the variable pattern of the variable display mode during the first effect period. Is configured to be selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed in the first effect period, the cracked crack effect is ended at that point (the setting of the second effect period is cleared, and switching to effects other than the cracked crack effect is performed) I'm sorry. As a result, it is possible to suppress, for a long time, notifying an effect that urges the operation of the frame button 22 to a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22 for a long time.

  In addition, when frame button operation (first frame button operation) is executed during the first effect period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first effect period) It is composed of Thereby, since it is possible to give continuity to the plurality of frame button operations executed during the crack generation, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  The background change effect is an effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives the stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols) Is configured to determine.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to receive the background change symbol type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114, and is included in the command when the background change symbol type command is received. It is comprised so that it may be discriminate | determined whether background mode is changed based on the stop symbol information currently done. By configuring in this way, even if the drawing result of the special drawing is out, it is possible to make the player interested in which stop mode is displayed, so the third symbol display device 81 The presentation performed on the display screen can be enjoyed to the end.

  Furthermore, it is determined in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and based on the determination that the determination results in changing the background mode, the player is notified that the background is to be changed. Unlike conventional pachinko machines that stop and display 3 symbols (display and display background change notification symbols), it is possible to determine whether background change is to be performed according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stop displayed. In other words, the stop mode of the third symbol is configured to be a trigger for the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily perform control to change the easiness of background change or to change the background change destination based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set gaming state. .

  In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when the special figure lottery is out, the player By operating the operation means, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the stop mode based on the player's operation result, so it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game. In this case, it is better for the player to operate the operating means more easily than the case where the player does not operate the operating means at all. For example, only when the operating means is operated, the background is changed It is good to comprise so that the stop mode of the 3rd design which will be performed will be displayed. As a result, the player can be more actively involved in the presentation.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Tenth Control Example
First, an electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 and 421. FIG. 420 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and FIG. 420 (b) is a diagram of the tenth control example. It is the model which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to RAM223 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 typically.

  As shown in FIG. 420 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is used when selecting an effect mode of the crack generation effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that a crack generation effect selection table 222ha is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 421, the contents of the crack generation effect selection table 222ha will be described. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the crack generation effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 421, in the crack generation effect selection table 222ha, a lottery result of special figure fluctuation in which the crack generation is executed (decision judgment result), and a frame button operation in the SW effective period of the crack generation operation for the first time In accordance with the operation (depression) timing of and the value of the acquired SW special effect counter 223 ha, different production modes (the number of frame button operations in which the number of cracks increases) is defined.

  Specifically, in the case where the success / failure determination result is a hit (large hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 seconds or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is The effect type A is defined in the range of “0 to 39”, the effect B is defined in the range of “40 to 89”, and the effect C is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  Here, specific contents of each effect type defined in the crack generation effect selection table 222ha will be described. In the effect type A, the number of frame button operations required until the second crack enters is set to “5”, and the number of frame button operations required until the third (MAX) crack enters is set to “10” In the scenario, the number of frame button operations required for effect type B and the second crack is set to “7”, and the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack to be set to “15” In the scenario type C, the number of frame button operations required until the second crack is entered is "10", and the number of frame button operations required until the third (MAX) crack is included is "25" It is a scenario set to.

  That is, the number of times the number of cracks varies can be varied by the second and subsequent frame button operations according to the effect mode of the crack cracking effect set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how much the player changes the crack by performing the frame button operation to the player, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Note that in the cracked crack effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 421, only the effect type in which the third crack is necessarily displayed is indicated by the player operating the frame button 22 as many times as necessary. There is also defined an effect type in which the second crack is not displayed even if the frame button 22 is operated any number of times, and an effect type in which the third crack is not displayed. As described above, by defining the effect type in which the crack is not easily variable and the effect type in which the crack is not variable, even if the effect type in which the crack is not variable is set, expectation is given to the end and frame button operation Can be done.

  Referring back to FIG. 421, description will be made. Judgment result is hit (big hit), the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is the value that falls under 0 to 1 second, or 3 to 4 seconds (range from 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds) If the value of the SW special effect counter ha is in the range of “0 to 19”, the effect type A is defined, the effect on the range of “20 to 79”, the effect B is defined, and the range of “80 to 99” , Production C is defined.

  In addition, if the result of the judgment is out of step, and the value of SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 seconds or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of SW special effect counter ha is "0 to 29". In the range, the effect type A is defined, the effect B is defined in the range of “30 to 89”, and the effect D is defined in the range of “90 to 99”. And in the case where the judgment result is out of judgment, the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha is a value corresponding to other than 0 to 1 second, or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds) The effect type A is defined in the range of “0 to 4”, the effect B is defined in the range of “5 to 79”, and the range of “80 to 99” is the value of the SW special effect counter ha. A presentation D is defined.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM according to the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 420 (b). As shown in FIG. 420 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the ninth control example described above in the SW effect counter 223h, the button press counter 223hb, and the noise. The difference is that a crack information storage area 223hc is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The SW effect counter 223 ha is a counter used for selecting a cracked crack effect. Each time the main processing is executed, 1 is added and repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198.

  The button press counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and is incremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracked crack effect performed in the tenth control example, the effect mode (variable number display of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button pressing counter 223hb.

  The cracked surface information storage area 223hc is a memory area for temporarily storing the effect type selected using the cracked surface effect selection table 222ha.

<About the control contents of the voice lamp control device of the tenth control example>
Next, control contents of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the control content same as each control example mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 422, the main processing 10 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 10. As shown in FIG. 422, in the main processing 10, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 10 with respect to the main processing 8 of the eighth control example described above, and a command The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the other points are the same.

  Next, the contents of the command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. The command determination process 10 is different from the above-described command determination process 8 in that control processing in the case of receiving a background change symbol command is added, and the other process is the same. Although the details of this background change symbol command will be described later, this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and the stop mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( Information for indicating the combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop is included.

  When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2208 as the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and it is then determined whether a background change symbol command has been received (Z7201). When it is determined in the process of Z7201 that the background change symbol command has been received (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z7202), and the variation corresponding to the set background mode A display switching command to a pattern is set (Z7203), and this processing ends.

  That is, in the tenth control example, the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to execute the process of changing the background mode based on the stop mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. As described above, by performing determination as to whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol actually displayed stop, even if the result of the special figure lottery is out, which It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 10 will be described. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 10. The frame button input monitoring and effect processing 10 differs from the above-described frame button input monitoring and effect processing 8 in that the SW special processing to be executed is changed to the SW effect processing 10, and the other is the same. is there. About the same content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the cracked crack termination end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the contents of crack generation effect end processing (Z2896). In this crack cracking effect end process (Z2896), when the specific period in the crack cracking effect has passed, a process for setting the subsequent effect mode is executed.

  When the crack processing termination process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and it is judged whether 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the crack processing (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) If it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: No), it is then determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed (the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not elapsed (Z7006: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is greater than 0 (Z7003) and not greater than 0 If it is determined (Z7003: No), a display effect command indicating the end of crack generation effect is set (Z7004), the values of the SW valid time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb are cleared (set to 0), End the process.

  If it is determined in the process of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223b is larger than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of Z7006 that 15 seconds have elapsed (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button press counter 223hb is set (Z7007), and the value of the button press counter 223hb is cleared. (Z7008), this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the SW rendering process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect process 10. The SW rendering process 10 is different from the above-described SW rendering process in that processing relating to a crack generation is added. The other parts are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the SW effect process 10 is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set SW effect is a cracked crack effect (Z7101), and if it is not judged to be a cracked crack effect (Z7101: No), as described above The same control as the SW rendering process of the eighth control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7101 that the SW effect set is the cracked crack effect (Z7101: Yes), then information indicating the crack cracking effect production mode in the cracked crack information storage area 223hc ( It is determined whether data) is stored (Z7102).

  If it is determined in the process of Z7102 that information (data) indicating an effect mode of a crack generation effect has already been stored in the crack generation information storage area 223hc (Z7102: Yes), the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is incremented by one (Z7106), read the cracked crack effect type set in the cracked crack information storage area 223hc (Z7107), the effect mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb A display effect command for indicating a turning effect) is set, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of Z7102 that there is no data (Z7102: No), the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is acquired next, the crack generation effect selection table 222ha is read (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed Based on the value of the effective time counter and the value of the acquired SW effect counter 223ha, determine the corresponding crack cracking effect type and set it in the crack cracking information storage area (Z7105), and set the corresponding display performance command (Z7108) , End this process.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Tenth Control Example
Next, with reference to FIG. 427, control processing of the display control apparatus 114 of the present tenth example of control will be described. The control content of the display control device 114 of this control example is different from the control content of the eighth control example described above in that the stop type command processing 8 is changed to the stop type command processing 10, and the other is the same. It is. About the same control content, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command process 10 (Z3496). In the stop type command processing 10 (Z3496), a command (background change symbol command) for outputting information on the stop symbol set in the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

  When stop type command processing 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the processing of Z3601 and Z3602 identical to the above-described stop type command processing 8 is executed, and then the stop symbol set in the processing of Z3602 is the background change It is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol indicating (Z8001). If it is determined in the process of Z8001 that the background pattern is not a stop symbol to be executed, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8001 that the stop symbol indicates a background change, the background change symbol command is set (Z8002), the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this processing is finish.

<About the technical ideas added to the above control examples>
Next, new technical ideas to be added to the above-described control examples will be described. In each of the control examples described above, the lottery result of the special symbol, the liquid crystal effect using the third symbol display device 81, and the role effect effect using the movable character for effect provided in the vicinity of the variable display device unit 80 , Are used to execute suggestion effects suggested to the player.

  Specifically, main controller 110 sets a variation pattern command including information indicating a lottery result of a special symbol, and when voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is received. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the feature effect based on the information indicating the lottery result of the special view included.

  The liquid crystal effect set here is output as an effect command for display to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 creates various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, for the feature effect, a drive scenario for driving the movable role by a predetermined operation is set, and the drive means (drive motor) for moving the movable role based on the set drive scenario is set. Drive control is executed.

  Thus, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal rendering and data for feature rendering are created, and a plurality of rendering devices (third one) are created based on the created data. In the case of executing effects on the symbol display device 81 and the movable character), it is possible to execute more entertaining effects by synchronizing the effects to be executed by the respective effect devices. There is a problem that it is difficult to synchronize the contents of the effects performed by the respective rendering devices in order to output data on the respective renderings to different rendering devices.

  In particular, in an object effect for moving a movable character configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, it is necessary to perform a preparation operation to move the movable character to the initial position after completion of the character effect Therefore, when performing effects for a plurality of effect devices based on one information (the change pattern command), consider the position of the movable part at the time when the effect corresponding to the change pattern command is performed There is a problem that when the effect is executed without the effect, the liquid crystal effect and the effect effect are shifted.

  Therefore, in the present technical thought, when setting the suggested effect based on the variation pattern command, the position of the movable role is determined, and based on the determination result, the liquid crystal effect and the effect effect are executed It is configured to set the content of the effect (effect mode). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute a combined effect without any deviation between the liquid crystal effect and the feature effect.

  In the case where the content of the effect (composite effect) for performing the liquid crystal effect and the feature effect is set to be different according to the position of the movable role, for example, the movable role is at the initial position. If it is determined that there is a predetermined combined effect (e.g., combined effect executed 10 seconds after the start of special figure fluctuation), the movable role can move to the initial position within 1 second. If it is determined that (state) is determined, a predetermined combined effect (a combined effect to be executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is delayed for 1 second and executed, and the movable role is initially within 1 second When it is determined that the movable position (state) can be moved to the position, various effects may be set so as to execute the suggested effect of only the liquid crystal effect without moving the movable role. Thereby, various effects can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Furthermore, as a bonus effect for moving the movable role, the first bonus effect is executed with a predetermined first position as an initial position and a second position different from the first position as an end position, and If it is a pachinko machine that can execute at least the second feature effect executed with the first position and the third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-mentioned second position as the end position, the combined effect Based on the position of the movable combination at the timing of setting the contents of the item, it may be configured to determine whether to execute the first combination effect or the second combination effect.

  Moreover, in this case, regardless of the special figure fluctuation, it is preferable to configure to be able to perform a turning effect that brings the movable combination closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation on the frame button 22. As a result, the player can select the position of the movable combination when the combined effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the composite effect desired by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the technical idea described above, an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect based on the variation pattern command has been described by way of example, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a big hit during the big hit game (for example, a big hit game) Suggestion that suggests the gaming state to be set after the end, and lottery result of the special figure change to be executed after the end of the big hit game (predetermined result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbol obtained by the end of the big hit game) It may be applied when setting the content of the effect to be

  Also, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a big hit game) to provide an effect (a turning effect) in which the movable character moves. In the case of a pachinko machine that is configured to cause the player to operate the operation means with desire, since the position of the movable role becomes unstable when executing the above-described suggestion effect, The above-mentioned problems were likely to occur. However, by using the present technical concept, various effects can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Next, conventionally, as a technical idea for solving the above-mentioned problems that may occur when performing the above-mentioned combined effect, even if the movable role is at any position (state) at the time of combined effect setting. There is a technical idea configured to include a period (preparation period) in which the movable role can be moved to the initial position of the feature effect in the first half period of the combined effect.

  When such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a combined effect that synchronizes the liquid crystal effect and the movable effect, but the content of the effect of the combined effect executed by the movement status of the movable combination during the preparation period is There is a problem that the player notices. In particular, the first combined effect in which the actor effect is executed in the state where the movable role is positioned at the first position as the combined effect, and the actor effect is performed in the state where the movable role is positioned at the second position. If it is a pachinko machine that has a second combined effect and the selection ratio of the first combined effect and the second combined effect is different according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it is movable during the preparation period Since the player can easily determine whether the character moves to the first position or the second position, it is easy for the player to distinguish the lottery result of the special symbol, and the rendering effect (( There is a problem that the rendering effect of the combined rendering is reduced.

  In order to solve such problems, according to the present technical concept, the point before setting the combined effect (the point before the determination of whether or not the combined effect is performed is performed) The control is configured to execute a preparation operation for moving the movable part to the first position or the second position.

  As described above, by configuring the setting operation to be performed separately from the setting of the combined effect, the combined effect (feature effect) is performed when the operation for preparing the movable combination is performed for the player. It can be thought that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparation operation is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the combined effect (feature effect), the presence or absence of the execution of the combined effect or the lottery result of the special symbol according to the movable situation of the movable role during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is determined by the player.

  In addition, in the case of using the technical idea in which the feature effect and the preparation operation are set differently as described above, for example, based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means for pre-discriminating prize information stored on hold. For example, in a case where it is determined that the combined effect is to be performed in the special figure change performed after the two changes, or in a case where it is determined that the combined effect is not performed in the special figure change performed to the two change degree, It is preferable to set the preparatory operation so that the preparatory operation is performed before the special figure fluctuation after the 2 fluctuation is performed.

  In addition, when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22), a determination means for determining whether or not to perform the preparation operation is provided, and it is determined that the preparation operation is to be performed by the determination means It may be configured to execute the preparation operation. In this case, it is preferable that the operation effect is executable only when the movable combination is positioned at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. Thus, the probability that the combined effect is executed can be varied according to the presence or absence of the operation by the player to the operation means, so that the player can more positively operate the operation means. Furthermore, the operation timing of the operation means using the determination means described above is, for example, an operation means as a suggestion effect that suggests a lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation that is executed before the special figure fluctuation for which the operation effect is executed. As a result of operating the operation means as a result of operating the operation means so that the determination means determines that the preparation operation is to be performed, when the effect indicating that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out is executed. Good to configure.

  By this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation on the operation means for performing the preparation operation without discomfort. In addition, since it becomes possible to execute the preparation operation of the movable combination while the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the movable combination It can be made difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

  In each control example mentioned above, although it explained using the display production displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 as an example of the various productions performed, it is a production mode which produces the same objective effect. It is sufficient for the player to use a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10 You may use the light emission production | presentation alert | reported.

  Also, as various effects to be executed in each control example described above, a notification effect for making the player know the contents surely and a suggestion effect for notifying the player of the contents without exception are used for the notification effect. Alternatively, the suggested effect may be executed, or the notified effect may be executed instead of the suggested effect.

  Furthermore, in each control example mentioned above, it uses the pachinko machine 10 which provided two kinds (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) of the probability (big hit probability) of winning the big hit by lottery of special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a setting unit (for example, setting switch) capable of setting one setting value out of a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and for each setting value set by the setting unit The main controller 110 may be configured to execute control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

  In this case, for example, six setting values of 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is configured to be the highest, and the setting value “6” is set. In this case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order to minimize the jackpot probability.

  In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to differ according to the setting value, or the high probability of the special symbol Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

  In addition, depending on the setting value mentioned above, not only the jackpot probability, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is made different, the probability of winning in a small hit is made different, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variation time may be made different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easy to select only when a specific set value is set is provided, and whether a special symbol variation based on that fluctuation pattern or a jackpot game based on that jackpot type is executed The player may be configured to determine the currently set setting value by paying attention to the player.

  Furthermore, a setting command for indicating the set value set is set, and a setting indication effect is suggested to suggest the set value currently set based on the set command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side. You may do, the command (the command for showing the lottery result) which shows the jackpot type which is output from main control 110 and the command (the command for showing the fluctuation time) in order to indicate the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol When it is received, the setting value currently set may be determined from the content of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect based on the determination result may be executed. By configuring in this way, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Moreover, unlike each control example mentioned above, you may use the pachinko machine 10 which can simultaneously perform the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. In this case, when using the configuration capable of setting the set value described above, the ease of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is varied according to the set value set, with respect to each set value. Various parameters may be defined, or in the case of a specific set value, the specific gaming state in which the lottery of one of the special symbols is advantageous to the player is a specific set state different from the specific set value. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player that the special symbol lottery is easy to be executed, and the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (a bonus (big hit game content) This is a concept including that the small hit game contents, the game state set after the big hit game end) is advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, regardless of the gaming state, the transition destination and distribution ratio of the gaming state are unified according to the type of the special drawing, but there is no limitation to this and the transition destination and transition distribution ratio of the gaming state according to the gaming state May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated gameplay, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early in the game.

  Furthermore, the definite change state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a drawing is executed to shift to the normal gaming state every time the special drawing changes. The player may be configured to shift from the probability change state to the normal gaming state by winning the. In this case, for example, a difference is made in the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol at which the definite change state ends, or the lottery probability of transitioning from the positive change state to the normal game state is made different as the positive change state and the negative change state advantageous to the player. It may be done.

  In addition, a plurality of time saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the time of the special symbol changes when the number of times of variation reaches a specific number of changes When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small winning is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be shifted to the low probability state at different timings.

  Using this configuration, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on starting the change of the special symbol, and the win number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hitting game.

  Thereby, even if the time saving state ends based on the variation of the same special symbol by the time shortening end condition established, the range in which the variation time of the special symbol and the time when the small hitting game is executed are added The timing at which the time saving state ends can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition which is satisfied. Furthermore, depending on the time-stopping conditions that are established, even during a small hit game in which a small amount of bonus is given to the player, the electric role object 640a is operated to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance. It becomes possible to make a small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, a plurality of small hit types in which the period in which the small hit game is executed is different is provided, and even if the win count end condition is satisfied, the game is performed according to the small hit type for which the win count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in more detailed contents of the time saving end condition as well as the type of the time saving end condition which is satisfied.

  Further, in this case, even when the win count end condition is satisfied, the short-time state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is started, and the time-shortened state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is ended. It is good to be configured to be mixed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the process of determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol and whether the time saving end condition is satisfied based on having won the small hit Although the processing for determining and processing are executed separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and centrally manages time saving information updated according to a drawing (variation) of a special symbol, and a time saving ending condition is established. A configuration may be used to set the timing for ending the time saving state based on

  In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above control examples, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are vertically scrolled on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but using a configuration other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the control examples described above, the right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 is executed in the gaming state (time reduction state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left area of the gaming board 13 in the normal gaming state. It is configured to execute the left-handed game aiming at the left-handed game, but it is sufficient if the aiming area of the game board 13 is made different according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state You may make the game run right. Further, while aiming at the same area, the game in different gaming states may be configured to be executable.

  In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Operation means configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or it can be determined that the player is operated by contact or proximity Alternatively, a touch sensor type operation means or a wireless type operation means capable of determining that the operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used. Also, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. The operation control may be partially or entirely performed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each control example mentioned above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, processing for executing a game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects The processing for this may be configured to be performed by the same control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes by one control device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of combinations of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (generally referred to as setting), and the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of stages of setting, any combination of jackpot probability (combination of jackpot probability in low probability state and jackpot probability in positive change state) in any of plural stages (for example, 6 stages) Although what can be set to is mentioned as a representative example, it is not restricted to this. As a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of jackpot, for example, instead of or in combination with the jackpot probability, according to the setting May be That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be varied. More specifically, for example, the rate at which a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is varied depending on the setting, or the small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined It is also possible to vary the degree of advantage for each setting by varying the ratio according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio in which the jackpot to which a large number of short time (for example, 100 times) is given after the big jack end is determined is varied according to the setting, or the small jack (for example, 0 times) is given The rate at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the rate at which the jackpot is determined to shift (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) can be varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) Depending on the setting, the rate at which the jackpot is determined (or is easy to shift) may be changed. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (which is hardly determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. And in setting 6, while the number of rounds is determined the number of rounds of six rounds at a rate of 2% when becoming a big hit, in other settings only six rounds of jackpots are determined at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as composition. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play by paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot be able to. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of becoming the jackpot type to which 66 times of time reduction may be given after the jackpot end may be configured to be higher than other settings. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game jackpot type in which the big winning opening (or prizes inside the big winning mouth etc) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types A configuration may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined in a specific setting (a ratio to be determined is increased). Also, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the jackpot is set in a disadvantageous setting for the player. It is good also as composition which makes a jackpot probability high so that it exists. In this configuration, in particular, in the definite change state, the more the number of drawing special symbols, the easier it is to increase the number of balls (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired) It is effective in the gaming machine. More specifically, for example, by applying to a game machine of a type that lasts until the probability change state wins the next big win, and in the probability change state is a small hit type with high probability, the advantage of high setting is achieved The sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big hit is likely to be large, so there are many chances to obtain a winning ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the definite change state, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the type of the special symbol is not limited to this, and three or more The special symbol type of may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to the rule in which several special symbols were predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is independently performed were demonstrated. However, each of the game characteristics described in the embodiments may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (a point where the pushing direction of the player is from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by the player, the operating device is disposed at a first state in a normal state and at a position where the operating means protrudes relative to the player than the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and includes urging means for urging the operation means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operation means in the second state is the front side from the back side to the player A game machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that an operating means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218) See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the player performs the operation in a mode that enhances the player's expectation of a big hit at the advanced position, so that the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. The strength of the operation means had to be designed high. In this case, the operation means becomes heavy as a whole, and there is a problem that the drive means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player. In this case, the force of pressing can be released by causing the portion not to be divided as the operation as a slip between the player's hand and the operation means.

  In addition, when the player operates the operation means centering on the shoulders and elbows from the game attitude of the player, it is difficult to apply a force in the near direction, so the player naturally weakens the force applied to the operation means. Can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axis arranged at the back of the player, and configured to be capable of tilting operation up and down around the axis and having the operation means A game machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operating means in the second state in the opposite direction of the player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and in the second state, the operating means is disposed in the opposite direction of the player, so that the game is performed in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation to strike the operating means.

  Also, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position, the operation means can be easily pushed in and operated, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method that is hard to have the pushing acceleration. It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

  With the method of the new pressing operation, for example, the outer side surface of the left hand little finger is placed near the shaft, and the thumb is directed to the operating means from the state where the hand is raised in the vertical direction A method of operating in a manner of tipping down, or a method of operating in a mode of dropping the palm toward the operating means from the state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and arranged with the palm facing the operating means Be done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, a pressing operation direction of the operating means is in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pressing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the operability in the first state is ensured. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is configured to be automatically operable, and the drive device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for the automatic operation. A game machine A4 characterized in that it operates in the direction of movement and not in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so the driving force in the direction opposite to the player's operation direction Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, the driving means can be prevented from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by setting the button to be capable of pressing only the button, it is possible to prevent the driving means from receiving a high load by being pulled from the player in the reverse direction when performing an operation to retract the button.

  The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state, and further includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, the drive means comprising the eccentric portion. The rotating means has a rotating means for transmitting the driving force to the operating means, and the phase changing of the rotating means is enabled between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained. In the first phase and the second phase, the movable range of the operation means is changed when the maintenance state is released, and the rotation is the same in any of the first phase and the second phase. A game machine A5 configured to be capable of releasing the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, it is possible to change the phase of the driving means while maintaining the maintaining means, and in the phase after the change, rotate the movement to release the maintaining state. By making the means, the moving means can move the moving width of the operating device by means of the biasing means. Therefore, the operation mode by the biasing means can be configured in a plurality.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotational speed of the rotating means. A game machine A6 configured to move the operation means following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is limited to one movement mode because it is caused only by the urging force. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device can be improved.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player, wherein the second state is compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the light emitting means emits light in the second state compared to the first state in the player's viewpoint. Since the area of the operation means decreases while the irradiation range of the light to be irradiated is expanded, the player can be made to pay attention to the light, the effect of the presentation can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operation means The player's power at the time of operation can be reduced by setting it as the mode.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-permeable material, and the movement of the operation means between the display means and the display means causes the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means to change. Feature game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of non-transparent material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means with the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Feature B group> (a point that makes the repulsive force at the normal time small while making it possible to cope with the consecutive hits)
In an operating device having an operating means by which a player can perform an operation up to the end position, the first state and a second movable range of operation up to the end position compared to the first state are second
And a first drive means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state A game machine B1 comprising a second drive means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the operation of the player in the game machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operating means is operated automatically by the drive motor. In this case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the player does not follow the player's operation when the operation of the player is fast, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when moving the operating means by the first driving means, while the return of the operating means is desired to be quickened. 2
Since the return can be made faster by pushing back the operation means by the drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The gaming machine B1 includes continuous hitting determination means for determining whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed by the sensor detection value of the operating means of the stroke within a predetermined time, and the second driving means A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means, so the player is not performing the continuous hitting operation (for example, single push operation or long press) The second drive means operates only when an operation or the like is performed, and the player can be prevented from feeling the load of pushing back his hand.

In the gaming machine B2, an end detection means for detecting the position of the operation means and detecting whether the operation means is arranged at the end position and whether the operation means is arranged at the position changed a predetermined amount from the end position Moving direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; The second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction is a direction to return from the pushing end to the first state, the game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, if the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction to return from the end to pressing to the first state, that is, the player's hand Since the second drive means is driven at the timing of moving in the separating direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operation means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the high load from being applied to the hand of the player by operating the second drive device in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the hand of the player.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is constituted by a voice coil motor which is displacing in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to generate a driving force for moving the operation means by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

One of the gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame for supporting the operation means, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A supporting means, the driving means for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state as the operation means approaches the end position; A game machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight is in contact with the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the end position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By separately generating the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and it can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the end position, and contacts the support frame. A game machine B6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and abuts against the support frame. The drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means. As a result, since the support means for supporting the drive motor is moved in the direction away from the support frame (in the direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Feature C group> (a point where the VCM is used as a braking device and a vibration effect device)
A detection sensor is provided for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, and measurement means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensor Threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the sensor is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in the direction opposite to the pressing direction of the operation means; The driving force generated by the repelling means is increased when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value judging means is less than the predetermined threshold value. A game machine C1 to be characterized.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when emphasis is placed on the player being able to operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although it is possible to lower the speed and reduce the possibility of breakage of the operation means, the power required for the player's operation increases and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for the weak player. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operation means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold, the operating resistance can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsion means can improve the operability and prevent the breakage.

In the gaming machine C1, the repelling means includes a voice coil motor generating a driving force directed in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and the threshold measured by the threshold judging means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor into the extended position is performed and the operation means is disposed at a position where it can be abutted with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operation means can be decelerated, and the operation means is disposed at a position where contact with the voice coil motor is possible. By causing the voice coil motor to be driven before switching, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation means and the voice coil motor.

In the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor abut against each other, control is performed to increase the current supplied to the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor abut, control is performed to increase the current supplied to the voice coil motor. The degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player at the time of operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates the driving force corresponding to the deformation amount by the spring elasticity, so that the driving force does not delay even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold determination means with the value measured with the threshold value determination means or less when the value measured with the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value. A game machine C5 characterized in that the movable area of the end of the repelling means and the end opposite to the side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repelling means and the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means is narrowed to operate the operating means The faster the speed, the more the elastic force generated by the repelling means can be increased.

<Feature D group> (prevents the breakage of the drive means by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch)
In the operation device having operation means operated by the player, the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means. And a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means providing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmission means is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. A game machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is operated automatically for presentation, there is a risk that a large load may be generated in the drive system when the operating means is operated during the automatic operation. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds the predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (discontinued), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the second direction is being driven.

Here, depending on the operating direction of the driving means, it can be determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled:
When the player operates the operating means in the direction of movement in which the transmission of the driving force can not be canceled, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the freedom of presentation when operating the operation means is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member for locking the button is moved in the release direction or the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or backward. Switch whether to move in the reverse direction. In this case, although the operation of the button can be made in two modes (a release pattern and a pattern not released), the interruption of the driving force needs to be performed in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. The degree of freedom of the operation of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

In addition, as a method of cancellation | release of transmission, it is illustrated that a clutch moves to the direction which cross | intersects the operation direction of a drive means. The intersecting direction is, for example, the meaning excluding the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotational axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes urging means for urging the drive means and the transmission means to a state capable of transmitting a driving force, and the release means is an abutment portion between the drive means and the transmission means. And an engaging tooth for transmitting the driving force in a state in which they engage with each other, and the engaging tooth has both sides facing the movement direction of the driving means from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is configured to be inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers away as it goes away.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages with the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surface to be pressed. Since the engaging teeth are provided in such a manner that both surfaces opposite to the operating direction of the drive means taper in such a manner as to move away from the contact surface while transmitting, the transmission means can be It can be separated, which can cancel the transmission of the driving force.

Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is always applied, and when the transmission means is separated from the drive means, the urging force is exerted in the movement direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. It is loaded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engagement portion of the engagement teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means gets farther from the drive means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored, not completely away from the resistance. Thereby, when the player releases the hand, it is possible to start operating the button within a short time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is actuated, "as effect",
One phase of button operation has passed. Then, if the player releases his hand on the way from the end of that one phase, the period in which the button is stopped will be longer,
The sense of "moving out of the player's load" is diminished.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, after the player releases his hand and the load is released, the operation means can be started within a short time. This makes it possible to produce a feeling of movement as the player's load has been relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it is formed of sawtooth shapes engaging with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when there is a flat surface parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move close to each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means butt in the plane to transmit the release means It is possible to prevent the movement along the direction away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be operated early.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation means differs between the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A game machine D5 characterized by

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the driving power transmission is canceled without being limited to one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference between whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operation means is the operation mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means. Similarly, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode of the predetermined period from the operation start time of the drive means is the same Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

Here, by intermingling the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with the information which is profitable for the player such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means for the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over

In addition, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player must grasp the difference such as the jackpot expectation without watching over the operation of the operation means. Can. However, normally, the driving means is concealed from the player, and the difference in the operating direction can not be recognized from vibration noise etc., so the operating direction of the driving means can not be confirmed in advance. Can watch the operation of the operation means.

<Feature E group> (The position of the projection of the cam is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
In the operation device having operation means operated by the player, the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means. First means configured to operate the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing change of the position of the operation means from the first position Biasing means for biasing the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means A gaming machine comprising: a termination unit that variably forms a movement termination of the first control unit, wherein the first unit suppresses change in position of the operation unit by engaging with the operation unit; Said operation of one means Releasing load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the means, wherein release of the engagement by the release load means and change in movement end of the operating means in the end means are single Game machine E characterized by being performed by drive means of
One.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable operation means is fixed at the first position by the cam and is released by the release load means, thereby causing the biasing force of the biasing means to perform the extension operation. There is a gaming machine capable of changing the displacement amount of the extension operation by the termination means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the extension operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated with different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means is required, and the arrangement space of the driving means is increased.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can both be used, so that the number of drive means can be reduced.

In the game machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transfer means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the loading means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor that detects the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a switching method of the state of the release load means, in the case where the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection A method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection with other phases such that the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are out of synchronization when the cam is disposed in a predetermined phase,
It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operated by the load given from the first means.
A game machine E3 which is disposed movably with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate in synchronization is switched by the operation of the release load means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is disposed movably with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronization means and the transmission means operate synchronously, it is possible to change the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is rotated in a second rotation. A game machine E4 comprising members, wherein rotation cycles of the first rotation member and the second rotation member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so the second rotation means is a predetermined one. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared when moving toward the second position. ,
You can broaden the range of the production. For example, an effect of gradually releasing the end position from the first position or an effect of gradually bringing the end position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Feature F group> (vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position, and a second position where the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position In the gaming machine, wherein the operation means is disposed at the first position. When the operation unit is disposed at the second position, the vibration unit can be in contact with the receiving unit. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is in a state of contact.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with operation means operable by the player and vibration means for transmitting a vibration to the player via the operation means or the casing of the game machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the housing of the gaming machine, so that the operating means Alternatively, since the information is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, the effect of transmitting the vibration immediately after operating the operation means is as follows:
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operation means, and the mode of the operation of the player (for example, the operation of releasing the operation means at the moment of pushing the operation means) According to the above aspect, the start of the vibration may not be in time before releasing the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, depending on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position, it is determined whether the vibrating portion abuts the receiving means or not Since the change occurs, even when the vibration unit is vibrated continuously, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to overhang an occupied area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position, and the operation means is moved to the second position. Thus, the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is moved based on the movement of the operation means to change from the separated state to the abutting state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operation means The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without changing the special drive mode.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via a support means having a spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can position the receiving means while suppressing transmission of the vibration of the vibrating means to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated, transmission of vibration can be prevented, and displacement generated in the vibrating means at the time of vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, in the contact state, the supporting means is expanded and contracted based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means abut, by utilizing the elasticity of the supporting means. That is, by the expansion and contraction of the support means, momentum can be applied when the vibration part moves in the direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means is configured to be resistant to deformation along the movement direction of the operation means.
A game machine F5 characterized in that it is lowered compared to the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely it can.

Thereby, even if the difference in the movement amount of the operation means is small, the expansion / contraction amount of the support means can be different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the reception means can be different. .

In addition, as a method of differentiating the deformation resistance, when the support means is constituted by a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, the method of extending the rubber leg along the operation direction of the operation means, the support means encloses the vibration means A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction when it is constituted of a rubber member, and a rail for guiding the support means to operate the operation means in the direction along the operation direction For example, a method comprising: a coil spring which biases the vibration means along the operation direction of the operation means.

In the gaming machine F3, a portion to which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means separate from the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means separate from the operating means. Thus, the transmission of the vibration of the vibration means to the drive means via the operation means and the transmission means can be suppressed, so that the load on the drive means can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the player's hand operating the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation at the time of the operation.

In addition, as the receiving means, for example, a part of the frame of the gaming machine, a part near the upper tray to which the game ball is supplied, an edge part of the glass frame, etc. A portion which may be touched by the hand, a storage portion which partially encloses the operation means, and the like are exemplified.

<Feature group G> (One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the attachment portion)
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is And a transmission unit for transmitting the drive force of the drive unit to the operation unit, the transmission unit including a deformation portion elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means There is a game machine provided (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218).
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the player holds and secures the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connection portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that load is accumulated at the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connecting portions may be broken.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformation portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed to connect the connection portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to ease the load given to the connecting part with the.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, the deformation portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotation shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformation portion causes the rotation shaft to rotate. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixed force of

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion plays a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member against the rotation shaft
Equipped with Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the function. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member is provided with a convex portion which is provided in parallel with the rotation axis, the convex portion and the operation means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is made to the cam member A game machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to it.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to configure the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotary shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member. The cam member can be easily configured from a single member as compared with the case of sliding movement relative to the case, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is compared with the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotation axis and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is larger in a second rotation direction in which a straight line connecting the convex portion and a straight line perpendicular to both the extending direction of the rotating shaft is the axis. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the deformation resistance of the deformation portion is made different for each direction so that the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed in the rotational axis direction view is The tip end of the convex portion of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member as compared with the state before being elastically deformed. Thereby, since the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion alleviates the load generated between the convex portion and the operation means. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to change its posture. A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformation of the deformation portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operation means.

A game machine G6 comprising: detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member tilts with respect to an axis in any one of the game machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means In the case where it is detected that an overload occurs on the basis of the difference between them, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but as the arrangement interval of the detection means is smaller, the configuration of the detection means becomes complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to provide an arrangement for detecting the occurrence of an overload early, at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member tilts with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member, without having to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Feature H group> (ball-on-ball-to-goto preventing structure)
In a game machine provided with a ball ball passage through which a ball falling back toward the launcher can be passed among the game balls fired to the game area, the ball passage allows the passage of the falling ball A game machine H1 comprising a one-way blocking means for blocking the advancing of a backflowing object.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a thread cutting blade is disposed inside a guiding path for guiding the gaming ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and cheating is carried out by driving the gaming ball to which the yarn is connected into the gaming area. There is a gaming machine provided with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (e.g.
4179)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the yarn is pressed against the yarn cutting teeth at the time of firing, and the yarn is cut by the tension generated at that time. If the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the gaming ball can not cut the yarn completely. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool in which gaming balls are connected to both ends of a thread is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the thread is discharged to the far ball passage by firing with a low firing intensity and returned to the player side. By holding the other game ball connected to the other end of the yarn into the game area while holding the one game ball held, it is possible to remove the yarn from the guide path, and through the far ball passage Since the game ball and the other game ball can be connected by the yarn, the yarn connected to the other game ball is externally loaded, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain an unfair advantage.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means is used even when an illegal act is performed to load the other gaming ball by using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. However, by blocking the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the gaming ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent benefits.

In the gaming machine H1, a game ball H2 characterized in that the far ball passage includes a bending portion that bends a flow-down path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, since the yarn guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed with the bending portion, the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes load means for applying a load to the backward flowing object without giving a load to the flowing gaming ball on the inside corner side of the bend.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) that flows backward.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion which is recessed with a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the load means and the game ball are prevented from colliding, and the load means is broken. Can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means outward of the ball passage is restricted by the restriction means, so that between the thread-like member and the load means When the load is generated, the load means is deformed outward of the ball ball passage to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout is provided which is a portion for receiving the gaming balls to be paid out from the payout device in the receiving tray, which is a tray which the balls reach first on the front side of the front door A game machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge portion is disposed above the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes through the front of the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage, thereby passing through the far ball passage When an illegal act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally hit to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a portion for discharging the gaming balls to be paid out from the payout device, to the receiving tray which is a plate that the balls reach first on the front side of the front door A gaming machine H7 characterized in that it is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using a yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed In some cases, the gaming balls to be paid out can make it easy to damage the yarn.

<Feature I group> (Structure of board retainer)
A game means to be used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side opposite to the game means and is capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means comprising the game means The game apparatus is provided with a state change means capable of making the game means available for use from an unusable state which is an unusable state, the state change means including the game means in the use state In this case, the game machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is in proximity to the game means from the one side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotating direction parallel to the front of the gaming board and fix the gaming board to the inner frame, and change the state in the released state where the gaming board can be removed from the inner frame There is a gaming machine provided with fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured to be changeable only after the game board is pushed into the position of use, so when the game board is pushed halfway, pushing again It is necessary to perform repetitive work, and there is a problem that work efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state change means is provided with the proximity means approaching from the receiving side (one side) to the gaming means when putting the gaming means into use, pushing of the game board Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes in contact with the game board and adds a pushing force.
The game board can be pushed to the position of use state.

In the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state is changed to an unusable state in which the gaming means can not be used. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) along with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. The effect is that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state change unit is characterized in that the proximity unit retracts to the outside of the game unit along with making the game unit unusable. A game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the working efficiency of the removal operation of the gaming means can be improved The operation efficiency can be further improved since the method is performed along with the disabling of the means.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 comprises contact means for receiving a load from the gaming means when changing to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means, the state change means changes state to the usable state, and the state change means can be used as a series of flows by pressing the game means on the state change means. It is possible to change the state.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on a shaft at one side of the receiving means and is configured to be received by the receiving means by being approached at the other side, and the state change means is the receiving means It is disposed on the other side of the game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is utilized,
The load can be efficiently applied to the contact means through the game means.

One of the gaming machines I1 to I5 includes closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the state changing means can not be used to make the gaming means unusable. In maintaining the state, the game machine I6 is provided with a blockade restricting portion that can not block the opening on one side of the game means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means according to whether or not the closing means can block the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means blocks the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means maintains the unusable state.

<Characteristics J group> (Piano line goth prevention with reverse cup and harness band)
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means opened at one side opposite to the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, and the receiving means is the game means A game machine J1 comprising arrangement means disposed on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arrangement means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud with respect to a fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from the rotary shaft side of a front frame (for example,
26573)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is only one fraud prevention unit, and there is a problem that the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is disposed on the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points. Can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at a first location, and a second means for inhibiting the entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing the entry of external members in different ways.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside between the first place and the second place. As compared with the case of increasing the number of members, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

In addition, the method of suppressing the approach from the outside is not limited at all. For example, it may be a method of restraining entry by closing the route, or a method of restraining fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the arrangement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed of a cup shape opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in a cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the member which has invaded.

In the gaming machine J3, the placement means includes support means for supporting the electrical wiring, and the support means is disposed downstream of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the game means. A game machine J4 that features.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud occurs that causes the entry control section to penetrate with high heat, detecting changes (such as disconnection due to heat) that occur in the wiring due to the high heat The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can easily be produced.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means includes a member which has entered from the outside,
A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it comprises cancellation means for guiding to a cancellation area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided by the arranging means to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that entering of the members entering from outside Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Features of K group> (Structure of decorative board of 5 sheets structure. Tamper prevention is also involved)
It is disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction, and the first means and the second means oppositely disposed along the first direction and having at least one side connected. A gaming machine comprising: a connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction A game machine K1 characterized by

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is disposed between a first means and a second means along a first direction, and a first means and a second means which are oppositely disposed and connected by at least one side. And a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the connection of each member is performed by the existing method such as adhesion and screwing, and the load along the first direction is not the first when the first means and the second means are connected. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being subjected to the third means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction of the third means is the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load that can be applied. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, a gaming machine K2 characterized in that the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means corresponds to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in a third direction which is close to each other and engaged with each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means Is fixed by engagement caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction adjacent to the coupled means, so that the first means directed in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to the decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed outward.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is arranged exposed outward, so the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even if a fraudulent action occurs in which the fitting portion is broken and the first means and the second means are disassembled, it is possible to accelerate the detection of the fraudulent action.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, light is emitted toward the first means or the second means, and light irradiating means fixed to the connected means and one of the first means or the second means A gaming machine K6 comprising: a light guiding means fixed to the member and configured to be capable of introducing the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside thereof.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, positional deviation between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means can be prevented.

In the gaming machine K6, a gaming machine K7 comprising contact means for surface contact in an area where the other member of the first means or the second means faces the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, maintaining an interval for the size of the contact means in the opposing area of the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. Can.
Thereby, when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means is prevented from changing. Can.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Feature L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guiding means. Not reached as a point)
A light guiding unit formed in a curved wave shape as viewed in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projection unit disposed opposite to the light guiding unit and onto which the light passing through the light guiding unit is projected; A game machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed facing the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate for uniformly emitting surface light from the end face (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are provided even if the intensity of light incident on the light guiding means is constant. Department and
The emission intensity of the projection means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected portion is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2 to be.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion where the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed The effect of the effect by the light of can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes reverse projection means disposed on the opposite side of the projection means across the light guide means and from which light passing through the light guide means is projected, the reverse projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave portion and a portion facing the convex portion of the light guiding means are made of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, a portion of the light guiding means of the opposite projection means facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex portion are light Since the transparency is formed of substantially the same material, by causing the same light to be incident on the light guiding means, a rendering aspect of light visually recognized through the projection means and a rendering aspect of light visually recognized through the opposite projection means And can be different.

<Feature M group> (arrangement structure of bass reflex speakers)
First means and second means which are disposed opposite to each other and fixed to each other to constitute an inner space in a fixed state, acoustic means disposed in a state where at least a part of the inner space is made to enter, and And Bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
6088). And in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave advancing to the back side of the speaker main body is advanced to the center position of the right and left sides of the gaming machine and sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined in the left and right width of the gaming machine, although it is easy to perform the production of listening to the bass.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending path is formed in the inner space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, The definition of the left and right width can be released to allow the vibration wave to travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in the opposite direction, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a projecting portion provided in a projecting manner, wherein a projecting end of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means By being in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in conjunction with fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means Game machine M3 characterized in that it is closed.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, making it unnecessary to prepare an additional closing member, With the passage member passing from the inner space to the outside, the wall constituting the inner space can be appropriately closed.

In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, when passing the wiring of the acoustic means from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched and broken by the protruding portion be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a presentation means disposed below the support fastening means and performing effects accompanying the game And, wherein the effect means supports the support and fastening means from below, a game machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the rendering means from below, so that the weight for the supporting and fastening means is not compressed. The thing can be adopted.

<Feature N group> (Movable unit, reversely rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way)
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction; A second switchable in a non-following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction
A third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of the second displacement means by a driving force of the driving means when at least the second displacement means is brought into a following state, A game machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is expanded / contracted, while the first displacement means is operated near the extension end When doing, there is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, JP-A-2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the direction of displacement of the first displacement means is the same as the direction of displacement of the second displacement means when the first displacement means is extended and contracted, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as the speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means which the player feels as a sensation can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 includes resistance means for generating a resistance to displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the follow state and the non-follow state. A game machine N2 to be

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the tracking state As the switching point is made variable, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is disposed so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means can be made visible to the player by configuring the resistance means to be visible by making the resistance means visible. It can be shared with the function as a rendering device.

The gaming machine N4 includes rod-like shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. A gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the shaft means functioning as the rotation shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means is fixed to the base member. Since the posture of the other member or means is also changed following the change of the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means, the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can.

<Characteristics O group> (Utilization of shellfish button, punching hole. As point, it has not been delivered)
In a gaming machine provided with a first means and an accommodation means configured to accommodate the first means, the accommodation means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is accommodated. A game machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means operable by a player and an upper tray for covering the operating means from below, wherein the operating means is moved up and down with respect to the upper tray (e.g. See open 2012-048970)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign matter remains inside, which may cause a malfunction. .

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, since the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means is provided, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. This can prevent the foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the storage means includes a low water resistance portion with low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistance portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape projected in the direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured in a shape based on the shape of the direction of the solid object, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, in the state where the solid object is blocked at a part of the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is viewed by the player It can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining can be reduced. .

<Feature P group> (G2 notice control)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result on the display means is stopped and displayed In the gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, a effect executing means for executing an effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a plurality of times It is determined that the specific effect is to be executed by the determining means that determines that the specific effect is to be executed by the effect executing means with respect to the dynamic display of the identification information that is continuous, A game machine P1 having interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, by providing special effects to a plurality of continuous change effects, by providing the player with a series of effects using a plurality of change effects, the fun of the game There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of improving the game speed (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine or the like, by executing a plurality of continuous fluctuation effects, if notification effects or the like to be performed during that time occur to irregulars etc., the player delays the execution, etc. There was a possibility that the problem that the contents became incomprehensible might occur. The present technical idea is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for the player to understand the contents of the game.

  According to the gaming machine P1, even when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed on the dynamic display of the identification information a plurality of times by the determining means, the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition Since the execution of the game is suspended until the establishment of the return condition, even if the execution of the specific effect is determined, it is possible to interrupt the execution and perform the necessary control etc. An easy game can be provided. Further, since the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, the player can be notified that the specific effect has not ended halfway, and the effect is provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine P1, an operation means operable by the player, a switching means capable of switching and setting the setting when the operation means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, it is possible to make the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed rich, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the game early There is.

  The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching unit when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining unit. Game machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted, and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. Even when the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same manner, so that it is possible to suppress a defect that makes it difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, and the game sphere entering the ball entering means, and the acquiring means A storage unit in which the information acquired by the storage unit is stored, and the determination unit performs the determination based on the information stored in the storage unit. P4.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the game ball having information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entering means causes the ball entering means to enter the ball It has the effect of being able to improve the interest for

  In the gaming machine P4, at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are disposed as the ball entering means, and the acquiring means comprises the first ball entering means The first information can be obtained when the game ball enters the second game, and the second information can be obtained when the game ball enters the second game means, and the dynamic display When the first information is determined by the determination means, the means dynamically displays first identification information for indicating the determination result, and when the second information is determined by the determination means. The second identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed dynamically, and the determination means gives priority to the determination regarding the second information over the first information stored in the storage means. And the specific condition is executed a plurality of times in succession. Characterized in that the second identification information is dynamically displayed in a state where execution of the specific effect is determined with respect to the dynamic display of the first identification information to be displayed. Game machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined with respect to the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times consecutively, the second entering ball Since entering the means occurs and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is prioritized This has the effect of making it possible for the player to easily recognize that the game has been started.

  In the gaming machine P7, when the first ball entering means is in the first gaming state, the game balls are more easily entered than the second ball entering means, and the second ball entering means is A game machine P8 characterized in that when it is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, it is configured to be easier to enter the ball than the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine P7, when the gaming state is the first gaming state, the gaming ball easily enters the first ball entry means, so the first identification information moves continuously. It is easy to be displayed in a targeted manner, it is possible to easily execute a specific effect many times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature Q group> (G production)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result on the display means is stopped and displayed In the case of the gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player, a specific effect is specified to execute a specific effect on the dynamic display of the identification information in a plurality of consecutive times A game machine Q1 characterized by comprising effect execution means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine and the like, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been desired. The present technical idea is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine B1, even if the dynamic display of identification information that does not result in a specific determination result, it is possible to show multiple times of identification information as a dynamic display of 1 and it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

  Interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the gaming machine Q1; A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that the gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted until the return condition is established based on the establishment of the specific condition, so the player is made aware of the establishment of the specific condition. There is an effect that it can be shown easily. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is returned, so that the specific effect is terminated halfway, and the problem that the content of the effect becomes halfway and confuses the player can be suppressed. effective.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operating means operable by the player, the switching means capable of switching and setting the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means And a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information when starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. The player can change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, can make the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed rich, and can suppress the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine Q3, a gaming machine Q4 characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching means when the specific effect is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. Even when the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same manner, so that it is possible to suppress a defect that makes it difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball and the game sphere entering the ball entering means, and the acquiring means And storage means for storing the information acquired by the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the game ball having information acquired by the game ball entering the ball entering means causes the ball entering means to enter the ball It has the effect of being able to improve the interest for

  A gaming machine Q6, characterized in that it comprises advance determination means for performing determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means in the game machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, the pre-judgment means executes the pre-judgment, so that the judgment result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

  In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, at least the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are disposed as the ball entering means, and the acquiring means comprises the first ball entering means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the movement When the first information is determined by the determination means, the target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result, and the second information is determined by the determination means. In this case, second identification information for indicating the determination result is dynamically displayed, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is moved after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. Game machine Q7 characterized by being established in the case of being displayed in a static manner.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined with respect to the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times consecutively, Since entering the ball into the ball entering means occurs and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is prioritized There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the game has been started.

  In the gaming machine Q7, the launching means is capable of launching the gaming ball by varying the launching force based on the operation of the player, and the gaming ball launched by the first launching force by the launching means is capable of flowing down. It is configured that the first game flow channel and the gaming ball which has flowed down the first flow channel is configured to be difficult to flow down, and the game ball launched with the second launch power different from the first launch power is flowable. A second flow path is provided, and the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where the gaming ball having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the second ball entering means is A game machine Q8 characterized in that the game ball having flowed down the second flow path is disposed at a position where it can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that it is possible to intentionally make the specific condition be established by the player adjusting the launch force of the gaming ball.

<Feature R group> (If special figure 2 remains after time reduction end, it does not shift to charge production up to 5 fluctuation)
A first ball entering means capable of constantly entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means capable of changing into a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; Obtaining means capable of acquiring first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means A storage unit storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination to execute the determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player In the gaming machine, the discrimination means for discriminating establishment of the specific condition for changing the second ball entering means from the second state to the first state, and an effect for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means Effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be performed by the effect generating means when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the effect determining means; A gaming machine R1 comprising: prohibiting means for prohibiting the specific effect from being executed by the effect determining means when the condition is satisfied.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine etc., when a special period is set in which entry to the starting opening is easier than usual, an effect of notifying in advance or during that period that the special period is to be performed is executed. Game machines have been proposed (patent document: JP-A-2011-229733). If there is a high possibility that a large number of holding balls are generated, such as immediately after the state in which entry to the starting opening becomes easy is finished, the notification is performed, and a notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. As a result, there is a risk that the inconvenience of the game will be reduced. The present technical idea is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine R1, since the execution of the specific effect indicating that the gaming ball can easily enter the second ball entry means is not performed due to the establishment of the prohibition condition, the prohibition condition is established, so It is possible to execute the presentation according to the needs of the person, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine R1 includes state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal state. The prohibition condition is set with at least one first condition established based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit. A game machine R2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, a first condition based on the termination of the special state in which the gaming ball easily enters the second ball entry means as the prohibition condition is set as the satisfaction condition Since a large amount of second information is stored, the specific effect is executed during a period in which the profit for the player is low even if the game ball is entered into the second ball entry means, and the problem of reducing the interest of the game is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine R2, when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means, the prohibition condition stores the second information of the predetermined number or more in the storage means. A game machine R3 characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, when the special state ends, the second information is often stored under the condition that the second information of a predetermined number or more is stored. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the stored state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific effect is not executed but the profit of the player is impaired although the number of stored second information is small. .

  In any one of the game machines R1 to R3, the determination means makes the second ball entering means variable in the first state during the first period, and a specific first determination result and a period longer than the first period. The second determination result is configured to be distinguishable from the specific second determination result to be changed to the first state during the second period, and the effect determining unit determines the specification based on the determination of the specific second determination result. A game machine R4 characterized by determining an effect.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, an effect that it is possible to inform the player that the period is more advantageous to the player can be performed by executing the specific effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Feature S group> (volume control)
A gaming machine comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing an effect; and a privilege imparting means capable of imparting an advantage advantageous to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means As a part of the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to set an audio output means capable of outputting sound and a volume output by the audio output means based on an operation from the outside of the gaming machine Said sound at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting means, the first state in which the voice output means outputs the sound based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the volume set by the volume setting means The power supply to the gaming machine is from the power-off state in which the power control for switching the second state in which the output means outputs the sound and the power supply for operating the game machine is cut off. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the in case of a start has been restored condition, those having an initial setting means for setting the second state.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine and the like, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set by varying the volume of sound effects, sounds and the like that are output as effects by the operation of the player, the setting of the game arcade, etc. Open 2011-200511 gazette). In this type of game machine, a game machine capable of further suitable volume control has been desired. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitable volume control.

  According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state in which the predetermined volume is output regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means is set, so that the power is turned on There is an effect that it can be recognized by the above, and suitable volume control can be performed.

  In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be smaller than the minimum volume setting set by the volume setting means.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to a smaller volume than the smallest volume set by the volume setting means. There is an effect that the noise of the game arcade can be reduced. In the game machine S1 or S2, the output control means continues to set the second state until execution of one effect is ended by the effect execution means.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed, so that the power supply is not performed during the execution of the effect. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that the effect is performed after the power is turned on by the volume of one effect to be executed later.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to an initial state on condition that a predetermined operation from the outside is performed. A game machine S4 characterized in that the sound output means is configured to output a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the sound output means is set in the initial state.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, it can be confirmed by an alarm sound that the initial state has been made, and the gaming machine is improperly initialized Also has the effect of being able to detect fraud early.

<Feature T group> (pending symbol display area variable control)
Determination means for obtaining information capable of obtaining information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and determination to execute determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means for a predetermined period, and identification for showing the judgment result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, the game stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. The display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is variable corresponding to the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the number of the information stored in the storage means for each information. That the symbol display area varying means and, wherein the one having a game machine T1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the game ball enters the starting opening during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the right to execute the lottery is stored as holding ball information, and the number of holding ball information There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the symbol is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, in the display area where the holding ball information is displayed, in the state where the holding ball information is not displayed, the display area becomes confusing and the gaming machine in which the display of the easy-to-understand holding ball information is executed It was being asked. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is easy to understand.

  According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of information stored in the storage means, so the pattern is stored according to the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed It is possible to easily recognize the number of pieces of information and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating that the symbol is displayed, even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area variable means A game machine T2 characterized in that the area information is varied and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, the area information is changed and displayed according to the number of stored information, so the area information in accordance with the number of symbols to be displayed is displayed It has the effect of being easy to understand.

  In the game machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information capable of identifying the upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent playing the game so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. .

  In the gaming machine T3, when the symbols serving as the upper limit number are displayed, the identification information is set to non-display.

  According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine T3, the identification information is not displayed when the symbol serving as the upper limit number is displayed, so that the display of the symbol is inhibited from being inhibited. There is an effect that the symbols can be easily identified.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed according to the period discriminating means for discriminating the period in which the predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied and the period discriminated by the period discriminating means A game machine T5 comprising: rule changing means for changing display rules to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed by the period until the predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the establishment period of the acquisition condition by changing the display mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays the first display mode until the first number of symbols is displayed, and the first display mode is achieved by exceeding the first number. And a second display mode different from the second display mode.

  According to the gaming machine T6, since the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the acquisition condition until the first number is exceeded There is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to establish the character, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Features U group> (cancellation of the number of held items)
Determination means for obtaining information capable of obtaining information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and determination to execute determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means for a predetermined period, and identification for showing the judgment result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, the game stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. For each information, symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and a display mode for changing the display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period during which a predetermined number of pieces of information are acquired by the acquisition means Gaming machine U1, characterized in that those having a variable means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the game ball enters the starting opening during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the right to execute the lottery is stored as holding ball information, and the number of holding ball information There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the symbol is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the holding ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets bored early in the game. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine U1, since the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed according to the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired, the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information is acquired. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine U1, the display mode variable means varies the display mode in the display area in which the symbol is displayed based on the period.

  According to the gaming machine U2, since the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is changed based on the period in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the confirmation of the symbol being displayed is also performed for the period There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, in the display area where the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means, a suggestion mode that suggests that the symbol is displayed is also in a period when the symbol is not displayed. A game machine U3 characterized by being displayed and set.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion aspect is displayed even during a period when the symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to early confirm that the information is acquired. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine U3, the display mode changing means is configured to change the indication mode in accordance with the period.

  According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is variable according to the period required to store the predetermined number of information, so the frequency at which the information is stored according to the suggestion mode Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the indication mode is regularly changed and displayed based on the number of the displayed symbols, and the display mode changing means is displayed based on the period. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols being played.

  According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U3 or U4, the frequency of acquiring information can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and it is irregularly varied when the suggestion mode is regularly varied. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game while enjoying the case.

<Feature V group> (pending navigation)
Determination means for obtaining information capable of obtaining information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and determination to execute determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means for a predetermined period, and identification for showing the judgment result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, in the storage means, the information before being judged by the judgment means is specified in the memory means. A game machine V1 having effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the fact that it has been stored several or more times.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the game ball enters the starting opening during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the right to execute the lottery is stored as holding ball information, and the number of holding ball information There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the symbol is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the holding ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets bored early in the game. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine V1, since the specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage unit, not only the determination result but also the number in which the information is stored may be interested It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V1, prior determination means for performing determination prior to determination by the determination means on the information stored by the storage means, and the effect execution means are performed in advance by the prior determination means. A game machine V2 comprising: effect determining means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result, so the identification information is stored prior to the dynamic display by the specific effect. It is possible to suggest the determination result of certain information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine V2, a type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of pieces of information are stored by the storage means. .

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information is stored in the storage unit. There is an effect that it is possible to identify the frequency at which the information is stored by the effect.

  The game machine has history information storage means in which game history information is stored based on establishment of a predetermined condition in any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. The game machine V4 characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined on the basis of.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means becomes equal to or less than a specific number. .

  According to the gaming machine V5, in any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number is less than or equal to the specific number. Has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V5, symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and stored in the storage means And a symbol display area variable means for changing the display mode of the area where the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of pieces of information.

  According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of stored information. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to distinguish the number.

<Feature W group> (Lucky number)
Determination means for obtaining information capable of obtaining information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and determination to execute determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means for a predetermined period, and identification for showing the judgment result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, the game stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. For each information, a symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the information is stored in the storage means at the time when the information is stored. The specific effect is executed based on the number information storage unit storing the number information corresponding to the number of the information stored before the determination by the determination unit and the number information stored in the number information storage unit A game machine W1 characterized by having an effect execution means capable of

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the game ball enters the starting opening during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the right to execute the lottery is stored as holding ball information, and the number of holding ball information There has been proposed a gaming machine in which the symbol is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the holding ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets bored early in the game. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the stored number of the information at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information Since the effect is performed, there is an effect that the interest in storing information can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine W1, the particular effect is executed based on the number information stored with respect to the information determined to be the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result, so the determination is made as the specific determination result There is an effect that it is possible to give an interest to the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode that indicates an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed. A game machine W3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result last time by the specific effect when the symbol is displayed. There is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that a symbol is displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a gaming machine W4 characterized in that a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information is attached to the symbol.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the symbol has a suggestion aspect corresponding to the number information, so that the number of information before being judged increases or decreases. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the stored time can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, and the number information of the specific effect when the bonus game is being executed A notification means for notifying suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed based on storage of the information in the number of memories corresponding to A gaming machine W5.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the suggestion information suggesting the type of the bonus game being executed is notified by storing the information up to the number of memories corresponding to the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to play the game so as to store information even during the bonus game, and it is possible to increase the efficiency of the game.

  In the gaming machine W5, a gaming machine W6 characterized in that the type of the bonus game is difficult to identify from the identification information for indicating the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5, the type of the bonus game is configured to be difficult to identify from the identification information, so that the value for notifying the suggestion information can be enhanced. is there.

<Group X> (derivation of charge production)
A first ball entering means capable of constantly entering a game ball, and a second ball entering means capable of changing into a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state; Obtaining means capable of acquiring first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means A storage unit storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a determination to execute the determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage unit Means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped and displayed A bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player In the gaming machine, the determining means for determining establishment of a specific condition for changing the second ball entering means from the second state to the second state, and an effect for indicating the determination result by the determining means And an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be executed by the effect means if the determination of the specific condition is determined by the determining means. A game machine X1 characterized by being one.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine and the like, moving members such as blade shapes that restrict entry into the starting opening and change the restriction so as to facilitate entry of the gaming ball when the opening condition is satisfied. A game machine has been proposed in which the game machine is arranged to be attached to the starting opening (Patent Document: JP-A-2011-229733). In the above-described pachinko machine and the like, there is a possibility that the player may get bored with the game even if the open condition is satisfied and the movable member is moved. The present technical idea is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored with a game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and the game is performed in expectation of the specific effect being executed as well as the specific determination result. Since the game can be performed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine X1, a gaming machine X2 characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting determination of a specific effect by the effect determining means when an avoidance condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1, the determination of the specific effect is prohibited by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that it is possible to suppress the specific effect from being executed unreasonably effective.

  State setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is more easily changed from the second state to the first state in the gaming machine X1 or X2 than in the normal state; The avoidance condition is set as a condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting unit as at least one of the conditions. A gaming machine X3.

  According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1 or X2, there is a high possibility that a large amount of second information is stored in the storage means at the timing set from the special state to the normal state. By making it easy to establish, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A game machine X4 characterized by being set as at least one condition.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the second information is excessively stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball by varying the launching force based on the operation of the player, and the playing ball launched with the first launching force by the launching means A first flow path configured to allow flow-down, and a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow-down, the gaming ball launched with a second firing force different from the first firing force is A second flow path configured to be able to flow down, and the first ball entry means is disposed at a position where game balls having flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball, and the second ball entry means The ball means is disposed at a position where the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball is flowed down to the first flow path. A gaming machine X5 characterized by notifying a player of suggestion information that is suggested to be caused.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects exerted on any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information to make the gaming ball flow down to the first flow path is notified, so the gaming machine There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player causes the game ball to enter the second ball entry means which is changed to the first state.

<Y group> (Button pop-out control)
It has an operation means having an operation surface operable by the player, a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the movement means, The moving means is configured to be able to execute a first operation to move the operation surface of the operation means in the first movement mode and a second operation to move the operation surface in the second movement mode different from the first movement mode. The movement control means executes the first operation when a first condition is satisfied, and the movement means performs the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A game machine Y1 characterized by controlling the operation of the game machine Y1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the player is provided with operation means such as a switch that can be operated, and the player operates the operation means so that the contents of the change effect being executed are changed or the type of background is changed. A gaming machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets bored early in the game by merely operating the operation means. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement modes by the operation control means, the player can be made to gaze at the operation means. Therefore, the rendering effect using the operation means can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means is for moving the operation surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operation position.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, the movement mode until the operation surface of the operation means is moved to the specific operation position can be made different by the operation control means. Can make people interested.

  The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the moving means moves the operation surface of the operation means so that the moving period in the second operation is longer than the moving period in the first operation. Game machine Y3.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, since the movement period can be made different according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

  In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. And the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls for the drive means, and makes the operation contents of the moving means different according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. The game machine Y4 that features.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, the operation content of the moving means can be made different by making the contents of the drive control to the drive means different. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine Y4, the drive means generates the drive force by a pivoting operation, and the operation control means performs first drive control to rotate the drive means in the first direction as the plurality of drive controls. And second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, wherein the moving means is configured to execute the first drive control by the control means. A game machine Y5 characterized by performing one operation and executing the second operation when the second drive control is performed.

  According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operating means.

  A game machine Y6, characterized in that the game machine Y5 has speed variable means capable of changing the rotation speed of the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed changing means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and the effect of the effect using the operation means It can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position in accordance with the rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed change means. The game machine Y7 that features.

  Discrimination means for performing discrimination in the gaming machines Y1 to Y7 when discrimination conditions are satisfied, and privilege giving means for providing an advantage advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result And C. suggestive effect executing means for performing a suggestive effect for suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, and the moving means operates as the suggested effect. A game machine Y8 characterized in that the operation control means determines the contents of the operation control in accordance with the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine Y8, the determination result of the determination means can be suggested by the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means to be executed, so that the player gazes at the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means Become. Therefore, the rendering effect of the rendering using the operation means can be enhanced.

<Feature Z group> (preventing the button popping out barre)
The predetermined movement is performed by an operation unit having an operation surface operable by the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination unit determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination unit Moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the projecting position when the condition is satisfied, movement control means for controlling the moving means, and the predetermined means for the operating means And a moving means for moving the operation surface of the operating means to the projecting position. A second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the projecting position, and the movement control means causes the effect execution means to perform the predetermined operation by the operation means The When said effect is feasible, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform said first operation Z1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the player is provided with operation means such as a switch that can be operated, and the player operates the operation means so that the contents of the change effect being executed are changed or the type of background is changed. A gaming machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets bored early in the game by merely operating the operation means. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine Z1, the moving means operates such that the operating surface of the operating means moves in order to cause the moving means to perform the first operation by the operation control means regardless of whether the operating surface of the operating means is moved or not. By grasping whether or not it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, by performing the first operation, it is possible to make the player expect the second operation to be performed.

  In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means generates driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by rotating operation, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. And, the movement control means is a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction as the plurality of movement controls, and a rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. And the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is performed by the movement control means, and the second drive control is performed. The game machine Z2 executes the second operation when being operated.

  According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1, it can be configured not to move the operation surface of the operating means even if the driving means is driven, and the position of the driving means Has the effect of being able to change without moving it.

  The gaming machine Z2 has a restricting means capable of changing between the restricted state for restricting the movement of the operation surface of the operating means by the moving means and the released state for releasing the restriction, and the control contents of the movement control means Accordingly, the first operation performed by the moving unit is an operation for changing the restricting unit to the release state, and the second operation moves the operation surface of the operation unit to the projecting position. A game machine Z3 characterized in that it is an operation.

  According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated to change the state of the restricting means in accordance with the control content executed by the operation control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, the presence or absence of movement of the operation surface of the operating means can be reliably controlled.

  In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means is connected to a rotating member capable of rotating in synchronization with the rotational movement of the driving means, and the operation means, and an action member on which the rotational movement of the rotating member acts. And, the pivoting member has a protrusion that can abut on the action member, and the restricting means rotates the driving means in the first direction to cause the protrusion to act on the action member. The game machine Z4 can be changed to the released state by bringing it into contact with the game machine Z4.

  The gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that the restricting means does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction and the projection is brought into contact with the acting member. With gaming machine Z5.

  In the gaming machine Z5, the position at which the projection is stopped is the same between when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6.

  Discrimination means for performing discrimination when discrimination conditions are satisfied in the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, and privilege giving means for imparting an advantage advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result And a suggestion effect executing means for executing suggestion effects for suggesting that the judgment result of the judgment means is the predetermined judgment result, and the predetermined movement condition according to the judgment result of the judgment means. A game machine Z7 characterized in that

<Feature α group> (over win at the time of the jackpot)
Discrimination means capable of performing judgment, display means on which identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the counter part acquisition means is dynamically displayed, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means When displayed, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, and a first bonus game in which a first bonus advantageous to the player is given as the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game executing means, In a gaming machine having a determination means capable of determining one of a second benefit game in which a second benefit more advantageous to a player than a first benefit is provided, the bonus game execution means executing the benefit game Is characterized in that it comprises type determination means for determining, from a plurality of types, notification types for notifying the player of notification information for notifying type information of the bonus game being executed when To play Machine α1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine α1, since the notification type for suggesting the type of the benefit game is determined from a plurality of types when the benefit game is being executed, the type of notification is executed in various manners to make the game fun Has the effect of improving

  In the gaming machine α1, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where entry of the game ball is more difficult than the open state, and the bonus game from the closed state Variable control means for causing an open game to vary the variable ball entry means until the predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number A game machine α2 including at least a first notification type in which the notification information is notified based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value for entering more than a predetermined number of gaming balls in the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game is there.

  In the gaming machine α2, the bonus game is to execute the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on the predetermined number of open games being executed, A game machine α3 characterized by having notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

  According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, the game is switched to another notification type during the bonus game, so the number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number Even when it is difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to switch so as to notify the notification information.

  In the gaming machine α3, a gaming machine characterized in that the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

  According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α3, since the notification type is switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the notifications overlap. .

<Features β group> (Normally directed as a definite variation hit)
Determination means for obtaining information capable of obtaining information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, storage means for storing the information obtained by the obtaining means, and determination to execute determination based on the information stored in the storage means Means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means for a predetermined period, and identification for showing the judgment result specific to the display means In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when information is stopped and displayed, the game is performed before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. Storing the information that is determined to be the specific determination result by the predetermination execution means when the bonus game is performed by the predetermination execution means that performs the determination and the bonus game execution means If so, the gaming machine β1, characterized in that those having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines have been known which perform lottery in accordance with winning of a game ball to a starting opening, and display on a liquid crystal screen variation effects and jackpot effects according to the lottery results. In this effect, effects of various patterns such as effects for giving the player a sense of expectation and effects for raising the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of the game has been desired. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine β1, when it is determined that the bonus game is further executed after the bonus game is executed, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine β1, in the bonus game, the first bonus game in which the normal gaming state is set after execution, and the probability that the player is determined to be the specific determination result more than the normal gaming state after execution At least a second bonus game in which a special gaming state is set is set, and the specific effect is configured to indicate that the special gaming state is set. Game machine β2 to be

  In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is displayed in the specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second benefit game is performed, and the first benefit game is executed. And a stop display switching unit capable of causing a stop display in the specific stop display mode as long as the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored when the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine β3 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, even when the first bonus game is executed, the stop display is performed in the specific stop display mode, so it seems as if the second bonus game is executed. It has the effect of being able to make

  In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information that the first benefit game is to be executed is dynamically displayed. And switching to the specific stop display mode based on the fact that the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine β4 to be.

  According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, so that the opportunity to be displayed in the specific stop mode can be further increased. is there.

<Feature AA group> (Reset BGM at the end of power recovery state)
A power supply unit capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification unit capable of executing a notification for indicating that the power is supplied by the power supply unit, and the notification unit executed after the notification unit is finished In a game machine having effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect and sound output means capable of outputting sound based on sound data of a predetermined period, the sound output means is configured to perform the notification by the notification means. The voice is outputted from the start position of the voice data during a notification period to be executed, and the voice is outputted from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. A game machine AA1 to be characterized.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. In the game, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player has been executed. Furthermore, when the power is turned off during a predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, and while the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is resumed (for example, JP-A-2016 -005505). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that the power is turned on in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the return screen, but it is possible to highlight and inform that the power is restored. There is a problem that it can not be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been resumed. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of the gaming situation at the time of power supply recovery more easily.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, even while notification for indicating that power is supplied is performed, it is possible to output voice that is output during a period in which a predetermined effect is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to relate the period for notifying that the power is supplied and the period after that. In addition, a sound based on sound data of a predetermined period is output from a specific position of sound data at a timing when a notification for indicating that power is supplied is ended and a predetermined effect is started. Since it comprises, an audio | voice can be output by the content corresponding to the presentation performed after the period which the alerting | reporting which shows that power supply was supplied was complete | finished. Therefore, there is an effect that the voice can be output without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the case of using the above-described gaming machine AA1, the discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the special figure fluctuation is being executed when the power is turned off, and the judgment result during the predetermined period when the power is cut off A storage means capable of storing is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, the information period is notified during the notification period to notify that the power is supplied. It is preferable to be configured to output BGM output during the fluctuation of the diagram. Thus, it is possible to notify the player using voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Further, it is preferable that the period for notifying that the power is supplied be continuously set to the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 until the start-up process is completed. By this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that the power is supplied. When the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation, or when the special figure fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power is supplied, the period for notifying that the power is supplied is ended. There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation may straddle the timing of the normal display screen. In this case, a period from when the normal display screen is displayed to when the special figure variation in progress ends is determined, and a variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily execute the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation.

  In addition, when the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to configure to delay the end timing of the effect notifying that the power is supplied, by a predetermined time (1 second). . As a result, since it is possible to suppress the execution of the remaining fluctuation time corresponding presentation only for a short period when the player is difficult to identify, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

<Features AB group> (The background change timing is made different according to the symbol change speed at the time of button operation)
Dynamically displayed by discrimination means for executing predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means The privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the operation means operable by the player, and the predetermined operation being performed on the operation means It is possible to execute an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode varied by the effect mode variable means A tie for changing the effect mode based on the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed by the effect executing means and the operation determining means. Gaming machine AB1 to, characterized in that with a variable timing setting means for setting a ring, a.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. In the game, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player has been executed. Furthermore, there is also provided an operation means that can be operated by the player, and setting various effects based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, JP-A-2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be varied according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. It is possible to operate the player eagerly, that is, to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, but when the player participates in the game (when the operation means is operated in the operation effect) Since the effect mode to be executed becomes scarce, it has been desired to make it possible to set more various effect modes and to enhance the effect.

  According to the gaming machine AB, since the effect mode can be made different according to the change speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operation means, various effects can be provided. In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine AB, as the effect mode which can be changed by the effect mode changing means, for example, a display mode of a background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. As a result, according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, it is possible to change the timing of variably setting the background mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress that the background mode is variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the present identification information. As a result, when operating the operation means to vary the effect mode, the player can determine immediately whether the effect mode changes. Furthermore, if the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode until the effect mode changes is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the player changes the effect mode after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is good to be configured to display the comment shown in. As a result, when an operation for varying the effect mode is executed, it is possible to make the gaming company easily grasp whether the game machine has received the operation.

  Furthermore, in the case where an interval equal to or longer than a predetermined period is provided from the operation of the operation means until the rendering mode is changed, for example, the above-described predetermined period is configured until the timing when the next special figure fluctuation is executed. Good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the effect mode in a state where dynamic display of identification information for indicating a lottery result of special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Feature AC group> (Change the development effect according to the button operation timing and the number of operations)
Operation means operable by the player, operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and timing when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed by the operation determination means Operation time determination means capable of determining the operation time count means capable of measuring the number of times that the predetermined operation is determined to have been performed by the operation determination means; determination results of the operation timing determination means; Having a rendering mode setting unit for setting a rendering mode based on the measurement result of the measuring unit, and a rendering execution means capable of executing a rendering according to the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting unit; Feature game machine AC1.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. In the game, a bonus game which is advantageous to the player has been executed. Furthermore, there is also provided an operation means that can be operated by the player, and setting various effects based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, JP-A-2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the content of the operation on the operation means or the number of times of the operation. In the gaming machine configured as described above, it is difficult to set a variety of rendering modes according to the content of the operation on the operating means, so the rendering effect can be enhanced, but a more versatile rendering There has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of setting the mode.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, since the effect mode can be varied based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set, and the effect can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AC1, a continuous operation effect whose effect mode is variable corresponding to a plurality of operations to the operation means can be executed and the continuous operation effect is being executed. Among them, according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times, it is preferable to be configured to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect. Specifically, on the basis of the operation timing to the first operation means in the period during which the continuous operation effect is being performed, the easiness of the effect mode being changed for the operation to the operation means after the second time being different Good to configure. By configuring in this manner, various presentation modes can be set without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Furthermore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the first operation unit, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation of the operation unit. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing of the first operation means.

  In addition, according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is ended, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed. Thereby, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous operation effect. In addition, the continuous operation effect can be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect can be set based on the demonstration result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special image fluctuation The effect mode variable condition of the continuous operation effect based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. The number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc. may be set.

<Feature AD group> (Providing a state in which the number of pending display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of pending balls and a state in which it is not synchronized)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for performing discrimination based on establishment of discrimination conditions based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the above acquired by the acquisition means In order to indicate a predetermined number of storage means capable of storing the first predetermined number at the upper limit, information execution means capable of executing a plurality of predetermined effects, and at least the first predetermined number of information until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. A mode display means for causing the display means to display the display mode on the display means, and the mode display means indicates the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect of the invention is displayed on the display means as the display aspect, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect of the effect executed by the effect executing means Number of times Gaming machine AD1, characterized in that the second embodiment for showing those to be displayed on the display unit as the display mode.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is randomly selected, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. The bonus game to be played was being executed. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to store a plurality of rights to execute the lottery, so that the game can be performed efficiently. Then, in the gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (pending) for executing the lottery, there has been one that displays a pending symbol for showing the stored pending number to the player. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, the game content can be determined based on the number of reservations, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, a function to determine the lottery result in advance is added to the stored suspension before the lottery is actually executed, and the stored suspension number becomes a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are performed using a period in which a lottery corresponding to the specific number of reservations is performed. In such continuous rendition, since it is possible to execute the result of prior discrimination for a plurality of reservations using a series of renditions, a hit is included in the target lottery rather than the rendition based on one lottery result. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay attention to the effect. However, in the above-described gaming machine, when a new hold is obtained during a period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold to be the target of the continuous effect. Because the player is to display the game, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which holding symbol is the subject of the continuous effect, and the effect of the effect is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily informing a player of a holding symbol to be an object of presentation in the gaming machine described above.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, when the display mode indicating the number of memories displayed on the display means displays the number of memories stored in the memory means according to the condition established, the information indicating the number of effects is displayed Since the variable setting can be made according to the case, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the number of memories stored in the memory means, different from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the stored number of storage means that affects the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device) or configured to notify by the light emission mode of the light emission means such as LED. Also good.

  In addition, the second display means may be configured to display the storage number stored in the storage means while the information indicating the number of effects is displayed by the display means. Furthermore, the second display means may be configured to be less noticeable than the display means. By configuring in this manner, the player can be made to gaze at the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of effects, the number of storages of the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations performed during the effect period may be displayed, or the effect period The display may be configured to provide a display based on the length (e.g., one display every 30 seconds). Moreover, you may use the display which shows the frequency | count that a 3rd symbol stops (temporary stop is included) during a production | presentation period.
<Feature AE group> (Notice effect performed only when background change)
An effect mode in which the effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation means operable by the player, the operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect according to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing at which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfies the specific condition A game machine AE1 comprising: special effect execution means capable of executing special effects.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board, the success or failure of the game is randomly selected, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. The bonus game to be played was being executed. Furthermore, there have been cases in which a suggestion effect for causing a player to perform a game is performed while expecting the player that the lottery result is a hit. And in order to make the variation of the production | presentation aspect of the suggestion production increase, there existed a thing which can be made variable in the mode in which the suggestion production is performed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-213999). Furthermore, there are also devices that change the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operation means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the mode to be set, it is possible to enhance the effect by providing various effects to the player. However, the player eagerly operates the operation means after seeing the exclusive effect corresponding to each mode, and there is a problem that the will to change the mode is lowered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of allowing a player to change the mode with desire.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, since special effects are configured to be executable when the effect mode is variable, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is played while each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that can not be performed at mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player who is trying to experience various effects to operate the operation means eagerly.

<Feature AF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even in a period not notifying.)
Mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of effect modes, effect execution means capable of executing effects corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and setting by the mode setting means Effect mode notifying means capable of giving notification of the indicated effect mode; operation means operable by the player; and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means The effect mode notifying means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determining means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. A game machine AF1 characterized by notifying information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting unit, when the game is performed. According to the gaming machine AF1, it is possible to set a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying, and to notify the effect mode based on the operation to the operation means even in the period not notifying. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to operate the operation means eagerly to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operation means during the second period, another information about the game may be notified, for example, dynamic display of identification information It may be configured to notify speed or suggestion information that suggests the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation on the operation means of the player.

<Feature AG group> (Step up of button vibe)
Operation means operable by the player, operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, vibration means capable of vibrating the operation means, and vibration means thereof Vibration amount variable means capable of changing the vibration amount for vibrating the operation means to different vibration amounts, and changing the vibration amount by the vibration amount change means based on the determination result of the operation determination means It is characterized by including period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and suggestion effect execution means for performing suggestion effect that suggests that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine AG1. According to the gaming machine AG1, a suggestion effect that suggests that the amount of vibration of the operation means is variable is executed, so that the player can operate the operation means eagerly.

<Feature AH group> (Inform the speed of symbol variation with button color)
Dynamically displayed by discrimination means for executing predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means The privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, the operation means operable by the player, and the predetermined operation being performed on the operation means Operation determining means capable of determining the effect, operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and mode variable means capable of changing the mode of the operation means; The aspect changing means changes the speed when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means changes from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. To change Game machine AH1 characterized by Rukoto. According to the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped by the mode of the operation means.

<Feature AI group> (The background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
Discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for indicating discrimination results by the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and discrimination results of the discrimination means having a specific discrimination result If the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the determination result of the determination means is other than a specific determination result, the identification information is a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode. A gaming machine comprising: a stop display means for performing stop display in a display mode; and a privilege giving means for providing a benefit based on the stop display means for displaying the identification information in the specific display mode. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and is based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A game machine AI1 comprising: an effect mode variable means for changing an effect mode; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. . According to the gaming machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to cause the display mode to be focused. In this case, when the player causes the identification information to be stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode, it is preferable that the player can select the stop display mode. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one stop display mode from among the plurality of stop display modes by operating the operable operation means.

<Characteristics AJ group> (prevention of preparatory movement of the product operation)
Display means for performing a predetermined effect display, effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, movable means for performing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined The effect operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and the effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario, The movable means is configured to be movable at least from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and the preparation movable to move the movable means to the initial position of the rendering operation is performed. It has an executable preparation movable control means, and the preparation movable control means is more than when the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. Gaming machine AJ1, characterized in that is to perform the preparation movable. According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparation movement in advance, the effect based on the effect scenario can be reliably executed. Furthermore, since the preparation movable control is performed separately from the rendering operation based on the rendering scenario, the preparation movable can be performed regardless of whether the rendering operation is performed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the rendering operation is performed even if the movable means is ready for movement.

<Feature AK group> (Replaces the pre-read result according to the operation state of the product)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means In the display means that can be displayed and the gaming machine to which a benefit is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least A storage means capable of storing a first predetermined number as an upper limit until the determination is performed, and until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started based on the information stored in the storage means And an effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the specific effect based on the result of the predetermination by the predetermination means, and the effect mode setting means In the case where the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the means at a predetermined timing and the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect And effect mode replacing means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A game machine AK1 characterized by being a game. According to the gaming machine AK1, since the effect mode set based on the determination result of the predetermination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, effects according to the situation can be executed, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means capable of moving the predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode replacing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to be configured to replace. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires a position where execution of the movable aspect is difficult, for example, position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable aspect, the movable mode is changed by the effect mode changing means It is good to constitute so that a production | presentation aspect which does not use it, for example, a production | generation aspect using only a display means may be set as a replacement production | presentation aspect. In addition, there is provided a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation to the operating means that the player can operate, and by using the above-described technical concept for the gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects The effect is more pronounced on the means.

<Feature AL group> (The setting timing of the operation effective period during demonstration is made to differ according to the game state)
Discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period is easily set Setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is established in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the game state setting means capable of setting the, and the dynamic display execution means A state setting unit, an operation unit operable by the player, an operation determination unit capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination unit Manipulation that can perform the production The effect execution means includes: effect execution means; and effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period in which the operation determination means can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the effective period setting means In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the period from when the standby state is set until when the effective period is set is longer than when the first period is set. A game machine AL1 characterized by setting the start timing of the effective period so as to be long. According to the gaming machine AL1, since the setting timing of the operation effective period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means can be made different according to the set gaming state, the operation is performed carelessly Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation effective period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable that the determination by the determination means be easily performed. Thereby, the second gaming state can be made more advantageous than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be ended in a short time.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine γ2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, a gaming machine γ3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions;
A determination unit that executes determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means;
In the gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode,
A storage unit capable of storing the first predetermined number as an upper limit until the determination on at least the information is executed, the information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the information stored in the storage means before dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means;
Specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means at a predetermined timing;
When a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect, the effect mode setting means is set as the effect aspect of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means A gaming machine, comprising: an effect mode replacing means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode.

Images